Revit MEP 2009

Imperial Tutorial

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Creating a Supply Air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Secondary Supply Air System . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System . Creating the Primary System Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Primary System Equipment . . . . . . . . . Inspecting and Color Coding the System . . . . . . . . . Creating Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Switch Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Electrical Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . 26 . 31 . 35 . 39 . 45 . 47 . 47 . 57 . 60 . 63 . 72

Developing Your MEP Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

v

Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones . . . . . . . . . Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. 77 . 88 . 94 . 95

Chapter 4

Mechanical Systems: Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Designing Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing the Primary Duct: Velocity Method . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method . Inspecting Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Air Conditioning Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 . 101 . 108 . 112 . 136 . 141 . 148 . 153 . 156 . 160 . 162 . 168 . 185

Chapter 5

Mechanical Systems: Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Designing Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Piping Views . . . . . . . . . . Placing Radiators and a Boiler . . . . . . Creating the Piping Systems . . . . . . . Creating Pipe Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . Resolving Pipe Interference . . . . . . . Connecting the Boiler . . . . . . . . . . Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Placing Circulator Pumps . . . . . . . . Inspecting Piping Systems . . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 . 189 . 196 . 200 . 204 . 217 . 230 . 249 . 252 . 260 . 263

Chapter 6

Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Planning Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Electrical Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Required Lighting Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Space Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels . Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels . . . Designing the Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Lighting Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Power Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Switch Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Circuit Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 . 269 . 274 . 280 . 281 . 284 . 284 . 291 . 296 . 303 . 304 . 309 . 314 . 320 . 325 . 331 . 338

Chapter 7

Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Planning Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Plumbing Plan . . . . . . . . . Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems . Designing Plumbing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 . 344 . 345 . 346

vi | Contents

Add Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . Begin Creating the Sanitary System . . . . Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System . Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . Refining the Urinal Lines . . . . . . . . . . Adding Vents to the System . . . . . . . . Create the Cold Water System . . . . . . . Create the Hot Water System . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 346 . 352 . 359 . 371 . 376 . 382 . 390 . 398

Chapter 8

Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Designing Fire Protection Systems . . . . . . . . . Starting the Fire Protection Project . . . . . Placing Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Creating the Fire Protection Dry System . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 . 406 . 410 . 432 . 445 . 451 . 458

Chapter 9

Creating Revit MEP Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Modifying Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Fan Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family . Modifying Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Water Closet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Diffuser Annotation Tag Family . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family . . . . . . Creating Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Light Fixture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flange Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Annotation Symbol Family . . . . . . . . . . . . Revit MEP Family Editor Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lookup Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 . 470 . 474 . 483 . 488 . 491 . 493 . 498 . 498 . 507 . 518 . 555 . 561 . 561 . 568 . 568 . 568 . 569 . 570 . 571 . 571

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 . 577 . 582 . 589 . 595 . 599 . 599 . 602 . 605 . 607 . 610 . 615 . 615

Contents | vii

Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623 Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

Chapter 11

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 . 631 . 637 . 641 . 644 . 644 . 649 . 651 . 654 . 656 . 662 . 670 . 673 . 673 . 675 . 678 . 682 . 682 . 684 . 684

Chapter 12

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687 . 688 . 692 . 692 . 702 . 704 . 709 . 712 . 713

Chapter 13

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719 . 720 . 727 . 731 . 732 . 735 . 737 . 741 . 742 . 742 . 743 . 745

Chapter 14

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 . 761 . 767 . 767 . 769

viii | Contents

Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. 769 . 773 . 779 . 779 . 781 . 783 . 784 . 790 . 791 . 791 . 792

Chapter 15

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813 Chapter 16 Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815 . 815 . 823 . 827 . 830 . 830 . 833 . 836 . 836

Chapter 17

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839 . 840 . 840 . 844 . 848 . 851 . 856

Chapter 18

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861 . 862 . 872 . 879

Chapter 19

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890

Chapter 20

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894 . 894 . 903 . 906

Contents | ix

Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 908 . 911 . 911 . 913 . 916 . 918 . 919

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923 Chapter 21 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925 . 925 . 927 . 929 . 930 . 933 . 933 . 937 . 939 . 942 . 947 . 949 . 950 . 953 . 953 . 954 . 959 . 961 . 964 . 965 . 967

x | Contents

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit MEP 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit MEP works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit MEP tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit MEP project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit MEP projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix.

3

■ ■

Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse. 10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates. 11 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit MEP templates. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 12 Select default.rte, and click Open. 13 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit MEP 2009?
The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit MEP model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

Understanding the Basics | 5

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit MEP 2009 keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
In projects, Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements:

Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. They display in relevant views of the model. For example, walls, windows, doors, and roofs are model elements. Datum elements help to define project context. For example, grids, levels, and reference planes are datum elements. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. They help to describe or document the model. For example, dimensions, tags, and 2D detail components are view-specific elements.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction

There are 2 types of model elements:

Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example, walls and roofs are hosts. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example, windows, doors, and cabinets are model components.

There are 2 types of view-specific elements:

Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example, dimensions, tags, and keynotes are annotation elements. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Examples include detail lines, filled regions, and 2D detail components.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. In Revit MEP, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls, for example.

Understanding Revit MEP 2009 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Project: In Revit MEP, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all information for the building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You

Understanding the Basics | 7

create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it

Element: When creating a project, you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories, families, and types.

Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. For example, categories of model elements include walls and beams. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family.

8 | Chapter 1 Introduction

System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. However, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have several types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a 30” X 42” title block or a 32" x 84" door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Navigating the User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit MEP is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit MEP window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit MEP uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit MEP is much easier. In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Navigating the User Interface | 9

Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. you type the required key combination to perform the command. While working in the drawing area.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. By default. The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. and View. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. This creates a new project based on the default template. Edit. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. click (New). new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The toolbar buttons represent common commands. which are listed on the menu. For example. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar.

Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component.the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. On the left side of the Options Bar. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. a door type is specified. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. 6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. When you select the Door tool. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list.

In the drawing area. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Show Design Bars dialog displays. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. 9 In the Type Selector. when you add a door. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector.8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. For example. You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. ■ The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars.

click the tab in the Design Bar.The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. immediately below the Type Selector. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. 11 Click OK. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . The respective commands display on the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. containing buttons grouped by function.

schedules. and rename views. reports. and groups of your current project: ■ Right-click in the browser to add. In the Project Browser. You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . families.TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. and groups. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. select Views (all). sheets. families. delete.

scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. To open a view. The browser is dockable. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. 3D). The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . click Wall. double-click its name. After creating a browser organization scheme. 14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name.■ The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. click Cancel. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. The cursor displays as a pencil. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. family category (doors. Do not click. windows). and group name. walls. elevations.

The status bar also provides information." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. When you place the cursor over an element. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 3. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. Revit MEP 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit MEP 2009 Help.In the bottom left corner of the window. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. In the status bar. click Modify to end the Wall command. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. in conjunction with tooltips. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. You can use this tri-pane. It highlights when the cursor is over it. There are several tools that help you find information. 18 On the Design Bar. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Help is available online at all times during a Revit MEP session. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. find a keyword on the Index tab. regarding selected elements in a view. In this case. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). 20 Press TAB. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow.

If no Help button displays. click Training Files. Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. There are several ways to access zoom options. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit MEP Help window. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Windows: From any window. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu.In addition. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP In this exercise. Click the Help button. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. Tooltips: To see tooltips. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. and the topic specific to the dialog opens.rvt. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP | 17 . press F1 for help. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. and open Imperial\i_Cohouse. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. click on the Standard toolbar. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. In the following steps. After you are familiar with these tasks. You can also press SHIFT+F1. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. press F1 for context-sensitive help. For example. Toolbar: From the toolbar. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window.

the view zooms in on the selected area. 7 Click in the drawing area. In the drawing area. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. When you release the mouse button. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . the view zooms out from the building model.The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). 5 On the View toolbar. this is referred to as a crossing selection.

and then using the Zoom tool again. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. If you do not have a wheel mouse. To modify or add snap increments. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP | 19 . 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. . click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. and click the SteeringWheels tab. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. For more information about SteeringWheels. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. To define settings for SteeringWheels. and click Help. 10 To display SteeringWheels. moving the wheel to the desired location. 15 To exit the wheel. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. NOTE As you zoom in and out. As you move the mouse. 13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. press ESC. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. on the View toolbar. click Settings menu ➤ Options. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools.9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button.

Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. When drawing or modifying a building model. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. bottoms. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. Similar controls. expand Views (all). zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Cnst. as shown. display along the ends. expand Floor Plans. 18 Click and drag the left control. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. Small blue dots. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views.Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. and on the Tools toolbar. and select the wall. and double-click 2nd Flr. called drag controls. These are the drag controls. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. referred to as shape handles. 17 Type ZR. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. to lengthen the wall. click (Move).

and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. require 2 clicks to complete the command. In this case. 23 Click next to the lower wall. click to specify the starting position. such as Move and Copy. Performing Common Tasks in Revit MEP | 21 . you want to move the table closer to the wall. After selecting the element to move. The table moves down.Some commands. for example. and drag it on top of the table. and click again to specify the ending position. as shown. 24 Select the plant. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location.

The table and plant are returned to their original locations. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). on the Standard toolbar. On the Design Bar. Move. 26 On the Undo menu. select the second item in the list. click Lines. such as the Lines command. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. Press ESC twice. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. and click again to end it. click the Undo command. click Modify. In this example. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. 29 To end the command. 30 Close the file without saving your changes. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. or press CTRL+Z. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Some commands.Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command.

Express Workshop 23 .

24 .

When you have finished these tutorials. you will have a basic understanding of Revit MEP design and documentation tools. Creating a Supply Air System In this lesson. return. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. Finally. and exhaust systems using these components. you create a supply air system that consists of 2 low pressure.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of Revit MEP functionality and highlight powerful features that are integral to the most common MEP workflows. and to place and size ductwork. To create Mechanical Supply Air 2. high pressure system. secondary supply air systems and a primary. In Revit MEP. an HVAC system is a logical connection between air terminals and HVAC mechanical equipment. The model you use in this lesson contains the secondary system Mechanical Supply Air 1. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an MEP project. you add and connect the air handler. you can create supply. which is the physical representation of the system. The systems are used to perform calculations and analysis. connect it to existing air terminals. and size the ductwork. After air terminals and mechanical equipment are placed in a model. 25 . You then create the main trunk line for Mechanical Supply Air 3 and connect it to the 2 secondary systems. creating the primary supply system. you place the variable air volume (VAV) box.

■ Open the i Express Workshop Supply Air System. click the Mechanical tab. scroll until the folder is displayed. 26 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . you create the logical system shown above on the left.rvt file located in the Imperial folder. the model contains one completed secondary supply air system. At the beginning of this exercise. click Training Files. You then define a logical connection between the VAV box and 4 existing air terminals.Creating a Secondary Supply Air System In this exercise. you place a parallel. fan-powered. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Mechanical. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click the Design Bar. In this exercise. If necessary. The Mechanical commands are displayed. Display the Mechanical commands 1 On the Design Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen. 2 If the Mechanical tab is not displayed on the Design Bar. VAV box in the model. creating a secondary supply system.

5 Click as shown to specify the upper-left corner of the zoom region.In this tutorial. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. Adjust the zoom for the model 3 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. To zoom in and out. The entire model displays on the screen. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. Add a VAV box 7 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Then. To pan. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. In this tutorial. when you are instructed to click a command on the Design Bar. hold the wheel down and drag. 4 Type ZR. Creating a Secondary Supply Air System | 27 . The model zooms to the specified area. roll the wheel. you find the command at the far left of the screen. you can enter ZE to zoom out. 6 Click to specify the lower-right corner of the zoom region. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. click Mechanical Equipment.

on the Options Bar. but do not click. 10 Press SPACEBAR once to rotate the VAV box 90 degrees. The cursor displays as the VAV box outline. 11 Click to place the VAV box in the location shown. the Type Selector displays the mechanical equipment that is pre-loaded in the model. 9 Move the cursor to the area near the interior door of the room between grid lines 3 and 4. select Parallel Fan Powered VAV : Size 3 . 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .Directly above the Design Bar. 8 In the Type Selector.8 inch Inlet. 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command.

Verify that the PrimaryToSupplyRatio is 0. this value is automatically updated to reflect the supply airflow requirement. and click Element Properties. Creating a Secondary Supply Air System | 29 . ■ 15 Click OK. verify that SupplyAirFlow is set to 900 CFM. indicating that it has been selected. This value is built into the family type for the VAV box. This value places the VAV box in the plenum space (between the Level 1 ceiling and the Level 2 floor.) ■ Under Mechanical .Airflow. The air terminal turns red. or just 10. 14 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. you can enter 10 0 without units. enter 10' 0".200000 (20%). After the system is created. 16 Press ESC to clear the selection of the VAV box. This value is built into the family type for the VAV box. for Offset. 19 Move the cursor off the air terminal.13 Right-click the VAV box. 18 Click to select the air terminal. Create the system 17 Move the cursor over the leftmost supply air terminal in the model to highlight it. You do not need to enter the units.

27 On the Options bar. You have created a secondary supply air system that includes 4 air terminals and a VAV box. 21 While pressing CTRL. and click to select it. the air terminals display in red. click (Edit System). click (Select Equipment For System). the equipment supplying the system. indicating that they are selected. 22 On the Options Bar directly above the drawing area.20 While pressing CTRL. (Create Supply Air System). 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . The Options Bar displays system information such as the system name. Verify the elements of the system 26 Select an air terminal that is an element of the system you just created. When you release CTRL and move the cursor away from the 4 selected air terminals. click 23 On the Options Bar. The red sketch graphics show the logical connection between the components of the system. select the 2 supply air terminals to the right. 25 On the Design Bar. move the cursor over the supply air terminal to the right. and the number of elements that make up the system. click Modify to end the command. 24 Select the VAV box you just placed.

30 Press TAB. 2 On the Options Bar. showing the logical connection between the components of the system. In this tutorial. Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System The model now contains the logical connection for Mechanical Supply Air System 2. for Solution Type. however. click (Layout Path). click Finish.Revit MEP automatically named the system Mechanical Supply Air 2. you leave it unchanged. Verify the connections between the system elements 29 Move the cursor over an air terminal in the system to highlight it. You could change the name by overwriting it. you complete the secondary system by adding ductwork. 3 On the Options Bar. 28 In the Supply Air : Mechanical Supply Air 2 dialog. the secondary supply air system shown below on the left. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 31 Move the cursor off the air terminal. The sketch graphics highlight. the ductwork. select Network. Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System | 31 . Next. Specify the layout 1 Select an air terminal in the system you created. you create the physical connection for the system. In this exercise. i Express Workshop Supply Air System. Do not click.rvt.

Specify the layout path settings 6 On the Options Bar. for Duct Type. piping. 11 On the Design Bar. verify that Round Duct: Tees is selected. select Main. plumbing. thus maintaining the consistency of these systems within the project. select Branch. which is located to the far left of the drawing area. click Settings. 9 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. 8 In the right pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under System Type: Supply Air. 10 Click OK. Configuring the layout path settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during the project. Verify that Flex Duct Type is set to Flex Duct Round : Flex . (Show Next Solution) to display other suggested network 5 Click until the network solution shown below displays. 4 On the Options Bar. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Verify that the Maximum Flex Duct Length is 2’ 0”.A network layout solution displays with main segments in blue and branch segments in green. 7 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. for Duct Type. and fire protection systems. The layout path settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. click Finish Layout. Verify that Offset is 10' 0". ■ ■ ■ ■ Under System Type: Supply Air. verify that Round Duct: Tees is selected. click solutions.Round. Verify that Offset is 10' 0".

Check the connectivity of the system You can check the connectivity of ducts and fittings using the TAB key.08 in-wg/100ft. 14 Press TAB. If the entire network does not highlight. click View menu ➤ Shading with Edges. and a disconnection exists at the point where the highlighting stops. Click Check None. and enter . the system has not been created properly. A disconnection will negatively impact calculations involving this system. You will use TAB to examine the hierarchy of the system components. 12 If the ductwork displays in wireframe instead of with shading. 13 Highlight a segment of the newly created ductwork by moving the cursor over it. fittings. Select Ducts. Select Duct Fittings. 16 Press TAB until the entire hierarchy of connected ducts. 22 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ Under Sizing Method. and type SD. 20 Click OK. Select Flex Ducts. Revit MEP supports 4 of the most common sizing methods: Friction. 18 On the Options Bar. The branch to which the duct is connected highlights. Velocity. 17 Click to select the highlighted system. or click in an empty part of the drawing area. click 19 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). Size the duct system 21 On the Options Bar.Revit MEP automatically creates and initially sizes all of the ducts and fittings required to connect the components of the system. Creating Ductwork for the Secondary Supply Air System | 33 . and equipment is highlighted. click Sizing. and Static Regain. select Friction. Equal Friction. 15 Press TAB again to highlight the next level of connections. Do not click.

23 Click OK. Next. 34 Press ESC to clear the selection. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. In the Element Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). 28 Click OK.Airflow. 35 Select the VAV box in the system. click (Element Properties). 30 Select the segment of duct shown. Verify the calculated airflow value for the VAV box. The ductwork is automatically updated with all the necessary fittings. scroll to Mechanical .08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork. select the segment of duct shown. 29 Press ESC to clear the selection. 33 Click OK. for Branch Sizing. 24 On the Design Bar.Airflow. click (Element Properties). 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . you create the ductwork for the primary system and connect it to the 2 secondary systems. 31 On the Options Bar. The ductwork is sized using the friction method at . under Mechanical . Under Constraints. The Flow value of 300 CFM is the sum of the 2 air terminals. Verify the sizing 25 In the system you created.Airflow. 38 Press ESC to clear the selection. click Modify to end the command. The Flow value of 150 CFM matches the required flow for the air terminal. select Calculated Size Only. 36 On the Options Bar. 26 On the Options Bar.■ ■ Verify that Only is selected. scroll to Mechanical . 32 In the Element Properties dialog. the adjusted SupplyAirFlow value of 625 CFM for the VAV reflects the supply airflow values calculated for the system. 37 Click OK.

you create the main trunk line for the primary system and connect the 2 secondary systems. 4 Click in the location shown to end the first segment of ductwork.rvt. select 10' 0". i Express Workshop Supply Air System. Creating the Primary System Ductwork | 35 . select Round Duct : Taps. For D:. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. ■ The cursor displays as a pencil. 3 To start the duct run. click near the door in the room to the left of the secondary systems. This specifies the duct diameter. Create the primary air duct 1 On the Design Bar. in the location shown by the pencil. For Offset. 5 Move the cursor past the rightmost VAV. 2 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ In the Type Selector. select 12".Creating the Primary System Ductwork In this exercise. and click to place the second segment of ductwork and end the run. click Duct.

This determines airflow direction and ensures accurate duct sizing. select Round Duct Endcap : Standard. 10 In the Type Selector. 9 On the Design Bar. 8 Type ZR. as described above. Add an end cap Before you size the ductwork for a system. 11 Place the cursor over the end of the duct to display an endpoint snap point.6 Press ESC twice to end the command. The ductwork and the proper fittings are automatically created. do the following: ■ On the toolbar above the Options Bar. click (Undo) to undo the last segment of duct. Draw the main trunk line again. ■ ■ Click again to undo to first section of duct. The model is zoomed to the end of the duct. you must place end caps on all open ends of the ductwork except for the end that connects to the air source. and specify a zoom region at the end of the trunk line. 7 If your trunk line does not match the above illustration and you want to draw it again. click Duct Fitting. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

you use the Connect Into tool to automatically draw the duct. 14 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Select Connector dialog. 13 Click to place the end cap. click Modify to end the command. 20 Select the primary air duct. 17 On the Options Bar. First. This connects the end cap to the ductwork. Creating the Primary System Ductwork | 37 . 16 Select the leftmost VAV. (Connect Into). In addition to the graphic at the cursor. click 19 Click OK. select Connector 0 : Supply Air: Round : 8" Primary Air Connector. 15 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view.12 Press TAB until the point snap graphic shown below displays. closing the right end of the duct run. Connect one secondary system You will use 2 methods of drawing a duct from a VAV box to the trunk line. the type of snap point is also identified in the tooltip and on the status bat at the lower-left corner of the screen.

and zoom in on the rightmost VAV box. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 22 Select the VAV box. 23 Right-click the 8” inlet supply connector. 21 Type ZR. and click Draw Duct. you manually draw the connecting duct. Connect the other secondary system Next.Ductwork is automatically created to connect the VAV to the primary air flow supply with a tap connection.

24 Click on the center of the primary duct in the location where the intersection snap (an X) displays. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Do not click.rvt. Adding the Primary System Equipment In this exercise. Next. you place an air handler and connect it to the main trunk line to complete the high pressure. i Express Workshop Supply Air System. primary system. Place the air handler 1 On the Design Bar. 3 Move the cursor to the location shown. click Modify to end the command. 25 On the Design Bar. 2 In the Type Selector. 26 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. select Air Handler : 10 ton. click Mechanical Equipment. Adding the Primary System Equipment | 39 . you add and connect the air handler for the primary system. The ductwork is created with a tap connection.

5 Move the air handler to the location shown. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Do not click.The cursor displays as the air handler outline. 4 Press SPACE BAR as needed to rotate the air handler 90 degrees. 6 Click to place the air handler. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command. Create a vertical section of duct 8 Move the cursor over an edge of the air handler to highlight it.

select 10' 0". are also visible. The connectors on the front of the unit. intake. select Rectangular Duct/Radius Elbows Tees. click (Apply Current Offset). Under Offset.9 Click to select the air handler. 10 Move the cursor over the 24" x 24" supply connector. On the Options Bar. return. 11 Right-click the connector. ■ Adding the Primary System Equipment | 41 . and click Draw Duct. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ In the Type Selector. and exhaust. for the hydronic supply and return. The connectors on the top of the unit are displayed. These are the connectors for the air handler supply.

The vertical section of duct you just created is visible. 15 Double-click 3D HVAC. past the end of the primary duct. 16 Close the 3D HVAC view. 19 Move the cursor to the right. and click Draw Duct. 18 Right-click the center point of the duct.A vertical section of duct is created. Attach a rectangular duct 17 Select the vertical duct you just created. and click. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . expand Mechanical ➤ 3D Views. 14 In the Project Browser. 13 Press ESC. which is located directly to the left of the drawing area.

(Select Equipment for System).20 Press ESC twice to end the command. click (Element Properties). 25 Select the air handler. 24 Press ESC. 22 On the Options bar: ■ Click Click (Create Supply Air System). 26 On the Options Bar. and then select the rightmost VAV box. select the leftmost VAV box. Create the main system logical connection 21 While pressing CTRL. ■ 23 Select the air handler. The sketch graphics show the logical connection between the components. Adding the Primary System Equipment | 43 .

28 Click in an empty part of the drawing area to clear the selection. the value for SupplyAirFlow has been updated based upon the primary to supply ratio you specified in the element properties of the 2 VAV boxes.Airflow. click System Browser. click (Element Properties). notice that the value for SupplyAirFlow is 32. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click (Trim/Extend). 36 Click OK. View the system components 38 On the Design Bar.Airflow. 33 On the Design Bar. Connect the ductwork 29 On the Tools toolbar located above the Options Bar. 34 Select the air handler. 35 On the Options Bar.In the Element Properties dialog. 31 Select the 24" x 24" rectangular supply duct by clicking a point on the duct between the air handler and the primary trunk line. 30 On the Options Bar. verify that (Trim/Extend to Corner) is selected. The ducts are trimmed and connected with the proper fittings. under Mechanical . 37 Press ESC to clear the selection.815 CFM. This is the capacity of the air handler. click Modify to end the command. 32 Select the primary 12" round duct. 27 Click OK. In the Element Properties dialog. under Mechanical .

The System Browser is a tool that displays a hierarchical. 40 Expand any Supply Air system to view its HVAC components.rvt. and double-click 3D HVAC. close the System Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 41 When you are done. You then add a legend to automatically color code the ductwork based on specific calculated values. discipline-specific list of all the components in the model. you inspect the system and color code the ductwork. the secondary system that you created in an earlier exercise. click (System Inspect). 2 Select a section of a secondary system. expand Mechanical (3 systems). 39 In the System Browser. Next. i Express Workshop Supply Air System. Elements are listed by the system they belong to. expand Mechanical ➤ 3D Views. The browser displays 3 mechanical systems: the primary system that you just created. and the secondary system that was already in the model when you opened it. Inspecting and Color Coding the System In this exercise. Inspecting and Color Coding the System | 45 . Elements that do not belong to a system are listed as unassigned elements. Inspect the completed supply air system 1 In the Project Browser. you inspect part of the system you created. 3 On the Options Bar.

10 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. 7 Close the 3D HVAC view. The inspection tag describes the section that is being inspected. select Duct Color Fill .The selected system maintains its appearance. and pressure loss. 9 Click in the drawing area to place the legend to the left of the air handler. click Inspect. the other systems are displayed in half tone. 8 On the Design Bar. Delete the legend and remove color coding from the ductwork 12 Select the legend. the red arrows indicate critical flow path. 5 Move the cursor over a section of the system. The flow arrows indicate flow direction. 11 Click OK.Flow. 4 On the Design Bar. static pressure. click Cancel Inspector. visual indication of a system’s air flow. The legend is added and the ductwork is automatically color coded based on the actual flow values. including flow. Place a legend and color code the ductwork Color coding the ductwork provides a quick. click Duct Color Scheme Legend. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . under Color Scheme. 6 On the Design Bar.

distribution systems. Wiring types (including material. After creating the logical connections. click No. temperature rating. power circuits. Creating a Supply Air System. and the color scheme is removed from the legend. Creating Electrical Systems | 47 . you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. and demand factors have been defined.13 On the Options Bar. receptacles. As you create circuits. the other circuit connects the 4 lighting fixtures on the other side of the room. click 17 Click File menu ➤ Close. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. You use the System Browser to view the created circuits. and switches. 14 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. click 15 Click OK. junction boxes. Electrical settings have already been specified for the model. you create 2 lighting circuits using lighting fixtures. One circuit connects the 4 lighting fixtures on one side of a room in the model. Revit MEP ensures that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. You then automatically balance the electrical loads on a panelboard. you create the physical connections between the components: the wiring. 16 On the Standard toolbar at the top of the window. The legend remains selected. and insulation type). You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. including power panels. (Delete) to delete the legend. The color is removed from the ductwork. select none. . Creating Lighting Circuits In this exercise. junction boxes. lighting fixtures. voltage definitions. 18 When prompted to save the model. Creating Electrical Systems In this lesson. under Schemes. The model already contains the electrical components you use to create the systems. and a 480V panelboard that have already been placed in the model.

rvt file located in the Imperial folder. If necessary. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this tutorial. 2 If the Electrical tab is not displayed on the Design Bar. The Electrical commands are displayed. ■ Open the i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . when you are instructed to click a command on the Design Bar. click the Electrical tab.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. right-click the Design Bar. you find the command at the far left of the screen. scroll until the folder is displayed. and click Electrical. click Training Files. Display the Electrical commands 1 On the Design Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen.

The model zooms to the specified area. 5 Click as shown to specify the upper-left corner of the zoom region. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. In this tutorial. you can enter ZE to zoom out. To pan. Creating Lighting Circuits | 49 . when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. Then. roll the wheel. 6 Click to specify the lower-right corner of the zoom region. To zoom in and out.Adjust the zoom for the model 3 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. 4 Type ZR. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. The entire model displays on the screen. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. Create a lighting circuit 7 Move the cursor over the lighting fixture in the upper-left corner of the large room in the model. hold the wheel down and drag.

The lighting fixture highlights. When you release CTRL and move the cursor away from the 4 selected lighting fixtures. they display in red. indicating that they are selected. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 10 While pressing CTRL. select the 2 lighting fixtures that are located immediately to the right of the previously selected 2 lighting fixtures. 9 Move the cursor off the lighting fixture. 8 Click to select the lighting fixture. indicating that it has been selected. and click to select it. 11 While pressing CTRL. move the cursor over the lighting fixture below the selected lighting fixture. The lighting fixture turns red.

click 14 Select lighting panel LP-1. click (Create Power Circuit).12 On the Options Bar directly above the drawing area. Creating Lighting Circuits | 51 . The red sketch graphics show the created circuit. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). 13 On the Options Bar. which is the logical connection between the elements.

52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . all the elements within the window are selected. 17 When you release the mouse button. and then drag diagonally to create a selection window that includes all 4 lighting fixtures as shown.15 Press ESC to clear the sketch graphics. Create a second lighting circuit 16 Place the cursor above and to the left of the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the room.

Select Lighting Fixtures. click the junction box located among the lighting fixtures to select it. Click Check None. which is the logical connection between the elements. Click OK. 22 On the Options Bar. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). click (Create Power Circuit). The sketch graphics show the created circuit.18 On the Options Bar. click 23 Select lighting panel LP-1. 20 While pressing CTRL. 21 On the Options Bar. Creating Lighting Circuits | 53 . The lighting fixtures remain selected. click 19 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection).

Do not click. 24 Press ESC to clear the sketch graphics. 26 Press TAB to display the circuit. 54 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . you have created 2 lighting circuits. The components include the 4 lighting fixtures and the junction box.The sketch graphics show the logical circuit with a home run. 25 Move the cursor over a lighting fixture in the leftmost circuit so that the lighting fixture highlights. Modify a circuit At this point.

Verify the modified circuit 32 Highlight the junction box in the circuit and press TAB. click (Add To Circuit). click Finish.The circuit includes 4 lighting fixtures. 29 In the Power : 1 dialog. click (Edit Circuit). 31 In the Power : 1 dialog. Creating Lighting Circuits | 55 . 30 Select the junction box located among the lighting fixtures. 27 Click to select the highlighted circuit. 28 On the Options Bar.

Elements that do not belong to a system are listed as unassigned elements. discipline-specific list of all the components in the model. the wiring. 35 On the Design Bar. You can display the logical connections using the TAB key. The System Browser is a tool that displays a hierarchical. 36 In the System Browser. and you can view the system components using the System Browser. click System Browser. expand Electrical (7 Systems) ➤ Power ➤ LP-1. 38 When you are done. At this point. you assign switches to control the lighting fixtures. Elements are listed by the system they belong to. only the logical connections between the elements exist. The circuits become visible when the physical connections. 56 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Display the electrical systems The lighting circuits you created are called electrical systems in Revit MEP.The modified circuit is highlighted. Next. 34 Select lighting panel LP-1. are created. close the System Browser. 33 Move the cursor away from the circuit to remove the highlighting. 37 Expand the 2 circuits to view their electrical components.

3 On the Options Bar. i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. (Select Switch). 2 On the Options Bar. The switches have already been placed in the model. click (Create Switch System). and the 4 lighting fixtures on the right are controlled by another switch. The 4 lighting fixtures on the left of the room are controlled by one switch. Creating Switch Systems | 57 . 4 In the Switch System dialog. click 5 Select the switch as shown. click (Edit Switch System). Create a switch system 1 Select the lighting fixture in the upper-left corner of the room.rvt. you create switch systems to define switching behavior. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. All elements in the drawing except the selected lighting fixture display in halftone. The sketch graphics show the only currently selected component of the system.Creating Switch Systems In this exercise.

Lighting. 10 Click OK. 13 Press TAB. and the lighting fixture displays in full tone in the drawing area. click Finish. Verify the switch system 12 Move the cursor over the switch to highlight it. the Number of Fixtures count on the Options Bar is updated.The Options Bar displays the selected switch and the number of lighting fixtures currently selected (1). 7 One by one. The switch system highlights. for Switch ID. 6 In the Switch System dialog. 58 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . enter A. As you select each lighting fixture. select the 3 remaining lighting fixtures on the left side of the room. click (Add to System). 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Switch Properties). The identifier A is assigned to the switch for reference purposes. 11 In the Switch System (A) dialog. Assign an identifier to the switch 8 In the Switch System dialog. under Electrical .

click (Create Switch System). Click Check None. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Assign an identifier to the switch 22 In the Switch System dialog. 18 On the Options Bar. 20 In the Switch System dialog.14 Move the cursor away from the switch system to remove the highlighting. 24 Click OK. (Edit Switch System). enter B. for Switch ID. click 21 Select the switch as shown. Creating Switch Systems | 59 . Select Lighting Fixtures. click 19 On the Options Bar. 25 In the Switch System (B) dialog. click Finish. The 4 lighting fixtures remain selected. The identifier B is assigned to the switch for reference purposes. The selection is filtered.Lighting. click 17 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). (Select Switch). under Electrical . Create a second switch system 15 Drag to draw a selection window that includes the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the room. Click OK. click (Switch Properties). 16 On the Options Bar.

you define lighting fixture types and tag the lighting fixtures.rvt. clear Leader. i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. 2 On the Options Bar. so each side of the room requires a different lighting fixture type. Then. you add a tag to each lighting fixture that identifies its type and the switch that controls it. Tag the lighting fixtures 1 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you define the lighting fixture types for the room. 60 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Next.Verify the switch system 26 Move the cursor over the switch and press TAB to highlight the switch system. The lighting requirements for the left side of the room are different from the lighting requirements for the right side of the room. 3 Select the upper-left lighting fixture. click Tag ➤ By Category. Tagging Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. The lighting fixture is labeled with an automatically generated tag.

4 One by one. enter A. The selected lighting fixtures are tagged. Click OK. click Duplicate. Tagging Lighting Fixtures | 61 . select (Element Properties). 10 In the Name dialog: ■ ■ Enter 2x4 3Lamp A. click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 Press ESC to clear the selection. Create a new lighting fixture type 6 Select the upper-left lighting fixture.The bottom part of the tag displays the identifier (A) for the switch that controls the lighting fixture. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. The top part of the tag displays the identifier for the lighting fixture type. 12 Click OK. which you have not yet defined. for Type Mark. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. select the remaining 7 lighting fixtures in the room. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 Press ESC to end the command. 7 On the Options Bar.

62 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . select the 4 lighting fixtures on the right side of the room. The cursor displays as an eyedropper. and the tag is updated.Hosted : 2x4 3Lamp A) is automatically updated to display type mark A. in the Type Selector. select Troffer Corner Insert . 17 Select the other 3 lighting fixtures on the left side of the room.Hosted : 2x4 3Lamp B. The 4 selected lighting fixtures are changed to the specified type. 20 On the Options Bar. Change the type for the remaining lighting fixtures 19 While pressing CTRL. the type is changed. and their tags are automatically updated. click (Match Type). 18 Press ESC twice to end the command. For each lighting fixture.The top part of the tag for the lighting fixture with the new type (Troffer Corner Insert . Change the type for some lighting fixtures 15 On the Tools toolbar. 16 Select the lighting fixture shown to specify the lighting fixture type to be matched.

23 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. You then connect the 2 circuits to create a multi-circuit home run. you create electrical circuits with wiring. Next. One circuit connects 2 electrical receptacles in a small room. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Turn off the tags 22 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. The lighting fixture tags are no longer displayed in the model. Creating Power Circuits In this exercise.rvt. on the Annotation Categories tab. select the 2 receptacles in the small room. Create a power circuit with wiring 1 While holding down CTRL. 24 Clear Lighting Fixture Tags. Creating Power Circuits | 63 . i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. while the other connects the 8 receptacles in the adjoining large room. scroll to Lighting Fixture Tags. you use electrical receptacles and a 208 volt panelboard that have already been placed in the model to create 2 electrical circuits with arc type wiring. 25 Click OK.21 Press ESC to clear the selection.

2 On the Options Bar. click (Create Power Circuit). The sketch graphics show the created circuit home run. click 4 Select power panel PP-1. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). 64 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . The sketch graphics show the logical created circuit. 3 On the Options Bar.

6 Press ESC to clear the selection. The circuit wiring with a homerun is created.5 In the drawing area near the created circuit. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. View conductor information 7 Type ZR. Creating Power Circuits | 65 . which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom to Region command. You can also specify the zoom region by clicking in one corner and dragging to the other corner. click as shown to create arc type wiring. 8 Click to specify the upper-left and lower-right corners of the zoom region shown.

66 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 12 Click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. verify the number of conductors of each type (hot.Loads. click (Element Properties).9 Select the wire shown. The tick marks indicate the number of conductors (3) for the wire. neutral. under Electrical . 14 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. Create a second circuit with wiring 15 In the large room. and ground). 11 In the Element Properties dialog. select the receptacle as shown. 13 Press ESC to clear the selection.

click (Create Power Circuit). click 19 Select power panel PP-1. The sketch graphics show the circuit and home run. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). for a total of 8 receptacles.16 While pressing CTRL. Creating Power Circuits | 67 . 17 On the Options Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. select the remaining receptacles in the large room. The sketch graphics show the circuit.

The circuit wiring with a homerun is created. 68 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . The single arrow at the end of the home run wire indicates a single-circuit home run. click as shown to create arc type wiring.20 In the drawing area near the created circuit.

24 Type ZR. and click Delete.21 Press ESC to clear the selection. Rewire a circuit 22 Select the home run wire for the small circuit. 25 On the Design Bar. and zoom in on the region shown. The cursor displays as a pencil with arc type wiring. The wire is deleted. click Wire. Creating Power Circuits | 69 . 23 Right-click.

28 Move the cursor to the location shown. The cursor is correctly positioned when the point snap graphic displays. the displayed snap point is also identified in the tooltip and on the status bar at the lower-left corner of the screen. In addition to the graphic in the drawing. press TAB until the graphic displays. 27 With the point snap graphic displayed. 29 With the point snap graphic displayed. If the cursor is positioned as shown. but the point snap graphic is not displayed. but the point snap graphic is not displayed. If the cursor is positioned as shown. click to place the end of the wire. press TAB until the graphic displays.26 Move the cursor to the location shown. 70 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click to place the end of the wire.

The two circuits are automatically connected. 30 On the Design Bar. Creating Power Circuits | 71 . The 2 arrows on the large circuit home run indicate that it is now a multi-circuit home run. 34 Highlight a wire in the small circuit as shown. select Leader. creating a multi-circuit home run. View the multi-circuit home run 31 Type ZP to zoom to the previous view. The wires in the circuit have been automatically resized to accommodate the demand created by the new multi-circuit home run. Tag the wires 32 On the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. 33 On the Options Bar. click Modify to end the command.

click (Panel Schedule Report). i Express Workshop Electrical Systems. 35 Click to place the label. Balancing Electrical Loads In this exercise. 36 Highlight a wire in the large circuit as shown.The temporary label shows the circuit the circuit number (5) and the power panel name (PP-1). 38 On the Design Bar. PP-1 is highlighted to show that it is the currently displayed view. 37 Click to place the label. 3 In the Project Browser. 72 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Next. you view the panel schedule report for panelboard PP-1 and balance the electrical loads on this panel. View the panel schedule report 1 Select power panel PP-1. which is located directly to the left of the drawing area. click Modify to end the command. and expand Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. you balance the electrical loads on panelboard PP-1. scroll down as needed. The temporary label shows the 2 circuits (5 and 6) and the power panel name (PP-1). The Panel Schedule Report view opens. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Options Bar.rvt.

for Appearance on Sheet. Balancing Electrical Loads | 73 . 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. All the circuits connected to the panel are listed. (Edit Circuits on Panel). click Rebalance Loads. click The Edit Circuits dialog displays. The loads are balanced across each phase. Balance the loads on the panel 9 Select power panel PP-1. 8 Close the Panel Schedule Report view. click Edit. right-click PP-1. 12 Click OK. 11 In the Edit Circuits dialog. B. 6 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog. click OK.4 In the Project Browser. A. 10 On the Options Bar. and the circuit structure is automatically reorganized. under Panel Schedule. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. and C. click OK. and click Properties. are shown. and the current loads on phases. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays.

74 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .The reorganized circuit structure is reflected in the wire labels. You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Electrical Systems. 14 When prompted to save the model. click No. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close.

Developing Your MEP Designs 75 .

76 .

At the end of this tutorial. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you can choose to save your work. In this lesson. This information is used for heating and cooling load analysis. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you perform a heating and cooling load analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. go to http://www. However. you configure the linked architectural model.autodesk. By following the recommended workflow. In this exercise. you place spaces in the areas of the building model. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. as most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. If the tutorial datasets are not present. you design a mechanical system for an office building. you create a plenum level and place various types of spaces. 77 .com/revitmep-documentation and download them. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spacial environment. First. you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Revit MEP 2009. This system consists of a VAV duct system and a hydronic piping system. As you create the mechanical system. you first carefully plan the system. Then. methodology. After finishing each exercise. you plan the system by first placing spaces in the building.Mechanical Systems 3 In this tutorial. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. and contain information about the locations in which they are placed. you will understand the process. Planning Mechanical Systems To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. as with any design project. After applying a color scheme to the zones. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Revit MEP 2009.

Open the i Spaces. These components are defined in the architectural dataset. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. The linked model is configured. NOTE When working with a linked file. and after the linked model highlights. Configure the linked model The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. and that the ceiling is defined as non room-bounding. make certain that the roof is defined as room-bounding.Mech. right-click. click the Training Files icon.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels to place spaces in the plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor) of the building. The elevation view opens. and click OK twice. click Edit/New. click Modify. expand Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. This makes the architectural components (such as walls and floors) room-bounding so that they are recognized as boundaries for spaces. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. select Room Bounding. and click Element Properties. In this section. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.■ ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click East . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans ➤ 1 Mech. 5 On the Basics tab of the Design bar. Next. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to achieve an accurate heating and cooling load analysis. The level 1 floor plan of the linked model displays. 78 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . not in the MEP dataset. The Status Bar located below the Design Bar and a tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. you add a level for plenums. 6 In the Project Browser.

verify that Level : Plenum is selected. Scroll down to the Extents category. For Offset. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 7 is created. Verify that Make Plan View is selected.7 On the Basic tab of the Design Bar. select Level Above (Level 2). In the View Range dialog. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. for Level. Placing Spaces | 79 . click Yes. and click OK. verify that Associated Level (Level 1 Plenum) is specified with a 0' 0" offset. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. for Top. ■ 10 Draw a plenum level 8' 6" above Level 1. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Draw) is selected. select HVAC for Sub Discipline. right-click Level 7. 9 On the Options Bar. and click Edit for View Range. enter an Offset of 1' 0" For Bottom. Under View Depth. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. For Cut plane. ■ ■ ■ ■ Click OK twice. If asked to rename the corresponding level and views. Click Plan View Types. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. 11 In the Project Browser. verify that 0' 0" is specified. do the following: ■ ■ Under Graphics. and in the Plan View Types dialog clear Ceiling Plan. and its listed in the Project Browser under Mechanical ➤ ???. and press ENTER. Under Identity Data. 8 In the Type Selector. and click Properties. verify that Associated Level (Level 1 Plenum) is specified with a 0' 0" offset. enter Level 1 Plenum for View Name. click Level. and enter an Offset value of 0 0.

■ ■ ■ ■ 19 Place the cursor in the office area located in the upper-left corner of the building until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements. In the Space box.The Level 1 Plenum floor plan is now listed under HVAC ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. Notice that the level is renamed in the elevation view. Place a space in an office area and in an open area 13 In the Project Browser. verify that New is selected. click Space. 80 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . 15 Use the mouse scroll wheel. double-click 1 . do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected.Mech view is not maximized or the elevation view was closed. select Level 1 Plenum. For Offset. under Floor Plans. The Space box contains all unplaced spaces (spaces that were placed in unbounded areas). Verify that Leader is cleared. The Space tool is also on MEP-specific Design Bar tabs. 18 On the Options Bar. This action specifies the vertical extent of the space. the 1 . 14 Click Windows menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows to close the elevation view. New indicates that a new space is being placed. 16 On the Basic tab of the Design Bar. and zoom the office area located in the upper-left corner of the building. Verify that Horizontal is selected in the tag location box.Mech. enter 0' 0" . If Close Hidden Windows is unavailable. For Upper Limit. 17 Verify that Space Tag is selected in the Type Selector. and maximize the window.

Placing Spaces | 81 . This displays the entire floor plan and centers it in the drawing area. and after the space snaps to the room-bounding elements. and click Zoom to Fit. you will separate the open space near the entrance and place a space there. 21 With the Space tool open. enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. TIP You can also right-click in the drawing area. You activate this visibility later in this exercise.20 Click to place the space. Only the space tag displays because the visibility for the interior fill and reference lines is not activated. Later in the exercise. 22 Move the cursor to the large open area in the center of the floor plan. Make certain that you place the space to the center-right of the open space as shown. click to place a space as shown.

23 Click Modify. 24 Zoom in on the space tag in the upper left hand corner office. 82 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . Next. you rename the 2 spaces. 25 Click the space tag name. A text box appears.

27 Repeat this method. expand Spaces. and rename the space in the open area. The 2 spaces display in the floor plan view. Open 104. 26 Double-click the space tag number. Placing Spaces | 83 .Enter Office. 28 With the view active. enter VG on the keyboard. Next. Color Fill displays space color fill when it is applied. and press ENTER. Reference displays space reference lines (cross hairs). Interior. You apply color fill to spaces in a later exercise. and Reference. 29 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. you activate spaces visibility. and select Color Fill. and click in the drawing area. 30 Click OK. enter 101 in the text box. The Interior option displays space shading.

and (Line) are selected. verify that 0' 0" is specified. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that (Draw). enter ZR. The entrance area is bound only by the radius wall—this area is considered semi-bounded. Chain. 32 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. To place a space in the entrance area.Place a space in the entrance area You need to place a space in the area next to the building entrance becaue this entrance area will be heated and cooled more often than the rest of the open space. right-click the Design Bar. click Space Separation. and draw a zoom region around the upper-corner of the radius wall as shown. 31 With the 1 . NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. For Offset.Mech view active. and click Mechanical. 33 On the Options Bar. 84 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . you need to make this area fully-bounded by drawing space separation lines.

click Move to Space. and press ENTER to specify the end point for the first line segment. The Draw tool remains open. 38 Draw the line down 32' 0". Notice that the Open 104 space adjusted its boundaries so that it is not in the new area. NOTE If the space or the space tag is inside the smaller area. If the space and space tag are inside the new area. 34 Place the cursor over the upper-corner of the radius wall. 35 Use the mouse scroll wheel to zoom out the view. and click to specify the end point for the second line segment. click to specify the start point for the first space separation line segment. Placing Spaces | 85 . select the space (reference line) or the space tag.■ Verify that Radius is cleared. 36 Draw the line up. click to specify the end point for the last line segment. The space separation line created a new fully-bounded area within the large open area. and click to specify the end point of the third line segment. select and drag both of them. and type 4' 0" (notice the text entry box called a dimension listener that pops up). 37 Move the cursor to the right to draw a horizontal line 32' 0". and drag it to the larger open area. 40 Press ESC twice to close the Draw tool. If you see a warning that the space tag is outside of its space. and after the end point snap displays. 39 Move the cursor to the left 4' 0" (which is located over the lower-end of the radius wall). and after the end point snap displays.

select Level 1 Plenum for Upper Limit. spaces can be placed in them. click Space. enter 121. 43 Place a space in the entrance area. Although room separation lines are recognized in Revit MEP. enter 0 0 for Offset. For Name. enter Entrance. right-click and click Element Properties. you place a space in the entrance area. 45 Place the cursor over the space. under Identity Data. 42 On the Options Bar. 44 Click Modify. After the areas are separated. space separation lines are not recognized in Revit Architecture. do the following: ■ ■ For Number. Next. and verify that New is slected in the Space box. after the space reference lines highlight. 41 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 46 In the Element Properties dialog.NOTE Space separation lines are MEP-specific room-bounding lines that separate areas where a wall is not desired or not possible. verify that Leader is cleared. 86 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . verify that Horizontal is selected in the tag location box.

click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Space. double-click Level 1 Plenum. Place a space in a plenum area 54 In the Project Browser. 57 Place the cursor in the plenum area. and enter 0 0 for Offset. and click to place a space. and select Interior and Reference. All other Option Bar settings are the same as when you placed the other spaces. All other Option Bar settings are the same as when you placed the other spaces. 50 On the Options Bar. 60 Click OK. Chase 118. and enter 2 0 for Offset. 55 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. select Roof for Upper Limit. expand Spaces. Placing Spaces | 87 . The space is renamed Entrance 121. 51 Place a space in the chase area. The plenum space displays in the floor plan view. under Floor Plans. The offset places the space 2 feet above the roof. 49 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 59 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. select Level 2 for Upper Limit. 52 Press Esc.47 Click OK. 53 Rename the space. 56 On the Options Bar. Notice that the plenum space is not in the mechanical room or in the stairwell. 58 With the Level 1 Plenum view active. click Space. Place a space in a chase area 48 Zoom in on the chase that is located to the right of the Mechanical room. This is because the walls prevent space placement. Roof is specified for the upper limit because the chase area spans multiple levels and ends at the roof level.

and double-click 1 . you can choose to save your work. Open the i Zones. you modified the spaces visibility for the views. you add spaces to zones in order to control the spacial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 2 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. navigate to the folder of your choice. click File menu ➤ Save. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. and verify the zones in the System Browser. Finally. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the next exercise. close the file. enter Spaces Training for File name. Zones allow you to control the spacial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. that action removes the space from the Default zone. When you add a space to a zone. NOTE After finishing each exercise. You used space separation lines to create a new fully-bounded area that was part of a larger area. 62 In the Save As dialog. However. you assign spaces to zones in the building. Creating Zones After spaces are placed in the building. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. click the Training Files icon. click System Browser. Otherwise. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the dataset to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.Mech to make it the active view.61 If you want to save your work. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can click Reference under Spaces on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog (View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics) to display space reference lines. In this exercise. and click Save. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. 88 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

it is automatically added to the Default zone. After a space is placed in an area. 6 On the Zone toolbar. You work with one zone until you click Finish. 3 Right-click in Systems Browser. Next. and modify the zone properties. As you do this. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. you can add or remove a space from the zone. you assign spaces to a zone. This is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. place the cursor on Office 101 located in the upper-left corner of the building until the space highlights. The Zone tool opens. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. Creating Zones | 89 . click Zone. the Zone toolbar displays. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. and click View ➤ Zones. The title bar displays the name of the new zone. Assign a zone to spaces on the same level 5 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Using the Zone toolbar. and a new zone is created. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. 7 In the drawing area.NOTE You can also press F9 (with the drawing area active) or click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. verify that (Add a Space to the Zone) is selected. NOTE The Zone toolbar provides zone tools and information. This removes the space from the Default zone.

10 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. 9 With the drawing area active. add the Office 102 and Office 103 spaces to the zone. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. The new zone name displays in the Zone toolbar and the space is renamed in the System Browser. 12 On the Zone toolbar. The new zone displays.8 Click the space to add it to the zone. expand the new zone and notice that the Office 101 space is added to it and removed from the Default zone.West Offices zone in the System Browser to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. TIP You can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. and click OK. Notice that the zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. Next. 90 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . you rename the zone. In the System Browser. 11 With the Zone toolbar open. click (Zone Properties). To view the zone in the drawing area. you need to activate the zone visibility which you do next. under Identity Data. click Interior Fill and Reference Lines. for Name enter 1 . expand HVAC Zones.West Offices. and click OK. enter VG. 14 Expand the 1 .

Assign a zone for spaces on different levels 16 In the Project Browser. 27 On the Zone toolbar. 20 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. Creating Zones | 91 . and click OK. expand HVAC Zones. you activate zones visibility for the view. 24 On the 1 . add the following level 1 spaces to the zone: Open 104 Men’s Room 105 Mech/Elec 106 Ladies Room 107. 18 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog. 17 With the drawing area active. click Finish. click Interior Fill and Reference Lines. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Next. 25 With the Zone toolbar open. 23 On the Zone toolbar. 21 Zoom in on each floor plan. and double-click Level 1 Plenum to open the view. verify that ■ ■ ■ ■ (Add a Space to the Zone) is selected.Mech to make it the active view. enter VG. 22 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.Mech floor plan.15 On the Zone toolbar. click in the Level 1 Plenum view to make it active. 26 Add the L1 Plenum 122 space to the zone. 19 Click Windows menu ➤ Floor Plan: 1 . click Zone. click Finish.

29 On the Options Bar. Next. However. 31 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.You need to rename the zone. 28 In either view. you cannot open the Zone tool as this will create a new zone.Open Offices. you edit the zone to rename it. click (Zone Properties). for Name. click Edit Zone. under Identity Data. Notice that the Zone toolbar displays the name of the zone that you are editing. enter 1 . 92 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . The Zone tool opens. TIP You can also access zone properties by right-clicking the zone in the System Browser. select the reference line to the zone that you created. 30 On the Zone toolbar. and click Properties.

Make certain that you verify the spaces in the floor plan views and in the System Browser If you prefer not to continue with this practice. 103 Stairwells 114.Conference Room 2 .South Offices 2 .South Offices 1 . and click Save. 120 Zones 1 . Ladies’ Room 107. 119. L1 Plenum 122 Offices 115.West Offices Chases 34 If you want to save your work. 35 In the Save As dialog.North Offices 1 . You can expand the 1 .North Offices 2 . 213 Conference 214 Offices 210. Spaces Offices 111. Office 209 Open 204.Entrance 1 . L2 Plenum 217 Offices 215. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and Creating Zones | 93 . Men’s Room 105. The table below lists all spaces and the zones. 110 Open 104.East Offices 1 . click Finish. 212 Lounge 208. use the methods that you learned and assign zones for all the spaces in the building. close the file.Open Offices 1 . navigate to the folder of your choice. All zones will be provided in the dataset for the next exercise. 216 Offices 201. 117 Offices 101. 113 Entrance 121 Offices 108. 102.West Offices Stairwells 2 . Complete the zones for the building 33 For additional practice.The new zone name displays in the Zone toolbar and the space is renamed in the System Browser. Men’s Room 205. Ladies Room 207. 112. you assigned zones to the spaces that were on the same level and on different levels of the building.East Offices 2 . Elec/Mech 206. You activated zone visibility in the views. 109. proceed to the next step. 116. enter Zones Training for File name. click File menu ➤ Save.Open Offices 2 .Open Offices zone in the System Browser to view the 5 spaces in it. Elec/Mech 106. Otherwise. 203 Chases 118. 32 On the Zone toolbar. In this exercise. 202. 211.

rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 7 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. click Color Scheme Legend. verify that Color Scheme Legend : 1 is selected. Open the i Zone Color Scheme. Create a new color scheme legend type 1 In the Project Browser. Apply the color scheme 5 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that the color scheme legend outline indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view. you apply a color scheme to the zones that you created in the previous exercise. Assigning a Color Scheme to Zones In this exercise. you assign a color scheme to these zones in preparation for laying out a VAV duct system. 94 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . 6 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Drafting. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than you using space schedules or accessing element properties.in the System Browser. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 4 In the Type Selector. NOTE If the Drafting tab is not available on the Design Bar. Click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon. NOTE All zone reference lines and shading have been hidden in this dataset to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. The color scheme is applied to the zones in the 1 .Mech view. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click to place the legend. You can click Reference Lines and Interior Fill under HVAC Zones on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides dialog (View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics) to display zone reference lines and shading. The zones are also listed in the System Browser. right-click the Design Bar. and double-click 1 .Mech to make it the active view. Verify that Schema 1 is selected for Color Scheme. In the next exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select HVAC Zones for Space Type. The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend.

select Manchester.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. You then perform a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. enter 03101. ■ Click for Location. Open the i Energy Analysis. enter Zone Color Scheme Training for File name.Mech. and view the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. and view the loads report. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. Level 1 Plenum. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis | 95 . Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis In this exercise. 9 If you want to save your work. Specify Project Settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. In the left pane of the Open dialog. use the method that you learned and add a color scheme for the zones on the 2 . click the Training Files icon. and click Save. navigate to the folder of your choice. NH for City. you verify the building. proceed to the next step. and on the Place tab of the Manage Place and Locations dialog. If you prefer not to continue with this practice. and zone information. 10 In the Save As dialog. click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK.8 For additional practice. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the Element Properties dialog under Energy Analysis. space. All color schemes will be provided in the dataset for the next exercise. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. and Level 2 Plenum floor plan views. In the next exercise. In this exercise. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. For Postal Code. click Edit for Energy Data. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Office is specified for Building Type.

For Ground Plane. select Level 1. Verify that 1' 0" is specified for Sliver Space Tolerance. 96 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . click Edit for Energy Data. verify that Office is selected. click Heating and Cooling Loads. you need to select this option. 5 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. After opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Verify that Shading surfaces is selected. verify that Manchester. Then.Single Duct is selected. IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. and click OK. Default Space Construction. For Place and Location. 7 Click the Building tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. Verify that <Building> is specified for Building Construction. You have verified the building information. under Energy Analysis. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting).■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that VAV . Verify area and volume setting 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Construction Settings). verify that <Building> is selected. Next. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. You can also access the building information by clicking Settings menu ➤ Project Information.Single Duct is specified for Building Service. (Building ■ ■ For Building Service (Default Space Service). Verify building information 6 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Click OK twice. NH is selected. For Building Construction. and do the following: ■ ■ For Building Type. verify that VAV . if you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. A preview pane displays the model and 2 tabs contain heating and cooling information for the building. Verify that New Construction is selected for Project Phase.

Next. click the Spaces/Zones tab. 10 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). and select Office 111. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. The Highlight tool allows you to verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. 12 Click (Highlight). and zoom the model to better view the space. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis | 97 . The Spaces and Zones tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. 11 Expand the 1 . verify that Wireframe is selected (default setting). The space for Office 111 highlights in red. spin the model as shown. while pressing SHIFT and the mouse scroll wheel. 9 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. The analytical volume is bounded by the center plane of walls and the top plane of roofs and floors. pan.East Offices zone. NOTE Wireframe displays the analytical volume of a space.View a space 8 In the preview pane. 13 Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. you isolate a space. TIP You can use the View Cube mouse to spin.

14 With Office 111 selected. Office 111. click Shading. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. roofs. Verify space information 19 On the Spaces/Zones tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. the space information displays for the selected space. you verify space information. highlight and isolate the space for Office 111 to view its inner volume. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces that normally would be obstructed by other spaces or by the architecture which would normally make it difficult to view. 16 On the View Selector . and other room-bounding components. 15 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. This space information will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. 98 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . select Office 111. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. floors. you view the volume of the space differently. Next. click (Isolate). Below the list of spaces and zones. 18 Next. 17 Using the methods that you learned.

This specified the number of people or the area per person for the space. 74. and humidification set point. cooling air temperature. click Wireframe. view other spaces and zones in the building model. you verify the zone information. ■ ■ View a zone and zone information 21 On the View Selector . and air changes per hour. This specifies the cooling set point. Revit MEP stores this space and zone information as space and zone properties.East Offices. right-clicking. 22 On the Spaces/Zones tab. and verify the space and zone information.00 °F : N/A for Heating Information. 1 . and dehumidification set point. This zone contains 3 spaces. select 1 . (Isolate) tools to view the analytical 24 Click (Shading). 70. outdoor air per area.East Offices. 25 Click 1 . use the (Highlight) and volume of the spaces in the selected zone.20 Under the list of spaces and zones. heating air temperature. ■ ■ IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains space and zone information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. This zone information will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the spaces in the zone. This specifies the heating set point.East Offices. 26 Verify the following zone information for the 1 . This specifies the outdoor air per person.00 °F : 90. N/A : N/A : N/A is specified for Outdoor Air Information. You can also click (Zone Properties) on the Zone toolbar to access the zone information. and repeat the above steps to view the inner volumes of the spaces in the 1 -East Offices zone. 23 As you did earlier.00 °F : 54.00 °F : N/A for Cooling Information. the zone information displays for the selected zone. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space.East Offices zone: ■ ■ <Building> is specified for Service Type. verify the following space information: ■ <Building> is specified for Space Type and Construction Type. and clicking Element Properties. You can also access the space and zone information by selecting a space or zone in the drawing area or System Browser. Below the list of spaces and zones. The space and zone information is located under Energy Analysis in the Element Properties dialog. respectively. This displays the analytical volume of the spaces in the selected zone. including Office 111. <Default> is specified for People Data. Performing a Heating and Cooling Loads Analysis | 99 . Next. Lighting Loads: <Default> : Power Loads: <Default> is specified for Electrical Data. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. View other spaces and zones 27 Using the methods that you learned.

space. and click Save. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. 30 If you want to save your work. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. 29 Review the loads report. Various factors are analyzed including analytical and inner volumes of the spaces. or zone information. Now that the project. close the file. weather. RELATED <Virtual Environment> allows you to either export the building and space information to the IES <Virtual Environment> program to perform an energy analysis and create an IES model. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. or zoom the view to see the selected space or zone. click File menu ➤ Save. this report includes project. 100 | Chapter 3 Mechanical Systems . you can perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 28 On the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and zone information has been verified. and zone information for the building model. pan. TIP You can select multiple spaces or zones by pressing CTRL and selecting them. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. In the next lesson.You may need to spin. enter Energy Analysis Training for File name. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. space. the People Data option becomes blank. space. You must have IES <VE> installed. For example. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. Otherwise. In this exercise. space. and a loads report displays. that information does not display. This product is not included with Revit MEP. NOTE If you select multiple spaces or zones that contain different information. Revit MEP performs a heating and cooling loads analysis using the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool that was developed in partnership with IES (Integrated Environmental Solutions). or import the IES model that has already been created. click Calculate. you verified building. or by pressing SHIFT to select a range of spaces or zones. or make any changes to the model. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. if 2 spaces are selected each having different people data. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. navigate to the folder of your choice. 31 In the Save As dialog. and zone information. building. You then performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report.

you create new views. you will create supply air systems. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. As you place the air terminals. and click View Properties. 101 .Ceiling Mech to make it the active view.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding the VAV boxes. Placing Air Terminals In this exercise. and learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. Open the i Air Terminals.Mechanical Systems:Air 4 Designing Air Systems Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. Then. After system creation.Ceiling Mech view in the Project Browser and click (Properties). you continue designing by resolving routing conflicts. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. Modify a ceiling plan view 1 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click 1 . and then you validate your air system design. After completing the air systems lesson. sizing ductwork. In the left pane of the Open dialog. adding AC units. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans. modify air terminal parameters. You can also select the 1 . you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. you create the secondary and primary supply air system and ductwork to connect the components that you added. In this lesson. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems.

and enter 8' 7" for Offset. You specify 8' 7" so that your view captures the air terminals (which will be located at the ceiling height of 8' 6") and not other system components that may be above the air terminals and in the same level. 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. These components would obstruct your view of the air terminals. Under Primary Range. make sure that Place on Face is selected. 10 On the Options bar. Under View Depth. 102 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser. and enter 8 7 for Offset. for the Cut plane parameter. Add a supply air terminal 7 Verify that 1 . verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected. for the Level parameter. separate the value with a space. click Air Terminal. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected. you can enter 8 7 and press Tab for 8' 7". NOTE The ceiling hosts the diffuser. you do not need to type measurement symbols instead. You will now use this ceiling plan to place the level 1 air terminals. 5 In the View Range dialog. 6 Click OK twice. Verify that Reflected Ceiling Plan is selected for Underlay Orientation. 9 In the Type Selector. ■ ■ TIP When entering a value. enter 0 for Offset. select Supply Diffuser . 11 Click to place the supply air terminal in the upper left office as shown. specify the following: ■ Under Primary Range. under Graphics. For example. for the Top parameter. do the following: ■ ■ Select Level 1 for Underlay.Ceiling Mech is the active view. 4 Scroll down to the Extents category and click Edit for View Range. or enter 12 3 1/2 for 12' 3 1/2".3 In the Element Properties dialog.

you first specify a start point on the component that you want to move and then you specify an end point for the destination. 20 Select the bottom-right corner of the air terminal as the copy start point. verify that Constrain is cleared and Copy is selected. Modify the supply air terminal flow and offset parameters 13 Select the supply air terminal that you just placed. First specify a copy start point on the component that you want to copy and then specify the copy end point (or destination).use the arrow keys for fine movement control. 16 Move the cursor to the bottom right corner of the air terminal. you may have to move it to center it -. click to specify the move start point. and after the (geometry) end point snap displays. the command in progress terminates. click Modify. click (Move) on the Edit toolbar. TIP When you click Modify. Notice that the selected air terminal turns red. click (Copy) on the Edit toolbar. Copy the supply air terminal 18 With the Office 101 air terminal selected. 14 On the Options Bar. TIP To use the Move tool. Since snaps are not available here. and then click Modify. Placing Air Terminals | 103 . Move the diffuser so that it fits squarely inside a ceiling tile. Move the supply air terminal 15 With the air terminal selected. TIP You use the same procedure with the Copy tool as with the Move tool. 17 Move the air terminal to the location shown. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the air terminal without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. You can also press Esc to accomplish this result. 19 On the Options Bar. The start point aligns with the end point when the move is completed. and then click the midpoint of the Office 102 and then of the Office 103 ceiling grids to specify copy end points.12 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. then select Multiple. enter 300 CFM for Flow.

23 Using the add-move-copy placement method. Add exhaust air grills and return air terminals 21 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar.Copies of the air terminal are placed immediately after you specify each end point. place an exhaust air grill in the Ladies’ Room (upper restroom). click Air Terminal. and then copy it to the Men’s Room (lower restroom) as shown. 22 In the Type Selector. TIP You can enter SM to override all other snaps and display midpoint snaps only. Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection. select Exhaust Diffuser .Hosted: Workplane-based Exhaust Diffuser. Notice that after you specify the copy start point. listening dimensions display to aid placement. 104 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .

Placing Air Terminals | 105 .Before you copy the exhaust diffuser.Hosted: Workplane-based Return Diffuser. make certain that you specify the airflow parameter to 250 CFM. 25 Using the same placement method. select Return Diffuser . place 3 return air terminals in the open space to the left of the restrooms. and specify a 325 CFM airflow for each of them. 24 In the Type Selector.

Modify the airflow display arrows 27 Select the Office 101 supply air terminal and use the Copy tool to place a copy below the Men’s Room in the Open 1 area. click Modify. and click OK.26 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 106 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . under Mechanical. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 Select the air terminal that you just placed. right-click. TIP Notice that each air terminal type is identified by a different symbol. and click Element Properties. clear the UpArrow check box.

remember to modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. You can safely skip this section if you have mastered the design process. continue laying out the level 1 supply system.Optional: Complete the level 1 supply air terminal layout For additional practice of the techniques you have learned so far. create the level 2 supply system. 31 Place copies of this supply air terminal at the ceiling grid intersections as shown below. The next exercise starts with a completed drawing. You can safely skip this section if you have mastered the design process. do the following for level 2: ■ Make 2 .Ceiling Mech the active view. After you place the supply air terminals. 30 Select the Office 101 air terminal. Placing Air Terminals | 107 . click on the Edit toolbar. Optional: Create the level 2 air terminal layout For additional practice of the techniques you have learned so far. The next exercise starts with a completed drawing. 32 Using the placement method that you learned for level 1.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool Schedules allow you to document the mechanical system components and heating and cooling requirements. click the Training Files icon. 108 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . ■ ■ After you finish the level 2 air terminal layout. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this exercise. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. and 250 CFM airflow for the exhaust diffusers. you create schedules and use them as not only as documents but as design tools. you create a schedule for the supply air system project.Ceiling Mech but use Level 2 as an Underlay and verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is set for the view range parameters. You will be using different views to design the systems. Specify 325 CFM airflow for the supply and return diffusers. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. specify the same view parameters as 1 . and learned a method for precise placement. enter Air Terminals Training for File name.■ In the Element Properties dialog. In the next exercise. and click Save. The completed level 2 air terminal layout is as shown. More importantly. collapse the ceiling plan views in the Project Browser. The schedule as a dynamic design tool is a very powerful method to monitor system requirements. In the next exercise. modified the air terminal parameters. you can modify this information directly within a schedule making the schedule a design tool. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. and to quickly and accurately make real-time system modifications across the entire Revit MEP project. click File menu ➤ Save. Use the add-move-copy placement method to place the same type of air terminals on level 2 that you did on level 1. you create the air systems. 33 If you want to save your work. In this exercise. you placed air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. Modify the airflow display arrows for air terminals that need 2-way and 3-way blow patterns. 34 In the Save As dialog. navigate to the folder of your choice.

Create a calculated value parameter 9 Click Calculated Value. Notice that the content of the Available fields list changes to fields associated with spaces. Notice that the schedule name and the phase is automatically added. Verify that Formula is selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Actual Calculated Airflow for Name. 8 Select a field and click Move Up and Move Down to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Space: Number Space: Name Mark System Type Flow Space: Actual Supply Airflow Space: Calculated Supply Airflow If you need to remove a field.■ Open the i Air System Schedules. select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Space: Actual Supply Airflow Space: Calculated Supply Airflow Space: Name Space: Number 7 Click Add to add them to the Scheduled fields list. ■ ■ Define columns 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Space. Select Air Flow for Type. Click OK. select the field and click Remove. Define schedule type 2 In the New Schedule dialog. under Available fields. click Schedule/Quantities. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. and click Add to add the Flow field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. do the following: ■ Under Category. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool | 109 . Select HVAC for Discipline. 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 10 In the Calculated Value dialog. 6 While pressing Ctrl. and that Show categories from all disciplines is cleared. 5 Under Select available fields from. 4 Add Mark and System Type. select Air Terminals. select Flow.

you use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow for an air terminal to satisfy the design requirements. Notice that the conditions that you specified display under Conditions to Use. Verify that (none) is selected for Then by. Select Footer. 110 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and click Conditional Format. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Actual Calculated Airflow is selected for Field. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 13 In the Conditional Formatting dialog. Enter -35 CFM and 35 CFM for Value. Click OK. select Actual Calculated Airflow. Use the schedule as a design tool 15 With the Air Terminal Schedule view active. Format the calculated value parameter 12 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Space: Number for Sort by. Click the Background Color and select Red in the Color dialog. Click OK twice. A new view opens called Air Terminal Schedule and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. Verify that Grand totals is cleared. in the Fields list. Select Not Between for Test. Notice that the data is sorted according to room number. This schedule is not only a construction document but also a design tool. and select Supply Air.Space: Calculated Supply Airflow for Formula. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. Verify that Ascending is selected. The red values in the Actual Calculated Airflow column immediately report that the actual amount of air being supplied to the room does not yet meet the design airflow requirements within the range of plus or minus 35 CFM.■ Use the button on the right to enter Space: Actual Supply Airflow . and Itemize every instance is selected. ■ ■ The Actual Calculated Airflow calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what rooms do not meet the design requirements as they are red in the schedule. The Actual Calculated Airflow calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list) and will display as a column in the schedule. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 11 Click OK. Organize the data 14 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. You can change one or more entries in the schedule to modify your system. Select Blank line. This is because you are modifying the digital database of building information. and Count and totals. select System Type for Filter by. Next. equals. On the Filter tab.

click Leader to clear this option. the selected air terminal displays in red. 19 In the schedule. NOTE If a different project is also open. click Window menu and select the project to make it the active view. 23 On the Options bar. The other parameters are design or calculated parameters. 16 In the Project Browser. and if you click in the floor plan to make it active. Optional: Modifying Other Parameters The drawing for the next exercise provides completed values. double-click 1 Mech to make it the active view. The Actual Calculated Airflow value displays in white indicating that it now complies with the Office 101 airflow design requirements. These changes dynamically propagate throughout your project because you are changing the digital database of building information. TIP Editing diffuser tags in schedules. and click File menu ➤ Close to close the project.This closes all open windows that are hidden by the schedule. Tagging an Air Diffuser 21 Select Tag from the Mechanical tab on the Design bar. The schedule and the floor plan display simultaneously in the drawing area. Notice that the Flow column parameters are the only parameters that you can define in the schedule. NOTE After you select and modify data in a schedule. the associated system component is immediately selected and modified in the project as if you used the Element Properties dialog. 18 Enter WT to tile the 2 views. 20 Delete 300 CFM enter 250. 24 Click on a diffuser to add a tag. rather than one by one in a drawing. 17 Enter ZR. 25 Modify the other supply air terminal Flow parameters for both floors so that the airflow design requirements are met. and press Tab. and draw a zoom region around Office 101 located on the left outer wall of the floor plan. 22 Select By Category. Using a Schedule as an Air Systems Design Tool | 111 . A cursor displays in the selected cell in the schedule enabling you to modify the parameter. speeds the design process. select the 300 CFM Flow parameter (in the Flow column) for the Office 101 air terminal. under Views ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. This allows you to use schedules to make multiple modifications in one view.

A system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. This occurred because you were modifying the digital database of building information that the project sources. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. After creating the logical connection. and click Save. 2 Right-click in the drawing window. You then used this schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow so that it meets the design requirements. 28 In the Save As dialog. you create air systems. You modified the airflow parameters directly in the schedule and all changes occurred dynamically and propagated throughout the project. During this exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice. Under Primary Range. Open the i Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including energy analysis.Mech to make it the active view. Air terminal connector sizes are used to calculate airflow but are also used to calculate ductwork sizing.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. click Edit for View Range. 26 Close the schedule view. Modify a floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. Unlike logical connections. and then create the logical connection between the system components. This is the Revit MEP recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation. However. In this exercise.NOTE Do not modify the return or exhaust air terminals as these are not supply air terminals and do not affect the supply airflow. After you modify the airflow parameters. enter an Offset value of 10 0. you are changing the air terminal connector size. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. and maximize the 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. for the Top parameter. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. you created a schedule to assess airflow for each room in the building. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. under Extents. all Actual Calculated Airflow parameters display in white. This is the power of BIM. IMPORTANT By modifying each supply air terminal airflow parameter. they are necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical geometry such as sizing. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either to a system that you create or to a default system. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 4 In the View Range dialog. In the next exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. 27 If you want to save your work. and double-click 1 . and click View Properties. enter Using Schedules Training for File name. 112 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected for the view range parameters. you also use the System Browser to validate your systems. click File menu ➤ Save.Mech floor plan view.

click in the drawing area to make it active. each default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. the assigned diffusers move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. Place a VAV (variable air volume) box 11 With the view active. They remain in the default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. right-click the title and select View ➤ Systems. and expand each default systems to view all of the air terminals that you placed in the building. 6 Type VG on the keyboard. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Supply Air system category located in the Unassigned folder. You use multiple views to clearly and effectively communicate different systems information.5 Click OK twice. This assignment occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. after you placed the diffusers. and click OK. enter ZR. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 113 . click System Browser. If the System Browser does not respond. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm air systems.Mech view. air terminals. if all system components are assigned. For now. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. 10 Expand the Unassigned systems folder. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. Different building professionals use different views during the course of the building project. 7 On the Annotation Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overides window. TIP You can also press F9 (Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. You will create the level 1 supply air systems in the 1 . You will learn more about systems in this exercise. Thus. So. As you assign diffusers to systems. notice that all of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. 9 If the System Browser title says Zones. and sketch a zoom region around Office 101 located in the top-left corner of the floor plan. uncheck Air Terminal tags. then press F9. The cursor changes to a magnifying glass when Zoom in Region is activated. Explore the System Browser 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.

and click Element Properties.TIP Although this view does not contain room tags. you add the VAV to this system. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component.8 inch Inlet. 18 On the Options Bar. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. enter 9 6 for Offset. click (Create Supply Air System). 114 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Notice that the VAV box listing is placed in the Unassigned folder under the Default Supply Air system in the System Browser. Modify VAV box parameters 15 Right-click the VAV box. This VAV box services only Office 101 so the VAV airflow equals that of the air terminal. 19 On the Options Bar. and select the VAV box. select VAV Unit . you can add room tags to the mechanical floor plans using the Room Tag tool on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ Under Constraints. Click OK. press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees. Create a secondary air system containing one diffuser 17 Select the Office 101 rectangular diffuser. 12 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click to place the VAV box. 13 In the Type Selector. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. If desired. You created a system that includes the air terminal. click (Select Equipment for System). and press Esc twice. 14 Move the cursor to the right of the office door. This is because you have yet to assign it to a system. ■ The offset value places the VAV box in the plenum space (between the level 1 ceiling and the level 2 floor and above the level 1 air terminals). click Mechanical Equipment.Parallel Fan Powered : Size 3 . Next. Note that the VAV will detect the downstream airflow when connected to diffusers. IMPORTANT After you select a system component. system specific tools display on the Options Bar.

place the cursor over the Office 101 air terminal and press Tab. click (Layout Path) on the Options Bar. and select the system. This display indicates that the new system is selected. The organization is from upstream. This is because you have yet to assign the VAV primary and return air connections to their systems. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the highlighted system clears. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path. and cleared from the Options Bar.Notice that only mechanical equipment highlight and can be selected when using the Select Equipment for System tool. Create the ductwork 20 With the new system selected. and click Select to select the system. the VAV (the parent) to downstream. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 115 . The newly created system that logically connects the air terminal to the VAV box displays in red. the air terminal (the child) with the system between (connecting) them. IMPORTANT The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. Notice that the air terminal listing moved to the assigned system but the VAV box is also listed under Unassigned. You can also right-click the Mechanical Supply Air 1 listing in the System Browser. This system tool displays along with the other Options Bar system tools. Next you create the ductwork to physically connect the air system components (air terminal and VAV). select an air terminal that you added to the system. They remain assign to their respective default systems. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. Default Supply Air and Default Return Air.

select Branch. Select Flex Duct Round : Flex . click Settings. and select solution 2. NOTE Configuring the duct conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type. Verify that 6' 0" is selected for Maximum Flex Duct Length. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Rectangular Duct: Radius Elbows / Taps is selected for Duct Type. 27 Under System Type: Supply Air. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green.The Layout Path tab appears on the Design Bar providing various layout tools. For more information. refer to Help. Notice that Solutions is selected. 24 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog.Round for Flex Duct Type. 21 On the Options Bar. do the following: 22 ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. Enter 9' 6" for Offset. 29 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Layout. ■ Click (Next Solution). 26 In the left pane of the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. You can also configure these settings in the Mechanical Settings dialog by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings) before beginning your project. 28 Click OK. 116 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Enter 9' 6" for Offset. select Main. 25 Under System Type: Supply Air. 23 On the Options Bar.

you can delete ductwork and the system remains. Check duct connectivity 31 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. select Coarse detail level for single line. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. and press Tab twice. as was the elbow itself. thus it is not part of the system. Note that the arrow over the duct is the diffuser airflow display arrow and not the supply airflow direction in the duct. IMPORTANT Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. For example. TIP You can easily change the duct geometry representation. select Medium for Detail Level. NOTE All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 117 . a transition connecting the elbow was automatically added. and Medium or Fine detail level for 2-line. For example. Change the geometry display 30 On the View Control Bar located below the bottom left of the drawing area.The physical connection composed of ducts and fittings is created. The duct geometry now displays in 2-line enabling you to better view the ductwork. The ductwork is a physical not a logical connection. On the View Control Bar.

and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminal.08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. and enter . You can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well.08 in-wg/100ft. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. 33 On the Options Bar. and click to select them. Under Constraints. Do not highlight or select the VAV box. 118 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Click OK. then you know that a disconnection exists. IMPORTANT When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. and equipment. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. fittings. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. Rerouting usually correct this issue. ■ The Office 101 low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at .The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. Verify that Only is selected. click Sizing. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then press Tab. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. If the entire network does not highlight. 34 In the Duct Sizing dialog. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. under Sizing Method. The first time you press Tab. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. Size the duct 32 Place the cursor over the duct.

press Spacebar twice to rotate VAV box 180 degrees. and click Element Properties. Create a secondary air system containing 2 diffusers 37 Click in the drawing area. 40 Move the cursor to the right of the Office 102 door. You can also right-click the second VAV box listed.IMPORTANT The Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. the required airflow for the space and the airflow assigned to the diffusers. 35 With the VAV selected. click Mechanical Equipment. and click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and sketch a zoom region around Offices 102 and 103 (the offices immediately below Office 101).8 inch Inlet. 41 In the left column of the System Browser. double-click the second VAV box listed. in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air. Note that the airflow is set to 250 CFM . select VAV Unit . 39 In the Type Selector. 38 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 119 . 36 Click Cancel. click to place the VAV box. right-click and select Element Properties. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . enter ZR.

43 Select the Office 102 rectangular diffuser. and click Select from the context menu. 47 Place the cursor over the Office 103 rectangular diffuser. The selected diffuser and its connector highlights. The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools.IMPORTANT Remember that all system components that you have not assigned to a system are placed in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. 120 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and number of elements in the active being edited. This system includes the selected system component(s). a new system is immediately created. click Add To System. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. NOTE Remember that after select Create Supply Air System from the context menu or click on the Options Bar. You can verify this new system in the System Browser. 46 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. right-click the component in the left column. You can also select the diffuser and click (Create Supply Air System) on the Options Bar. system equipment. under Constraints. click Show from the context menu to open the appropriate window and zoom in on the selected system component. enter 9' 6" for Offset. or select an air terminal and the airflow displays on the Options Bar. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. System components that were not selected for this system are grayed out. 45 Click (Edit System). The component highlights in the drawing area. right-click. 44 Place the cursor over the diffuser connector. and click OK. the selected component and its connector(s) highlight. and click Create Supply Air System from the context menu. TIP To locate a system component in the System Browser. NOTE After you select a system component. If not. TIP You can verify the airflow for the air terminals by opening the Air Terminal Schedule that you created in a past exercise. Note that the correct view must be active to see the highlighted component.

50 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. The bottom diffuser is no longer grayed out as it is now part of the system. Notice that the cursor changes indicating that Select Equipment is active. 52 Select the VAV box.48 Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active. 51 Place the cursor over the VAV box located outside Office 102. click (Select Equipment). Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 121 . 49 Select the Office 103 rectangular diffuser. the number of elements has increased to 2.

55 Click to select the system. If you leave the mouse stationary. 53 On the Edit System toolbar. 54 Place your cursor over the Office 102 rectangular diffuser and press Tab to display the new system. a tooltip displays the system name as Duct Systems : Mechanical Supply Air 2.On the Options Bar. The system displays in red. 122 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . the selected VAV is listed for System Equipment. click Finish.

59 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. and select solution 3. 57 On the Options Bar. click Layout Path. 58 Use the left or right arrow keys on your keyboard to view the various layout solutions. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 123 . You can click in the drawing area to close the warning. click Finish Layout.Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 56 On the Options Bar. Ignore the warning reporting that no auto-route solution was found. You already configured the duct conversion settings for the first system. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. These settings remain the same and do not need to be changed.

and after the end point snap displays. 62 In the Type Selector. or modify the duct manually. 124 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Remember to check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. you can review it and take action if necessary. Notice that the main is open and an endcap is needed to close the duct. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place an endcap. you are creating the physical duct and not altering the logical system. This was the reason for the warning message. 63 Move the cursor over the end of the main. select Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard. select or modify a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool.The ductwork physically connecting the system components is created. if a layout solution causes errors (not warnings) while attempting create duct. or click in the drawing area to close the warning and continue your work. If a warning occurs. click Duct Fitting. IMPORTANT When creating layouts. You can either relocate the VAV box. So. it is because the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. Add an endcap 60 Zoom in on the open (left) end of the main duct in Office 102. 61 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click to place the endcap.

Click OK. 64 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. Size the duct 67 Place the cursor over the duct. under Sizing Method. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. click Sizing. ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 125 . 66 Click Cancel. 69 In the Duct Sizing dialog. 65 With the VAV selected.Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. Under Constraints. Notice the airflow value of 530 CFM.08 in-wg/100ft. right-click and select Element Properties. Do not highlight or select the VAV box. verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. and enter . Verify that Only is selected. 68 On the Options Bar. and click to select them. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. and press Tab twice to highlight the duct and the air terminals.

08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork. 126 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . The VAV box. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. Check duct connectivity 70 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. and press Tab twice. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected.The low pressure secondary air system ductwork for Offices 102 and 103 is sized using the Friction method at . air terminals.

72 In the 1 .8 inch Inlet. click Mechanical Equipment. and click to place the VAV box.Mech view. this time you will add the component after the ductwork has been created. select VAV Unit. 74 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 73 Use your mouse scroll wheel to adjust the view as shown below. Create and modify a secondary supply air system containing multiple diffusers 71 Right-click in the drawing area. click Zoom in Region from the context menu. sketch a zoom region around the air terminals in Open 1 (the large open space).Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 .Next. 76 Move the cursor to the left of the air terminals. you create a low pressure secondary air system in which you modify the layout path and add a new system component to it. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 127 . 75 In the Type Selector. However.

The selected diffusers highlight in red (shown here as circled). 79 In the Element Properties dialog.77 Click Modify on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. You will add this later. enter 9' 6" for Offset. click (Element Properties). 80 While pressing CTRL. and click again to deselect the VAV. Do not select the air terminal in the upper-right corner. 128 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . 78 Select the VAV. 81 On the Options Bar. click (Create Air Supply System). and on the Options Bar. under Constraints. select the 4 air terminals above and to the right of the VAV. The new supply air system displays in red.

■ 86 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. and select solution 1. Then. place the cursor over one of the air terminals in the system. and the red system display cleared. 83 Select the VAV to add it to the system. 82 On the Options Bar.The new system named Mechanical Supply Air 3 is now listed in the System Browser under Supply Air in the Mechanical folder. you create the ductwork to physically the system components. Next. Click . Modify the layout path and create the ductwork 84 With the system selected. 85 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. click (Select Equipment for System). click Modify. Remember that this display indicates that the new system is selected. Notice that the selected diffusers are included in the system. You have logically connected the air system components. It does not indicate a ductwork layout path. and press TAB once to highlight the system. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. click Layout Path on the Options Bar. click to select the system. The system displays in red and now includes the VAV. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 129 .

The parallel control (horizontal and vertical arrows) move the layout horizontally and vertically. The end control points (dots) moves the layout ends in any direction.87 In the drawing area. select the left section of the branch. 130 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . click Finish Layout. 88 Click the parallel drag control and drag the left section of the branch to the right until it snaps creating a straight path to the VAV. IMPORTANT Layout Path provides 2 drag controls enabling you to modify the layout. 89 Repeat this procedure and move the connection to the upper right branch. After you select the branch. and then snap and move down the right section of the main to create a straight main to the VAV. notice that drag controls display. 90 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar.

You can also verify the added diffuser by referring to the system in the System Browser. Then. Notice that on the Options Bar. click Add to System. and so on) to a system by right-clicking the system component connector and selecting Add to System from the context menu. The new system component is now part of the same system. you can select the duct or component to display system controls on the Options Bar. 96 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the end of the ductwork. Next. VAV. This number verifies the added diffuser. and you will need to add an air terminal to this system and connect it to the existing ductwork. Add a diffuser to a system containing ductwork 91 Select the main duct. and so on) are logically connected by a system and ductwork is created. click Finish. 94 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 131 . Remember that all duct and fittings are created automatically according to the duct conversion settings that you configured earlier. A change has occurred in the air system design. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). 93 Select the upper-right diffuser to add it to the system. you need to manually modify the ductwork to physically connect the diffuser. mechanical equipment. and (Edit) on the Options Bar. TIP You can also add a system component (air terminal. 92 On the Edit Systems tab of the Design Bar. 95 Place the cursor over the new diffuser and press TAB once to highlight the logical connection. The system components are now physically connected. IMPORTANT After system components (air terminals. the Number of Elements increased to 5.The ductwork is created. select a system component that is already part of a system.

and select an air terminal in the system to display the system tools on the Options Bar. 132 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Check duct connectivity 103 Place the cursor over the VAV box and after it highlights. and working from the end of the main. Now that the duct work is in place. 98 With the duct work selected. Click . 100 Click Layout Path on the Options Bar. and select solution 1. 99 Zoom out the view. The new ductwork is created. select the flex duct and the transition on the diffuser.97 While pressing CTRL. click Finish Layout. ■ 102 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. 101 On the Options Bar. and press Tab twice. do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. you need to check that all the parts are connected. right-click and select Delete to remove the unwanted duct work.

and click TAB twice to highlight the duct and diffusers but not the VAV. under Sizing Method. Verify that Only is selected. click Sizing. 105 On the Options Bar. Under Constraints. Click OK. ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 133 . and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. and enter . verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. and click to select them. Size the duct 104 Place the cursor over the main duct.08 in-wg/100ft. TIP Depending on your ductwork layout. 106 In the Duct Sizing dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Friction. you may need to press TAB 2 or 3 times to check connectivity.The system components and ductwork highlight indicating that they are physically connected. The selection displays in red.

modify the duct manually. modify the layout. Reposition and rotate if necessary. if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect. see the note below.Mech floor plan to make it the active view. If you receive errors. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 .8 inch Inlet with a 9' 6" offset. Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing.) 107 In the Project Browser. Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing. see the note below. Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement. Size the duct using the Friction sizing method at 0. If you receive errors. Next. 108 Using the systems creation methods that you learned. complete the level 1 system layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ VAV Unit . IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. you complete the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 1. under Mechanical. You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. ■ ■ ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct.This low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Friction method at . Optional: Complete the level 1 secondary supply air systems (See the next exercise for a completed drawing. or the duct or duct fittings are not connected properly. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. or reinsert duct fittings. Add Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard fittings where needed. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings.08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork. it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space. double-click 1 . Verify that all Other options are cleared. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. Select and modify a Network layout path solution. So. Do not change the duct conversion settings. an offset elevation is incorrectly specified. Other sizing methods and values can also be used as well. select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. 134 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air .08 in-wg/100ft and select Only. You can either relocate the VAV box.

Mech mechanical floor plan view. If multiple air terminals are connected to a system. If you receive errors. If you receive errors.08 in-wg/100ft and select Only. Size the duct using the Friction method at 0.Parallel Fan Powered: Size 3 . set the Primary Range Top Offset to 10' 0" and the Detail Level to Medium. turn off Air Terminal tags. Next. You may experience cases where you need to modify the duct manually such as a drag flex duct segment to connect it. Optional: Create the level 2 secondary supply air systems 109 Use the 2 . Select and modify a Network layout path solution. Add Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard fittings where needed. see the note above. create the level 2 system and duct layout according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ VAV Unit . For VAV airflow.The completed level 1 secondary supply air systems are shown below. Review the no auto-route solution warnings as some may be caused by disconnected diffusers due to proximity issues and others due to the need for endcap fittings. Remember to zoom the view for accurate placement.8 inch Inlet with a 9' 6" offset. 111 Using the systems creation methods that you learned for level 1. see the note above. Select Calculated Size Only for Branch Sizing. Reposition and rotate if necessary. Note that created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. specify the air terminal airflow. Verify that all Other options are cleared. you create the low pressure secondary supply air systems for level 2. Do not change the duct conversion settings. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 135 . Verify that Associate Level (Level 2) is selected for all View Range parameters. specify the total air terminal airflow for VAV airflow. 110 On the Annotations tab of the Visibility Graphics window. Use TAB to check duct connectivity after creating ductwork and after performing sizing.

You also modified a system by adding an air terminal to an existing system. 1 In the Project Browser. Although you already checked duct connectivity. You used the Create Supply Air Systems tool to logically connect the air terminals to the VAV boxes. 112 If you want to save your work. you use 2 different types of views to validate the duct geometry of the secondary supply air systems that you created. click File menu ➤ Save. Open the i Using Views for Duct Validation. In this exercise. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog. After creating each system. You also specified VAV airflow. Again note that the created ductwork may vary slightly from the illustration. you used the Layout Path tool to create and modify duct layouts to physically connect the system components. enter Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems Training for File name. you create 2 different views to validate the ductwork geometry. navigate to the folder of your choice. sized the ductwork. In the next exercise. 136 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.The completed level 2 secondary supply air systems are shown below. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. it is recommended to validate the duct geometry to confirm that the geometry corresponds to your design intent. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.Mech to make it the active view.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 113 In the Save As dialog. and validated the systems in the System Browser. checked duct connectivity. and double-click 1 . and click Save.

and click OK. 3 Place the cursor in the drawing area. After you add the section. and the second click specifies the section tail. enter ZR. A new section view named Section 1 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. and sketch a zoom region around Offices 101 103. and click Zoom to Fit. and click Properties. 8 In the drawing area. you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view. The section relocates under HVAC. 5 Place the cursor just above the Office 101 air terminal and click to set the start point for the section. click the section. 6 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The first click specifies the section head. move the cursor down and click just below the Office 103 air terminal to set the end point. under Graphics.Create and use a section view to validate duct geometry 2 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area. 9 Using the shape handles (triangles) on the far right. right-click Section 1. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number. This zooms the view to fit the drawing area. select HVAC for Sub Discipline. Adding a section view is a 2-click process. The selected section displays in red. you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Section. drag the clip planes of the view so that you capture only the systems that you created and set the depth just past the VAV boxes as shown. TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 137 . expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section).

and verify that the geometry and location of the duct that you created is as you expect it to be. 12 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. and Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. 11 Double-click the section head to open the Section 1 view. All section heads are linked directly to their corresponding section view. 13 Use the mouse scroll wheel and zoom in on the bottom-right duct servicing offices 102 and 103. select Medium for Detail Level. similar to the level heads in the elevation view. 138 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . The system geometry displays with shading and outlined edges. 10 On the Design Bar. The section head displays in blue.You many need to zoom out to view the shape handles.

This allows you to quickly and easily target your mechanical systems without the architecture obstructing the mechanical design. and click View Properties. A section box displays around the building model. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. 19 Right-click in the drawing area. Modify and use a 3D view to validate duct geometry 16 On the Design Bar.14 Continue to validate the duct geometry of the other secondary supply air systems in the Section view. all of the mechanical elements display as shaded with edges but all architectural elements displays as halftone underlays that highlight when you move the cursor over them. click Modify. select Shading with Edges for Model Graphics Style. and click OK. select Section Box. and double-click {3D} to make it the active view. under Extents. Notice that in the 3D view. 17 In the Project Browser. They offer easy and immediate accessibility to all floors. Using Views to Validate Duct Geometry | 139 . You will create a number of sections to both inspect and modify the duct layouts that you create. 15 Sections are extremely useful in visualizing the detailed connections between ductwork and equipment in a vertical space. 18 On the View Control Bar.

25 Zoom in on each air system to verify that the geometry and location of the systems that you created are as you expect them to be. 26 If you want to save your work. 102.NOTE A section box allows you to limit the view so that you can target only the geometry that you want to view. 21 In the drawing area. click File menu ➤ Save. 23 Click in the drawing area to deactivate the crop boundary. and 103 duct geometry is as you expected. 140 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . You will use both section and 3D views during your systems designing. click the section box and locate the top center drag handle. 22 Zoom in on the view and slowly drag the top center drag handle down to adjust the crop boundary until the plenum space for the level 1 ceiling is exposed. TIP Release the drag handle at certain points to see a preview of the section at the current crop boundary position. It is especially helpful in 3D views in which the three dimensional space makes it difficult to view some geometry. 3D views allow you to validate geometry of multiple duct runs in a three dimensional space by using the zoom and spin controls. 24 Use the ViewCube in the upper right corner of the drawing area to rotate the image so that you can verify that the Office 101.

you manually draw the primary duct and connect to the VAVs. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. 6 Place the cursor in the Mechanical/Electrical room in the approximate location shown.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. and click to specify the start point. Draw the primary duct 1 In the Project Browser. Enter 9' 6" for Offset. and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room.Mech to make it the active view. and click Save. and double-click 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. This exercise allows you to become familiar with manually drawing and modifying ductwork which is very important for resolving duct layout errors caused by insufficient space. 4 In the Type Selector. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 141 . In the next exercise. enter Using Views for Duct Validation Training for File name. click the Training Files icon. Unlike the previous exercise in which you created the systems first and then selected from a series of duct layouts. navigate to the folder of your choice.27 In the Save As dialog. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. 2 Enter ZR. Open the i Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you draw the high pressure primary supply air ductwork and connect the primary to the VAV boxes. click Duct. do the following. 5 On the Options Bar. In this exercise you created a section view and used a 3D view to validate the secondary supply air system duct geometry. You will create the primary systems in a later exercise. you draw the primary supply air system ductwork. select Round Duct : Taps. ■ ■ ■ Verify that 12" is selected for diameter (D:).

142 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . After placing the duct.7 Draw duct as shown in the following image. Connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct 8 Enter ZR. 9 Click on the VAV. and click Draw Duct. you can select individual segments and use the arrow keys to adjust location. right-click on the air connection. and sketch a zoom region around the VAV box outside of Office 101.

use the connector snap to quickly and accurately locate a connector. and press Spacebar to automatically change the duct diameter and offset to match the 8" VAV primary connector diameter. Note that the Spacebar does not automatically specify the duct type. and offset parameter to match that of the selected start point object. If you pause briefly. and click to specify the end point. you pressed Spacebar before you began drawing duct. press the Spacebar after you specify your start point and move the cursor to begin drawing duct. a tooltip appears confirming the connector. 10 Move the cursor to the right to begin drawing duct. 12 Move the cursor down and draw an approximate 8' 0" vertical second duct segment. and click or press Enter to specify the end point. This automatically specifies the duct diameter or width and height. 11 Draw the first duct segment 2' 0" to the right. TIP When drawing duct. When drawing duct. If a warning appears informing you that the line is too short. You can also change the duct diameter from the Options Bar. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 143 . You should always verify the duct type in the Type Selector.NOTE You must place the cursor over the connector to connect to the VAV primary.

13 Move the cursor to the right and over the primary duct. zoom in on the VAV box outside of Office 102. 14 With the Draw tool open. the centerline snap makes the process quick and easy. TIP When connecting duct to the centerline of another duct. 144 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . After you click to specify the end point. the duct run connecting the Office 101 VAV to the primary is complete. and click after the centerline snap displays to specify the end point for the third duct segment.

you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. On the View Control Bar.TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. Check connectivity 19 Place the cursor over the primary duct and press Tab twice to check connectivity up to but not including the VAV boxes. click to specify the start point. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display 15 Place the cursor over the Office 102 VAV box supply air connection. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display. 16 Draw the duct to the right and connect it to the centerline of the primary. 18 Using the draw duct methods that you learned. and after the connector snap displays. 17 Connect the other three VAVs to the primary duct as shown. and connect the 2 VAVs in Open 1 to the primary duct as shown. Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 145 . zoom the view to the right of the primary.

Do not size the primary. NOTE Do not size the primary at this time. specify a 9' 6" offset. you may encounter errors when connecting to the primary duct or a VAV. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. but you have not logically connected the VAVs with a system.) 21 In the Project Browser. This is usually caused by insufficient space preventing duct creation or fitting insertion. and verify that Auto Connect is selected. On the Options Bar. ■ ■ IMPORTANT Remember that when drawing duct. and Angle is cleared. Modify the duct length or relocate the VAV box to make sufficient space. Check connectivity. IMPORTANT Notice that the VAV boxes are still listed in the Unassigned folder under Default Supply Air because you physically connected the VAVs to the primary duct.You can press TAB 3 times to check connectivity including the VAVs and secondary system ductwork. 22 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned. Optional: Complete the level 1 primary duct (See next exercise for a completed drawing. Finally. and double-click 1-Mech to make it the active view. 20 Validate the primary duct geometry using the Section 1 and 3D views. and use the Draw Duct tool to reconnect. remember to always check connectivity and validate the duct geometry. The main has a 12" diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 8". 146 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . you will do that in a later exercise. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. You will size the primary in a later exercise. You will create a system for the primary and add the VAVs to it in a later exercise. complete the level 1 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. and use the Section 1 and 3D views for duct geometry validation.

and use the Section 1 and 3D views for duct geometry validation. Optional: Draw the level 2 primary duct 23 In the Project Browser.Mech to make it the active view. specify a 9' 6" offset. Use approximate duct segment lengths from the layout below. The main has a 12" diameter and the connections to the VAV boxes have a diameter of 8". On the Options Bar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. You will size the primary in a later exercise. complete the level 2 primary duct according to the following specifications and floor plan layout: ■ Draw the primary duct using Round Duct : Taps. ■ ■ Drawing the Primary Supply Air Duct | 147 . Check connectivity. Do not size the primary.The completed level 1 air system layout is shown below. and Angle is cleared. and double-click 2 . and verify that Auto Connect is selected. 24 Using the duct drawing methods that you learned.

you resolve routing conflicts with the primary duct. This determines the airflow direction. click the Training Files icon. The airflow direction inside the primary must be determined to accurately size the primary duct run.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. you created the high pressure primary duct that supplies air to the VAV boxes. but you have yet to size the primary. you learned how to use connectors to create ductwork. Finally. you used the Duct tool to manually draw the high pressure primary supply air duct and physically connect the VAV boxes to the primary duct. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. However. 25 If you want to save your work. Considering that both ends of the primary are open. 148 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . In this exercise. You will connect the primary duct to AC units in a later exercise. In this exercise. Before sizing the primary. enter Drawing Primary Supply Air Duct Training for File name. Open the i Duct Sizing . In the next exercise. you place an endcap where no further connections are planned. navigate to the folder of your choice. you size the primary to meet airflow requirements using the same sizing tool that you previously used to size the low pressure secondary supply air ductwork.The completed level 2 air system layout is shown below. While drawing duct. you checked duct connectivity and validated duct geometry using different views.Velocity. click File menu ➤ Save. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method In a previous exercise. you use the Velocity sizing method rather than the Friction method. and click Save. you must first determine the direction of the airflow in the primary duct. 26 In the Save As dialog.

2 Zoom in on the lower end of the left primary located near the wall between Offices 117 and 116. and double-click 1 . select Round Duct Endcap : Standard. click to place the endcap. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar. 7 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. The upper end of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit. and after the end point snap displays. right-click the Design Bar. Notice that the centerline snap displays to aid in fitting placement. NOTE It is highly recommended to zoom the view to accurately place the endcap. This determines the airflow direction and the duct will size accurately. 6 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool. you must place endcaps to close all open ends except the one that connects to the air source. and click Mechanical.Mech to make it the active view. IMPORTANT When sizing duct that has multiple open ends. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click Duct Fitting. 5 Move the cursor over the end of the left primary duct run.Place an endcap on the level 1 primary to determine airflow 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Type Selector. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 149 .

verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing. and click to select it. under Sizing Method. The selected primary displays in red. and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. Under Constraints. click Sizing. IMPORTANT Remember that the Duct Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 9 On the Options Bar. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected duct. 10 In the Duct Sizing dialog.Size the level 1 primary duct 8 Place the cursor on the left primary duct run and press Tab twice to highlight the entire run including the VAV connections but not the VAV boxes. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Velocity. ■ 150 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and enter 2500 FPM. Click OK. Verify that Only is selected.

or duct or duct fittings are not connected properly. 11 Place the cursor over each left side of the primary duct run. You can either relocate the VAV box. The primary and the connections to the VAVs highlight indicating that they are physically connected. you place an endcap on the right side of the primary in order size the duct. or reinsert duct fittings. So. modify the duct manually. it is because either the duct usually has insufficient space. You should always check duct connectivity after modifying ductwork. if a layout solution or duct sizing causes errors or it seems incorrect. Next. modify the layout. and press TAB twice.The sized left primary is shown below. IMPORTANT Remember that when creating layouts and sizing duct. you are creating and sizing the physical duct and not altering the logical system. select a different layout solution using the Layout Path tool. 12 Zoom in on the lower end of the right primary duct run located outside Office 117. Sizing the Primary Duct:Velocity Method | 151 .

and size this primary using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the left primary. Optional: Size the level 2 primary duct run (See the next exercise for a completed dawing. 17 Size both the left and right sides of the primary duct run using the same sizing method and parameters that you used for the level 1 primary duct run. place a round duct endcap at the lower end of the right primary duct run. place a round duct endcap on the lower end of the left and right side of the primary duct run to determine airflow direction.) 15 In the Project Browser. the upper ends of the primary duct run will connect to a rooftop AC unit. 18 Check connectivity for both sides of the primary duct.13 Using the process that you just learned. 152 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. check the connectivity of the right side of the primary duct run. and double-click 2 .Mech to make it the active view. The sized right primary is shown below. 16 Using the process that you learned for the level 1 primary duct run. 14 Using the method you have learned. As in level 1.

This makes it much easier to determine whether the plan meets your requirements. you sized the primary duct for the building. click File menu ➤ Save. duct color scheme can help you communicate your design immediately and effectively. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK.Mech is created and becomes the active view. and click Rename. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.The completed level 2 primary duct run is shown below. 19 If you want to save your work. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 153 . A new floor plan view called Copy of 1 . and click Save. right-click Copy of 1 . navigate to the folder of your choice.Velocity Training for File name.Mech. 20 In the Save As dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. you assign a color fill to the ductwork. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Duct Sizing . click the Training Files icon. In the next exercise. enter 1 . Then. This procedure is similar to the one that you used for rooms in a previous exercise. This determined the airflow direction inside the primary. 2 In the Project Browser. First. Like room color scheme. you assign a color scheme to the ductwork in your project. you placed an endcap at the end of each side of the primary duct run where no connection was planned. Create a new view 1 In the Project Browser.Mech Duct Classes for Name. In this exercise.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. you used the Duct Sizing tool to size the primary using the Velocity sizing method. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct In this exercise. Open the i Duct Color Scheme.Mech. right-click 1 .

Apply the color scheme 4 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct Color Scheme Legend. NOTE If the Mechanical tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Mechanical. 5 In the Type Selector, verify that Color Scheme Legend : 1 is selected for color scheme legend type. 6 Move the cursor in the drawing area and notice that an outline of the color scheme legend indicates that no color scheme has been assigned to the view displays. 7 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan, and click to place the legend. The color scheme outline follows the cursor movement to help you accurately position the legend. 8 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, verify that Duct Color Fill - Flow is selected for Color Scheme, and click OK.

Next, you change the color scheme. NOTE Elevations have been hidden for legend clarity. Edit the color scheme 9 In the Drawing area, select the duct color scheme legend that you placed, and on the Options Bar, click Edit Color Scheme. 10 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select Velocity for Color, and click OK after a warning indicates that colors are not preserved. Select By range. In the At Least column, click in the second row, and enter 2000 FPM. In the Caption column, delete the existing text, and enter low velocity for the first row, and enter high velocity for the second row. In the Color column, click in the first row and select Green from the Basic colors in the Color box. In the Color column, click in the second row and select Red from the Basic colors in the Color box.

154 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

TIP Color names are displayed under Name in the Color box.

Click OK.

The duct color scheme legend now identifies the duct by velocity. Notice that duct fittings do not have color scheme applied to them.

Assign color scheme to the level 2 duct 11 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, right-click 2 - Mech, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. A new floor plan view called Copy of 2 - Mech is created and becomes the active view. 12 In the Project Browser, right-click Copy of 2 - Mech, and click Rename. 13 In the Rename View dialog, enter 2 - Mech Duct Classes for Name, and click OK. 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct Color Scheme Legend. 15 In the Type Selector, verify that Color Scheme Legend : 1 is selected for color scheme legend type. 16 Position the color scheme legend outline at the top-right corner of the floor plan, and click to place the legend. 17 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog, verify that Duct Color Fill - Flow is selected for Color Scheme, and click OK. The same velocity-based color scheme that you created for level 1 is automatically applied to the level 2 duct. Using the same color scheme allows you to quickly assign consistent color throughout your design. The completed level 2 duct color scheme legend is shown below.

Assigning a Color Scheme to Duct | 155

18 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 19 In the Save As dialog, enter Duct Color Fill Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you added duct color scheme legends to both levels of ductwork in your project. You edited the color scheme by associating colors to velocity parameters and changed the caption text. In the next exercise, you size one of the secondary supply air system duct runs using the Equal Friction sizing method.

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method
In 2 previous exercises, you sized the secondary air system ductwork using the Friction sizing method and then you sized the primary duct run using the Velocity method. In this exercise, you size the duct for one of the secondary air systems that you previously sized. This allows you to more closely meet airflow requirements for that system. First, you split the duct main into multiple pieces, and then you size the duct run using the Equal Friction method. Finally, you tag the main duct of the secondary air system to annotate the duct segment sizes. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Duct Sizing - Equal Friction.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Locate the secondary air system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 1 - Mech to make it the active view. 2 In the System Browser, expand the Mechanical systems folder. TIP If the System Browser is closed, press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close it. If the System Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9. All mechanical systems that have been created for the project are organized by system type in the Mechanical folder. Remember that only systems (logical connections) and the assigned system components are in the System Browser, not ductwork (physical connections).

156 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

3 Right-click Supply Air, and click Expand All. Every supply air system that you created is listed. Notice that each system listing consists of a system name and number, such as Mechanical Supply Air 6, and a hierarchy of system components that you assigned to each system, such as a VAV box and diffusers. 4 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 3, and click Show. The 1 - Mech view automatically zooms on the selected system, and the system including the assigned components and the ductwork displays in red. 5 In the Show Element(s) In View dialog, click Close to deactivate the Show tool. Notice that the main duct connecting the VAV box to the diffusers is one size.

You need to reduce the size of the main to ensure that the air pressure meets airflow requirements. To accomplish this reduction, you split the main into multiple duct segments and then size each segment. Split the main

6 On the Tools toolbar, click

(Split).

7 Move the cursor along the top edge of the main and to the right of the 2 middle diffusers. 8 Watch the listening dimensions, and split the main about 11' 0" from the end of the main.

TIP When splitting duct in 2-line display, move the cursor along the top or bottom edge of the duct to view the split line and the listening dimensions. 9 With the Split tool open, split the main to the right of the second branch as shown.

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method | 157

10 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Split tool. Notice that a Rectangular Duct Union fitting is automatically inserted to connect the duct at each split. You can place the cursor over the union and both a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting. Size the system 11 Move the cursor over the main, and press Tab twice to highlight the ductwork and air terminals located downstream from the VAV box, and click to select them. Note that the VAV box is not selected.

12 On the Options Bar, click Sizing. 13 In the Duct Sizing dialog, under Sizing Method, do the following:
■ ■

Select Equal Friction, and enter 0.08 in-wg/100ft. Under Constraints, verify that Calculated Size Only is selected for Branch Sizing, and that Restrict Height and Restrict Width are cleared. Click OK.

IMPORTANT Equal Friction sizing is an iterative process. The completion time varies according to the speed of your computer. NOTE If a Warning dialog opens alerting you that there is no loss defined, ignore this warning. You can click anywhere in the drawing area to close it.

158 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

The low pressure secondary air system ductwork is sized using the Equal Friction method at .08 inches of water column per 100 feet of ductwork.

Notice that as the airflow decreases, transitions are automatically added to reduce duct size and maintain air pressure. Next, you tag the main to annotate the duct segment sizes. Tag the main 14 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 15 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader. Click Tags.

16 In the Tags dialog, under Category, for Ducts, verify that Duct Size Tag is loaded, and click Cancel. 17 Move the cursor over the 3 segments of the main, and notice that the tag outline dynamically displays the size of each segment. 18 Position the tag outline in the center of each segment, and click to place each tag. TIP To reposition a tag, select the tag and drag it to a new location. You may want to zoom the view for accurate placement.

19 Click Modify on the Mechanical tab to deactivate the Tag tool. The low pressure secondary air system duct run is sized and tagged. 20 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 21 In the Save As dialog, enter Duct Sizing - Equal Friction Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you sized low pressure secondary air system ductwork to more closely meet airflow requirements. First, you used the Split tool to split the main into multiple segments, and then you sized the duct run using the Equal Friction sizing method. Finally, you tagged the main to annotate the duct segment

Sizing the Secondary Air System Duct: Equal Friction Method | 159

sizes. In the next exercise, you use the System Inspector to check flow and pressure in the secondary air system that you just sized.

Inspecting Air Systems
In this exercise, you use the System Inspector to inspect the low pressure secondary air systems. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each system for airflow, pressure, and pressure loss by placing the cursor over it. Using this tool, you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Inspecting Air Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view. 2 Right-click in the view, click Zoom in Region from the context menu. 3 Draw a zoom region around the lower-right secondary air system in Open 2.

You will inspect this system. 4 Select the VAV box that you assigned to the secondary air system. IMPORTANT To select a system, select any duct segment, duct fitting, diffuser, or mechanical equipment that you have assigned to a system. System tools display on the Options Bar.

5 On the Options Bar, select

(Inspect).

The System Inspector tab opens providing system inspection tools on the Design Bar. RELATED If you select a system component that has been assigned to more than one system such as an AC unit or a VAV box and click , the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select a system to inspect. Each selected system highlights in red enabling you to preview it.

160 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

6 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Inspect. NOTE You can also use System Inspector from in the System Browser. Right-click a system from the System Browser, and click Inspect from the context menu. After the System Inspector opens, click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. 7 Place the cursor over the upper-left flex duct branch of the secondary air system to highlight it. An inspection flag dynamically reports the airflow, pressure, and pressure loss in the highlighted duct segment. Arrows display on the duct indicating the airflow direction for both the main and the branches in the air system. A tooltip also displays the system information.

IMPORTANT As you inspect a system, remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction, also known as the critical path. Notice that the secondary air system and the assigned system components highlight and can be selected, but you cannot select other secondary air systems or the primary duct run. These are not logically connected to this system. Next, you inspect 2 areas of the air system to compare information. Compare system information 8 With the cursor over the upper-left duct segment, click to temporarily place the inspection flag on the segment. 9 Place the cursor over the middle duct segment to compare the airflow and pressure information with that of the upper-left duct segment.

Inspecting Air Systems | 161

10 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. 11 Move the cursor over the upper-right air terminal to compare its information with that of the middle duct segment. You can continue to use this method to compare inspection information for system components or duct across the selected system. 12 Click a blank space in the view to close the current inspection flag. 13 Continue to inspect the remaining secondary air systems in the building. TIP You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. 14 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. 15 Use the System Inspector to inspect other secondary air systems in the project. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork, the selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). For example, you cannot inspect the primary high pressure duct run because you have not created a system for it. The primary is physically but not logically connected. In a later exercise, you will create a system for the primary and then you can inspect the primary duct run. 16 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 17 In the Save As dialog, enter Inspecting Air Systems Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you used the System Inspector to inspect the airflow direction, airflow, and pressure information for various systems in the project. You learned that airflow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component, and that all system information is color-coded for either the duct main or the branch. You also compared system information across a system. In the next exercise, you place 2 AC units.

Placing Air Conditioning Units
In this exercise, you place 2 air conditioning roof top units (RTU) on the building. You also use create and use new views to precisely locate the AC units.

162 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Placing AC Units.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Create a new roof plan view 1 Click the View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. 2 Select Roof and click OK. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Roof. 4 Right-click Roof, and click Rename. 5 Enter Roof Mech for Name, and click OK. 6 Click Yes to rename corresponding views. Ignore the warning about the name changing. 7 Right-click in the drawing area of the new view, and click View Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Mechanical for Discipline, and HVAC for Sub-Discipline. 9 Under Extents, click Edit for View Range and select Level 2 for View Depth: Level. Click OK twice. 10 Change the Graphics Style to Wireframe. 11 Set the Detail Level to Medium. This action specifies halftone for all architectural elements in the Roof Mech view. Notice that the level 2 system components and ductwork display as an underlay. Also notice that the Roof Mech view is now located under the Mechanical HVAC floor plans in the Project Browser.

Add the AC Unit that services level 2 12 In the Roof Mechanical view, enter ZR, and sketch a zoom region around Men’s Room (located below the Mechanical/Electrical room). You need to place the AC unit that services level 2 on the roof above the Men’s Room. 13 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment. 14 In the Type Selector, select Rooftop AC Unit 15 - 25 Ton - Bottom Return Connection : 15 Ton.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 163

15 Move the cursor over the Men’s Room, and press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the unit. The AC unit supply connection is now located at the top. 16 Place the unit in the approximate location shown below.

17 Click to place the AC unit, and then click Modify on the Design Bar.

Next, you create a section view to precisely relocate the AC unit. Create a new section view 18 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Section. 20 Place the cursor below the AC unit and over the Office 203 VAV box, and click to specify the section start point.

21 Move the cursor to the right, and after the cursor is past the AC unit, click to specify the section end point.

164 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

A new section view named Section 2 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. 22 In the Project Browser, expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section), right-click Section 2, and click Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select HVAC for Sub Discipline, and click OK. The section relocates under HVAC ➤ Sections (Building Section). 24 Select the section tail to display the drag handles. 25 Drag the top shape handle to adjust the depth view clip plane just past the AC unit. You may need to scroll the view up to access the top shape handle.

The section should partially capture the VAV on the left. 26 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Relocate the AC unit to the roof surface 27 Double-click the section head to open the Section 2 view. 28 On the View Control Bar, click Medium for Detail Level. This changes the duct display from single line to 2-line. You may need to adjust the top border to see all of the AC unit.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 165

29 Zoom in on the AC unit and watch the level indicators, notice that the unit is located on the roof level and not on the roof surface.

NOTE As with air terminals and VAV boxes, AC units are level-based components. Notice that the roof level is not referencing the roof surface but the underside of the roof. To place the AC unit on the roof surface, you must relocate it.

30 Select the AC unit, and click

(Move) on the Edit toolbar.

31 Move the cursor over the bottom-left corner of the AC unit, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the move start point.

32 Move the cursor up along the left edge of the AC unit, and after the intersection and centerline snaps display at the roof surface, (1' 0" directly above the start point), click to specify the move end point.

166 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

This specifies the AC unit offset level of 1' 0" which moves the AC unit to the roof surface.

TIP You can also specify the offset level in the Element Properties dialog. Place the level 1 AC unit 33 Using the methods that you learned, place an AC unit for the level 1 supply air system according to the following specifications and procedures (see the next exercise for approximate locations):

Work in the Roof Mech view, and place a Rooftop AC Unit 15 - 25 Ton - Bottom Return Connection : 15 Ton above the Mechanical/Electrical room. First rotate the unit so that the return connection is at the top. TIP You can copy the first AC unit you placed. Copying eliminates the elevation adjustment. Note that you must locate this AC unit above the Mechanical/Electrical room to allow the supply and return air duct riser to pass through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space below.

The 2 AC units and the section headers are as shown.

34 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 35 In the Save As dialog, enter Placing AC Units Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you added 2 rooftop AC units to the design. You created 2 section views and used the Move and the Align tools to relocate the AC units to the roof surface. In the next exercise, you connect the AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork.

Placing Air Conditioning Units | 167

Completing the Supply Air Systems
In this exercise, you complete the supply air systems that you began in previous exercises. First, you draw the duct to physically connect AC units to the high pressure primary supply air ductwork. Then, you create the systems to logically connect the VAV boxes to the AC units. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Completing Supply Air Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Modify the 3D view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views, and double-click {3D} to make the view active. 2 Select the section box, and drag the center drag handle up to move the crop boundary past the roof.

The entire building including the AC units display.

If you like, you can drag the bottom set of drag handles up above the level 1 system to hide that system. Remember that, if you do this, you will need to reset this boundary to validate the level 1 supply air system later. 3 Use the ViewCube in the upper right corner of the drawing area to rotate the image so that it displays as shown below.

168 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

Next, you tile the Roof Mech and the 3D views so that you can work on and validate your system design simultaneously. Tile the views 4 With the 3D view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. Note that if this option is unavailable, the active view is the only open window. 5 In the Project Browser, under Mechanical, double-click Roof Mech to make it the active view. 6 Enter WT to tile both windows. TIP When tiling 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left. 7 Zoom the view in both windows as shown.

You are ready to create the duct riser for the level 2 supply air system. Draw the supply duct riser from the AC Unit to the level 2 plenum space 8 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct. 9 In the Type Selector, select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps. 10 In the Roof Mech view, place the cursor over the center of the level 2 AC unit (lower unit) supply duct connection, the connector snap displays.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 169

11 Click to specify the duct riser start point. 12 On the Options Bar, do the following:

Enter 68" for W: (width), and 20" for H: (height). This specifies the proper dimensions for the duct. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. Enter -2 6 for Offset, and press Tab.

■ ■

The -2' 6" offset creates the supply duct riser from the Roof reference level down into the level 2 plenum space and places the riser at the same level as the level 2 supply air system, 9' 6". Notice that the duct riser is offset from the Roof reference level and not from the roof surface which is the location of the AC unit. IMPORTANT When setting offset parameters for system components, Revit MEP offsets the selected component from the reference level and not its location. If the 2 are different, connections are automatically created. Note that Auto Connect must be selected on the Options Bar. 13 Move the cursor up, and after listing dimensions display, enter 3' 6" and press Enter to specify the end point.

The duct riser is drawn down from the AC unit to 9' 6" from level 2, and then the duct continues horizontally for 3' 6".

Notice that a green supply duct riser symbol displays to indicate that a supply duct riser exists. 14 Click Modify on the Design Bar. 15 Validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D view.

170 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

Notice that the mitered elbow fitting is automatically inserted.

16 Close the Roof Mech view. You now switch to the 2 - Mech view to more accurately draw the duct in order to connect the primary supply duct to the duct riser. Connect the primary duct to the duct riser 17 In the Project Browser, double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view. 18 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to tile the 2 views, and zoom in on the duct riser in the 2 - Mech view. TIP When zooming or reorienting a view that uses Medium or Fine for Detail Level, you may experience performance issues depending on the size and complexity of the system geometry. On the View Control Bar, change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe to improve performance. This allows you to continue to use the 2-line display. You can also specify the Detail Level to Coarse for viewing a single line display.

Notice that only the duct riser displays. This is because the AC unit is beyond the top view range of the 2 - Mech view. You can change the Top view parameter to see the AC unit, but for this exercise you only need to see the riser. You can also validate the duct riser geometry in the 3D view.

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 171

19 Zoom out the view to show the duct riser and the left primary duct segment.

The horizontal primary duct segment needs to be removed as it was an approximate location and it is no longer needed. 20 In the 2 Mech view, select the horizontal primary segment, and while pressing CTRL, select the adjoining elbow. The selected items display in red. 21 Press DELETE to delete the selected duct segment and elbow.

22 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Duct. 23 In the Type Selector, select Round Duct : Taps. 24 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■

For D: (diameter), select 9". Verify that Auto connect is selected. For Offset, verify that 9' 6" is specified.

25 Place the cursor over the left edge of the duct riser, and after the mid point snap displays, click to specify the start point.

172 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air

Completing the Supply Air Systems | 173 .26 Move the cursor over the primary. The left primary is connected to the AC unit. click to specify the end point. 27 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. 28 Validate the geometry in the 3D view. and after the centerline snap displays.

you connect the right primary duct to the AC unit. You will also use this view to validate endcap placement. Notice that the Draw tool opens (pencil icon) as you drag the duct and closes after you release the mouse button to specify the end point.Next. and place the cursor over the end connector. 29 Spin the 3D view around and zoom as shown to validate the right primary connection. 30 In the 2 . pan the view to the right to show the duct riser and the right primary segment.Mech view. 31 Select the right primary duct. 32 Drag the connector down and to the right. 174 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and past the Mechanical/Electrical room wall.

36 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Draw Duct tool. right-click and select Draw Duct. draw a horizontal run and connect it to the midpoint snap of the riser . 34 Draw a short run of duct with a downward 30 degree angle and click to set the endpoint. 37 Validate the geometry in the 3D view.33 Select the right primary duct. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 175 . 35 With the draw tool still active.

Mech view. You now need to add endcaps to the left primary and to the duct riser to close the ductwork. However.You physically connected the primary duct to the AC unit. Check connectivity 38 In the 2 . place the cursor over the duct riser and press Tab twice. click Duct Fitting. You may want to zoom out to see the entire primary duct run. 41 In the Type Selector. 176 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . zoom in on the duct riser. The entire primary supply air duct run including the VAV box connections highlight indicating that they are connected. you still need to check connectivity to make certain that all duct and duct fittings are connected. select Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard.Mech view. Add endcaps 39 In the 2 . 40 On the Mechanical Tab of the Design Bar.

44 In the Type Selector.. after the endcap snap aligns to the duct edge and the centerline snap displays. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 177 . The endcap snap aligns with the duct edge to indicate proper placement. move the view to the left to show the end of the primary where you deleted the duct segment and elbow. select Round Duct Endcap : Standard. 43 With the Duct Fitting tool open.Notice that the endcap snap follows the cursor. 42 Place your cursor over the top edge. click to add the endcap. TIP It is a best practice to zoom in close for accurate endcap placement.

49 Using the 2 views. verify the duct riser endcap. and then validate its geometry. 46 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Duct Fitting tool.45 Place the cursor over the end of the primary duct segment and after the endcap snap aligns and the centerline snaps displays. click to add the endcap. Additionally endcap edges display enabling you identify the endcap. 48 In the 3D view. Verify endcap placement 47 Place the cursor over the primary duct round endcap to verify endcap placement. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the endcap. 178 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . use the same method to validate the endcap geometry.

Notice that all of the selected elements highlight.Mech view to make it active. All level 2 VAV boxes are selected. 53 On the Options Bar. 52 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. 51 With the 2 views tiled. click Check None. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. you finish the level 2 supply air system by creating a system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the AC unit. and then select Mechanical Equipment. You physically connected the AC unit to the level 2 VAV boxes by drawing ductwork. Create the high pressure supply air system. click in the 2 . and click OK. 54 In the Filter dialog. You can verify the selected VAV boxes in the 3D view. and enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. This is because they are the only mechanical equipment on level 2. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire level 2 floor plan. Remember that when drawing a pick box or using cross-picking (right to left dragging) all elements visible in the view range of Completing the Supply Air Systems | 179 .50 Press Tab to check connectivity. Next.

56 Click (Select Equipment for System) to assign the AC unit to the system. Remember that systems can be created before or after you draw ductwork. You just created the high pressure primary supply air system to logically connect the level 2 VAV boxes to the rooftop AC unit. 58 Press Esc or click in the drawing area to deactivate the Create Supply Air System tool. 55 On the Options Bar.the current view are selected.Mech view range. These calculations are used during duct sizing and can be viewed using the System Inspector. and select the level 2 AC unit. However. In this case. or even without ductwork. all system components must be logically connected by a system. only the level 2 VAV boxes are within the 2 . ductwork must exist for Revit MEP to perform system calculations such as airflow and pressure. 57 Click the 3D view title bar to make the window active. IMPORTANT Although you can draw duct to physically connect system components. 180 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . click (Create Supply Air System) to create a supply air system and assign the selected VAV boxes to it.

Supply Air. After you assign the level 1 system components to a primary supply air system. right-click Mechanical Supply Air 25. 65 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. This is the system that you just created. 69 Make the 3D view active and continue to inspect the primary supply air system.Mech drawing area to make the view active. all supply air system components will be assigned and the Default Supply Air category will be empty. The new level 2 primary supply air system highlights in red. and notice that the rooftop AC unit is listed. You can then use system tools from the Options Bar. 68 Move the cursor over the primary supply air system duct run to inspect the air flow and pressure within the duct. Remember that you can click to place a temporary inspection flag in the view enabling you to compare inspection information. expand Mechanical. and click Inspect. Ductwork must exist to access the System Inspector. click Inspect. and click Select. 67 Click a blank space in the 2 . Inspect the primary supply air system 64 In the System Browser. 63 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 25. you inspect the system. 62 Expand Mechanical Supply Air 25 to view the VAV boxes. notice that only level 1 VAV boxes are listed in the Default Supply Air category. The System Inspector tool opens. Next. the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. In the Unassigned folder. If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as an AC unit or a VAV box. 66 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. or mechanical equipment that has been assigned to a system.Validate the primary supply air system 59 Press F9 to open the System Browser. 61 Expand Rooftop AC Unit 15 -25 Ton .Bottom Return Connection : 15 Ton to display the Mechanical Supply Air 25 system listing. diffuser. IMPORTANT The system components (air terminals and VAV box) that you assigned to a system are organized in a hierarchy from upstream (parent) to downstream (child). duct fitting. 60 In the System Browser. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 181 . click Inspect. IMPORTANT Another way to select a system is to select any duct segment. This is because you have assigned all level 2 VAV supply air connectors to the secondary and primary supply air systems.

Optional: Complete the level 1 supply air system 72 Using the methods that you learned in this exercise. and a 20" height. 9' 6". and enter 3' 6". ■ ■ This is the opposite of what you did with the level 2 AC unit. Click the supply connector. you complete the level 1 primary supply air system.70 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar. Verify the duct riser geometry in the 3D view. move the cursor down. 182 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and press Enter to specify the duct end point. This offset routes the duct through the level 2 Mechanical/Electrical room and into the level 1 plenum space terminating at the same level as the level 1 supply air system. Specify the offset to -14' 6". This is because the location of the supply and return connections are reversed due to rotating the AC units at placement. complete the level 1 primary supply air system to the following specifications: ■ In the Roof Mechanical view. 71 You have completed the level 2 high pressure primary supply air system. Next. click Finish Inspector to deactivate the tool. draw the supply duct riser using Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps and specify a 68" width.

In the 1 . ■ Close the Roof Mech view and the 2 .Notice that the duct riser passes through level 2 as confirmed by the green supply riser symbol in the 2 -Mech view. and after the edge highlights. The edge snap displays when the connector is over the edge. release the mouse button. and drag the end connector over the left edge of the duct riser to open the Draw tool. Watch for the centerline snap as shown.Mech view (if open). ■ Drag the right primary duct connector to the right edge of the AC duct riser. Instead of drawing duct. select the left primary duct segment. and tile it to the left of the 3D view.Mech view. select the left primary horizontal duct segment and elbow. open the 1 . ■ ■ Connect the primary to the AC.Mech view. Completing the Supply Air Systems | 183 . and drag them down to align with the centerline of the right primary duct.

■ 184 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . and remember to zoom the view. add an endcap on the end of the duct riser. Use Tab to check duct connectivity. Validate the system using the System Browser. ■ In the 1 . and inspect the system with the System Inspector. Use Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard.Mech view. and assign the VAV boxes and the AC unit to it. ■ ■ Create a system for the level 1 primary supply air system. and validate the duct geometry in the 3D view.The level 1 primary duct run is connected to the AC unit.

and quickly target those systems that need attention. click File menu ➤ Save. In this exercise. You then created 2 systems to logically connect the AC units to their VAV boxes. and validated these logical connections. you use the Check Duct Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project. In the next exercise. You have completed the high and low pressure (primary and secondary) supply air systems for the building. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (duct) connections of each system throughout the project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Revit MEP lists the system components Checking Air Systems | 185 . These warnings direct you to check the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. enter Completing Supply Air Systems Training for File name. In this exercise. Using tiled windows. Warnings report that the Default Exhaust Air and Default Return Air systems (for levels 1 and 2) and are not empty. you connected the level 1 and level 2 high pressure primary supply air duct runs to separate rooftop AC units. click the Training Files icon. Because both the logical (system) and physical (ductwork) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. you need to validate them. click Check Duct Systems. and for duct sizing. As you view the warnings.The completed level 1 primary supply air system is as shown. navigate to the folder of your choice. Checking Air Systems Revit MEP uses both the duct geometry and logical system to perform calculations such as airflow and pressure. 74 In the Save As dialog. you drew the AC duct risers and then you physically connected each AC unit to its respective primary duct run. you check the systems in your project. These systems allow Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure on the primary supply air systems. and click Save. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Perform a systems check 1 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. Open the i Checking Air Systems. 73 If you want to save your work.

the duct is now associated with that system. you confirm that the assigned system components are in their proper systems. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Duct Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. Then. the VAV is listed in the assigned system and associated with the Default Return Air system in the Unassigned folder. and for duct sizing. 186 | Chapter 4 Mechanical Systems:Air . all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic duct) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system) in a system. Notice that no warnings refer to the supply air systems indicating that they are valid. Use the System Browser to confirm duct system assignments 2 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. and click Select to view all of the unassigned system components. Remember that after you create ductwork to physically connect a system. NOTE The Check Duct Systems warnings contain a system type and a description. you assigned a VAV to a supply air system but the same VAV has a return air and another supply air connector that you have not assigned to system. Ductwork that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. and you have not assigned the component to the other systems. 5 Right-click Default Return Air. After you assign the system components to a system. As you learned when placing air terminals and VAV boxes. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. So. 3 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. you open the System Browser to view the unassigned system components in the Unassigned folder. you can click in the drawing area to close the message window and continue designing other systems. However. If you place air terminals and VAV boxes without assigning them to a system. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems. In the System Browser. These Check Duct System warnings refer to different systems that you have yet to design.that are associated with each warning. as a tutorial exercise. IMPORTANT The most common Check Duct Systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). For example. 4 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. thus assigning the components to a system. The duct geometry is used for system airflow and pressure calculations. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder.

otherwise click Close. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. You confirmed all of the unassigned default systems in the Unassigned systems folder. 10 If you want to save your work. 11 In the Save As dialog. confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system. and click Expand All to view all systems that you created including their assigned diffusers (air terminals) and mechanical equipment. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. Depending on your air systems design. you used the Check Duct Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the supply air systems that you created. In this exercise. 8 Right-click Supply Air.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. enter Checking Air Systems Training for File name. open the i Completed Mechanical Systems. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems. 9 Right-click a system. and click Select to view it and its assigned system components. 7 Collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Mechanical systems folder. In the next lesson. TIP If you have multiple views open. To view the completed mechanical systems for this tutorial including the supply air system. 6 Using the same methods. navigate to the folder of your choice. you design a hydronic piping system for the building. You have validated both the unassigned and the assigned system components and their systems. You have completed the supply air systems for the building. click File menu ➤ Save. and click Save.The red lines represent the default logical connection. You now confirm the systems that you created. such as Mechanical Supply Air 3. Notice that each system contains a system type and an assigned number. Checking Air Systems | 187 .

188 .

Mech is created and becomes the active view. You will use many of the same methods and practices that you learned while designing the air systems. you create new views in which to design the piping system. Open the i Creating Piping Views. right-click 2 . 189 . you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the hydronic piping systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. and the systems to logically connect the system components.Mechanical Systems: Piping 5 Designing Piping Systems As with designing air systems. The hydronic piping systems consist of wall mounted hydronic fin-tube radiators. you create the systems and pipe runs to logically and physically connect the system components. You continue designing by resolving pipe interference. After completing the air systems lesson. and inspecting the piping system. Then. You begin your piping systems design by placing fin-tube radiators in rooms and adding a boiler. placing a circulator pump. pipes. Creating Piping Views In this exercise. Create the level 2 piping floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. a boiler. In this lesson. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete the air systems part of this tutorial before creating hydronic piping systems. designing piping systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. click the Training Files icon. you create hydronic piping systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Mech. First. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. A new view called Copy of 2 . you begin designing the level 2 hydronic piping systems for the building. circulator pump.

click view properties.2 In the Project Browser. or enter 12 3 1/2 for 12' 3 1/2".Mech. TIP When entering a value. enter 2 . 3 In the Rename View dialog. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. just separate the value with a space. 190 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . Next. and enter -11' 6" for Offset.Piping for Name. under Graphics. and click OK. This allows you locate the boiler and connect to it from one view. 7 In the View Range dialog. Also notice that 2 . Modify the view properties 4 With the 2 . you change the view range. you do not need to type measurement symbols. For Bottom. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected.Piping view displays all architectural elements in halftone and it displays the level 1 air systems. Delete HVAC and enter Piping for Sub-Discipline. and click Rename. 8 Click OK twice. and enter -11 6 for Offset. This specifies the top view range above the radiators on level 2 and a bottom view range below the return connection of the boiler on level 1. Enter -3 1 for Cut plane Offset. verify that Associated Level (Level 2) is selected. and enter 1' 0" for Offset. do the following: ■ ■ (Properties) to modify the Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.Piping view selected in the Project Browser. The 2 . Under View Depth. you can enter 8 7 and press Tab for 8' 7". right-click Copy of 2 .Piping is now located under Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. For example. under Primary Range do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Top. scroll down to the Extents category. and click Edit for View Range. for Level.

15 Under Filter Rules. and the vertical pipe run from the boiler will be routed in the Mechanical /Electrical room. system type. select Mechanical Equipment. IMPORTANT You can create and define filters in the Filters dialog. IMPORTANT You can filter by many types of criteria. such as family name. So. Depending on the filter criteria. Considering this. and verify that equals is selected. or even a description that you define. you must select filter criteria that is common and shared by all selected components that you want to filter. you may want to select each component type separately. you need a define common filter criteria. it will be best to create filters. So the pipe will not interfere with the duct. Next you create a series of filters to hide the level 1 duct and system components. under Filters. you create a filter to hide all 3 types of air terminals. 14 Under Categories. click 13 Enter VAV Boxes for Name. However. This filter will hide all parallel fan powered VAVs in the view after it is added and activated. A quick way to determine common filter criteria is to draw a pick box around all components in a view. and click OK. Then you can view the common filter criteria from the Element Properties dialog. and enter VG. You can then use these filters to hide or show objects in other views. You can use the level 1 ductwork as a reference to avoid interference with the level 2 pipe run. Notice that filters are already created and listed under Filters. the system filters are not used. click the Filters tab. common (shared) instance parameters will display even if other instance parameters are different (the different instance parameters do not display). Select VAV Unit . 12 In the Filters dialog. Next. type name. However. You can use the system filters for tasks such as color-coding your systems. You could use the system filters to filter some duct and duct fittings. Note that if you are filtering multiple categories or multiple types in one category. Verify that none is selected for And. Note that if at least one type parameter is different amongst the selected components. you can add and activate filters. The new VAV Boxes filter is listed in the Filters list. Click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Family Name for Filter by. In this lesson. you can hide the level 1 duct and system components to make it easier to view the pipe run. You can create filters that are either general or specific in scope depending on the filter criteria. (New). To do this. 11 Click Edit/New. then no type parameter will display in the Type Properties dialog. the pipe run will be located near the outer walls.Piping view. On the Filters tab. Notice that some predefined filters are listed under Name. they will not filter all system elements needed.Parallel Fan Powered for the family name. however. These system filters show or hide certain system elements that share the same system type. 10 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. click in the drawing area to make the view active.You use this view to create the pipe run that services level 2. Create and define filters 9 In the 2 . Creating Piping Views | 191 . and click on the Options Bar to view certain components.

. 30 Click OK twice. and select Air Terminal. 20 Enter Air Terminal for the description. select Description for Filter by. return. and enter VG. NOTE The Description type parameter is applied to all components of that type. click 17 Enter Air Terminals for Name. This is different from the Comment instance parameter which only affects the selected component (or instance). This is because the selected supply. select Supply Diffuser . Next.16 In the Filters dialog. 29 Repeat the method that you learned to add a description to the Return air diffusers. and exhaust air terminals but they all have a Description type parameter. you continue to create and define the filters. 18 Under Categories. and verify that equals is selected. 31 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Air Terminal tool. under Identity Data. You do not have common filter criteria for the supply. you can view the Description type parameter and identify it as common to all air terminal types. select Workplane-based Supply Diffuser. 25 In the Type Properties dialog. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. 26 Click Apply. click Air Terminal. Next. By selecting each air terminal type separately. and click OK twice. you can select it. 32 Click in the 2 . Next. 28 Under Identity Data. 21 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar. click in the Value column for Description. Remember to click Apply. It also creates common criteria that associates all of these exhaust air terminal types to the Air Terminal filter. and click Apply.Piping view to make it active. Remember. This is the same rule for using formulae. 192 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . then the type parameters will not display. For Type. select Exhaust Diffuser Hosted: Workplane-based Exhaust Diffuser. you add a description for the supply air diffusers. Because you already entered the description. otherwise the filter will not work. you will not see the Description type parameter. 19 Under Filter Rules. under Filters. return. 23 On the Options Bar. So. click Edit/New. you create a description as the common filter criteria. NOTE When entering filter criteria and assigning it to a family. enter Air Terminal for Description. 22 In the Type Selector. click (Properties). and click OK. do the following: ■ ■ For Family. click Air Terminals. you need to assign the new description to all 3 air terminal types that you use in the project. This action adds a description for all Exhaust Diffuser air terminals. if differences exist in the selected elements. NOTE If you drew a pick box and filtered to select all air terminals.Hosted. and exhaust air terminals have at least one different type parameter. you must spell both verbatim. 24 In the Element Properties dialog.

Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. Category: Duct Fittings. you need to define the filter again.33 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. Category: Ducts. create the following new filters according to the specifications. All duct fittings in your project have a System Type instance parameter defined as Supply Air in the element properties. Next. Category: Flex Ducts. Filter by: Family Name. verify that equals is selected. click the Filters tab. 39 Under Visibility. Flex Ducts . Notice that the Filters tab in the Visibility Graphics dialog does not list the new filters even though you created them. 40 Click OK twice. Filter by: Family Name. Filter by: Family Name. you specify a family and a type name. Next. clear all check boxes except for Mechanical .Round. verify that equals is selected. If you did not click Apply. Next. 38 In the Add Filters dialog.Duct Fittings. verify that equals is selected. you activate the filters. Round Ducts. and select Mitered Elbows / Taps for the type name.Supply and Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. You will use the duct riser as a reference to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler. The new filters are listed on the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. and remember to click Apply in the Filters dialog after you define each filter to create it: ■ Supply Air . Category: Ducts. Creating Piping Views | 193 . you filter duct fittings by system type. Category: Ducts. So. verify that equals is selected. Filter by: Family Name. you add and activate the filters. And: Type Name. and select Radius Elbows / Taps for the type name. and select Round Duct for the family name. click Edit/New. 34 On the Filters tab. and select Rectangular Duct for the family name. You want to view only the rectangular duct with mitered elbows because this the duct riser which is in the Mechanical /Electrical rooms and you want to avoid it when routing the pipe from the boiler. verify that equals is selected. You defined and created all of the filters that you will need to create the hydronic piping system. click Add. You used this duct to create the duct riser. verify that equals is selected. you need a common filter criteria. and select Flex Duct Round for the family name. and click OK. This is because you have not added them. So. Add and activate filters 37 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. select all of the filters that you created. To filter multiple duct fitting types. and enter Supply Air for system type name. you have 2 types of rectangular duct. And: Type Name. verify that equals is selected. 36 Click OK. Filter by: System Type. 35 Using the methods that you just learned. Notice that you have visibility controls similar to visibility categories on other Visibility Graphics dialog tabs. Rectangular Ducts Radius Elbows/Taps. ■ ■ ■ ■ Remember that you must click Apply after defining each filter and before defining the next one in order to create the filter.

do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Mechanical is specified for Discipline. Unlike the 2 . and click View Properties. 48 Click OK twice.Mech.Piping for Name. Next. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans. verify that Associated Level (Level 1) is selected and that 10' 0" is specified for Top Offset.Piping view displays the new view settings. you change the view range. scroll down to the Extents category. and click Rename. Create the level 1 piping view 41 In the Project Browser. this view only displays ducts and pipes on its level. and click OK. and click Edit for View Range. You now define the view properties. 44 Right-click in the drawing area. A new view called Copy of 1 . 46 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. The 1 .Piping view. you create the level 1 piping view in order to place the boiler. right-click Copy of 1 . right-click 1 . It also improves viewing performance because geometry that would normally be regenerated is hidden. The 10 foot top offset prevents the level 2 pipes (except 194 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 43 Enter 1 . You can also set the Detail Level to Wireframe to increase viewing performance. under Primary Range.All filtered components hide from view except for the duct riser in the Mechanical/Electrical room. Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. 42 In the Project Browser. TIP Filters allow you hide geometry making visibility clearer.Mech.Mech is created and becomes the active view. 47 In the View Range dialog. Next. 45 In the Element Properties dialog.

You use this view to place the boiler that services level 2. clear Section Box to turn it off. 53 In the Element Properties dialog. If you turn off ducts visibility. and click Rename. right-click 3D. and fin-tub radiators from displaying. Click Edit for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ 3D Views. under Extents. Next. you create the 3D piping view to be able to validate this geometry. Create the 3D Piping view 49 In the Project Browser. select all of the filters that you created. click Add. 51 Enter 3D Piping for Name. 50 In the Project Browser. Creating Piping Views | 195 . you will be unable to view the duct riser. under Graphics. You used this duct to create the duct riser. you will want to validate the geometry. 59 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Copy of 3D Mech. 55 On the Filters tab. and click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Mechanical is selected for Discipline. click the Filters tab. The selected filters are listed on the Filters tab. As you create the pipe runs. and to create the level 1 piping system. 52 Right-click in the drawing area. The new view is created using the view properties from the 3D Mech view. You want to view it to avoid interfering with it when routing the pipe run from the boiler. You need to use the filters that you created earlier so that you can view only the pipes and the level 1 duct riser. 56 In the Add Filters dialog. 58 Click OK. and click OK. Select Piping for Sub-Discipline. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog. and click View Properties. such as halftone architecture. ducts. 57 Under Visibility. clear all check boxes except for Rectangular Ducts Mitered Elbows/Taps. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.for the boiler pipe connection).

In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. you place the radiators and a boiler. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. You also created filters to display certain system components. and click Save. click Mechanical Equipment.Piping to make it the active view. you place the fin-tube radiators on level 2 and the boiler on level 1 that services the level 2 radiators. TIP Although room tags were not copied when you created this view. 1 In the Project Browser. This is fine because you are using the riser as a reference to avoid interference with the boiler piping. 61 If you want to save your work. 5 Move the cursor over a wall and notice that an outline of the radiator and listening dimensions display only if the cursor is over the wall. right-click the Design Bar. and click Piping. and double-click 2 . you can identify a room by placing the cursor over the room component. 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 In the Type Selector. 196 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . click the Training Files icon. Placing Radiators and a Boiler In this exercise. In the next exercise. The duct risers and AC units display in the view. enter Creating Piping Views Training for File name. 62 In the Save As dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog.60 Click OK. click File menu ➤ Save. This is because the fin-tube radiator is a wall-hosted family and can only be placed on a wall. navigate to the folder of your choice. Open the i Placing Radiators and Boiler. select Hydronic Fin-Tube Radiator : 1" NPT. you created and modified 2 floor plans and a 3D view. 6 Zoom in on Office 201 located in the upper-left corner of the floor plan. The AC units display because you did not create a filter to hide them. Notice that the duct fittings are filtered. A tooltip and the Status Bar (located at the lower left under the Design Bar) confirm the room name and number.

Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 197 . 9 Continue placing radiators centered under all windows on level 2 as shown. 8 Click to place the radiator. select it and use the arrow keys to move it into position. To place the radiator precisely under the window. and notice that the connectors display. and center a fin-tube radiator under the upper-right window as shown. except for the windows on the radius wall.7 Place the cursor over the top exterior wall.

Do not delete the section as you will reuse it later in this lesson. 198 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . TIP Remember to zoom the view to accurately place the radiators. under Mechanical Loads. IMPORTANT If you select multiple objects and then view their properties. 10 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool. and you do not want to include it. drag the section tail. Next. Modify radiator flow rate 11 In the drawing area. All level 2 radiators display in red. 13 In the resulting dialog.You may need to move the Section 1 head and tail to place the Office 6 upper-left radiator. The flow rate changes for all radiators on level 2. If parameters are blank. you modify the radiator flow rate. you place the boiler. then it would be better to use other selection methods such as drawing a pick box. right-click a radiator. 12 On the Options Bar. If so. the parameters that display are common to all of the selected objects. NOTE Note that Select All Instances selects all components of the same type in the entire model. then these are different across the selected objects. click (Element Properties). If the same type of component exists on another level. 14 Enter 4 for Flow. The existing radiator flow rate needs to be changed. You selected all instances of the level 2 radiators because Flow is an instance parameter and must be applied to each instance that you want to modify. double-click 1 . Place the boiler 15 In the Project Browser. Your design specification recommends a flow rate of 4 GPM for all fin-tube radiators in the building. and click Select All Instances. for Flow. Next. verify that 20 GPM is specified for all of the selected radiators.Piping to make this the active view. and click OK. The boiler that services the level 2 radiators will be located on level 1.

you verify the boiler flow rate. click Mechanical Equipment. and click to place the boiler approximately as shown. Next. Notice that the connectors display after you place the boiler. Placing Radiators and a Boiler | 199 . watch the listening dimensions. and sketch a zoom region around Mechanical/Electrical room.16 Enter ZR. and select Boiler : Standard from the Type Selector. 19 Press Esc twice to deactivate the Mechanical Equipment tool. 17 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. 18 Move the cursor to the right of the duct riser.

In the next exercise. and the boiler that services those radiators on level 1. TIP You can also press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. Open the i Creating Piping Systems. Unlike logical connections (systems). 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. click System Browser. you placed wall mounted fin-tube radiators on level 2. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. It is not a pipe system but only a physical connection. analyses cannot be performed. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. The boiler maximum flow rate complies with the design specification. you create the systems to logically connect the system components. click File menu ➤ Save. and click Element Properties. 200 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 4 Expand the Unassigned folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. then press F9. click the Training Files icon. Creating the Piping Systems In this exercise. and double-click 2 . During this exercise. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation. you also use the System Browser to confirm your systems. You create piping systems by placing mechanical equipment and other system components. After creating the logical connection. verify that 230 GPM is set for Max Flow.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. you create the supply and return piping systems.20 In the drawing area. You can create pipes to connect system components but without a corresponding system. In this exercise. You also modified the radiator flow rate and verified the boiler flow rate so that they complied with design specifications. you then create pipes to physically connect the system components. 22 Click OK. and then create the logical connection between these system components. navigate to the folder of your choice. enter Placing Radiators and Boiler Training for File name. Explore the System Browser 3 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. 23 If you want to save your work. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click in the drawing area to make it active. If the System Browser does not respond. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. A system is the logical connection between system components such as fin-tube radiators and a boiler. and click Save. 1 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Save As dialog.Piping to make it the active view. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply and the Default Hydronic Return systems to view the level 2 radiators and the boiler that you placed in the building. under Type Parameters. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. right-click the boiler. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure.

As you assign radiators to systems. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. So. right-click. the assigned radiators move from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. Notice that after you click . after you placed the radiators and boiler. click (Create Hydronic Supply System). 6 On the Options Bar. and click Select All Instances. (Select Equipment for System). and so on) to a system either by creating a logical connection (or system) between the system components or by assigning a system component to an existing system. each Default system category would not contain any system components and would be considered empty. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to their proper system. and select the boiler to assign Creating the Piping Systems | 201 . Create the supply hydronic piping system 5 Select a fin-tube radiator. 7 On the Options Bar. The System Browser is a powerful tool that allows you to validate and confirm systems. click it to the supply system. if all system components are assigned. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Supply and Default Hydronic Return system category located in the Unassigned folder. Thus. the hydronic supply system is immediately created and listed in the System Browser along with the fin-tube radiators that were assigned to it. This occurred because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. Notice that all of the mechanical equipment that you added are located under Default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. You assign a system component (mechanical equipment. All level 2 radiators display in red.

This indicates that you have assigned all hydronic supply system components in the model. you create the return piping system. all other components are unavailable. place the cursor over a radiator or the boiler. You can also right-click the Hydronic Supply 1 listing in the System Browser. 202 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . click the Edit Systems button and then choose Boiler: Standard from the System Equipment drop-down list on the Options bar. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. the Default Hydronic Supply system is empty and does not display. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Notice that the Default Hydronic Supply category no longer displays. and click Select to select the system. Notice that you can select only valid system components. The supply system that logically connects the radiators to the boiler displays in red. IMPORTANT The new system named Hydronic Supply 1 is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply in the Piping folder. The organization is from upstream. This display indicates that the new system is selected. and select the system. press Tab. the radiator (the child) with the connecting system between them. the boiler (the parent) to downstream. Thus.TIP If you have trouble selecting the boiler. Next.

10 On the Options Bar. right-click. and click Select All Instances to select all level 2 radiators. Confirm and validate the systems 12 In the System Browser. Remember that the only radiators that exist in the project are on level 2. select one of the radiators that you added to the system to display this tool and the other Options Bar system tools. expand Piping. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. 11 The return system displays in red. You can now view the supply system hierarchy: Hydronic Supply 1 logically connects the boiler (parent) with the radiators (children). and notice that Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return systems categories are listed. and select the boiler to assign TIP If you have trouble selecting the boiler. So. click the Edit Systems button and then choose Boiler: Standard from the System Equipment drop-down list on the Options bar.Create the return hydronic piping system 8 Select a radiator. 14 Expand Hydronic Supply 1 to view the radiators. click it to the return system. Select All Instances is an appropriate selection tool. Creating the Piping Systems | 203 . and click Expand to view the boilers and the Hydronic Supply 1 and Hydronic Return 1 system listings. click (Create Hydronic Return System) to create the hydronic return system and assign the selected fin-tube radiators to it. 9 On the Options Bar. 13 Right-click each category. (Select Equipment for System). and cleared from the Options Bar. Notice that (Create Hydronic Supply System) does not display because the selected components already have a hydronic supply system assigned to them. These listings represent the systems that you just created.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. you must create a system for Revit MEP to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. The pipe runs physically connect the level 2 radiators. click the Training Files icon. Creating Pipe Runs In this exercise. 16 Repeat this method to validate the Hydronic Return System logical connection. you design 2 pipe layouts and then create the supply and return pipe runs based on these layouts. you created the supply and return piping systems to logically connect the radiators and boiler. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a pick box around the entire floor plan. Remember that systems can be created before or after pipe. or even without pipe being drawn. The hydronic supply system highlights in red indicating the logical connection.Piping to make it the active view. 204 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . and click Select. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. in the next exercise. 18 In the Save As dialog. and double-click 2 . click File menu ➤ Save. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and you used the System Browser to confirm and validate the newly created systems. Create the level 2 supply pipe layout 2 Place the cursor outside of the building at the upper left corner. IMPORTANT Although you can draw pipe to create the physical pipe connections. navigate to the folder of your choice. In this exercise.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. and click Save. In a later exercise. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. enter Creating Piping Systems Training for File name. 17 If you want to save your work. You learned how the System Browser organizes system components and systems. Open the i Creating Pipe Runs.15 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1. 1 In the Project Browser. you create the level 2 pipe runs to physically connect the system components. Now that you logically connected the piping system components.

Piping view). click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. The level 2 radiators and the level 1 boiler are selected (and display in red). the boiler. Creating Pipe Runs | 205 . (You can see the level 1 boiler in the 2 . You can click each system in the Select a System dialog to view it. click Check None. you can place the cursor over a radiator. This occurs because when you draw a pick box to select components. and click OK. The Layout Path tool and the Select a System dialog open. Then. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. Notice that the radiators. the return system that logically connects the components display in red. click Layout Path. 5 On the Options Bar. you can click Layout Path on the Options Bar.Notice that all components that are in the 2 . you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. 4 In the Filter dialog. and then select Mechanical Equipment. press Tab to highlight the system and select it.Piping view range highlight. 3 On the Options Bar.

7 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. select Hydronic Supply 1 and click OK. You want the pipes to run along the perimeter of the radiators. ■ 206 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . ■ Verify that 0" is specified for Slope. 6 In the Select a System dialog. NOTE The Perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. Enter 1 0 for Inset. You can select each system in the dialog to view it. You can also view all possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. and select solution 4 of 4. The Layout Path tool activates providing various layout tools. The system displays in red. This option slopes the entire pipe layout. The layout path solution displays with the main in blue and the branch in green. 8 On the Options Bar. It does not reference the architecture. You will need to select a system to create the layout. then the Select a System dialog will open. do the following: ■ Select Perimeter for Solution Type. ■ Click (Next Solution). verify that Solutions is selected.IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors).

you create the supply pipe run 1 foot from the radiator pipe connections (not from the outside wall). IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main. you specify the pipe conversion settings that you use to convert the layout path to a pipe run. You can also configure these settings by clicking Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or Settings ➤ Mechanical Settings). refer to Help. click Settings.The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. 14 Click OK. Creating Pipe Runs | 207 . Using this inset. Later in this exercise. structural beams. Next. and other obstacles. This negative offset elevation places the pipe main at 10' 9" in the level 1 plenum space. After configuring the pipe conversion settings. duct. or architecture. 9 On the Options Bar. NOTE Configuring the pipe conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. Enter -1' 3" for Offset. 10 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. you modify the layout segments that are tangent to the radius wall. 11 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. 12 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. For more information. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected for Pipe Type. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. NOTE Notice that the Perimeter layout solution inset modifies the layout path. Remember that you are working in the level 2 piping view. select Branch. 13 Under System Type: Hydronic Supply. Enter -1 3 for Offset. verify that Main is selected. you now modify the layout path.

and select the lower layout path main that is tangent to the radius wall. zoom the view. 16 In the drawing area. A drag control displays. click Modify. 208 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . The layout path is located under the radiators. 17 Using the drag control. You now modify the layout paths that are tangent to the radius wall.Modify the level 2 supply pipe layout 15 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. drag the main to the right at approximately the same inset as the layout path.

Ignore the no auto-route solution warning.18 Repeat the process to modify the upper layout path tangent to the radius wall. 19 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. TIP Use the Ctrl key to select both the main and the branch line. The supply pipe run (main and branches) is created and all required pipe fittings Creating Pipe Runs | 209 . click Finish Layout. You will address the cause of this warning later in this exercise.

are automatically inserted. select a different layout solution. Pipes are a physical not a logical connection. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Change the geometry display 20 Enter ZR and draw a zoom region around the Office 201. 210 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . or manually modify the pipe. This pipe run physically connects the supply side (supply connectors) of the system components. Either relocate the system components. or offset elevations are incorrect. For example. Notice that the pipes are not listed in the System Browser. This is because the System Browser lists system components and systems. you can delete pipes and pipe fittings and the system remains unaffected. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created. and is not part of the system.

select Fine for Detail Level. click Mechanical Settings on the Piping tab of the Design Bar (or click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings). a gap displays indicating the hidden geometry. You use the 2-line display to design the piping system. In the Mechanical Settings dialog. Also notice that a rise/drop symbol displays indicating the pipe riser. If a pipe is hidden by an object. Creating Pipe Runs | 211 . The pipe geometry displays in 2-line enabling you to better see it. The Hidden Line mechanical setting is not to be confused with the Hidden Lines Model Graphics Style located on the View Control Bar. This is caused by the hidden line setting. 22 Zoom the view and notice that the symbolic fittings and rise/drop symbol have been replaced by fitting geometry and a green pipe riser symbol. To turn off hidden lines. 21 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower left of the drawing area).Notice that the pipes and symbolic fittings display in single line. select Hidden Line and specify the inside and outside gap to 0. IMPORTANT Creating Hydronic Piping Systems uses a hidden (haloed) line display. Some pipes are hidden causing a gap.

If you experience slower viewing performance while using the higher detail settings. you modify the pipe run so that it better fits in with the design. Instead of moving the pipe. you will need 2 pipes connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe and the adjacent pipe fittings. the pipe run needs to be changed to a 1 inch diameter. and click to select them. change the Model Graphics Style to Wireframe and/or turn off component visibility in the Visibility Graphics dialog. A single pipe does not conform to the hydronic piping design. select Coarse for single line display. 24 Place the cursor over the pipe. 25 Press Delete to delete the selection. Modify the pipe run 23 Zoom in on the pipe connecting the boiler to the supply pipe run. Additionally.TIP You can easily change the pipe geometry representation by changing the Detail Level. Medium for 2-line duct display. The selected pipe and pipe fittings display in red. or Fine for 2-line pipe display. 212 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . The deletion also divides the pipe run into left and right sides. Next. On the View Control Bar. The design requires 2 zones. it is easier to delete the pipe and fittings and draw a new one later. So.

27 Place the cursor over the left side of the supply pipe run (left of the split that occurred after deleting the boiler connecting pipe). the pipe run and click to select each side of the pipe run. NOTE It is important to recognize that changing the diameter. and click Modify on the Design Bar. The diameter of the main and branches change to 1 inch. 30 Verify the diameter changes by pressing TAB twice to highlight. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) and sizes the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. you modify the supply pipe run diameter.Remember that although the physical connection from the boiler to the radiators has been deleted. the diameter Creating Pipe Runs | 213 . 28 On the Options Bar. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not sizing. 29 Repeat this method to change the right side of the supply pipe run to the same diameter. Next. select 1" for D: (diameter). width. If the pipes had different diameters. 26 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. The diameter on the Options Bar displays as 1" indicating that all pipe for the selected pipe run have been modified to the specified diameter. and click to select it. and press TAB twice to highlight the pipe run (main and branches but not the radiators). the logical connection (or system) is still intact.

Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected pipes. Next. All radiators and pipe highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 32 Place the cursor over the right side of the supply pipe run and after it highlights. Check connectivity 31 Right-click in the view and click Zoom to Fit from the context menu. you check to make certain that the pipe run is physically connected to the radiators. You can repair the connection by dragging the pipe segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of pipe so that it highlights and then press Tab. or you may need to convert a fitting and draw pipe. If the entire network does not highlight. Typically the disconnect results from not having sufficient room to make the connection. fittings.would not display. the branch to which the pipe is connected highlights. The first time you press Tab. 214 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . press Tab 3 times. This disconnect will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected pipe and pipe fittings up to the first piece of connected equipment. and equipment. IMPORTANT When pipes and fittings are connected. then you know that a disconnect exists.

and enter -1' 9" for both the main and branch offsets.After the pipe run and radiators are highlighted. Create the level 2 return pipe run 34 Using the methods that you learned to create the supply pipe run. This allows you to better see disconnects. This places the pipes at a 10' 3" elevation in the level 1 plenum space. For pipe conversion settings. Select Perimeter solution 4. Creating Pipe Runs | 215 . 33 Repeat this method to check the connectivity of the left supply pipe run. Enter 2' 0" for Inset. you can click to select them. Verify that 0" is specified for Slope. create the level 2 return pipe run according to the following specifications: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 2 .Piping view. create a layout for the Hydronic Return 1 system. you create the return pipe run. Next. verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected.

modify the 2 layout path mains that are tangent to the radius wall to approximately the same inset as the other sides of the return layout path. Validate the pipe geometry using the 3D Piping view. Use the same method to correct any disconnects. and click Save. navigate to the folder of your choice. click File menu ➤ Save. Remember. The deleted pipe divides the return pipe run into left and right sides. 216 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ The level 2 return pipe run is as shown. Delete the pipe and the 2 fittings that connect the boiler to the return pipe run. 36 In the Save As dialog.■ In the Layout Path tool. enter Creating Pipe Runs Training for File name. Change the diameter of each return pipe run side to 1". 35 If you want to save your work. do not select the radiators when selecting the return pipe runs. Check connectivity and inspect the corner connections for disconnects.

Piping to make it the active view. 1 In the Project Browser. Resolving Pipe Interference The supply and return pipe runs that you created seem to interfere with the 2 staircases in the building. Resolving Pipe Interference | 217 . you resolve interference issues with the new pipe runs. In the next exercise. corrected disconnects. you used the Layout Path tool to design the supply and return pipe layouts. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click 2 . You then converted these layouts to create the supply and return pipe runs that physically connect the radiators. you create new views to confirm this interference and then modify the pipe run to resolve it. Notice that the supply and return pipe runs seem to interfere with the 2 staircases. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You also modified the pipe runs so that they were a better fit with the systems design. converted fittings. Open the i Resolving Pipe Interference. In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. You checked connectivity.In this exercise. and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Adding a section view is a 2-click process. 218 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . you can flip the view direction or modify the extents of the view. You need to create a section view to confirm pipe interference. and draw a zoom region around the right stairwell. The first click specifies the section head. 4 Place the cursor over the left wall of the room that is below the stairwell and click to specify the section head location. Create a section view to confirm interference 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Section. click Zoom in Region.Resolve pipe interference with the lower staircase 2 Right-click in the drawing area. After you add the section. 5 Move the cursor to the right and click just past the exterior wall of the building to specify the section tail. and the second click specifies the section tail.

click Modify.A new section view named Section 3 is created and located in the Project Browser under ???. NOTE Make certain that the clip planes do not capture the pipe branch above. 6 Use the drag handles to modify the clip planes so that you capture the pipe run and the stairwell. Resolving Pipe Interference | 219 . 7 On the Design Bar.

9 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics. expand Mechanical ➤ ??? ➤ Sections (Building Section). similar to the level heads in the elevation view. 12 Draw a zoom region around the staircase. You can also open the section view from the Project Browser under Sections. All section heads link directly to their corresponding section view. and Wireframe for Model Graphics Style. select Fine for Detail Level.The section head and tail display. and click OK. The geometry displays with shading and outlined edges. 11 On the View Control Bar. 8 In the Project Browser. 10 Double-click the section head to open the Section 3 view. and click Properties. select Piping for Sub Discipline. 220 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . right-click Section 3. The section relocates under Piping.

These connectors connect to the tee fittings. Resolving Pipe Interference | 221 . 14 Zoom in on the stairwell. place the cursor over the top connector. and other aspects of your systems design. 16 Zoom in on the top pipe connector to view the tee fitting. 15 Click the return pipe segment that is interfering with the stairs.The section view confirms that the pipe runs do interfere with the right staircase. They offer immediate accessibility to all floors and areas.Piping to make it the active view. mechanical equipment placement. You will usually create many sections to both inspect and modify pipe runs. you modify the pipe runs around the staircase. 17 Drag the top pipe connector down and notice that the cursor changes to a pencil to indicate that the Draw tool is active. Modify the pipe runs around the staircase 13 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . TIP Sections are very useful in visualizing and validating your designs. The tees connect the radiator return branches to the return pipe run. Next. and after the connectors display.

and after the fitting end point snap displays. 20 Drag the top pipe segment connector down to the area outside the stairwell as shown. This is another way to use the Draw tool to create pipe. you split the supply pipe segment. 222 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 23 Watch the listening dimensions. NOTE When modifying pipe. or mechanical equipment after a snap displays. fittings. You drag the pipe segment instead of splitting it because you will convert the vertical tee fitting to a horizontal tee fitting. 22 Place the cursor over the supply pipe run above the stairwell. click (Split). a small pipe segment will be created that will need to be removed. and click to split the pipe approximately as shown. 19 Zoom out.18 Drag the pipe connector up to the tee fitting. The cursor changes to a knife to indicate that the Split tool is open. always connect to pipe segments. If you split the pipe. Next. You may need to zoom the view to get the correct snap dimensions. Usually a connector snap displays but other snaps may display such as an end point snap. and select the return pipe segment again. release the mouse button to reconnect it. 21 On the Edit toolbar. Remember to always check connectivity after connecting.

Next. You can place your cursor over the fitting and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the pipe fitting.Zoom the split and notice that a line displays across the pipe. Resolving Pipe Interference | 223 . 26 Zoom in the return tee fitting above the stairs. Notice that the fittings that were inserted at the splits have been deleted. 24 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool. and draw the pipe around the stairs. you convert a tee fitting. 25 Select the pipe segment that is over the staircase. This indicates that a pipe fitting was automatically inserted at the split. and press Delete to delete it. Zoom out the view.

27 Select the tee. and press Spacebar to automatically specify the pipe diameter and offset to that of the pipe run. and move the cursor to the left. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. orientation. 30 Notice that the return pipe is hidden under the supply pipe due to the hidden (haloed) line mechanical setting. 224 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . and after the end point connector snap displays. click Pipe to open the Draw tool. 31 In the Type Selector. click to specify the start point for the first pipe segment. and then click Modify. The new tee has a horizontal. and then select the two adjacent pipes to add an elbow. 32 Place the cursor over the end of the return tee fitting that you just converted. 29 Select the elbow and click on the upper plus (+) sign to convert the elbow to a tee. 28 Select Trim. right-click and select Delete. not vertical. On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. 33 Zoom out the view.

click to specify the segment end point. and after the connector snap displays. Resolving Pipe Interference | 225 . and after a snap displays aligning with end of the return pipe run. and click to specify the pipe segment end point and specify the start point for the second pipe segment. Consider that pipe geometry may be larger and additional fittings may be inserted after performing sizing. click to specify the end point and the start point of the third segment.34 Draw the pipe 12’ 0" to the left outside the stairwell. NOTE When drawing pipe. 35 Draw the pipe down. 36 Draw the pipe to the return pipe run on the right. always make certain that you provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry. especially when connecting to mechanical equipment.

39 Right-click the lower connector.The return pipe run is connected as shown. and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. 226 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 38 Select the supply pipe segment above the stairs to display its connectors. 37 Press Esc to deactivate the Draw tool.

The section displays in red. The amount of movement that these keys provide depends upon the zoom factor. However. and automatically matches the pipe diameter and offset of the selected pipe.This activates the Draw tool. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. draw the supply pipe run around the stairs as shown. Optional: Resolve pipe interference with the upper staircase 42 Click the Section 1 tail (located on the upper-left of the building). 43 Drag Section 1 to the left of the stairwell. 41 Using the pipe drawing methods that you learned. Resolving Pipe Interference | 227 . If necessary. and offset automatically match that of the selected connector. the pipe diameter. or width and height. you should always verify the pipe type in the Type Selector. 40 In the Type Selector. and adjust the view clip planes as shown. use the arrow keys to move pipes to the exact location required. NOTE If you right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe on the context menu.

228 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . and double-click the section head to open the section view. 50 Move the cursor to the left of the stairs and over the supply pipe. 44 Press ESC. modify the supply and return pipe segments as shown. and split the supply pipe at 12' 0" from its left connector.Although this section was used for air systems. NOTE If you use a section view to check pipe interference. 52 Using the methods that you learned. 45 On the View Control Bar. select Fine for Detail Level. 46 Zoom in on the staircase and notice that the pipes do interfere with the stairs. click (Split). watch the listening dimensions. 49 On the Edit toolbar. 47 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 . you reuse it to confirm pipe interference with the stairs instead of creating a new section. you may get a false positive result. 51 Use the same procedure to split the return pipe run at 5' 0" from its left connector. Otherwise. you must adjust the section view clip planes to capture only the stairs and not the pipes beyond the stairs.Piping to make it the active view. 48 Zoom in on the stairwell.

draw the supply and return pipe segments as shown. using the methods that you learned. 53 Again. Resolving Pipe Interference | 229 .You can either drag the pipe segments to the right past the stairs or split and delete them. Remember to watch for connector snaps.

the pipe type is also matched. Using Create Similar. the start point. Using these 2 methods.54 The level 2 supply and return pipe runs are as shown. and rerouted pipes to resolve the interference. 1 In the Project Browser. You can right-click a connector and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. You also tile 2 views to simultaneously create the pipe connections and validate the pipe geometry. In the next exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. and click (Create Similar) on the Edit toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Another method to create pipe is to select the pipe to create. Open the i Connecting Boiler. 230 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . you used the Split. In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views. navigate to the folder of your choice. (2) Connect to a snap. and offset are automatically specified. and click Save. You can also drag a pipe connector to modify a segment. Then. Draw. and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. and (4) Check connectivity after making a connection. you connect the boiler to the pipe runs. You can click Pipe from the Design Bar and press Spacebar to match the diameter (or width and height). and Move tools to modify the pipes that interfered with the stairs. always: (1) Provide sufficient space for segment and fitting geometry. IMPORTANT You have learned 3 different methods to create pipe using the Draw tool. Remember that after you create pipe. and offset elevation to that of the selected pipe connector. Connecting the Boiler In this exercise. 56 In the Save As dialog. click the Training Files icon. (3) Verify the pipe type in the Type Selector (not necessary with Create Similar). preferably a connector snap.rvtfile located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. diameter (or width and height). 55 If you want to save your work. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you used section views to confirm pipe interference with the stairs. enter Resolving Pipe Interference Training for File name. you connect the boiler to the level 2 supply and return pipe runs.

4 Enter WT to tile both windows. You are ready to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and the pipe runs as shown. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 7 Click each pipe segment and drag the connectors to adjust the pipe segments to provide ample space to connected the boiler connector pipes as shown. the active view is tiled to the left.Piping view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. and double-click 2 . You will design in the 2 . Note that if this option is unavailable. 3 In the Project Browser. Connect the boiler to the supply pipe run 6 Zoom in on the split supply and return pipe runs located above the boiler.Piping to make it the active view. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. Remember that these pipe runs split as a result of deleting the pipe that connected the boiler to the pipe runs. TIP When tiling 2 views. Connecting the Boiler | 231 . the active view is the only open window.Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active.

This offset places the horizontal pipe segment at 7 feet from level 1. click Pipe. watch the listening dimensions. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that 3" is specified for D: (diameter) Verify that Auto Connect is selected. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. 12 Draw the pipe to the left. 10 In the Type Selector. and click to specify the pipe segment end point at approximately 1' 6" from the boiler connection. 11 Place the cursor over the supply connection on the boiler. and after the connector snap displays. Enter -5 0 for Offset. 14 Move the cursor to the left. 13 On the Options Bar. 232 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . and press Spacebar to match the pipe diameter and the offset elevation to that of the boiler connector. 9 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar. click to specify the first pipe segment start point.8 Zoom in on the boiler.

You can also add a dimension snap increment in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). In a later exercise. Remember to always use a semi-colon (. you may need to press TAB to make the drawing area active. TIP When drawing pipe.) to separate snap increments. enter -1 3 for Offset. Connecting the Boiler | 233 . 10' 9" from level 1. 16 On the Options Bar. 15 Draw the pipe up to 3’ 0". you will place a circulator pump on this pipe segment. TIP If the exact dimension snap increment does not display. you can enter a dimension and press Enter instead of drawing to the preferred dimension. This creates a pipe segment at the same offset as the supply pipe run. after listening dimensions display. TIP After entering a value in Options Bar. and click to specify the end point. zoom the view and try again.A green pipe riser symbol displays to indicate a pipe riser.

and after the centerline and intersection snaps display. and after the connector snap displays. 19 Zoom in on the left supply pipe run segment and the boiler connector pipe. release the mouse button to connect to it. 234 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . The boiler supply connector pipe is created. click to specify the pipe segment end point. 21 Drag the right connector toward the boiler connector pipe. 20 Click the left supply pipe run segment to display the connectors.17 Draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run. 18 Click Modify on the Design Bar.

Connecting the Boiler | 235 . The connector pipe and the left supply pipe run segment highlight indicating that they are physically connected.The boiler is connected to the left supply pipe run. 22 Place the cursor over the boiler connector pipe and press Tab. 23 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view.

Next. 236 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 27 Click on the lower of the two plus (+) signs to convert the elbow to a horizontal tee. 26 Use the selection tool to draw a box around the tee to select it. you connect the boiler to the right supply pipe run. click in the 3D Piping view to make it active. 25 Zoom in on the elbow fitting above the boiler. 24 With the windows tiled.

30 Zoom in on the tee. Notice that the fitting is selected in the floor plan view and remains selected in the 3D view. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Auto Connect is selected. 33 Draw the pipe 2' 0" to the right and click to specify the segment end point. and click Draw Pipe from the context menu. Connecting the Boiler | 237 . and the start point is automatically specified.Piping view to make it active. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. 31 In the Type Selector. 32 On the Options Bar. The pipe diameter and offset are specified to that of the selected connector. Verify that -5' 0" is specified for Offset. 29 Click in the 2 .28 In the 3D Piping view. 34 Draw the pipe up. and after listening dimensions display. select the tee to display the connectors. enter 3 0 and press Enter. right-click the right connector.

38 Using the same method that you used to connect the left supply pipe run. connect the right supply pipe run.This creates a 1 foot pipe segment. you will place a circulator pump on this segment. In a later exercise. 37 Press ESC twice to deactivate the Draw tool. 36 With the Draw tool activated. draw the pipe segment straight up toward the supply pipe run. click to specify the end point. 35 On the Options Bar. enter -1 3 for Offset. 238 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . and after the intersection and centerline snaps display.

The right supply pipe run is connected to the boiler. 40 Validate the pipe geometry. Connecting the Boiler | 239 . 39 Check connectivity.

and enter 0 4 and press Enter. click the specify the end point. enter -1 9 for Offset. you draw a 6 inch pipe segment at this elevation and then create a pipe riser. verify that Pipe Types : Standard is selected. 44 On the Options Bar. 47 Draw the pipe to the left. Optional: Connect the boiler to the return pipe run 41 With the windows tiled. zoom in on the boiler. 46 On the Options Bar. 43 In the Type Selector.Next. and that Auto Connect is selected. This places the return connection 10 inches above level 1. 42 Select the boiler.Piping the active view. This places the next pipe segment at an elevation of 10' 3" from level 1. verify that 3" is specified for D: (diameter). you connect the boiler to the return pipe run. and the 2 . Next. and right-click the return connector. 45 Move the cursor up. and click Draw Pipe. 240 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . and after pipe segment aligns with end of the left return pipe run located above. Notice that the return connection is at an offset elevation of -11' -2" from level 2.

and after the connector snap displays. Connecting the Boiler | 241 . click to connect to the left return pipe run.48 Draw the pipe up toward the return pipe run.

convert the elbow to a tee with a horizontal orientation. 49 Press ESC to deactivate the Draw tool. 52 Select the tee fitting. right-click the right connector. 242 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . 51 Using the fitting conversion methods that you learned. 50 Zoom in on the boiler. and click the elbow fitting on the return pipe above the boiler to display the fitting conversion controls. and click to specify the end point.The boiler is connected to the left side of the return pipe run. and click Draw Pipe. 53 Draw the pipe 1' 0" to the right.

54 Draw the pipe toward the return pipe run. Connecting the Boiler | 243 . and after the intersection and centerline snaps display. click to specify the end point.

Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 57 Place the cursor over the return pipe before the tee fitting. and press TAB 3 times to check connectivity for both sides of the return pipe. Remember that hidden lines display when the pipe display is obstructed. 244 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .55 Using the method that you learned. The return pipes highlight indicating that they are physically connected. 56 Click Modify on the Design Bar. drag the right return pipe segment and connect it to the boiler connector pipe. The boiler is connected to the right side of the return pipe run.

click Window menu ➤ Toolbar ➤ Tools. and then you select the point to align. If the Tools toolbar is not available. click (Align).Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled. click to specify the alignment reference point. IMPORTANT Using the Align tool is a 2-click process. 59 With the 2 . Align the boiler supply and return connector pipes. you align the boiler return connector pipes with the supply connector pipes. Connecting the Boiler | 245 .58 Validate the return pipe geometry in the 3D Piping view. zoom in on the boiler and supply and return connector pipes. 61 Place the cursor over the left supply pipe.Piping view. in the 2 . and after highlights. 60 On the Tools toolbar. Next. select the reference point where you want to align. First.

62 Move the cursor over the left return pipe. 246 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping .NOTE Make certain to click the supply pipe and not the return. and after the centerline highlights. click to specify the point to align.

The left return pipe is aligned with the left supply pipe. Notice that the return pipe parametrically adjusts.

63 Using the alignment method you just learned, align the right return pipe with the right supply pipe.

64 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Align tool.

Connecting the Boiler | 247

The aligned return pipes are as shown. Notice that the return pipe runs also are parametrically adjusted. This situation results because they are connected to the return boiler connector pipes that you aligned.

65 Place the cursor below the tee fitting, and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity.

66 Validate the geometry in the 3D Piping view.

248 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

The boiler is physically connected to the radiators and the hydronic piping system is now a closed loop. 67 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 68 In the Save As dialog, enter Connecting the Boiler Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, connected the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. You used the Split tool to create 2 separate supply and return pipe runs. You then drew pipes that had different offset elevations to connect the boiler to the supply and return pipe runs. You worked in 2 tiled views enabling you to design and validate geometry simultaneously. It also allowed you to better understand the Auto Connect behavior. Finally, you used the Align tool to align the return pipes to the supply pipes. In the next exercise, you size the supply and return piping runs.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods
You created the level 2 supply and return pipe runs to physically connect the boiler to the radiators. Next, you size the pipe runs using both Friction and Velocity sizing methods. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Pipe Sizing - Friction & Velocity.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 2 Place the cursor over the boiler, and after it highlights, press Tab 4 times to highlight both the supply and return pipe runs including the radiators and the boiler, and click to select them.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods | 249

The selected pipe runs and mechanical equipment display in red.

3 On the Options Bar, click Sizing. IMPORTANT Remember that the Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. 4 In the Pipe Sizing dialog, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Sizing Method, select Friction, and enter 2.50 FT/100ft. Select And, and enter 8 FPS for Velocity. Under Constraints, select Match Connector Size for Branch Sizing, and that Restrict Size is cleared. Match Connector Size matches the pipe to the connector size of the mechanical equipment to which the branch is connected. Click OK.

The sized pipe runs are sized. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that the pipe usually has insufficient space to be created. Either relocate the system components, select a different layout solution, or manually modify the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 5 Zoom in and confirm the pipe sizing.

250 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

Notice that the branch sizing used the size information from the connector on the fin-tube radiator and not from the connector on the main pipe. This is because you selected Match Connector Size for branch sizing.

6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view. 7 Validate the sized pipe geometry.

8 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 9 In the Save As dialog, enter Pipe Sizing - Friction & Velocity Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you sized the supply and return pipe runs using both the Friction and Velocity sizing methods. You also specified branch sizing that was different than the main pipe sizing. In the next exercise, you place the circulator pumps for the supply pipe runs.

Sizing the Pipe Runs: Friction & Velocity Methods | 251

Placing Circulator Pumps
In this exercise, you place 2 in-line circulator pumps on the hydronic supply pipe runs that you sized. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Placing Circulator Pumps.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Piping to make it the active view.

Tile the views 2 With the 3D Piping view active, click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. This closes all windows that you previously opened during the current design session. Note that if this option is unavailable, the active view is the only open window. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. TIP When tiling 2 views, the active view is tiled to the left. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the boiler and connecting pipes as shown.

You place the pumps in the 2 - Piping view and validate the geometry and rotate the pumps in the 3D Piping view. Place in-line circulator pumps 6 In the 2 - Piping view, zoom in on the boiler and the 2 supply pipes to the left and right of the boiler. 7 On the Edit toolbar, click (Split).

8 Watch the listening dimensions, and make 2 splits on the left pipe 0' 3" from the upper and the lower elbow fittings as shown.

252 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

Notice that a pipe fitting is automatically inserted at each split. You can place your cursor over one and a tooltip and the Status Bar confirm the fitting.

9 Click Modify on the Design Bar to deactivate the Split tool. 10 Click the pipe segment between the 2 splits. The selected pipe segment displays in red. 11 Press Delete to delete the pipe segment. Notice that the pipe fittings that were automatically inserted are also deleted.

12 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Mechanical Equipment. 13 In the Type Selector, select In-line Circulator : Standard. 14 Place the cursor between the pipe openings and click to place the circulator pump. 15 Select the pump and click Rotate on the toolbar. 16 Flip the pump so that the motor is on the left. 17 Click Align on the toolbar and select the middle of the pipe above and the middle of the circulator connector. NOTE You must align the pump correctly in order to connect it to the pipes above and below.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 253

18 TIP If you need to reposition the circulator pump, drag the pump away from the pipe, and then move it over the pipe opening, and watch for the centerline snaps. You can also use the cursor keys or the Move tool for precise placement. 19 Press ESC twice. 20 In the 3D Piping view, notice that the pump is not located near the selection point.

Actually, the pump is on the selection point but at the default offset elevation. You need to specify the pump offset. 21 In the 2 - Piping view, click the pump. The selected pump displays in red. 22 On the Options Bar, click .

You can also right-click the pump, and select Element Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, enter -5 0 for Offset. This is the offset elevation of the horizontal pipe on which you are placing the pump. TIP To quickly view the pipe offset value, click the pipe segment. The offset appears on the Options Bar and in the drawing area. You can also open the Element Properties dialog to view the offset.

254 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

24 Click OK. The circulator pump is placed at the same offset as the horizontal pipe segment.

If the pump remains selected, click in the drawing area to clear the selection. Next, you connect the pump. TIP Sometimes a selected object remains selected (displays in red) after an action upon it has finished. To clear the selection, you can click in the drawing area, click Modify on the Design Bar, or press ESC. 25 In the 2 - Piping view, click the upper pipe segment to display the connectors. 26 Drag the pipe connector down toward the pump, and after the connector snap displays, release the mouse button to connect the pipe to the pump.

Notice that the necessary pipe fittings are automatically inserted. Also notice that the modified pipe segment remains selected after connecting to the pump. 27 Press ESC to clear the selection.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 255

28 Repeat this method to connect the lower pipe segment to the pump above.

After connecting the pump, you need to check connectivity. 29 Place the cursor over the pump, and press TAB. The pump and the pipe segments highlight indicating that they are physically connected.

30 Using the methods that you just learned, connect the circulator pump the services the right side of the supply pipe, and check connectivity. Make certain that you align the right pump to the left.

Next, you rotate the pumps so that the motor is located as the top.

256 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

31 With the 2 - Piping and the 3D Piping views tiled, click in the 3D Piping view to make it active. 32 Adjust the view so that both circulator pumps are in the view.

33 Click the left pump to display rotation controls.

34 Click the rotation control on the right.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 257

The pump rotates 90 degrees to the right.

35 Using the method that you just learned, rotate the right pump so that motor is at the top. The in-line circulator pumps are rotated.

Assign the pumps to the supply system 36 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click System Browser. You can also press F9. 37 In the System Browser, do the following:
■ ■

Expand the Unassigned folder. Expand the Piping folder, right-click Hydronic Supply and click Expand All to view all of the system components assigned to Hydronic Supply 1 system.

Notice that the 2 circulator pumps are in the Unassigned folder. As you learned in previous exercises, you must assign all system components (mechanical equipment, and so on) that you placed to a system. Immediately after placement, Revit MEP associates the unassigned components with a default system in order to perform calculations. These unassigned components are located

258 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

in the Unassigned folder in the System Browser. After you assign the components to a system, they move to their respective system folder. You need to assign the 2 circulator pumps to the hydronic supply system. 38 In the 3D Piping view, select the left supply pipe riser.

System tools display on the Options Bar. TIP You can select any system component or piping that has been assigned to a system to access system tools on the Options Bar.

39 On the Options Bar, click

(Edit System).

The Edit System tab appears on the Design Bar providing various system editing tools.

NOTE Do not click . You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system, such as VAV boxes, boilers and AC units. If you use this tool, the boiler will be considered unassigned and it will move to the Unassigned folder. 40 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Add To System. System components that were not assigned for this system are grayed out. Notice that the cursor changes to indicate that Add To System is active. 41 Click the left and right circulator pumps to add them to the supply hydronic system.

Placing Circulator Pumps | 259

Notice that the pumps moved from the Unassigned folder in the System Browser to the Hydronic Supply 1 system listing in the Piping folder. This indicates that the pumps have been assigned to the supply hydronic system. They are now logically connected to the boiler and radiators. 42 On the Edit System tab of the Design Bar, click Finish System. 43 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 44 In the Save As dialog, enter Placing Circulator Pumps Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you used tiled floor plan and 3D views to place 2 in-line circulator pumps for the hydronic supply piping system. You used the Split tool to open the pipe segments to accommodate the pumps and then you connected the pumps. You rotated the pumps in 2 different ways by pressing the Spacebar, and by clicking the rotation controls. Finally, you assigned the circulator pumps to the supply hydronic system and confirmed the assignments in the System Browser. In the next exercise, you inspect the hydronic piping systems for flow and pressure.

Inspecting Piping Systems
In this exercise, you use the System Inspector to inspect the level 2 hydronic piping system. The System Inspector is a unique tool enabling you to inspect each piping system for flow, pressure, and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Using the System Inspector, you can immediately target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Inspecting Piping Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder. 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 2 Right-click in the view, click Zoom in Region from the context menu. 3 Draw a zoom on the boiler in the Mechanical/Electrical room. You will inspect the hydronic supply system. 4 Select the boiler. System tools appear on the Options Bar. You select the boiler because you assigned it to the hydronic supply system. NOTE To select a system, select any pipe segment, fitting, mechanical equipment, and so on that you have assigned to a system. System tools display on the Options Bar.

5 On the Options Bar, click

(Inspect).

6 In the Select a System dialog, select Hydronic Supply 1, and click OK. The System Inspector tab opens providing inspection tools on the Design Bar. IMPORTANT If you select a system component that has been assigned to multiple systems such as a boiler, the Select System dialog opens enabling you to select the system to inspect. You can click a system in the dialog and the system highlights in red enabling you to preview it. 7 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Inspect.

260 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

NOTE You can also use System Inspector from within the System Browser. Right-click a system from the System Browser, and click Inspect from the context menu. After the System Inspector activates, click Inspect from the System Inspector tab on the Design Bar. 8 Place the cursor over the boiler to inspect system information pertaining to the boiler. The boiler highlights and an inspection flag dynamically reports the section number, flow, and pressure information including pressure loss. A tooltip also displays this system information. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system.

IMPORTANT As you inspect a system, remember that all information is color coded according to pressure. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction, also known as the critical path. As you inspect, notice that the assigned system components highlight and can be inspected but you cannot inspect system components that have not been assigned to the selected system. Next, you inspect 2 areas of the selected piping system to compare system information. Compare system information 9 Place the cursor over the left pipe segment above the pump, and click to temporarily place the inspection flag on the segment. 10 Move the cursor over the right pipe segment above the pump to compare the flow and pressure information with that of the left pipe segment.

Inspecting Piping Systems | 261

11 Click to place the current inspection flag and close the prior one. 12 Move the cursor over one of the circulation pumps, click and compare its information with that of the right pipe segment. 13 Click in the view to close the current inspection flag. You can also inspect systems in a 3D view. 14 With the System Inspector activated and the Hydronic Supply 1 system selected, double-click the 3D Piping view, and inspect a fin-tube radiator.

Continue to use this method to inspect and compare inspection information for system components and pipe across the selected Hydronic Supply 1 system. Remember that you can switch between the floor plan and 3D views without closing the System Inspector.

262 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

15 On the System Inspector tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Inspector to deactivate the System Inspector. 16 Using the methods that you learned, use the System Inspector and inspect the return piping systems in the project. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe, the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). 17 If you want to save your work, click File menu ➤ Save. 18 In the Save As dialog, enter Inspecting Piping Systems Training for File name, navigate to the folder of your choice, and click Save. In this exercise, you used the System Inspector to inspect the flow direction, flow, and pressure information for the hydronic supply system in the project. You noticed that flow and pressure information is specific to the selected system component, and that all system information is color-coded for either the main or the branch. You also compared system information across a system. In the next exercise, you check the piping systems.

Checking Piping Systems
Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure, and for pipe sizing. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design, you need to validate them. In this exercise, you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to immediately check these connections for all systems throughout your project, and quickly target those systems that need attention. Dataset
■ ■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. Open the i Checking Piping Systems.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder.

Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Piping ➤ Floor Plans, double-click the 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 2 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Check Pipe Systems. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. A warning appears, but does apply to the piping system. The piping system is logically and physically valid. However, check system warnings may occur. As a tutorial exercise, you check the air systems to view check systems warnings. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Piping. 3 On the Mechanical tab of the Design Bar, click Check Duct Systems. Warnings display. Notice that these warnings indicate that the default systems are “not empty.”

Checking Piping Systems | 263

4 NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system, the pipe is now associated with that system. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations, and for pipe sizing. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is the “default system is not empty” warning. As you learned when placing fin-tube radiators, all system components must be assigned to a system immediately after placement. If you place radiators without assigning them to a system, Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them, thus assigning the components to a system. After you assign the system components to a system, Revit MEP places them in their assigned systems folder and removes them from the Unassigned folder. After you have assigned all system components for the project to their systems, the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display “not empty” warnings. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. This occurs because the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors), and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. For example, you assigned a fin-tube radiator to a supply hydronic system but the same radiator has a return system connector that you have not assigned to a system. In the System Browser, the fin-tube radiator is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Return system in the Unassigned folder. Next, you open the System Browser to view the unassigned air system components and the associated default air systems. Then, you confirm the validity of the assigned piping system components and systems. Next, you confirm the system component assignments. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 5 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser to open the System Browser. TIP You can press F9 (or Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. If the System Browser does not respond, click in the drawing area to make it active, then press F9. Because you assigned all piping components, you will check the unassigned air system components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm default system assignments. 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, double-click 2 - Mech to make it the active view. 7 Expand the Unassigned folder and notice that both Default Return Air and Default Exhaust Air systems are listed. 8 Expand Default Return Air and notice the air terminals and mechanical equipment that were automatically assigned to the Default Return Air system. 9 Right-click Default Return Air, and click Show to view all of the unassigned system components.

264 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping

The red lines represent the default logical connection. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views.

TIP If you have multiple views open, you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views, otherwise, click Close. 10 Using the same methods, confirm the unassigned system components in the Default Exhaust Air system. Now that you confirmed all of the unassigned component for the default air systems, you confirm the piping system assignments. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Floor Plan: 2 - Piping to make it the active view. 12 In the System Browser, collapse the Unassigned folder and expand the Piping folder. 13 Right-click Hydronic Supply, and click Expand All. The supply system that you created, Hydronic Supply 1 is listed along with the boiler, fin-tube radiators and the circulator pumps that you assigned to this system. Notice that the system contains a system type and an assigned number.

Checking Piping Systems | 265

a boiler. To view the completed mechanical systems for the tutorial including the level 2 hydronic piping system. 15 Using the methods that you learned. click File menu ➤ Save. For additional practice. circulator pumps. navigate to the folder of your choice. Use the same piping system components that you used for level 2. 17 In the Save As dialog. enter Checking Piping Systems Training for File name. The piping system that you designed did not return any check system warnings. In this exercise. You have completed the level 2 piping systems for the building. 16 If you want to save your work. open the i Completed Mechanical Systems. you created a supply air system and a hydronic piping system. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 hydronic piping system. specify 9' 9" for the supply and 9' 3" for the return pipe offset elevation. In the lesson. and fin-tube radiators. This completes the Designing Piping Systems lesson. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. it is a valid system without problems. Design the system in the 1 . you checked the logical and physical connections for the system using Check Pipe Systems. You inspected the logical systems using System Inspector and the System Browser. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical duct or pipe 266 | Chapter 5 Mechanical Systems: Piping . you used the Check Pipe Systems tool and the System Browser to validate the level 2 supply and return hydronic piping systems that you created. you created a hydronic piping system consisting of a supply and return pipe runs. You also confirmed that the air terminals and mechanical equipment for the return and exhaust air systems were unassigned as they were located in their respective default systems in the System Browser and “not empty” warnings were generated by Check Duct Systems. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. In this tutorial. the creation and modification methods remained the same. 3D. Finally. confirm the system and the system assignments for the hydronic return system. and click Save. you may need to assign these system components to their proper systems. Depending on your air systems design.Piping view and filter the visibility of objects as needed. For pipe offset. Each was a completely different mechanical system that consisted of different system components however.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. and section views.14 Right-click Hydronic Supply 1. You validated rigid pipe connections and geometry using floor plan.

rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Mechanical folder under Training Files. parametrically modify those designs.connections and creating logical systems. and see the results dynamically in views and design documents. This is the future of systems designing—Revit MEP 2009. Explore different system designs. This is the power BIM (Building Information Modeling). The completed mechanical systems are included in the i Completed Mechanical Systems. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new mechanical systems. Checking Piping Systems | 267 .

268 .

Preparing the Electrical Plan In this exercise you define the basic parameters for your electrical system. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog. if the link is lost. you learn to create electrical systems using a linked architectural model of a building project. You should maintain the relative path to the architectural model. and select the component families that you will use in the plan.Electrical Systems 6 In this tutorial. click Reload From. 269 . However. The first lesson consists of exercises that prepare your project for the types of systems that you will design in the following lesson. Planning Electrical Systems The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. you can choose to save your work. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory. and select i Office Building. You can search the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. However. If the tutorial datasets are not present. and create schedules that you will need to design the electrical systems for your project. go to http://www. navigate to Training Files ➤ Imperial ➤ Architectural. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. The building contains a variety of spaces where you will design lighting and power systems. you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the linked model. NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder. load the families containing the electrical components that will make up your electrical system.autodesk. After finishing each exercise.rvt.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. In this tutorial. In this lesson you specify electrical settings.

For this reason. power distribution systems. Lighting Plans where you will design lighting circuits. 3 Click Wiring Types. It is important that the connectors associated with components that you place in a view are within the View Range or level offset. and in the right pane. Lighting. wiring. Connectors allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the systems that you create. power. and ceiling plans for each have been prepared by duplicating architectural views. has been set to 10' 6" for the building used with these exercises. in the left pane. expand Wiring. the Limit Offset. Electrical Ceiling Plans where you will place lighting fixtures. you can customize components and expand the library of electrical families. Specify Electrical Settings 1 Electrical settings let you specify the voltages. in the Element Properties dialog for Spaces. You load the families that comprise the specific components that will be used in your electrical system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as you place components and create circuits in your electrical plan. 4 Specify the following parameters for this wire type as follows: Parameter Name Material Temperature Rating Insulation Max Size Value CU-THWN Copper 75 THWN 500 270 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . the connectors for the ceiling-hosted lighting fixtures that you will place in spaces are above the ceiling level. click Add (below the table). and make it possible for Revit MEP to perform calculations to assist you with your design. and demand factors that you will use in your project. Revit MEP checks to assure that those components are compatible with voltages and distribution systems that you specify here. and demand factors that are applied in the design. Click Settings menu ➤ Electrical Settings. Later. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP. then applying the appropriate template to each plan: ■ ■ ■ Power plans where you will place electrical devices and equipment and design power circuits. wiring. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Revit MEP provides families of common electrical components that you place in your power and lighting plans.rvt. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Electrical Views. click the Training Files icon. distribution systems. All of Revit MEP’s electrical (and mechanical) components are designed with connectors.The electrical settings determine the voltages. For example. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog. This allows the illuminance of the lighting fixtures to be considered when calculating required lighting levels.

Regardless of the Name value for a voltage definition.00V 260.00 V 460.0 selected Hot Conductor Steel 5 In the tree view.00 V Minimum 110. 6 The Voltage Definitions table is where you specify a range of voltages that will be used with your Voltage Definitions. By specifying a range. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value.00 V 200.00 V 480. the numeric value in the Value column is the actual voltage used for calculations involving this definition.00 V Preparing the Electrical Plan | 271 .00 V 208. Verify that voltage definitions have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120 208 240 277 480 Value 120.00V 277.00 V Maximum 130.Parameter Neutral Multiplier Neutral Required Neutral Size Conduit Type Value 1.00 V 220.00 V 220. For example. click Voltage Definitions.00 V 250.00 V 490. many components intended for use in a 120V circuit are rated anywhere from 110V to 130V.00 V 240.00V 280.

you could specify a distribution system with a L-L Voltage value of 120 and an L-G Voltage value of 480. 8 In the right pane.Voltage definitions can be deleted only if they are not currently in use with any distribution system. 7 In left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. NOTE Revit MEP does not prevent specifying unfeasible voltage values. 272 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . For example. verify that distribution systems have been specified with the following parameters: Name 120/208 Wye 120/240 Single 480/277 Wye Phase Three Single Three Configuration Wye None Wye Wires 4 3 4 L-L 208 240 480 L-G 120 120 277 Distribution systems can be deleted only if they are not currently assigned to any devices. click Distribution Systems. even though this is physically impossible.

000VA.000VA 10. or Other systems in your project based on their load.000VA. you can specify the following parameters for a building lighting system: More Than Less Than 3.000VA Demand Factor 100% 50% 30% The settings in this example apply a 100% demand factor to loads less than 3000VA. Power. Demand factors let you adjust the rating of the main service for a building based on the expectation that. For this exercise. 10 Click OK. More Than and Less Than values define the range for the associated Demand Factor: ■ ■ ■ More Than specifies the lower limit of a range of loads. Demand Factor (%) specifies the anticipated a percentage of full rated load that will exist at any given time for the specified range. Preparing the Electrical Plan | 273 . this type of system (High. For example. Red.000VA 10. You can specify one or more Demand Factors. only a portion of the electrical equipment will be drawing at its full rated load. The particular system for which Demand Factors are applied is selected from the Load Classification drop-down list. You can Split the default range to create several load ranges for a particular system and apply a different demand factor to each range. Less Than specifies the upper limit of a range of loads. 9 Click Demand Factors.NOTE Although it is possible to specify a distribution system with a Configuration value of Delta and a Wire value of 4. and a 30% demand factor for loads greater than 10. at any given time.000VA 3. a 50% demand factor to loads between 3000VA and 10. or Wild leg) is currently not supported in Revit MEP because there is no way to specify the high leg voltage. leave the default settings as shown here. applying different Demand Factors to Lighting. HVAC.

480-208Y120 . 13 Select Lighting Switches.rfa. they were added to the Families in the Project Browser.480V MCB . Later. expand Electrical Components ➤ Lighting Devices. conference rooms. reopen Electrical Components ➤ Electrical Equipment ➤ Panelboard folder. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. has also been added under Lighting Device. restrooms. 19 Open the Electrical Components ➤ Lighting Fixtures folder and load the Troffer Corner Insert. and load the following families: ■ ■ Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. and load Duplex Receptacle. 17 Using the same method. As an alternative. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). reopen Electrical Components ➤ Electrical Equipment ➤ Transformer folder. 16 In the Project Browser.rfa. distribution systems. in the Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels exercise. 20 You can save the open file if you wish. and established the parameters for your wiring.208V MLO . An Electrical Fixtures ➤ Duplex Receptacle folder containing receptacles has been added to the families currently available for your design. expand Families.rfa family. and click Open. Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. As you loaded each of the component families.rfa Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 15 Click Open. Defining Required Lighting Levels on page 274. In this exercise. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. and load Dry Type Transformer . Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles.rfa 18 Using the same method. 12 In the Open dialog. reopen Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.rfa. containing several switch types. and demand factors. 14 Using the same method. 274 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . A Lighting Devices ➤ Lighting Switches folder. Particular lighting levels are generally specified for different types of spaces (offices. you prepared views specifically for your power and lighting plans.Surface.Load component families 11 NOTE The components used throughout this tutorial have been copied from the Imperial Library to the i families sub-folder. selected components for your electrical systems. and so on). voltages. Defining Required Lighting Levels In this exercise you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. its value becomes to the Required Lighting Level.Surface.NEMA Type 2. In this case the key style is the type of space and. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. you can load from the components from that location. 22 Proceed to the next exercise.

For Discipline.Lighting to make it the active view. enter Required Lighting Level for Name. click to select the space. as described below. double-click 1 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. To verify this.rvt. and when the cross-hairs display. Verify the new parameter 5 In the Project Browser.Open the provided dataset. 6 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. click Add. select Spaces. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. Select Instance. The new parameter you have just created applies to all spaces in the project. The new Required Lighting Level parameter is added to the list in the Project Parameters dialog and is now an instance parameter for Spaces under Electrical . click the Training Files icon. you can look at the properties for one of the spaces. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Defining Lighting Levels. you must first create a parameter that will hold the value for the lighting requirement. Create a Required Lighting Level parameter 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. select Electrical. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Project parameter is selected for Parameter Type.Lighting in the Space Element Properties dialog. Defining Required Lighting Levels | 275 . 4 Click OK twice. For Type. Before you can specify a lighting requirement for the spaces within your project. Under Parameter Data. For Group. In the left pane of the Open dialog. move the cursor over the office in the upper-left corner. select Illuminance. Under Categories. select Electrical-Lighting.

8 Click Cancel. The key schedule displays in the drawing area. NOTE Schedules can be used as a design interface (Key schedule) as well as a documentation tool (Schedule building components). Click Schedule keys. This name will appear as the title for the resulting schedule. your new Required Lighting Level parameter is now listed under Instance Parameters in the Electrical . For Key Name. one for each type of space in the building. You determine the type of schedule by clicking Schedule building components or Schedule keys in the New Schedule dialog when creating a new Schedule/Quantities view. ■ ■ ■ The Shedule Properties dialog displays. click (Properties). and it is more efficient to create a key schedule and use it to assign Required Lighting Level values based on space type.7 On the Options Bar. and click Add to add this field to the Scheduled fields (in order) list. The new rows are added with 1 through 8 as the default Key Names. The value that you specify for each Key Name in the schedule will be used to determine the required lighting level for each space type. there are many spaces in this project that have similar lighting requirements. 13 Drag column borders horizontally to the desired column width. select Required Lighting Level from the Available fields list. However. Enter lighting level requirements in the key schedule 14 On the Options Bar. 10 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ Select Spaces for Category. Lighting Levels is added as a new instance parameter for the space component. Create a key schedule 9 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. NOTE You can double-click column dividers to auto-fit column width to its content. click New 8 times to add 8 rows in the key schedule. 276 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .Lighting category. enter Lighting Levels. 12 Click OK. Click OK. For Name. 11 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Space Lighting Requirements. You could use your new parameter to enter a Required Lighting Level value in the Element Properties dialog for each space. In the Element Properties dialog.

click . under Instance Parameters edit the Sort/Grouping parameter. and select Open Office. Defining Required Lighting Levels | 277 .Enter a space type in the Key Name column and a corresponding lighting level in the Required Lighting Level column for the different types of spaces in the project. click View Properties and. under Instance Parameters. according to the values in the following table: Space Type Private Office Open Office Main Entrance Lounge Restroom Conference Elec/Mech Stair/Circulation Required Lighting Level (fc) 30 45 45 25 30 35 20 20 When completed. and click Element Properties. 17 Move the cursor over the space until a cross-hair displays.Lighting floor plan to make it the active view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. You can change the sort keys for the schedule. right-click in the Space Lighting Requirements schedule. scroll down to the Identity Data category. In the Project Browser. double-click the 1 . in the Element Properties dialog. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Assign space keys to the spaces in the project 15 In the Project Browser. and for Lighting Levels parameter. the Key Schedule should looks like this: TIP Your entries are automatically sorted alphabetically by Key Name. 16 Zoom in on the large open area (not the main entrance) in the center of the floor plan. then right-click.

select multiple spaces of the same type (for example.Lighting 1 . and notice that the value for Required Lighting Level is now 45 fc.19 Scroll up to the Electrical .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 . 21 Using the same method.Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 . and click Element Properties to open the Element Properties for the selected spaces.Lighting 1 . 20 Click OK. While pressing Ctrl. the value that you entered for this space type in the key schedule.Lighting category. Office).Lighting 1 .Lighting. continue applying Lighting Level keys to the remaining spaces in 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 .Lighting and apply Lighting Level keys to the remaining spaces in the project according to the following table: TIP You can select multiple spaces of the same type and set the Lighting Level parameter from the same Element Properties dialog.Lighting Number 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 Name Office 101 Office 102 Office 103 Open 104 Mens Room 105 Elec/Mech 106 Ladies Room 107 Office 108 Office 109 Office 110 Office 111 Office 112 Office 113 Stairwell 114 Office 115 Office 116 Office 117 Key Name Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Restroom Mech/Elec Restroom Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Private Office Private Office Private Office 278 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 . The value is grayed out and cannot be edited because you associated this parameter with the Key Name specified by the Space Lighting Requirements key schedule. then open 2 . then right-click one of the selections.Lighting 1 .Lighting 1 . Level 1 .

Now the key schedule will have one column for Required Lighting Level and another for Temperature where you can specify values Defining Required Lighting Levels | 279 . 24 Proceed to the next exercise. You can use a key schedule to specify more than one parameter for a component.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Level 1 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. you could create a key schedule named Space Variables. 23 Click File menu ➤ Close.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . For example.Lighting Number 121 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 Name Main Entrance 121 Office 201 Office 202 Office 203 Open 204 Mens Room 205 Elec/Mech 206 Ladies Room 207 Lounge 208 Office 209 Office 210 Office 211 Office 212 Stairwell 213 Conference Room 214 Office 215 Office 216 Key Name Main Entrance Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Restroom Mech/Elec Restroom Lounge Private Office Private Office Private Office Private Office Stair/Circulation Conference Private Office Private Office 22 You can save the open file if you wish.Lighting 2 . if required.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . In this exercise you created a new project parameter and used it in a key schedule to specify a parameter value (Required Lighting Level) for the spaces in your project.Lighting 2 . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 .Lighting 2 . and select both Required Lighting Level and Temperature as parameters. Assigning Space Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels on page 280.

In this exercise you will create a space color fill using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. as described below. click Edit/New. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click Element Properties. select Underline. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog.according to space type.rvt. selecting a space type for your new Space Variables parameter in a space’s Element Properties dialog will specify values for both parameters according to the key schedule. Space color fills can be helpful as a design tool and as a design communications document. 6 For Color. and click OK. for Name. select Required Lighting 10 Click OK. Under Title Text. 14 Click OK twice. For Space Type. For Color Scheme. Open the provided dataset. Consequently. 15 Drag the color scheme legend preview to the lower-left corner of the plan. select Spaces for Category. and click 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. click Color Scheme Legend. click the Training Files icon. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Space Color Fills. select Spaces. 11 Right-click the color scheme legend. 8 On the Drafting tab on the Design Bar. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The color scheme for the Level 1 floor plan should now look something like the image below. select Required Lighting Level. and place it in the drawing. for Title. enter Required Lighting Levels. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists on the space components. 280 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 12 In the Element Properties dialog. specify the following Type Parameters: ■ ■ Under Graphics. 7 Click OK.Lighting floor plan to make it the active view. Assigning Space Color Fills According to Required Lighting Levels Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. enter Required Lighting. double-click the 1 . 9 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ (Duplicate). select Show Title. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. Activate color fill 1 In the Project Browser.

Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels In this exercise you create a space lighting analysis schedule that you will use as a check document rather than as a construction document.Lighting floor plan the active view. 19 Click File menu ➤ Close. Color fill plans can be useful as design documents and as communication documents to show other team members design intent while the project is in the design phases. 17 Using the same method. As you place lighting fixtures in the spaces in your project. Open the provided dataset. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. as described below. you will refer to the schedule to assure that the lighting level falls within the +/. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels on page 281.Lighting.16 Make the 2 . Color fills can be applied for any parameter that already exists for spaces. 18 You can save the open file if you wish. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. activate the color scheme as you did for 1 .5 fc range specified in the schedule. Your schedule will compare the actual lighting levels in each space against the required lighting levels that you specified in the Defining Required Lighting Levels exercise. but only one per view. This is because the color scheme is a type within the project. or for any parameter that you want to create for a space (such as the Required Lighting Level parameter you created in the previous exercise). You can have more than one color scheme in the project. Notice that the color scheme you created is still in effect. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 281 .

For Discipline. Verify that Ascending is selected. select Electrical. enter Average Estimated Illumination . 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Click OK. click the Training Files icon. For Name. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive 6 Click OK. select Illuminance. Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Space Schedule Lighting Requirements. Create space lighting analysis schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Formula. enter Lighting Delta. enter Space Lighting Analysis Verify that Schedule building components is selected. double-click the following fields to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Required Lighting Level Average Estimated Illumination Ceiling Reflectance Wall Reflectance Floor Reflectance Lighting Calculation Workplane Create a new schedule parameter 4 In the middle of the Schedule Properties dialog.Required Lighting Level. scroll down the Available fields list. select Number. select Spaces. click Calculated Value. 7 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. 2 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. The Lighting Delta parameter is added to the Scheduled fields list. 3 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 282 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . For Type.

16 Click OK. 15 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. For Value. under fields. select 2 decimal places. For Rounding. 17 Using the same method. select Not Between. Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels | 283 . select Lighting Delta. under Fields.8 On the Formatting tab. select Ceiling Reflectance. 18 Click OK. 12 In the Color dialog. and click Field Format. 10 In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Field. select Lighting Delta. under Basic colors. For Test. 14 On the Formatting tab. click the red color chip. 19 You can save the open file if you wish. 11 Click the Background Color chip. For Units. 13 Click OK twice. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. enter -5 fc and +5 fc in the text boxes. verify that Fixed is selected. 9 Click Conditional Format. specify rounding to 2 decimal places for the Wall Reflectance and Floor Reflectance fields.

20 Click File menu ➤ Close. and Lighting Calculation Workplane columns. Place the initial lighting fixture 1 In the Project Browser. as described below. This type of schedule can be useful as a method for checking design components in the project. you created a schedule that you will refer to as you add lighting fixtures to the project. Open the provided dataset. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click Space Lighting Analysis to open the schedule created in the previous lesson. and click Hide Column(s) to hide that column. The schedule will be used to check the actual design against the design requirements that were specified in a previous exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Floor Reflectance. and lighting fixtures throughout your building project. 284 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Only the Number. 3 Repeat the previous step to hide the Ceiling Reflectance. 21 Proceed to the next lesson.rvt. Adding Lighting Fixtures In this exercise you add lighting fixtures throughout your project. Wall Reflectance. You can also see that the Lighting Delta has been calculated for each of the occupied spaces. Designing the Electrical System In this lesson you use the views and schedules that you created in Lesson 1 to place electrical devices. As you select and place lighting fixtures. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Adding Lighting Fixtures. Designing the Electrical System on page 284. The schedule that you have just created shows the Average Estimated Illumination level for all of the spaces as 0. 2 Right click in the Required Lighting Level column. and in every case the Lighting Delta field is red. Average Estimated Lighting. click the Training Files icon. NOTE Space components are placed in chases and plenums to permit reliable heating and cooling load analysis. these spaces appear in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Once the equipment is in place.5 fc range that you specified in the Conditional Formatting dialog. there is no required lighting level specified. In this exercise. NOTE Right-click a heading. and Lighting Delta columns should remain visible in the schedule. you will create power and lighting circuits. Name. expand Schedules/Quantities. the key schedule that you created in the previous lesson serves as a tool to verify that the design meets each space’s lighting requirement. and click Unhide All Columns to restore the hidden columns. electrical equipment. However. This is because the value is not within the +/. and these areas will not be lighted. As a result. This is because you have not yet added lighting fixtures to any of the spaces. and make connections to electrical equipment.

6 In the Project Browser. double-click 1 . click Lighting Fixture. click Close Hidden Windows. and arrange the windows as shown. 9 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar.Ceiling Elec view. You need to add lighting fixtures in a ceiling plan because you want to align the lighting fixtures to the ceiling grid. 5 Resize the view containing the schedule to show only the 4 remaining columns. In the next step you will use the Move command to snap the fixture to a ceiling grid intersection. 10 In the Type Selector.Ceiling Elec to make it the active view.4 On the Windows menu. and move the cursor into the ceiling plan view. 11 With the cursor in the space in the upper-left corner of the plan. It is not necessary to align the lighting fixture to the grid in this step. You cannot place this type of lighting fixture in a non-ceiling location. 7 On the Windows menu. under Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Ceiling Plans. NOTE A preview of the lighting fixture is not displayed until you move the cursor over a ceiling. Adding Lighting Fixtures | 285 . zoom in to the upper-left corner of the plan. click to place the lighting fixture in the ceiling as shown. click Tile. select Troffer Corner Insert : 2x4 3 Lamp. 8 In the 1 . and the ceiling grid is not visible in a floor plan view.

15 Move the cursor over an intersection of the ceiling grid lines where you want to place the fixture. click to specify the start point. and on the Toolbar.12 Click Modify. click (Move). 286 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and click when Intersection displays. select it. 14 Move the cursor over the lower-left corner of the lighting fixture. and when Endpoint displays. 13 Zoom in on the lighting fixture.

18 Select the lower-left Endpoint of the lighting fixture as the start point. Copy and place additional lighting fixtures 16 Select the lighting fixture. Adding Lighting Fixtures | 287 . and on the toolbar. click 17 On the Options Bar. select Multiple.In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. as shown. the Lighting Delta for Office 101 is closer to the required +/. This will let you place multiple copies of the lighting fixture after selecting a start point. and then select ceiling grid intersections as the destination move endpoints to place 5 copies of this fixture in the 3 offices in the upper left area of level 1.5 fc. (Copy).

The Average Estimated Illumination for Office 101. 102. select one of the lighting fixtures in each space. 288 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . but is still not within the +/. Change lighting fixture type 20 In 1 .Check the illumination levels against the Space Lighting Analysis schedule 19 Check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. Point by point analysis is not currently supported.Ceiling Elec. and 103 is now nearer the required lighting level target of 30 fc. and in the Type Selector. If you select a component inadvertently. press Shift while clicking the component to remove it as a selection. To adjust the illumination level downward.5 fc range. select Troffer Corner Insert : 2x4 2Lamp. so the Lighting Delta column remains red for these spaces. TIP You can select multiple components by pressing Ctrl while selecting components in a drawing. NOTE Average Estimated Illumination levels are calculated using the lumen method for lighting calculations. you decide to replace one of the 3-lamp fixtures in each space with a 2-lamp fixture.

The lighting fixtures are all placed in the next dataset. When you are finished. continue placing 2-lamp and 3-lamp lighting fixtures in the remaining spaces in the 1 . placing lighting fixtures in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset.Ceiling Elec views.5 fc range. and go on to the next exercise. You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise. The Average Estimated Illumination is now within the +/.Ceiling Elec and 2 . Completed lighting layouts for Level 1 and Level 2 should appear similar to those shown below along with the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. Adding Lighting Fixtures | 289 . check the Average Estimated Illumination and Lighting Delta in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. only the Mechanical/Electrical spaces (without ceilings) will have a red background in the Space Lighting Analysis schedule. Plenum and chase spaces will be blank.21 Again. 22 Using the same method. Use the Space Lighting Analysis schedule to determine when the lighting levels are within the specified range. and verify that the lighting levels are now within the specified range. Level 1 NOTE Lighting fixtures were not added to the Mechanical/Electrical spaces.

and click Unhide All Columns. right-click one of the headings. 290 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .Level 2 23 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule.

Lighting to make it the active view. Placing Lighting Switches In this exercise you add switches for the lighting fixtures in your project. Open the provided dataset. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 4 Click OK twice. click in the Value column for Color Scheme. verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected. click (none). double-click 1 . and click Properties. click the Training Files icon. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 5 Using the same method. turn off the color scheme on level 2. 9 On the Options Bar. 24 You can save the open file if you wish. 8 In the Type Selector. and how to verify the lighting layout using the schedule that you created as a design tool in Creating a Space Schedule to Check Required Lighting Levels on page 281. Place switches in spaces 6 In the Project Browser. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. and click to place the switch. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The procedure for placing switches is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. your Lighting Delta column for all of the spaces should be white. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. as described below.rvt. right-click 1 . 2 In the Element Properties dialog. under Instance Parameters. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Placing Switches. 10 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the building and move the cursor along the right wall of space 101. under Schemes for the Spaces Category.With the exception of the 2 Mechanical/Electrical spaces. you learned how to place lighting fixtures in ceiling plans. 11 Position the switch preview on the interior wall of the space as shown. In this exercise.Lighting. click Device. select Lighting Switches : Single Pole. Placing Lighting Switches | 291 . Placing Lighting Switches on page 291. 7 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. Turn off the color scheme 1 In the Project Browser.

and in the Type Selector. Level 1 13 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. 14 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. click Device.12 Continue placing switches of this type in the remaining spaces in the 1 .Lighting view as shown. select Lighting Switches : Three Way. 292 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and place a 3-way switch on the open office side of the upper restroom wall as shown.

as shown. 17 Place a 4-way switch near the exit door on the right side of the stairwell as shown. Placing Lighting Switches | 293 . 16 In the Type Selector. and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell. select Lighting Switches : Four Way. and place one 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office.15 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan.

Lighting to make it the active view. 22 Place a 3-way switch on the open office wall near the stairwell in the upper-left corner of the plan as shown. and in the Type Selector. place a 4-way switch near each end of the curved wall as shown. 21 On the Design Bar. select Lighting Switches : Three Way. double-click 2 . click Device.18 In the open office area. 294 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 20 In the Project Browser. 19 Click Modify.

Placing Lighting Switches | 295 . and place a 3-way switch on the wall inside the stairwell near the door to the open office. and place another 3-way switch on the wall of the open office outside of the stairwell. and go on to the next exercise. placing lighting switches in the remaining Level 1 and Level 2 spaces or you can close this dataset. and place single pole switches in second-floor offices and restrooms as shown. click Device. in the Type Selector. The lighting switches are all placed in the next dataset.23 Zoom in on the stairwell at the lower-right corner of the plan. select Lighting Switches : Single Pole. On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. 24 You can perform the following steps to complete this exercise. as shown.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 296 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and click View Properties. Placing Power Receptacles In this exercise you will be placing receptacles that will be hosted by architectural components in the project. Open the provided dataset.Level 2 25 You can save the open file if you wish. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. click the Training Files icon. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 26 Click File menu ➤ Close. The process is similar to placing switches as you did in the previous exercise.rvt.Power to make it the active view. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. as described below. Hide lighting components and specify view ranges 2 Right-click in the drawing area. Placing Power Receptacles on page 296. and double-click 1 . Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Placing Receptacles.

Power plan view. select Associated Level (Level 1). edit the Visibility/Graphics Overrides for the view to hide lighting fixtures and lighting devices. 15 In the left side of the plan. 4 In the Visibility Graphics dialog.Power. and click Properties. Place wall-hosted receptacles 11 In the 1 . and for Offset. Placing Power Receptacles | 297 .3 In the Element Properties dialog. for Top. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected. scroll down and. clear Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. 8 Click OK twice. click Edit. 16 Continue placing receptacles throughout the offices on Level 1 and Level 2 approximately as shown. right-click 2 . under Instance Parameters. place receptacles along the walls in the offices as shown. scroll down to View Range. 10 Using the same method. and click Edit. enter 10' 0". and specify the top of the view range as 10' 0". for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. and edit the View Range to select Associated Level (Level 2). click Device. 9 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Type Selector. on the Model Categories tab. 12 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. under Instance Properties. zoom in to the upper-left corner of the view. select Duplex Receptacle : Standard. 14 On the Options Bar. including the wall-based receptacles in the open office areas. under Primary Range. 5 Click OK. 7 In the View Range dialog.

1-Power 298 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

and place a receptacle on the floor as shown. The current level is selected by default. 21 Zoom in on the upper-right corner of the Open Office. (Place on Work Plane). double-click 1 .2-Power Place floor-hosted receptacles 17 In the Project Browser. click for Plane. select Duplex Receptacle : Standard. and verify that Level : Level 1 is selected NOTE You can select a work plane from the Plane drop-down list on the Options Bar.Power. 20 On the Options Bar. Placing Power Receptacles | 299 . click Device. 18 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. 19 In the Type Selector.

as shown. click (Copy). you will flip the work plane of the receptacle to locate the connector above the work plane. select Multiple on the Options Bar and using the previous procedure. Just as it was for ceiling hosted lighting fixtures. place 2 copies of the flipped receptacles along the right side of the Level 1 open office. 23 Select the receptacle and click plane (within the space). as shown. 27 Draw a pick box around the 4 floor-based receptacles. 24 On the Toolbar. (Flip WorkPlane) to locate the connector above the work 25 On the Options Bar. select Multiple. its connector is located below the level of the work plane. 300 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Then you will create copies of the flipped receptacle to place the remaining floor-based receptacles. it is important that the connector be within the space to allow Revit MEP to maintain information about the electrical system and perform calculations for spaces in your design. When placing a receptacle on a work plane. click . In the next steps. This will let you place multiple copies of the receptacle after selecting a start point. and then place 3 copies of the receptacle in the upper right area of the first floor. 26 Select an Endpoint on the receptacle as the start point.22 Click Modify.

as shown. as shown. select Multiple 29 Using the previous procedure. place 2 copies of the flipped receptacles below. and click on the Options Bar. and to the left of the men’s restroom. .28 Draw a pick box around the 2 floor-based receptacles. Placing Power Receptacles | 301 .

click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. then copy and paste them in the 2 .Power.Power floor receptacles.Power view. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close.30 Using the same procedure. open 2 . Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports on page 303.Power view.Power as shown. Select all 1 . place receptacles on the floor of the open office in 2 . 31 You can save the open file if you wish. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. and click Edit ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Current View. TIP You can select all of the floor-hosted receptacles in the 1 . 302 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

5 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. because it is quite common in Revit MEP. A schedule is created similar to the one shown. the amount of electricity consumed by different systems within the building is becoming increasingly important to the design. It is good to be familiar with this concept of placing hosted components. scroll down the Category list. Open the provided dataset. Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports In this exercise you will create a consumption usage report for power and lighting in this project. select and add the following fields to the Scheduled fields (in order) list in the order shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Area Actual Lighting Load Actual Power Load Actual Lighting Load/Area Actual Power Load/Area 6 Click OK. you can refer to this report rather than having to measure spaces and count fixtures. 4 Click OK. When the HVAC designer asks what the wattage/SF amounts are for different spaces. click the Training Files icon. enter Power & Lighting Usage. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the New Schedule dialog.In this exercise you placed wall-hosted receptacles on the walls and floor-hosted receptacles on the floor. and select Spaces. 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities.rvt. under Available Fields. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Verify that Schedule building components is selected. and for Name. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Usage Reports. Creating Power & Lighting Usage Reports | 303 . as described below. With the introduction of local energy codes.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 8 Click File menu ➤ Close. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). you need to create logical connections to define the topology. and work toward the higher voltage. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. Placing Electrical Equipment on page 304. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 304 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical equipment. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). In this exercise you created a schedule that can be used as input for the HVAC engineers or as input for energy analysis and code review.7 You can save the open file if you wish. Placing Electrical Equipment In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. The information in this schedule was produced using the data that you entered into the model.

click Element Properties. under Instance Parameters. select 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 11 In the Type Selector. enter MDP to indicate Main Distribution Panel. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Name the new panel 7 With the panel still selected.Power. select 480/277 Wye for Distribution System Types. 5 On the Design Bar. and for Panel Name. Placing Electrical Equipment | 305 .Surface : 250A. TIP The Distribution System Types parameter is also accessible in the Element Properties dialog. select Electrical Equipment. 6 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Type Selector.Open the provided dataset. and place the transformer in the Mechanical/Electrical space to the right of the panel as shown. Right-click the panel. click . 9 Click OK.Loads. 3 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. under Electrical .Loads category. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Placing Electrical Equipment. select 480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers : 45kVA. This will be where the primary electrical service enters the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. scroll down the Instance Parameters and. and double-click 1 .rvt. click Modify and select the panel you just placed. click Electrical Equipment. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and click to place the panel as shown. click the Training Files icon. for Distribution Sys. scroll down to the Electrical . 2 Zoom in on the Mechanical/Electrical space between the 2 restrooms. Add a transformer 10 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. Add a panel 1 In the Project Browser. as described below. select 480/277 Wye.

select 208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 19 Click Modify. you must also specify a Secondary Distribution System parameter.Loads category. select 120/208 Wye. and for Panel Name. For Panel Name. 14 On the Options Bar. 16 Click OK. and on the Options Bar. 306 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 On the Options Bar. scroll down to the Electrical . 18 In the Type Selector. click . and place the panel to the right of the transformer.12 Click Modify 13 Select the transformer. under Instance Parameters. for Distribution Sys. and on the Options Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. select 120/208 Wye. select 480/277 Wye. Add another panel 17 On the Design Bar.Surface : 100A. under Instance Parameters. enter T1. scroll down to the Electrical . for Distribution Sys. select Electrical Equipment. click . 23 Click OK. and specify the following: ■ ■ For Secondary Distribution System.Loads category. 20 Select the panel you just placed. enter L-1. Since this is a transformer.

Surface : 250A named H-2 480-120-208V Dry Type Transformers: 45kVA named T2 208V MLO Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 26 On the Options Bar. 27 Click (Select Panel). select T2 for Panel to establish the connection between the L-2 panel and T2 transformer. because the circuit on the mains of this panel is connected to a transformer rather than to another panel. In this case you are going to select something other than a panel. select panel L-2. click as shown. A Bounding Box displays as a dashed box surrounding the components that make up the circuit. and click 30 On the Options Bar. including the Secondary Distribution System for T2.Surface : 100A named L-2 NOTE Remember to select the appropriate Distribution System Types parameter values for each equipment component. The Bounding Box expands to enclose the transformer and panel L-2 and you will see temporary circuit indicating that the panel has been connected to the transformer. The temporary circuit displays Placing Electrical Equipment | 307 . 29 Select the transformer T2. and select panel H-2 for Panel.Add panels and a transformer to second floor 24 Using the same method. . . Create logical circuits between equipment 25 In the 2-Power view. 28 On the Options Bar. add the following components in the Mechanical/Electrical space in the 2-Power view: ■ ■ ■ 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . click (Create Power Circuit).

36 Click anywhere in 1-Power view to make it the active view. A circuit is created between H-2 and MDP. The temporary circuit is displayed as shown. . and select the MDP panel. indicating that a connection has been made between H-2 and MDP. and maximize the 1-Power view to make it easier to work with. select the L-1 panel. 308 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 33 Zoom in on each view and scroll as necessary to display the Level 1 and Level 2 Mechanical/Electrical spaces side-by-side. click . and click 39 Click . and on the Options Bar. 34 In the 2-Power view. . and select the T1 transformer as the panel.31 Close all open views except 1-Power and 2-Power 32 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both views in the drawing area. click 35 On the Option Bar. 37 Close the 2-Power view. 38 On the Options Bar. select the H-2 panel.

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. as described below. . You also defined how the pieces of electrical equipment are connected by creating logical connections between the different pieces of equipment. Creating Power Circuitry In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Creating Power Circuitry | 309 . Open the provided dataset. and click 41 On the Options Bar. Creating Power Circuitry on page 309. and select the MDP panel. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and data systems. Dataset: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Training Files icon. click . 43 Click File menu ➤ Close. lighting. 42 You can save the open file if you wish. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. Circuits are used for power. In this exercise you placed the electrical distribution equipment required for the project. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system.40 Select the T1 transformer.

select all the receptacles in the corner office. click . and voltage (120 V). 310 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and double-click 1 . 2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. 5 Select one of the receptacles in the corner office.Power to make it the active view. Creating an electrical circuit to connect the devices (receptacles) in this view is similar to creating the electrical circuits in the previous exercise. 3 While pressing Ctrl. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. load (180 VA). leave the circuit as a temporary logical circuit. The generate wiring controls ( ) let you create permanent wiring for the circuit. Temporary circuits are display as dashed lines between the components to indicate the interconnection of the devices that you selected for this circuit. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 4 On the Options Bar. The difference here is that you will have several components in the circuit. and observe that the information displayed indicates the number of poles (#1). You will add permanent wiring in a later exercise.■ Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Power Circuitry. For now.

click for this circuit. The drop-down list on the Option Bar lists only those panels that are compatible with the circuit’s distribution system and have an available circuit. the Specify Circuit Information dialog is displayed. 8 On the Options Bar. 9 Highlight one of the receptacles in the office. 6 Click Modify. and press Tab. Revit MEP will only let you make a connection between compatible components. (Select a Panel for the Circuit). NOTE When all of the devices for the circuit have their distribution system specified as instance parameters. and select panel L-1 as the panel NOTE You can click a panel in the drawing area or select the panel name from the drop-down list on the Options Bar.A question mark is displayed for this receptacle because no Label has been specified in the Type Properties for this particular receptacle type. You cannot connect components having a different number of poles or a different voltage specified for the distribution system types. and click to select the circuit again. Creating Power Circuitry | 311 . press Tab. 7 Move the cursor over one of the receptacles in the corner office so that it is highlighted. You use the Specify Circuit Information to specify the distribution system parameters for the circuit.

1-#6. notice that most of the Instance Parameter values are grayed out. and then scroll back down to Wire Size. The editable parameters. The currently specified values are 1-#12. and ground wiring. 312 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . When editing a circuit. 12 On the Edit Circuit toolbar. making it easy to identify the components that are part of the circuit group. 14 Scroll back up to the Rating parameter. click (Circuit Properties). Notice that the Wire Size values have changed to 1-#6. which are the wire sizes for the load. 1-#12. These values are calculated based on the Rating and Voltage Drop values. In the Element Properties dialog for this circuit. respectively for this circuit. 13 Scroll down to the Wire Size parameter. In the next 2 steps you will see how parameters interact as Revit MEP calculates values for the circuit. They cannot be edited because they are calculated according to the components in the circuit. click (Edit Circuit). 11 On the Options Bar.10 Click to select the circuit and all of the devices on the circuit. The Edit Circuit tab is activated on the Design Bar. all but the components in the circuit are dimmed. neutral. 1-#12. will be discussed in a later exercise. change the value from 20A to 50A. Wire Type and Rating. 1-#10. The Voltage value for the circuit is 120V because all the receptacles and the panel in the circuit are 120V components.

as previously described. 24 After circuits have been created and assigned for all of the individual offices. Revit MEP displays a warning message indicating that adding this circuit group exceeds the number of available slots on panel L-1. 17 Continue selecting receptacles. 16 On the Edit Circuit toolbar. creating power circuits. click . 18 Select the receptacle in the stair well. zoom in to the upper part of the large open office. Panel L-1 is not listed on the drop-down list. and assigning them to panel L-1 on a space-by-space basis for all of the offices around the perimeter of the building. Add additional slots to panel 20 Right-click panel L-1. 23 Select the receptacle in the stairwell again. for the remaining groups of 4 floor-hosted receptacles. 22 Click OK. click . and click Element Properties. click Cancel. 25 On the Options Bar. and select the 4 floor-mounted receptacles as shown. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. and try to select panel L-1. under Instance Parameters. These will be connected in a later exercise. and change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 18. 26 Continue creating circuits. NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area at this time. . and add it to panel L-1. Creating Power Circuitry | 313 . 19 Close the warning message. scroll down to the Electrical . click . If you select L-1 in the drawing. click The circuit is created. and then select panel L-1. You should now be able to create the circuit for the stairwell.Loads category. and select panel L-1.15 Click Cancel to close the Element Properties dialog and cancel your changes. click .

In this exercise you learned how to create circuit groups (circuits) and assign the circuits to panels. NOTE Do not create a circuit for the 5 wall-hosted receptacles on the walls in the large open area of Level 2 at this time. 314 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 29 Select the L-1 panel. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires on page 314.Power view and assign them to panel L-2. Notice also that all the circuits have been assigned to a location on the panel. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. In the Edit Circuits dialog. You also learned how voltage definitions and distribution systems determine the kinds of electrical systems that you can define for your project. These will be connected in a later exercise. you have assigned only 17. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created.27 Using the same procedures. you learned how to add slots to a panel to accommodate circuits. you can create circuits and maintain the information associated with them without adding wiring to the project. Adding wiring to a project is optional. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close. click (Edit Circuits on Panel). 31 You can save the open file if you wish. As you saw in the previous exercise. 30 Click OK. and on the Options Bar.Power to make it the active view. create circuits in the 2 . 28 Double-click 1 . 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Although this panel is currently capable of supporting 18 circuits. Increase the number of circuits on panel L-2 to 18. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires In this exercise you become more familiar with the wiring settings. Finally. notice that circuit descriptions have been automatically created based on information from the devices themselves.

12 On the Options Bar. select <all>. click Edit in the Value column. in the Value column. For Names. click the Training Files icon. for Top. under View Properties. and click Apply View Template. Create lighting circuits 9 In the Project Browser. for View Range.rvt. enter 3' 0" Under View Depth. and in the New View Template dialog. 6 Scroll down to Sub-Discipline.Open the provided dataset. double-click 1 . enter 3' 0" 5 Click OK. re-select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. click Check None to clear all the check boxes. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. select Associated Level. and click OK. enter Electrical Lighting Plan. enter -1' 0" For Bottom. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Level Above. as shown. select Electrical Plan . 8 In the Apply View Template dialog. and for Offset.Lighting. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Lighting. and for Offset. click (Filter). select Electrical Lighting Plan. 13 In the Filter dialog. 7 In the Project Browser. Click 3 In the right pane. Create an Electrical Lighting Plan template for Lighting Views 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. and click OK. 2 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ For Show Type. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 315 . 4 In View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Associated Level. right-click 1 . as described below. 10 Zoom out so that the entire plan is visible. and for Offset. and click OK. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires.Lighting to make it the active view. 11 Draw a pick box around the plan to select everything. for Level. under Names. Only the lighting fixtures and switches on Level 1 should now be selected.

15 Close the message window and. This should generate a Warning message indicating that the load for the circuit exceeds 80% of the defined rating (20A). click . 316 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .14 On the Options Bar. 16 Select all the light fixtures and switches in the large open office (Open 1) as shown. click (Undo) to undo the circuit creation.

Splined wiring is similar to arc. When creating wires. Adjust the number of conductors in a path between switches 19 Select the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall.17 On the Options Bar. as in this step. 20 On the Options Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. Later. or floors. you can specify splined wiring. lighting fixtures. select Wires. Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. Chamfered wiring can be used to indicate wiring that is exposed. but with an additional vertex. when you create wiring manually. click Check None. click . neutral. ceilings. click (Filter). and click the switch to select the switches. You can add or remove vertices from wires by right-clicking the wire and clicking Insert Vertex or Delete Vertex. This changes the temporary wiring graphics into permanent wiring graphics as shown. and click OK. click circuit. In this step. 21 In the Filter dialog. move the cursor to highlight the 4-way switch at the right end of the curved wall. ground) in the wire run. you created arc type wiring. and wire segments on the path between the 2 switches. you can choose to create either arc or chamfered wiring. Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 317 . press Tab. Tick marks (the short lines that intersect a wire run) indicate the number and type of conductors (load. and then select panel MDP as the panel for the . click . you add a conductor in the wiring path between the 3-way and 4-way switches to allow switching the lights on or off from any of the switches in the open office area. The meaning for each tick mark varies according to the style of the tick mark selected on the Wiring panel in the Electrical Settings dialog. In the next steps. Arc wiring is sometimes used to indicate wiring that is concealed within walls.

enter 2. 25 In the Mech/Elec space. under Instance Parameters. and click OK. change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 22. NOTE The Hot Conductors parameter value will be blank if the path being selected contains wire segments with a combination of both 1 and 2 specified as the value for Hot Conductors.Loads category. and click OK. under Instance Parameters. and assign each circuits to panel MDP. restrooms and stairwell on Level 1. The wiring layout should look similar to the following: 318 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . When this occurs. 24 Using the same method. and one ground conductor).22 On the Options Bar. for Hot Conductors. one neutral conductor. 28 Create permanent wiring for each circuit. click . 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 Create lighting circuits for the private offices. enter 2 as the value. right-click the MDP panel. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the wire segments on the path between the switches (2 hot conductors. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. scroll down to the Electrical . add a hot conductor to the wire segments between the remaining switches in the open office and between the 2 switches in the Level 1 stairwell. and click Element Properties. and click OK.

NOTE Do not include the two lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the stairwell in either circuit.29 For more practice.Lighting. Creating Switch Systems on page 320. and click OK. change the value for Max #1 Pole Breakers from 12 to 18.Lighting view. These will be connected in a later exercise. The wiring layout should look similar to the following: Creating Lighting Circuitry and Wires | 319 . then creating lighting circuits in 2 . 32 Create lighting circuits and wiring for the private offices. continue performing the steps in this exercise using the procedures and tools described previously to create another lighting circuit for the rest of the lighting fixtures and switches on the 1 . conference room. under Instance Parameters. 31 Create a lighting circuit for the open area on Level 2. and assign each circuit to panel H-2. lounge. and in the Element Properties dialog. assign the circuit to panel H-2.Lighting view.Loads category. scroll down to the Electrical . close the dataset and go on to the next exercise. and restrooms in the 2 . Otherwise. 30 Right-click panel H-2.

After creating the switch systems on Level 1.rvt. assign lighting fixtures to switches. 1 In the Project Browser. and panel information. and double-click 1 . but does not prevent you from doing so. Creating Switch Systems on page 320. 34 Click File menu ➤ Close. You also saw that the Revit MEP warns you when you try to put too much load on a circuit. fixtures.Lighting to make it the active view. Creating Switch Systems You create switch systems to specify switches that control groups of lighting fixtures in a project. click the Training Files icon. You also learned about the settings that control how Revit MEP performs wire sizing. you will create a space schedule with an embedded schedule listing switch IDs. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. In this exercise you learned how to create lighting circuitry and used the basic methods for adding and editing wires. 320 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . as described below. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Open the provided dataset. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Switch Systems.33 You can save the open file if you wish. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. In this exercise you will create switch systems on Level 1 and Level 2. and specify switch IDs for switches.

After creating the switch system. click Finish to confirm your selections. on the Options Bar. (Edit Switch System). you decide to assign several fixtures to a different switch in the large open area. 4 Click (Select Switch for System). With Multiple selected on the Options Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. TIP Because all of the lighting fixtures in the open office are part of the same lighting system. you can use a pick box to select several fixtures. Number of Fixtures: the number of components in the system (excluding switches). click The Switch System toolbar is activated. (Remove From System). select The Options Bar provides the following information about the currently selected switch system. and click the 4-way switch at the left end of the curved wall to designate the switch controlling the fixtures. Then. click Multiple. and click to select everything in the system. and on the Options Bar. When you have selected as many fixtures as you want. ■ ■ Switch ID: the identifier for the switch that is currently assigned to the system. press Tab. you can highlight one of the lighting fixtures. click (Filter) to select only the lighting fixtures.2 Select all the lighting fixtures in the large open office (Open 1). 6 On the Switch System toolbar. click (Create Switch System). 5 With the switch system still selected. Creating Switch Systems | 321 .

10 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Finish. and click OK. click Finish. click . (Select Switch). The Number of Fixtures field now displays 27 fixtures remaining in the system. 11 On the Switch System toolbar. (Switch Properties).West.1st Floor. for Switch ID. 322 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . for Switch ID. 8 On the Options Bar. and select the switch on the wall 14 On the Switch System toolbar. 12 Select the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms. The Switch ID is updated on the Options Bar. 15 Click 16 Click . under Instance Properties. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 On the Options Bar. enter Main Entrance . click outside the ladies’ restroom. 9 Click (Switch Properties). under Instance Properties.7 Draw a pick box around the 6 lighting fixtures to the left of the restrooms. enter North Stairwell .

Click OK. create switch systems for the remaining private offices. select Number from the Fields list. 24 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 19 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the plan. Verify that Ascending is selected. enter Switch Systems. 26 On the Formatting tab. scroll down the Available fields list. click . and on the Options Bar. 20 Click . and for Heading. 23 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. For Name. and restrooms in the 1 .Lighting view. select Number. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. select Spaces. Creating Switch Systems | 323 . stairwell. 27 On the Embedded Schedule tab: ■ ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule Under Categories. double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ Number Name 25 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. 21 Using the same method. click Finish. enter Space Number.18 On the Switch System toolbar. select both lighting fixtures in the corner office. Create a switch system schedule 22 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and click the single-pole switch on the right wall of the office to designate the switch controlling the fixtures in the office. select Lighting Fixtures Click Embedded Schedule Properties.

The Switch System schedule displays in the drawing area. Create separate systems for the lounge. Specify Open Area . and is added to the Project Browser under Schedules/Quantities. The embedded lighting fixture content is arranged so that the information about a switch system displays below the space containing that system.2nd Floor for the switch ID. 324 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs on page 325. Create a system for all the lighting fixtures in the large open area and assign them to the switch near the east stairwell. close the dataset and go on to the next exercise. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. The Switch Systems schedule is automatically updated as you specify switch IDs or make changes to the lighting. Otherwise. and private offices. continue creating switch systems in the 2 . conference room. 32 Click File menu ➤ Close.28 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 30 For more practice. double-click the following fields—in the order shown—to add them to the Scheduled fields (in order) list: ■ ■ ■ ■ Switch Id Type Panel Circuit Number 29 Click OK twice. restrooms. scroll down the Available fields list.Lighting view. 31 You can save the open file if you wish.

2 Zoom in on the office at the upper-left corner of the plan. and double-click 1 . 3 In the corner office.rvt. Open the provided dataset. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Creating Multi-Circuit Wiring. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs In this exercise you will see how Revit MEP deals with wiring runs that contain more than a single circuit. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs on page 325. You will design the power wiring for the 3 offices in the upper-left portion of 1-Power view to serve as an example of the multi-circuit wiring run. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. generate permanent wiring for the circuits in the remaining spaces along the left side of the plan. click the Training Files icon. and click to select the circuit and all of the components connected to it.NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. press Tab to highlight the entire circuit.Power to make it the active view. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. move the cursor over one of the receptacles to highlight it. click to generate arc type wiring for the selected circuit. 4 On the Options Bar. as described below. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. 5 Using the same method. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 325 .

8 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar.6 Select the home runs that extend out into the open office from the 2 upper offices. verify that (Arced Wire) is selected. 7 Adjust the view so that the 2 upper offices are visible. click Wire. 9 On the Options Bar. and delete both home runs. 326 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 10 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the top office to specify the start point for the wire.

12 Click the connector for the receptacle on the east wall of the middle office to specify the endpoint for the wire.11 Click in the open area near the door for the office to specify the second point for the wire. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 327 . as shown.

when the wiring is completed. the number of tick marks is increased to show the increase in the 328 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . As wiring runs are collected into a multi-circuit wiring run. create wiring between receptacles in the 2 lower offices. your layout should look similar to the following: Home run arrows are used to indicate that a wiring run is returning to a panel. and using the same method. Revit MEP temporarily assigns a direction to the home run.NOTE When neither of the 2 groups of components on the circuit has a free home run. if necessary. When completed. 13 Adjust the view so that the 2 lower offices are visible. Multi-circuit wiring runs appear with multiple arrows on the home run. The direction will be corrected.

18 Drag the vertex at the end of the home run toward the lower restroom. and notice the vertex controls at each end of the wire and another in the center. Creating Multi-Circuit Wire Runs | 329 . select Insert Vertex. 17 Right click the wire run. In the previous steps. a shared neutral. 14 Click Modify.number of hot conductors. and drag the new vertex up and to the left to arrange the wire run so that it looks similar to the following image. drag the new vertex along the wire run to a point midway between the other vertex and the connector. the number of tick marks and home run arrows is increased such that the final home run has 3 home run arrows and 5 tick marks (3 hot conductors. Adjust the home run routing 15 Select the home run extending from the lower office. as the circuits in each office was added to the wiring run. 16 Drag the center vertex to the left so that it is closer to the receptacle in the lower office as shown. and a shared safety ground). and click.

Completed 1-Power 330 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . you can continue creating permanent wiring for the circuits in the 1 . 19 For additional practice.Vertices let you route wires in your project views.Power and 2 . The wire behaves like a spline. Examples of completed plans are provided below for reference. adjusting its shape according to the vertex location. or you can close this dataset and go on to the next exercise.Power views.

The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Checking Your Design | 331 . Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Checking Your Design.Power to make it the active view. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click 1 . In this exercise. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises.Completed 2-Power 20 You can save the open file if you wish. 1 In the Project Browser. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you created wiring runs from the circuits that you created in a previous exercise and combined these to form multi-circuit wiring runs. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. click the Training Files icon. Checking Your Design on page 331.rvt. You also learned how to adjust the layout of wiring runs and interpret tick marks and home run arrows. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. as described below. Open the provided dataset.

4 Click and hold the Title Bar of the System Browser. release the mouse button. drag it to the bottom of the drawing area.2 Zoom in on the upper-left corner of the drawing so that the corner office is visible. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. right-click one of the devices under circuit 1. and when the preview expands to the width of the window. 6 Right-click a column heading in the System Browser. and click View ➤ Electrical to limit the information displayed to the electrical discipline. The System Browser is displayed to right of the drawing area. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 7 In the System Browser. each with a load of 180VA. 332 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . and click Select. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 1. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel L-1. 3 Click Window menu ➤ Systems Browser. 8 In the System Browser. 5 Right-click a column heading. expand Power ➤ L-1 ➤ circuit 1.

Lighting and 2 . 12 Zoom in on the stairwells in both lighting plans as shown. 6 receptacles in the open area of Level 1. and expand Unassigned. a 3-way switch and 2 lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell. Resolve unassigned electrical components 9 In the System Browser. The list includes the main distribution panel (MDP).The device you selected in the System Browser is also selected in 1 .Power. collapse Power. Checking Your Design | 333 . and 6 receptacles in the open area of Level 2.Lighting views and close any windows. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. 10 Open the 1 . 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile to display both these views in the drawing area.

to 334 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . click to select the circuit. click create permanent wiring. In the System Browser. and select both lighting fixtures and the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell. until the power circuit is previewed. select one of the lighting fixtures in the stairwell. and on the Options Bar. click . 13 In the 1 . Add Level 2 components to the existing Level 1 lighting circuit. and on the Options Bar. press Tab several times. (Add to Circuit).The lighting fixtures and 3-way switch in the 2 . 18 Highlight one of the lighting fixtures in the Level 2 stairwell. 14 On the Edit Circuits toolbar.Lighting view. click Finish.Lighting view.Lighting view have not yet been connected. 16 Click the title bar of the 2 . click 15 On the Options Bar. You need to add the switch and lighting fixtures in the upper level to the same circuit as the switches and lighting fixtures in the lower level. 17 On the Edit Circuits toolbar. clear Multiple. the 2 lighting fixtures and 3-way switch have been moved from the Unassigned folder to Power ➤ MDP ➤ Circuit 2.

enter 2. click to create a power circuit for these receptacles. and click OK. click 27 On the Options Bar. Checking Your Design | 335 . 22 Click . In the System Browser. click . select panel L-1. Assign remaining receptacles to circuits 24 In the Project Browser. and in the Mechanical/Electrical space. 25 In the drawing area.Lighting view. 21 In the Filter dialog. highlight the 3-way switch in the Level 2 stairwell. double-click 1-Power to make it the active view. press Tab. click Check None. the only remaining unassigned components should be the MDP and the receptacles in the 2 open areas. and click to select all of the components in the path between the 2 switches. select the 3-way switch in the stairwell. and click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Only the wire segments are selected in the path between the switches. select the unassigned receptacles in the open area. click the title bar of the 2 . 19 In the 1 . for Hot Conductors.Lighting view. . select Wires. 26 On the Options Bar. 20 On the Options Bar. arrange the view so that the System Browser and the 5 unassigned receptacles are visible. under Instance Parameters.Add a Hot Conductor to the wiring for the stairwell lighting circuit.

28 Click to create permanent wiring. 336 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems .

29 Using the same method. create a power circuit for the 6 unassigned receptacles in Open 2 in the 2-Power view. 31 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. Checking Your Design | 337 . Check Circuits 30 On the Electrical tab on the Design Bar. 33 Expand the warning categories until you can see that the piece of equipment that is not connected is the MDP panel. 32 Click to view details of the warning. click Check Circuits. The MDP panel is now the only component listed in the Unassigned category.

34 Close the Warning dialog. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 35 You can save the open file if you wish. 338 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . Balance circuit loads 1 Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase.rvt. You also learned how to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your project were connected. you learned how to use the System Browser to examine electrical components in your project and resolve unassigned and unnamed circuits. Defining Circuit Loads on page 338. as described below. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Open Imperial ➤ Electrical ➤ i Defining Circuit Loads. 36 Click File menu ➤ Close. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. In the Project Browser. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Defining Circuit Loads In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. Finally.Power.This warning refers to the feed from the outside power service and can be ignored. and double-click 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. Open the provided dataset.

Examination of the loads on Phase A. click Rebalance Loads. select panel L-2.2 In the Mechanical/Electrical space. Defining Circuit Loads | 339 . and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 5040 VA on Phase B. while Phase A provides 4860 VA. and Phase C provides 3780 VA. 3 On the Options Bar. and Phase C . B. click . 4 In the Edit Circuits dialog. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A .4320 VA). Phase B 4860 VA.4500 VA. 5 Click OK.

which will require a 40A circuit breaker. The MDP panel feeds the lighting circuits for Level 1. and present a load 6496 VA. 14 In the Type Selector. The lighting circuits connected to MDP are already specified as 20A circuits. 7 Click Rebalance Loads to adjust the loads on panel H-2. . click 8 In the Project Browser. L-1 and MDP. select the T1 transformer. This is because you may have selected a different mix of lighting fixtures to attain the required lighting levels. NOTE If you have continued to save and use your own dataset throughout these tutorials. Adjust circuit breaker sizes 10 Select panel MDP.Power view.Power. The 3 circuits that feed panel H-2 present a load of 18844 VA. and for T1. enter 40A for the Trip value. 9 Repeat the previous procedures to balance the loads on the Level 1 panels. and on the Options Bar. Therefore. and the T1 transformer. and on the Options Bar. for panel H-2. The remaining circuits feed the lighting circuits on Level 1. you can use a 30kVA transformer. 340 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . click . in the Mechanical/Electrical space. 13 In the 1 . Therefore.6 Select panel H-2. Although the load from panel H-2 is approximately a 40 A load at 480V. After the loads are balanced. you may see different values for the loads. double-click 1 . enter 100A for the Trip value. select 480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: 30kVA. Transformer T1 was specified as a 45kVA transformer but. 12 Click OK. the 3 circuits feed transformer T1. the rating for the breaker feeding panel H-2 should be increased to 100 A. H-2 is a 100A panel. the actual load connected to it (12960 VA) is less than 15kVA. so no further changes are required. the H-2 panel. and present a load of 12960 VA. 11 In the Edit Circuits dialog.

and click the value for the Wire Size parameter. double-click 2 . select the T2 transformer. 28 In the Type Selector. 1-#8. Notice that it changes to 3-#1. enter 40A for the Trip value. select panel H-2.Power view. 24 In the Mechanical/Electrical space. 19 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. Similar to the situation you observed for transformer T1. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating.Now that you have specified transformer T1 as a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit. 17 Click OK. 27 In the 2 . 16 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Under Electrical-Loads. and notice that the current value for Mains is 100.Power to make it the active view. 1-#12. 18 With panel L-1 selected. 26 Click OK.00A is the correct size panel for a 30kVA transformer. which will require a 40A circuit breaker. in the Mechanical/Electrical space. 100. and click Element Properties. scroll down and verify that the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. you should verify that the wire sizes for panel L-1 is set correctly. enter 100A for Rating. scroll down to the Electrical-Loads category. for transformer T2. 21 Scroll down. 1-#1. and on the Options Bar. select 480-120-208V Phase Dry Type Transformer: 30kVA. under Instance Parameters. click (Circuit Properties). click . the load presented by T2 is less than 14kVA and you decide to change the transformer from 45kVA to 30kVA.00A. Defining Circuit Loads | 341 . 1-#12. Verify/adjust wire sizes 15 Right-click panel L-1. on the Options Bar. 22 Click OK. 25 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 23 In the Project Browser.

Now that you have set transformer T2 to be a 30kVA transformer and restored it to the circuit.Power to make it the active view.00A. click . under Electrical Loads. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. under Instance Parameters. 35 On the Options Bar. Size the service entrance conductors 32 In the Project Browser. double-click 1 . click . A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 33 With the MDP panel selected. 29 Right click panel L-2 and click Element Properties. you should verify that the size of panel L-2 is set correctly. Notice that the value for the Wire Size parameter changes appropriately. and verify that the current value for Mains is 100. 342 | Chapter 6 Electrical Systems . 31 Click OK. 38 Click File menu ➤ Close. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. 37 You can save the open file if you wish. 36 In the Element Properties dialog for the circuit. enter 225A for the Rating parameter. scroll down to the Electrical-Loads. 34 Close the Warning. This completes the Electrical Tutorial.

you will understand the process. and select i Office Building. navigate to Training Files ➤ Architectural. By following this workflow. and sanitary piping. 343 . you learn system design best practices while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems designing more efficient. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. including plumbing fixtures.rvt. After finishing each exercise. if the link is lost. you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the linked model.autodesk. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. However. you can choose to save your work. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2009. you create the plumbing systems for the second floor men’s room in an office building. In this tutorial. However.Plumbing Systems 7 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. You should maintain the relative path to the architectural model. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. You can search the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. As you create the plumbing system. The datasets that you use to complete these exercises are located in the Training Files directory. If the tutorial datasets are not present. methodology.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. hot and cold water piping. At the end of this tutorial. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. go to http://www. NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder. click Reload From. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the dataset that Autodesk provides. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog. In this tutorial. and specific techniques for designing plumbing systems. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design plumbing systems using Revit MEP 2009.

Flush Valve .Floor Mounted. 4 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ Water Closet . 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this lesson. Load plumbing component families 1 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rvt. As you develop more advanced skills working with Revit MEP. 3 Expand Imperial ➤ Plumbing.Wall Hung. You load the families of components that comprise your plumbing systems. planning is critical to a successful design. 344 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . click the Training Files icon. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa 5 Click Open. you can customize components and expand the library of plumbing families. Preparing the Plumbing Plan Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Loading Plumbing Parts. you plan each system by loading the fixtures and fittings that you will need to design the plumbing system.rfa Urinal .Planning Plumbing Systems Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. click the Training Files icon.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. The selected component families are loaded into the project. and click Duplicate.Sanitary .Wall Hung. for New.PVC: Standard For Preferred Junction Type. and click Properties. 5 In the Rename dialog. click the Training Files icon.PVC: Standard For Tap. 12 You can save the open file if you wish.DWV . and click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems In this exercise. select Pipe Short Tee . Notice that 2 folders have been added to the families currently available for your design: Water Closet .rfa Pipe Reducing Short Tee .PVC . are added under Families in the Project Browser. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Configuring Plumbing and Pipe Systems.Glued. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. select Pipe Cross . 10 While pressing Ctrl select the following files: ■ ■ Pipe Bend . 3 Right-click PVC 2. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rfa 11 Click Open. select None For Cross. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems on page 345.rvt. you create new PVC pipe types and specify the default fittings that will be used with them.Flush Valve .Floor Mounted and Urinal . Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 1 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. 6 Under Mechanical.6 In the Project Browser.Glued: Standard For Transition. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. select Pipe Bend . select Tee For Tee. 9 Expand Imperial ➤ Plumbing. expand Families ➤ Plumbing Fixtures. 13 Click File menu ➤ Close.Sanitary . 2 Right-click PVC. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.PVC: Standard Configuring Plumbing and Piping Systems | 345 . click Rename. enter PVC Sanitary. All of the loaded families. Load piping component families 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. select Pipe Transition .Glued.

a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. and click OK. 346 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .PVC: Standard is selected For Union. You then modify the piping.PVC: Standard is selected For Preferred Junction Type. 8 In the Name dialog. Finally. Add Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. Add Plumbing Fixtures on page 346. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. In this lesson. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow.PVC: Standard is selected 10 Click OK to close the Type Properties dialog. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Adding Plumbing Fixtures. Designing Plumbing Systems Designing plumbing systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward process. verify that Pipe Coupling . 13 Proceed to the next exercise. then click Duplicate. 3 sinks. you add 2 toilets. for Name. verify that Tee is selected For Tee. you create systems to logically connect the fixtures. select None For Cross. 11 You can save the open file if you wish. verify that Pipe Transition . enter PVC Sanitary Vent. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. you add plumbing fixtures to physically connect them with piping.■ For Union. 9 Under Mechanical.rvt.PVC . verify that Pipe Bend . select Pipe Coupling .Glued: Standard is selected For Transition. and a floor drain to the second floor men’s room. Place floor-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Pipe Cross . ZR (Zoom Region).Vent . select Pipe Tee . NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.PVC: Standard For Tap. 3 urinals. 2 Enter the keyboard shortcut. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the second floor men’s room.PVC: Standard 7 Click Apply. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

click Dimension. and 1' 6" from the right wall. a On the Design Bar. 3 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar.Floor Mounted : Private 1. 4 Select Water Closet . 3 wall-mounted urinals. 6 Click Modify.The men’s room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls.Flush Valve . Add Plumbing Fixtures | 347 .6 gpf in the Type Selector. and click to place the toilet in the approximate location shown. 5 Move the cursor over the upper-right corner of the men’s room. click Plumbing Fixture. Position the first toilet 7 Position the toilet 6" from the upper wall. and 3 sinks.

and click to place the dimension annotation. enter 1' 6". e Using the same method. and press Enter. move the cursor over the center of the toilet. Wall faces is selected for Prefer. do the following: ■ ■ ■ (Copy). i Click Modify. click the value for the blue dimension to the right. click 9 On the Options Bar. d Move the cursor down. c Click the face of the right wall. and on the Edit toolbar. and click. verify that (Aligned) is selected. Clear Constrain Verify that Copy is selected Clear Multiple 348 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . j Delete both dimension annotations. and Individual References is selected for Pick. place a dimension annotation between the upper wall and the back of the toilet. The toilet is placed 1' 6" from the right wall. enter 0' 6". Add a second toilet 8 Select the toilet. g Select the toilet. h Click the value for the blue dimension below the toilet. f Click Modify. and press Enter. The toilet is placed 6" from the upper wall of the toilet stall.b On the Options Bar.

do the following.Wall Hung : 3/4 Flush Valve in the Type Selector. move the cursor over the center of the leftmost urinal. and on the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. select Wall centerlines Verify that Individual References is selected for Pick 17 Click the centerline of the left wall. and click to place the dimension annotation. click Plumbing Fixture. place a dimension annotation for the rightmost toilet. ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Aligned) is selected For Prefer. Place wall-mounted urinals 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 14 Move the cursor over the upper-left corner of the men’s room. verify that (Place on Vertical Face) is selected. and click. and place 3 urinals approximately as shown. 18 Move the cursor down.10 Click the center line of the toilet to establish a start point. 15 Click Modify. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 349 . click Dimension. 11 Move the preview of the toilet 5' 0" to the left (into the left stall). 19 Using the same method. 13 Select Urinal . and when the alignment snap displays and the preview is from the original toilet. click to place the toilet as shown.

Island . and press Delete. click the value for the blue dimension. 23 Select the dimension annotation above the urinals. 25 While pressing Ctrl. select Sink . and click the blue above the dimension values to space the urinals evenly along the wall. place the leftmost urinal 1' 8" from the left wall. click the centerline of each urinal in succession. select the 2 remaining dimension annotations. 27 On the Options Bar click (Place on Face). and in the Type Selector. 22 Using the same method. select the counter top. (Equal Control) 24 Press Delete to remove the dimension from the drawing.Single : 18"x18". The urinal is placed 1' 8" from the wall of the toilet stall. then move the cursor up. and click Unconstrain in the warning dialog. and enter 1' 8". Place sinks 26 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 28 In the drawing area.20 Working from left to right. 21 Select the rightmost urinal. 350 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . click Plumbing Fixture. and click to place the dimensions annotation.

32 On the Design Bar.3" Drain. 37 On the Option Bar click (Place on Work Plane). 30 Place 3 sinks. 33 Using the same method you used to evenly space the urinals. and click to place the floor drain. specify the distance between the drain center line and the lower wall as 1' 6". 35 Delete the dimension annotations. 31 Click Modify. Place the floor drain 36 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. click Plumbing Fixture.29 Move the cursor over the counter top in the lower-right corner of the men’s room. and for Plane. Add Plumbing Fixtures | 351 . as shown. select Level : Level 2. click Dimension. specify the distance between the center line of the outer sinks and the center line of the walls as 1' 10". 34 Using the same method specify the distance between the center line of the wall below the sinks and the center line of each sink. select Floor Drain . 38 Move the cursor to a point where the walls for the toilet stalls meet. approximately as shown. and in the Type selector. and press the Space Bar twice to rotate the sink into the proper orientation.Round : 5" Stainer . then equalize the space between sinks.

click the Training Files icon. Prepare for sanitary piping 1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the View Control Bar. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. You then use Revit MEP‘s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. verify the view range settings: ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 352 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. 40 You can save the open file if you wish. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.39 Click Modify. and click View Properties. urinals. you need to adjust the view depth to make the piping visible in the view. and click Edit. specify Fine for Detail Level. specify Associated Level (Level 2) and -5' 0" for Level Offset 5 Click OK twice. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Starting the Sanitary Piping System. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. specify Associated Level (Level 2) and -5' 0" for Bottom Offset Under View Depth.rvt. 41 Click File menu ➤ Close. scroll down to View Range. and Wireframe for Model Graphics Style. 2 Right-click in the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Begin Creating the Sanitary System on page 352. Begin Creating the Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that will guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. and floor drain. under Extents. 4 In the View Range dialog. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Because most of the piping for the sanitary system will be placed below the floor level. In this exercise.

toilets and the floor drain are moved from the Unassigned folder to the newly created Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 1 folder in the System Browser. select Sanitary from the System Type list. specify -1' 0" 13 Click OK. and click Main. TIP You can also access the system browser using the F9 keyboard shortcut. toilets. while coarse and medium display plumbing components as 1-line symbols. Create the sanitary plumbing system 14 When you are creating systems the System Browser can help you identify components that have not been added to a system. and select Sanitary from the System Type list. 18 Zoom in on the men’s room. The urinals. Click Window ➤ System Browser. and notice that all of the plumbing fixtures are currently unassigned. 16 Right-click in the system browser table heading. click Mechanical Settings. 17 Expand the Unassigned folder. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the urinals. 19 On the Options Bar. 12 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 10 In the table: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. specify -1' 0" 11 In the left panel. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 353 . 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. click (Create Sanitary System). click Branch. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. specify Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary For Offset. 9 In the right panel. click View ➤ Piping. as shown. and floor drain.The fine setting displays 2-line piping and plumbing components. Specify mechanical settings for piping 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 15 Click the title bar for the browser.

and on the Options Bar. click (Layout Path). and click OK.20 Zoom out to include the chase near the top-right corner of the second floor men’s room in the view. 28 Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. and a preview of the piping layout displays. and click to place the base approximately as shown. for Offset. click Sanitary 1. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping the sanitary piping in the system. select 4". click Solutions. 26 On the Options Bar. 21 Click (Thin Lines) on the toolbar. 22 Select one of the components in the newly created sanitary system. 354 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 27 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Select a System dialog. 25 Move the cursor over the chase. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. The Layout Paths tab is activated on the Design Bar. click Place Base. specify -4' 0" and for D. 24 On the Layout Paths tab on the Design Bar. enter 1/8" for Slope. and on the Options Bar.

Review the following steps prior to using them to customize the layout.Up to 6 piping layout solutions are suggested on the Options Bar. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 355 . It’s easier if each segment can be moved to a snap. as needed. Select the horizontal main segment above the rightmost urinals and toilets. You can click (Previous) and (Next Solution). 29 Select solution 1. click Modify. The layout preview displays the main piping as blue lines and the branch piping as green lines. Customize the layout 30 The alignment of segments is critical when customizing a layout. and do the following: a Use the (Parallel Movement Control) control to drag the segment down into the middle of the chase above the urinals. to view them. and on the Design Bar.

d Move the cursor to the right to locate the snap above the center urinal. and click to align the branch to the main segment. Snap the main in the middle of the chase. c Using the same method. and drag the segment down into the chase. This makes it easier to locate a snap. NOTE You press Ctrl to select multiple segments when you want to move more than one segment to the same location.b Move the cursor to the left to the junction between the main and the branch to the rightmost toilet. 356 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 31 Click Finish Layout. select the horizontal branch segment above the leftmost urinal.

32 Examine the piping that was automatically created. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. and check the slope control. and orientation of fittings: a Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. The second tab highlights the fixture. checking for the proper connectivity. slope. Begin Creating the Sanitary System | 357 . When a fitting is reversed. The first tab highlights the fixture and the branch. branch and the fixture connecting it to the main segment. b Select each pipe segment in the system. select the fitting and click (Flip) to reorient it. The third tab should highlight the entire system. c Examine the sanitary tees to assure proper orientation. The slope control for every segment should indicate that the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. as shown.

click Show categories from all disciplines. 34 It is easier to work with Revit MEP components if model categories from other disciplines are hidden in the view. 358 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . Enter the keyboard shortcut. specify Fine for Detail Level.33 In the Project Browser. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. and double-click 3D Plumbing. and on the Model Categories tab clear the following categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Columns Curtain Panels Curtain Systems Curtain Wall Mullions Doors Floors Lines Railings Roofs Shaft Openings Stairs Walls Windows 36 Click OK. 35 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. VG (Visibility/Graphics). 37 On the View Control Bar. and Hidden Line for Model Graphics Style.

Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 359 . 39 Click File menu ➤ Close. click the Training Files icon. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Connecting Sink Drain Lines. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System on page 359 to continue creating the sanitary system. 40 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. 2 Zoom in on the piping to the right of the men’s room. and click the plus sign below the fitting to upgrade the fitting to a tee. adding the sinks in the men’s room. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise you continue with the work from the last exercise. and creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.rvt. 3 Select the sanitary elbow to the right of the rightmost toilet.38 You can save the open file if you wish. 1 In the Project Browser.

Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. right-click the connector on the open leg. 6 Drag the preview of the pipe down parallel to the wall.4 Select the tee. 360 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . verify that 1/8" /12" is specified for the slope. 5 Verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. When you press the space bar. press the Space Bar once. 7 Click Modify. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. and on the Options Bar. enter 13. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and click Draw Pipe. and press Enter. Pressing Return completes the dimensioning.

and when the snap displays. enter 2".If you select the pipe. 9 Move the cursor over the open end of the pipe. and press Enter. and when the extension snap displays. and select Pipe Plug-PVC : Standard in the Type Selector. 10 Click Modify. 13 Move the cursor over the straight leg of the reducing wye. click to place the fitting. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 361 . click to place the fitting. click Pipe Fitting. click Pipe Fitting. click the blue size control for the wye leg. 8 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 11 Select the fitting. 12 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. you can verify that the slope has been applied in the correct direction: toward the sanitary outlet. and select Pipe Reducing Wye-DWV-Glued : Standard in the Type Selector.

19 Continue this section of pipe by dragging the preview along the centerline of the wall. right-click the connector on the open leg. 15 Using the method learned earlier. 362 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and that 1/8" /12" is specified for slope. and when the end of the pipe is even with wall centerline. and when the snap for the center point of the middle sink displays. 18 Drag the end of the pipe to the left and down to a point approximately even with the centerline of the wall below the sinks. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity.14 Click Modify. 16 Select the wye fitting. click to specify the end of the pipe. highlight the wye. press the Space Bar once so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. click to specify the end of the first segment of pipe. verify that Auto Connect is selected. 17 Verify that the Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector. and click Draw Pipe. and on the Options Bar.

the vertical pipe extends above the level of the floor. enter 0' 6" for Offset. and when the Extension snap displays and the end is outlined in blue. press Space. 23 Zoom in on the vertical segment behind the middle sink. and in the Type Selector select Pipe Double Wye . and click Modify. clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog as described in the previous exercise. In this case.20 On the Options Bar.DWV . check the slope and connectivity for the added piping as described previously. click Apply. 21 In the Project Browser. click Pipe Fitting.Glued : Standard. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 363 . 25 Move the cursor near the open end of the vertical pipe. 22 In the 3D view. 24 On the Plumbing tab. If necessary. and click to place the fitting. Changing the Offset while drawing pipe creates a vertical segment. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added.

Add pipe stubs to the double wye 28 Double-click 2 . as 27 Select the double wye fitting. specify Hidden Line. and for Model Graphics Style. 29 On the View tab Design Bar. without having to enter ' and " symbols. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. place a section below the sinks as shown. 31 On the View Control Bar. for Detail Level.The double wye is added to the vertical segment. in this step you can enter 0 8 (zero space eight) to specify 8". 364 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . to orient the fitting. 26 Click Modify. click Section. For example.Plumbing to make it the active view. VG (Visibility/Graphics) to hide architectural components that will interfere with selecting plumbing components. 32 Enter the keyboard shortcut. 30 Double-click the head of the section to open the section view. In the next steps you add 2 short pipe segments to the double wye. specify Fine. and in the drawing area. TIP When entering dimensions. click shown above. If necessary. and on the Options Bar. specify 0' 8" for Offset.

click Pipe. draw a 1' pipe from the right leg of the double-wye. in line with the angle for the leg. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 365 . 39 Click Modify.33 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. it is necessary to restore the offset for the fitting. then to the right when pipe is connected to the right leg. The fitting moves to the left when pipe is connected to the left leg. draw the pipe up. click None. and clear the check from any category c Clear Show categories from all disciplines. 40 Select the double-wye fitting again. then clear the check from Lines e Click OK 34 NOTE There is a known issue when connecting piping to the double-wye. for Offset. 41 Click Modify. specify 0' 6". and on the Options Bar. 36 Click Modify. draw the pipe up to the left. do the following: a Click Show categories from all disciplines b Click All. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and enter 0 6 and press Enter. 37 Using the same method. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and enter 1 0 and press Enter. 35 Click the connector snap on the left leg. After adding the piping to the right and left leg. and click All again d Select any category. On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 38 Click the connector snap on the center leg.

and click Apply Verify 1/8" /12" is specified for slope 46 Drag the pipe preview down to a point between the sink and the wall. 366 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary. 44 Right-click the connector for the sink drain. expand Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. and click Draw Pipe. and click to specify the end of the pipe. and double-click 2 . expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 50 Zoom in to a level that allows you to view all 3 sinks and the double wye fitting. 47 Click Modify. double-click 3D Plumbing. and select the leftmost sink. 43 Zoom to a level that lets you view all 3 sinks. and in the Type Selector. 48 Using the same method. connect drain pipes to the other 2 sinks. 49 In the Project Browser. enter 1' 6". and on the Options Bar.42 In the Project Browser. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the sink drain. 45 Drag the pipe preview a short distance from the drain. do the following: ■ ■ For Offset.Plumbing.

58 Click Modify. click Routing Solutions. select the short pipe connected to the center leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the middle sink. and select a proposed solution. While pressing Ctrl. 59 Using the same method. Routing Solution tools are activated on the Options Bar that let you (Add Control Points) or (Remove Control Points). click Routing Solutions.Using Routing Solutions to finish the sanitary piping 51 Routing Solutions works best when the segments being routed are the same size. 60 Click Finish to create piping for the third sink. specify 1 1/2". (Previous) and (Next) buttons to cycle through 55 Select solution 9 of 16. and click Finish to create piping for the middle sink. You use the plus and minus buttons to add vertex controls to pipe segments. select the short pipe connected to the right leg of the double wye and the horizontal pipe from the drain of the rightmost sink. and on the Options Bar. specify 2". 53 While pressing Ctrl. and on the Options Bar. for D. 61 Select the double-wye. 52 Click Modify. 56 While pressing Ctrl. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 367 . select the pipe from the left sink and the pipe connected to the left leg and create the piping by selecting solution 9 of 16. You use the proposed solutions. 54 On the Options Bar. Transitions and fittings are automatically added to maintain connections. and click Finish to create piping for that solution. 57 Select solution 7of 7. select the double-wye and the 3 short segments of pipe connected to it. and on the Options Bar. for D.

Close the warning. 65 On the Options Bar. enter 1/8" / 12". click (Slope) to activate the slope tools on the Options Bar. A warning displays and the pipe from the leg of the double-wye is highlighted to indicate the segment where the slope could not be applied. 63 Click Window ➤ Toolbar ➤ Routing Modify to place the Slope and Justify tool on the toolbar. 64 On the toolbar. This is to be expected. for Slope.Specify slope for the sink sanitary piping 62 Draw a right-to-left pick box to select the elbow and adjoining 2 pipes between the double wye and the sink drain for the rightmost sink as shown. 368 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and click Finish.

Since the routing solution applied to the middle sink used the existing pipe (without adding a segment). you can make minor adjustments to the system. 67 In the System Browser. and press the up arrow on your keyboard twice. If necessary. NOTE In applications where the elevation of a sloped pipe is critical. This will set the elevation for the pipe’s reference end without changing the slope. The amount of adjustment with each keystroke is proportional to the zoom level. and under Instance Parameters. then click Finish on the Edit System toolbar. while pressing Ctrl. Then. modifying offset values. right-click the pipe. When zoomed in close. or by using the arrow keys on your keyboard. click Finish on the Options Bar. Make minor adjustments to the sanitary system 71 Zoom in and select the double wye fitting for the sink drains. you can specify the elevation of a pipe’s reference end in the Element Properties for the pipe. right-click Sanitary 1. and on the Options Bar. specify the exact Offset. and click Select. 68 On the Options Bar. specify the slope for the piping to the left sink. click Multiple. click to select the reference end of the pipe. 70 In the drawing area. expand Sanitary. click 69 On the Edit System toolbar. The fitting moves up and at the same time the piping attached to its legs automatically adjusts and maintains connectivity. there is a smaller movement. the piping to the middle sink is already sloped. click (Edit System). click Element Properties. 72 Press the down arrow on the keyboard twice to return the fitting to its original location. select all 3 sinks. (Add to System). With the piping created and the slope and connectivity properly defined.66 Using the same method. Connecting Sinks to the Sanitary System | 369 . The sinks are added to the Sanitary 1 system in the System Browser. You can move fixtures by dragging.

Pipe Bend . select the 2 bends connecting the 45-degree legs of the double-wye to the horizontal pipe segments. 75 Using the method learned earlier. (After the third tab. highlight the leftmost sink. 74 Select the 2 elbows in the section of piping between the double wye fitting and the reducing sanitary wye. select Pipe Bend .When the piping was created for the sink drains.DWV .Glued : Standard. and in the Type Selector.Glued : Standard in the Type Selector.) 370 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .PVC : Standard components were used because the shorter size of this fitting works well with the automated Routing Solutions.DWV . and select Pipe Bend .DWV .Glued : Standard. 73 While pressing Ctrl. and press Tab 3 times to check connectivity. Now that the routing is completed. the entire system should be highlighted. you can change these to the more commonly used Pipe Bend .

Refining the Sanitary Stack | 371 . click the Training Files icon. while maintaining the same angle.76 If you want to save your work. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 1 In the Project Browser. 77 You can save the open file if you wish. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 2 Zoom in on the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe connected to the sanitary outlet. 78 Click File menu ➤ Close. 79 Proceed to the next exercise. adjusting the sanitary stack. and double-click 3D Plumbing to make it the active view. Refining the Sanitary Stack on page 371 to continue creating the sanitary system. and select the horizontal pipe. otherwise. 3 Click the pipe’s connector snap at the elbow. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise you continue with the work on the sanitary system. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Refining Waste Stack Connection. click File menu ➤ Save As. and carefully drag it away from the elbow. skip the next 2 steps.

press the Space Bar once (so that the fitting assumes the elevation of the end of the pipe). click Pipe Fitting. and select Pipe Reducing Wye . and when the Extension snap displays. and click to place the fitting.Glued : Standard. and press Delete.DWV . and on the Options Bar.4 Select the elbow. 372 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 5 Select the vertical pipe segment. specify 6" for D (diameter). Add a reducing wye to the stack 6 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. 7 Move the cursor over the center of the open end of the vertical pipe.

Plumbing. and click Modify. draw a section to the right of the sanitary outlet as shown. enter 4 to change its size. 11 On the View tab on the Design Bar. and press Enter. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 373 . If necessary. double-click 2 . to rotate the 45 degree leg until it is pointing toward 9 Select the wye. and zoom in on the sanitary outlet.8 Click Modify. The wye is added to the vertical segment. and click the sanitary piping. select the wye. Create a Section view to complete the stack connections 10 Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. click Section. click the value for the 45 degree leg.

13 On the View Control Bar. click Draw Pipe. enter -2' 6" for Offset. specify Fine. press Space so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. click to specify the end of the pipe. 16 Right-click the connector on the 45 degree leg. 14 Zoom in. and select the reducing wye fitting. and draw the pipe in line with 45 degree leg and when the center line for the main segment displays. This places the wye at a level that will allow creating a routing solution that will not change the slope of the main segment. and press Enter. 374 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 15 On the Options Bar. for Detail Level.12 Double-click the section view symbol in the drawing area to open the new section view.

select solution 3 of 3. select the short pipe segment and the main pipe. 21 Right-click the open connector on the reducing wye. 18 While pressing Ctrl. The fitting moves toward the pipe being added after the pipe is drawn. click Draw Pipe. 20 Select the bend created by the routing solution tool. then enter 4 0 and press Enter to add a 4' 0" vertical vent pipe. and on the Options Bar. 19 On the Options Bar. and in the Type Selector. it will be necessary to move the piping after making the connection. This adds a short segment of pipe (from the wye). Refining the Sanitary Stack | 375 . and in the Type Selector select Pipe Bend . However. 23 Click Modify. when the location is critical. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent. 22 Move the cursor up and press Space to assume the size and elevation of the fitting.NOTE There is a known issue when connecting piping to the reducing tee. click Routing Solutions.DWV . and click Finish to create piping for that solution.Glued : Standard. 17 Click Modify. The exact position of the riser is not critical in this application. 24 Check slope and connectivity as described previously.

and double-click 2 Plumbing to make it the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Refining the Urinal Lines The waste piping from the urinal extends down through floor directly beneath the urinals before connecting to the sanitary main piping. 1 In the Project Browser. then down to connect with the sanitary main. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.) 376 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. 26 Click File menu ➤ Close. use the Filter tool to select only piping and fittings. 2 Zoom in on the piping behind the urinals. and draw a left-to-right pick box around the piping above the urinals as shown. In this exercise you change the routing for the waste piping from the urinals. Refining the Urinal Lines on page 376 to continue creating the plumbing system. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.25 You can save the open file if you wish. running it inside the wall.rvt. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. (If necessary. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Refining Urinal Waste Lines. click the Training Files icon.

and drag it to the right to a point midway between the toilet and urinal. click the connector snap. starting at the level of the original pipe. (Connect Into). 6 On the Options Bar. then placing a vertical segment and continuing the run at 0' 6". 4 Select the pipe connected to the wye above the leftmost toilet. 12 In the Select Connector dialog. click to specify the end of the pipe. The next 4 steps draw a series of pipe segments. do the following: ■ ■ Verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary is selected in the Type Selector For D. specify 2" Click (Auto Connect) ■ ■ For slope. and when the snap for the center line of the leftmost urinal displays. press the Space so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. click the pipe above the urinal. 11 Select the leftmost urinal. 5 Right-click the connector at the open end of the shortened pipe. click Connector 2 : Sanitary Round : 2" Out. for Offset. and click to specify the end of the pipe. click Draw Pipe. 10 Click Modify. click 13 In the drawing area. 9 Continue drawing the pipe run to the left. and on the Options Bar. Refining the Urinal Lines | 377 . 8 On the Options Bar. and click OK.3 Press Delete. enter 0' 6" and press Tab. specify 1/8" /12" 7 Drag the preview to the left approximately 8". and finally connecting to the sanitary drain on the left urinal.

Plumbing to make it the active view. clear Plumbing Fixtures and click OK. verify that 1/8" /12" for Slope. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. Do not include the riser and fitting. 16 In the Filter dialog. click The slope is applied to the selected piping. and on the Options Bar. connect the remaining urinals to the sanitary main. 17 On the Routing Modify toolbar. 15 Draw a pick box around the 3 urinals and the horizontal 2" piping just added as shown. 19 In the Project Browser. click (Filter Selection). (Slope). and click Finish. 378 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . double-click 3D. 18 On the Options Bar.14 Using the same method. and check the slope and connectivity as described previously.

Plumbing to make it the active view.Resize pipes 20 In the Project Browser. double-click 2 . So. specify 3" for D (diameter). you cannot upgrade an elbow to a tee unless all of the connections are the same size. In the next steps you will change the elbow behind the left urinal to a tee to create the cleanout. 21 Zoom in on the piping above the urinals. 22 On the Options Bar. However. first you must temporarily resize the pipe to the urinal. and draw a left-to-right pick box around only the main piping (including the short 4" segment) as shown. Refining the Urinal Lines | 379 .

and on the Options Bar. double-click 3D. specify 2" for D.Add a cleanout 23 Select the pipe between the 3" elbow and the left urinal. verify that Pipe Reducing Short Tee . click Pipe Fitting. and in the Type Selector. 32 Select the vertical pipe segment between the toilets and the urinals. 30 In the Project Browser. for D. select Pipe PVC Plug : Standard.Plumbing to make it the active view. 25 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. This eliminates the need for transitions between the pipes and the tees. and click the + control on the left to add a leg for the cleanout. 24 Select the elbow. and on the Options Bar. specify 3" for D (diameter). 29 Select the 2" pipes connecting the urinal drains to the main.Glued : Standard is selected.Sanitary . and zoom in on the area between the toilet and the leftmost urinal. 26 Move the cursor over the open connector on the sanitary tee above the leftmost urinal. and in the Type Selector. Redefine fittings 28 Select the 3 sanitary tees behind the urinals. 31 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ North. 380 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and drag it to a point midway between the 2 sanitary tees. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. select 3". then select 2". and when the extension snap displays. click to place the plug on the tee. and on the Options Bar. 27 Select the pipe to the urinal again.

Glued : Standard. 34 Select the elbows at each end of the vertical pipe. and zoom in on the area between the toilet and the leftmost urinal. Refining the Urinal Lines | 381 . 35 Check slope and connectivity as described previously. 33 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast.DVW . and select Pipe Bend .This will provide the space required to change the short elbows to the DWV Bends that allow better sanitary waste flow.

a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. and click the + control above it to change the fitting to a tee. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 37 Click File menu ➤ Close. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Creating Sanitary Vent Piping. If necessary. 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Select the elbow at the upper end of the vertical pipe segment. click the Training Files icon. expand Plumbing ➤ 3D Views and double-click 3D Plumbing to view the piping just added.rvt. Adding Vents to the System on page 382 to continue creating the plumbing system. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Vents to the System In this exercise you finish the work on the sanitary system.36 You can save the open file if you wish. 382 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . clear unwanted components from the 3D view using the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog as described previously. adding the vent piping at several points in the waste piping. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and zoom in on the area between the toilets and the urinals.

10 On the Filters tab in the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. specify 0" for Rise/12". do the following: a Click Edit/New. 5 Click the connector at the upper end of the tee to specify the start of the pipe. click Pipe. Adding Vents to the System | 383 . specify 2" for D (diameter). VG (Visibility/Graphics). 8 Click Modify. NOTE You must press Tab or move the cursor into the drawing area for the new offset value to be recognized. Apply a filter to the vent piping 9 Enter the keyboard shortcut.4 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. select Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent. and specify 14' for Offset. 6 On the Options Bar. 7 Click Apply. and in the Type Selector.

Plumbing to make it the active view. click the Color button. select Sanitary Vent. and click Override. Create additional vents 11 Double-click Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans ➤ 2 . g For Sanitary Vent. click the Lines column. i In the Line Graphics dialog. and click OK. select Sanitary from the Filters list. and click OK. click Add. 12 On the View tab on the Design Bar. select IMPORT-DASHED (2) j Click OK twice. and in the Color dialog.b In the Filters dialog. h In the Line Graphics dialog. d Under the Filter Rules. and place a section above the urinals and toilets as shown. and click (Duplicate). and click OK. and click OK. click Section. f In the Add Filters dialog. for Pattern. rename the filter Sanitary Vent. click Rename. select (green). 384 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . Vent piping throughout the plan appear as dashed green lines. and zoom in to view the urinals and toilets. e In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. c Right-click Sanitary 1. specify Filter by as System Type ➤ contains ➤ Sanitary Vent.

specify Wireframe. 17 On the Options Bar. 15 On the View Control Bar. click to specify the end of the first pipe section. and enter the keyboard shortcut VG. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. then drag the preview to the right and when the center snap for the previously created vent displays. clear unwanted architectural components from the view as described previously. specify Fine. 20 At a point above the toilets.13 Double-click the section symbol to open the section view. and on the Options Bar. click to make the connection to the vent as shown. and enter 1/8" /12" for slope. 18 Click a point midway between the tees connecting the first toilet and floor drain to specify the start of the pipe. click Pipe. and for Model Graphics Style. and verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector. 16 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. Adding Vents to the System | 385 . 19 Begin drawing the vertical pipe. for Detail Level. verify the (Auto Connect) is selected. specify 2" for D (diameter).

f Click Modify. d When the snap for the center line for the cross displays. 22 Right-click the new horizontal pipe. c For D. under Instance Parameters. 386 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . b Begin the vertical pipe. The vent is automatically created and connected with the earlier vent pipe. enter 9' 6" to specify the elevation for the reference end of the pipe. for Offset. and click to make the connection. and click Element Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. press Tab to display the connector.21 Click Modify. draw the pipe to the left to the open leg of the cross. and click the + control to update the tee to a cross. specify 2". 24 Select the tee that was inserted when you connected the vents. and click OK. e If necessary. 25 Place another vent between the two rightmost urinals: a Click the midpoint of the pipe between the urinals.

Plumbing to make it the active view. use the Flip control to make the adjustment.26 Double-click 3D . Adding Vents to the System | 387 . 27 If either of the tees that were added need to be reoriented according to the slope of the piping.

click Draw Pipe. specify 2" for D (diameter). 33 Click Modify. select the tee and the short pipe segment that connects it to the double wye. then click Apply. 29 Select the elbow above the double wye for the drain section to the middle sink.Add a vent to the sinks 28 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. verify that Pipe Types : PVC Sanitary Vent is selected in the Type Selector. specify 2" for D (diameter). 30 While pressing Ctrl. 31 Right-click the tee. 388 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . and click the + control above the elbow to change it to a tee. 32 On the Options Bar. and specify 9' 6" for Offset. and begin drawing a vertical vent pipe. and zoom in on the area of the double wye behind the sinks. move the cursor into the drawing area. and on the Options Bar.

and click Finish. and click the snap at the horizontal vent pipe to specify the endpoint for the pipe. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the vent pipe. 37 Drag the pipe preview. and on the Routing Modify toolbar. Adding Vents to the System | 389 . A tee is automatically inserted at the joint. toward the horizontal vent segment between the toilets and urinals. 38 Select the horizontal vent pipe. 36 On the Options Bar specify 0" /12" for slope.34 Zoom out to view the vents from the toilets and urinals and the new vent from the sinks. while maintaining a 90 degree angle. right-click the connector at the open end. click Draw Pipe. (Slope). 35 Select the vent. click 39 Enter 1/8" /12" for slope.

click Rename. enter Cold Water. 4 In the Rename dialog. Create the Cold Water System In this exercise you create the cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.40 Highlight any component in the system and press Tab 3 times to check the connectivity of the system as described previously. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Creating Cold Water Piping. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. 41 You can save the open file if you wish. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. 42 Click File menu ➤ Close. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. click Properties.rvt. 390 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . right-click Standard. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create the Cold Water System on page 390 to continue creating the plumbing system. 2 Right-click Standard 1. Create new pipe types and specify default pipe fittings 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate. click the Training Files icon. for New. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

click Mechanical Settings. in the right pane. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. 14 Click OK. 11 In the left pane. Specify Mechanical Settings for the cold and hot water systems 7 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. Create the Cold Water System | 391 . for Name. and in the right pane. Create the cold water system 15 In the Project Browser. and double-click 2 . and avoids potential obstructions and conflicts between systems. 13 In the left panel. verify that the following default fittings are specified: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Elbow. and specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 9' 3" for Offset. specify Pipe Elbow : Standard For Preferred Junction Type. and in the Name dialog. select Domestic Hot Water from the System Type list. and click OK twice. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. The default fittings for the hot water pipe are the same as those specified for the cold water pipe. and as long as there is a fixture without a common connector type. specify Pipe Straight Coupling: Standard 6 Click Apply. 8 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 10 In the left pane.Plumbing to make it the active view. click Main. 21 On the Options Bar. enter Hot Water. specify Pipe Tee: Standard For Tap. specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 9' 0" for Offset. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. click View ➤ Piping. 12 In the table.5 In the Type Properties dialog. which places the piping above the ceiling. 16 Press F9 to open the System Browser. then select Plumbing Fixtures. in the Type Parameters under Mechanical. and in the right pane. 19 In the Filter dialog. specify None For Cross. the Options Bar will not have active tools for creating a system. specify Pipe Cross: Standard For Transition. and specify Pipe Types : Hot Water for Pipe Type and 9' 0" for Offset. You now have the cold water piping at 9' 3" and the hot water piping at 9' 0". click (Create Domestic Cold Water System). click Check None. and on the Options Bar click (Filter Selection). specify Tee For Tee. select Domestic Cold Water from the System Type list. click the title bar for the browser and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. specify Pipe Transition : Standard For Union. 9 In the table. 17 Right-click a table heading in the system browser. click Branch. in the right pane. then click Duplicate. and click OK. click the floor drain. specify Pipe Types : Cold Water for Pipe Type and 9' 3" for Offset. click Branch. 18 Draw a left-to-right pick box around all of the plumbing fixtures in the men’s room. 20 While pressing Shift. click Main. The floor drain has neither a hot or cold water connector.

35 On the Plumbing tab. 30 Enter the keyboard shortcut VG. select the domestic cold water connector. 26 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. click Show categories from all disciplines. 31 In the Visibility/Graphic dialog. and click the cold water pipe behind the sinks. Piping is added to connect the sink to the cold water system. specify 0" /12" for Slope. 34 Zoom in on the area between the middle and rightmost sink. click to specify the starting point for the pipe. click Pipe. and click to end the run as shown. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. click (Connect Into). click Pipe. Create piping for the cold water system 22 Zoom in on the area below the sinks. 28 Move the preview up to the cold water connector on the sink. and click OK. 33 In the Select Connector dialog. click a point between the sink and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe. 392 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . clear Casework. and in the Type Selector. click OK. 24 On the Option Bar. 27 Drag the preview to the right until the snap for the cold water connector for the rightmost sink displays. 25 Move the cursor over the cold water connector on the leftmost sink. 32 Select the middle sink in the view.The Domestic Cold Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Cold Water 1 system. 23 On the Plumbing tab on the Design Bar. and click to specify the end the segment. 29 Click Modify. specify 2' 6" for Offset. select Pipe Types : Cold Water.

press Tab. and click to specify an endpoint for the pipe. 38 On the Options Bar. click to specify the end of the pipe. (If necessary. select the cold water pipe. 37 Click to specify the starting point for the pipe as shown. 40 Zoom in on the area between the toilets. and click Apply. and verify that the cold water pipe is not obstructed by the vertical vent. specify 1' 2" for Offset. drag the preview into the center of the wall behind the sinks.36 Move the cursor over the cold water pipe at a point between the sinks. 39 Click Modify. and at a point near the vent that rises between the toilets and urinals. press Tab to avoid connecting to the sanitary piping. click Pipe. Create the Cold Water System | 393 . and use the keyboard left arrow to move the pipe to the left. drag the preview up and into the mechanical room above the men’s room.) 41 On the Plumbing tab. 44 On the Options Bar. and click to end that segment. 42 Move the cursor over a point on the cold water pipe in the chase. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. click the snap on the cold water pipe. just above the wall. 43 Drag the preview to the left. specify 9' 3" for Offset.

49 Select the elbow behind the toilet. double-click 3D. right-click the open connector. and then click the vertical cold water pipe. click Pipe. and click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 51 Select the tee. click to specify the endpoint as shown. select the rightmost toilet. click Draw Pipe. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the fixture. 52 Drag the preview to the left while maintaining the same angle. 394 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 50 On the Plumbing tab. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. and when the center line for the left toilet displays. Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. 47 Zoom in on the area behind the toilets. 48 On the Options Bar click (Connect Into).Plumbing.45 Click Modify. and click the + control to change it to a tee. 46 In the Project Browser.

56 Use the same method. 55 Select the rightmost urinal. . and on the Options Bar click pipe. and on the Options Bar click water pipe that you added to the tee. and click the vertical cold water Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. and click the horizontal cold Piping is automatically created between the vertical pipe and the toilet cold water connector. . 54 Select the leftmost toilet.53 Click Modify. Create the Cold Water System | 395 . connect the remaining urinals to the horizontal cold water pipe.

Adjust cold water pipe sizes 57 Use the View Cube in the upper-right corner of the view to spin the 3D . The final steps in this exercise adjust the size of several sections of the piping.Plumbing view as shown. and the horizontal segment to the sinks. 58 Select the main cold water piping from the mechanical room. the tee. as shown.All of the cold water piping is in place. 396 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems .

62 Spin the 3D Plumbing view as needed to see the piping behind the sinks. as shown. Create the Cold Water System | 397 .59 On the Options Bar. specify 2" for D (diameter). 61 On the Options Bar. feeding the toilets and urinals (including the tees. 63 Select the main and branch pipe segments as shown (including the tee behind the middle sink). 60 Select the cold water branch piping from the main. specify 1 1/2" for D (diameter). but leaving the branch to the urinals as is).

Open Imperial ➤ Plumbing ➤ i Creating Hot Water Piping. double-click 2 . 66 You can save the open file if you wish. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. Create the Hot Water System In this exercise you add a water heater. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and add piping to connect the sinks in the men’s room to the system. 65 Highlight a segment of cold water pipe in the system and press Tab to check the connectivity of the system as described previously. 398 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . Create the Hot Water System on page 398. create the hot water system. and zoom in on the sinks.64 On the Options Bar. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. specify 3/4" for D (diameter). click the Training Files icon. 67 Click File menu ➤ Close. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser.Plumbing.rvt.

click (Filter Selection). click Check None. 5 In the Filter dialog. click Mechanical Equipment. click (Edit System). right-click Domestic Cold Water 1. 9 Expand Imperial ➤ Plumbing. click (Create Domestic Hot Water System). 6 On the Options Bar. and click Select. press the Space Bar 3 times to orient the water heater with the electrical connections to the left. Add a water heater to the hot and cold water systems 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and click to place the water heater as shown. and click View ➤ Piping. Create the Hot Water System | 399 . to the left of the main cold water pipe. select Plumbing Fixtures. click the water heater.rfa. 10 Double-click Water Heater. expand Domestic Hot Water. The Domestic Hot Water folder is added in the system browser and all of the fixtures have been added to the Domestic Hot Water 1 system. 14 In the System Browser. and on the Edit 17 In the System Browser. click Finish. 13 Move the water heater preview into the mechanical room. 3 Right-click a table heading in the System Browser. 4 Draw a left-to-right pick box around the 3 sinks in the men’s room. click the Training Files icon. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 11 Zoom in on the mechanical room above the men’s room. 12 On the Mechanical tab on the Design Bar. right-click Domestic Hot Water 1. 15 On the Options Bar. click the title bar for the browser. (Add to System). and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. click System toolbar. and in the Type Selector.2 Press F9 to open the System Browser. and on the Options Bar. The Edit System toolbar is activated. and click OK. expand Domestic Cold Water. and click Select. select Water Heater : 40Gallon. 16 On the Edit System toolbar.

26 Specify an end point for the pipe between the water heater and the cold water pipe to the right. click OK. add the water heater to the cold water system. and on the Options Bar. 400 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . click (Connect Into). specify 8' 6" for Offset. and click the main cold water pipe. and in the Type Selector. click Pipe. and then drag the pipe preview down to a point to the right and just above the middle sink. 24 Move the cursor over the water heater. click when the hot water connector displays. click Draw Pipe. and add 2 segments extending the main cold water piping into the chase. click (Edit System).18 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. select the domestic cold water connector. 20 Select the water heater in the view. 23 On the Plumbing tab. 19 Using the same method. select Pipe Types : Hot Water. right-click the connector. 22 Select the open end of the main cold water pipe. 25 On the Options Bar. A segment of pipe is added connecting the water heater to the cold water system. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector.

select Pipe Types : Hot Water. 33 Click Modify. click Pipe. and click to specify the end of the segment. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. and in the Type Selector.27 Click Modify. 30 On the Options Bar. click to specify the starting point for the pipe. Create the Hot Water System | 401 . 32 Move the preview up to the hot water connector on the sink and click to end the run as shown. 31 Click a point between the cold water piping and the wall to specify the endpoint for the pipe. drag the preview to the right until the snap below the hot water connector for the rightmost sink displays. 29 Move the cursor over the hot water connector on the leftmost sink. specify 2' 8" for Offset. 28 On the Plumbing tab.

click Apply. and zoom in on the area behind the sinks. the Select Connector dialog was not displayed because the only possible connection was to the hot water system. specify 2' 8" for Offset.Plumbing. 37 Drag the preview down into the center of the wall below the sinks. click click the hot water pipe below the sinks. and press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. 36 Right-click the open connector. double-click 3D. and click to end that segment. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ 3D Views. 35 Select the hot water piping from the water heater. 38 On the Options Bar.34 Select the middle sink in the view. click the connector at the open end of the vertical hot water pipe. 402 | Chapter 7 Plumbing Systems . 40 In the Project Browser. 41 On the Plumbing tab. (Connect Into). and In this case. click Pipe. 39 Click Modify. click Draw Pipe. click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. press the Space Bar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the connector. and on the Options Bar.

44 In the Project Browser. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. This concludes the tutorial for plumbing systems. 45 Highlight a fixture in the view. 46 You can save the open file if you wish. double-click 2 .Plumbing. and click. press Tab 3 times to check connectivity as described previously. 47 Click File menu ➤ Close.42 While maintaining a 90 degree angle. 43 Click Modify. expand Mechanical ➤ Plumbing ➤ Floor Plans. drag the preview to the piping connecting the hot water connectors for the sinks. Create the Hot Water System | 403 .

404 .

you create a wet and dry fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. you create a system to logically connect the sprinklers.autodesk. You should maintain the relative path to the architectural model. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Revit MEP 2009. Designing Fire Protection Systems The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. NOTE The architectural model used with this tutorial is in the Architectural folder. you can choose to save your work. If the tutorial datasets are not present. By following the recommended workflow. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. After finishing each exercise. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. methodology. Then. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. On the Revit tab on the Manage Links dialog. insert fittings. go to http://www. However. click Reload From. you can click File menu ➤ Manage Links to reload the linked model. create schedules. In this lesson. and select i Office Building. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. manually modify the pipes and fittings. and size and tag the pipes. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. you will create both wet and dry fire protection systems for the second floor of an office building. At the end of this tutorial. However. This dataset includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems. You can search this directory to verify that the datasets have been downloaded. 405 .rvt. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Revit MEP 2009. you create views and pipe types. You begin each fire protection system design by placing sprinklers in the rooms. if the link is lost. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided dataset. navigate to Training Files ➤ Imperial ➤ Architectural. and finally.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. As you create the systems. During the fire protection design process. The datasets that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. you will understand the process.Fire Protection Systems 8 In this tutorial. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. In this tutorial.

and click OK. click the Training Files icon. click Mechanical Settings. Configure pipe conversion settings 10 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. and click Duplicate. You create new pipe types. 9 In the Type Selector. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. Next. enter Fire Protection Wet. do the following: ■ For Pipe Type. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Notice that the new dry pipe type inherits the same type properties from the wet pipe type. and click Fire Protection. and click OK. you modify the pipe type properties. click Rename. select Carbon Steel. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. select Main. and enter Fire Protection Dry for the new pipe type name. select Fire Protection Wet. Next. right-click the Design Bar. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. You can also click Settings menu ➤ Mechanical Settings. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Click OK twice to create the new wet and dry pipe types. Next. including the new material property. you begin work on the project that contains both the wet and dry fire protection systems. Open the i Starting the Fire Protection Project. Create new pipe types 1 In the Project Browser. under Mechanical. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. 2 Right-click Standard. 11 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 With the Type Properties dialog open. 13 Under System Type. NOTE If the Fire Protection tab is not available on the Design Bar.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. 5 In the Rename dialog. you create another pipe type based on the new pipe type that you created. 12 For System Type.Starting the Fire Protection Project In this exercise. you need to configure the pipe conversion settings. for Material. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet and Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry are listed. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. click Duplicate. 3 Right-click the copy. for New. 406 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 6 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Properties.

22 While pressing Ctrl. Create a Space Schedule 19 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. select Fire Protection Wet. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. 15 For System Type. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. structural beams. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. and click Add. for System Type Fire Protection Dry. and click Remove.■ For Offset. 18 Click OK. select Spaces. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. 17 Using the same method. select the following fields from the Available fields list: ■ ■ ■ Level Name Number 23 Click Add to add the fields to the Scheduled fields list. You can also configure these settings by clicking Settings on the Options Bar when the Layout Path tool is open. select Branch. This adds the Area field to the list of scheduled fields to include in the schedule. For Offset. for Offset verify 9' 0". verify that 9' 0" is specified. verify that 9' 0" is selected. select it. duct. So. and specify Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry for the Main and Branch piping. However. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 407 . select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. ■ ■ Define columns 21 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 20 In the New Schedule dialog. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. 16 Under System Type. 14 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. select Area. under Available fields. the pipe main will be offset from level 2. click Schedule/Quantities. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. or architectural components. To remove a field. do the following: ■ Under Category. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. Scheduled fields display as columns in the schedule. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project.

verify that (none) is selected. For And. select Minimum Sprinklers. For Discipline. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. This information is based on the project specification and the fire protection codes. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design and code requirements. select Number.24 Select a field. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. do the following: ■ ■ Under Fields. verify that Number is selected. you create a calculated value parameter to indicate the minimum number of sprinklers required for each space. For Then by. 29 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Under Level. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). select Level 2. Verify that Grand totals is cleared and Itemize every instance is selected. Organize the data 28 On the Filter tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Minimum Sprinklers. For Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to arrange the Scheduled fields list as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Level Area Next. enter Area/130. verify that Common is selected. Verify that Formula is selected. The fire protection code requires one sprinkler for every 130 square feet. select Level. Verify that Ascending is selected. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. 408 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Create a calculated value parameter 25 Click Calculated Value. verify that (none) is selected. For Formula. For Field formatting. 30 On the Formatting tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Verify that equals is selected. 26 In the Calculated Value dialog. click Field Format. 27 Click OK.

You then created 2 new pipe types for the wet and dry fire protection systems and modified their type properties. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. you created new views and modified view properties. In this exercise. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. you place the wet system sprinklers. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.31 In the Format dialog. Next. 32 You can save the open file if you wish. Click OK twice. The conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems were also configured. For Units. A new view called Space Schedule opens and is located under Schedules/Quantities in the Project Browser. Although you rounded the data to 2 decimal places. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. Starting the Fire Protection Project | 409 . 33 Click File menu ➤ Close. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. you place the wet system sprinklers in the level 2 spaces. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). you will want to round all decimals up to the next whole number. In the next exercise. For Rounding. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. As a result. select Fixed. Notice that only the data for the level 2 spaces displays. Placing Sprinklers on page 410. select 2 decimal places. sorted according to space number. Finally. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. You can refer to the minimum number of sprinklers per space data as you place sprinklers in order to satisfy the design and code requirements. you created a Space Schedule for fire protection systems.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. Place a sprinkler 1 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion or a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. 2 Enter ZR. 5 On the Options Bar. click Sprinkler. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. and double-click 2 . As you place the sprinklers. click (Place on Face) to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. you place the fire protection wet system sprinklers in the ceilings of the spaces on level 2. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Ceiling Plans. You will use the schedule that you created in the previous exercise to identify the required number of sprinklers per room.Ceiling Fire Prot to make it the active view.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. When there is a small misalignment. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 410 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . When this happens. 4 In the Type Selector. 3 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar.Placing Sprinklers In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. After placing the initial sprinkler. and sketch a zoom region around Office 201 (located in the upper-left corner of the building). select Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 1/2" Pendent. click the Training Files icon. Open the i Placing Sprinklers. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers.

place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tile as shown. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. Continue placing sprinklers 8 In the drawing area. 7 Click Modify on the Design Bar. and that Copy is selected. First specify the start point on the element that you want to copy and then specify the end point (or destination). 11 Select the upper-left corner of the ceiling grid. and after the intersection snap displays. You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool.6 With the view zoomed. You copy this sprinkler to place the other sprinklers. click to specify the copy start point. The selected sprinkler displays in red. Also the cursor changes indicating that the Copy tool is open. and click to place the sprinkler. verify that Constrain and Multiple are cleared. click (Copy). select the sprinkler that you placed. 10 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Edit toolbar. Placing Sprinklers | 411 . TIP Using the Copy tool is a 2-click process.

and after the intersection snap displays. The copy selection border follows the cursor. TIP If you have difficulty displaying an intersection snap because of other snaps interfering. 412 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . Note that snap overrides deactivate after you make a selection. You can also deactivate snaps in the Snaps dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Snaps). and listening dimensions display to aid in placement. you can enter SI to override all other snaps and display only intersection snaps.12 Move the cursor diagonally to the lower-right as shown. click to specify the copy end point.

This allows you to place multiple copies of an object without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 16 On the Options Bar. click to specify the copy start point. and select Multiple. Copy is selected. verify Constrain is cleared. Placing Sprinklers | 413 . Copy and array sprinklers 13 Zoom out to view the region around Office 201 and Office 202 (Office 202 is located immediately below Office 201). 15 On the Edit toolbar. place the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection immediately above the sprinkler that you selected. Next. 14 Select the lower-right sprinkler in Office 201. 17 In Office 201. you copy and array sprinklers in Office 202. click (Copy). and after the intersection snap displays.A copy of the sprinkler is immediately placed after you specify the end point.

414 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and after the intersection snap displays. click to specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler.18 Move the cursor down and to the right into Office 202.

Placing Sprinklers | 415 .19 Move the cursor directly down. click to specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler. and after the intersection snap displays.

The sprinklers are placed. 416 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

select Last. TIP You can also enter AR to activate the Array tool. Clear Group And Associate. 21 While pressing CTRL. you array the other Office 202 sprinklers. you can use the Array tool to finish the job. Rather than copy and place the rest of the sprinklers. Verify that 2 is specified for Number (of arrays). because all of the sprinklers in Office 202 are equally spaced. 22 On the Edit toolbar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. click (Array). A border displays around the 2 sprinklers. Placing Sprinklers | 417 . Verify that Constrain is cleared. it is an ideal situation to use an array. 23 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Next. For Move To.20 On the Design Bar. select the 2 sprinklers that you placed in Office 202. Furthermore.

then you move the cursor to the second or last location (if you have more than 2 arrays). to specify array end point.NOTE Similar to the Move or Copy tool. and after the intersection snap displays. You first specify an array start point. click to specify the array end point as shown. An outline follows the cursor to aid in placement. and after the intersection snap displays. creating an array is a 2-step process. 25 Move the cursor to the left along the same horizontal ceiling grid. 418 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 24 Move the cursor over the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the upper Office 202 sprinkler. click to specify the array start point.

The Office 202 sprinklers are placed. Placing Sprinklers | 419 .

420 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 27 While pressing Ctrl. 30 Place the cursor in the center of the selection border. 26 Zoom out to view all 3 offices along the left wall.Next. A border displays around the selected sprinklers indicating the copy selection. clear Multiple. click (Copy). 28 On the Edit toolbar. select both sprinklers in the corner office (Office 201). and after the mid point snap displays. you place sprinklers in Office 203. 29 On the Options Bar. click to specify the copy start point.

31 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid and into the center of Office 203. Placing Sprinklers | 421 . and after the mid point snap displays. click to specify the copy end point.

NOTE If you have difficulty locating the mid point snap. enter SM to override all other snaps and display only mid point snaps. 422 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

click (Copy). Placing Sprinklers | 423 . you place sprinklers in the large common space. 32 Click Modify. You copy this sprinkler to Open 204 and use it to create a sprinkler array. 37 Specify the copy start point at the upper-left ceiling grid intersection directly above the sprinkler. 34 Select the lower-right Office 203 sprinkler. Open 204. verify that Multiple is cleared.You have now placed the sprinklers for 3 offices. Next. 36 On the Options Bar. 35 On the Edit toolbar. Create multiple sprinkler arrays 33 Zoom in to view Office 203 and part of the adjacent common area. Open 204.

40 Select the sprinkler that you copied. but creating an array is quicker. 39 Click Modify. and after the intersection snap displays. 42 On the Options Bar. enter 6 for the number of arrays. Next. Verify that Group And Associate is cleared. The Office 203 sprinkler is copied to Open 204. 424 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . select 2nd. 41 On the Edit toolbar. click to place the sprinkler. Verify that Constrain is cleared. For Number. click (Array). do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. For Move To. you array this sprinkler to place multiple sprinklers in the lower section of Open 204. You could copy sprinklers.38 Move the cursor to the right into Open 204 as shown. 43 Specify the ceiling grid intersection to the upper-right of the sprinkler as the array start point.

and after the intersection snap displays. The array is created.44 Move the cursor along the same horizontal ceiling grid to the right. Zoom out to display the array. Placing Sprinklers | 425 . click to specify the array end point as shown.

click to specify end point for the second array. 45 While pressing CTRL. you create multiple arrays based on this array. enter 4 for number of arrays. verify that 2nd is selected. 426 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 48 Specify the array start point at the ceiling grid intersection directly to the upper-left of the left sprinkler as shown. Next.IMPORTANT When specifying array start and end points make certain that the array is placed accurately. 49 Move the cursor directly down along the same vertical ceiling grid. 46 On the Edit toolbar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that (Linear) is selected for a linear array. click (Array). and after the intersection snap displays. Verify that Group And Associate is cleared. For Number. Any misplacement has a multiplier effect as the array propagates. If you make a mistake placing the array. select all the sprinklers except for the far left sprinkler in the Open 204 space. For Move To. undo the step and try again. 47 On the Options Bar. Verify that Constrain is cleared.

Notice that 3 sprinklers are located outside of the building.The arrays are created. Sprinkler placement for the lower section of Open 204 is complete Placing Sprinklers | 427 . 51 Expand the 3 Warnings. and click Delete Checked to delete the 3 sprinklers. You need to remove these sprinklers to resolve the errors. click Expand. and an error message displays informing you that 3 sprinklers do not lie on the host face (ceiling tiles). click the check box associated with each warning. 50 In the Revit MEP 2009 dialog.

428 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . click Sprinkler. move the cursor to the approximate center of the space. and double-click 2 . first. and so on) in the RFA (Revit Family) file. To modify a family type. and click Modify. you need to load them in the project. and then to edit the family in the Family Editor. 54 Open the Sprinkler -Upright. you will use a non-hosted sprinkler. and sketch a zoom region around the Mechanical/Electrical space (located between the Men’s and the Ladies’ rooms). select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright.Fire Prot to make it the active view. you place a sprinkler in the Mechanical/Electrical space. click to place the sprinkler.rfa file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection folder. IMPORTANT A family contains one or more family types (different sizes.Next. click the Training Files icon. click Edit Family on the Options Bar. Because this space does not have a ceiling. However. Families are loaded and saved in the current project (dataset). The sprinkler family loads into the project. Place non-hosted sprinklers 55 In the Project Browser. 58 In the Type Selector. 56 Enter ZR. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. These family types can be selected in the Type Selector or under Families in the Project Browser. select an instance of the family type in the drawing area. 59 In the Mechanical/Electrical space. 57 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. Load a new sprinkler family 52 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 53 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Placing Sprinklers | 429 . enter 10' 6".Ceiling Fire Prot. Unconstrain the sprinkler when deleting the dimension. click Dimension. 63 In the Project Browser. and notice that the sprinkler displays in the Mechanical/Electrical space. 61 In the Element Properties dialog. 60 Right-click the sprinkler. and on the Options Bar. and click Element Properties. double-click 2 . 66 Click to center the sprinkler between the upper and lower wall. Next you adjust the offset. then click the wall face of the lower wall. 67 Select the dimension. click the center of the sprinkler. and press Delete. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the 2 . do the following: ■ ■ Verify that (Aligned) is selected For Prefer.The sprinkler is added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. as shown. select Wall Faces 65 Click the upper wall face. and because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. and move the dimension to the left. 62 Click OK. NOTE Click the center of the sprinkler. and when a dot displays click to specify the center. under Instance Parameters.Ceiling Fire Prot view. for Offset. Do not click the vertical line that displays as the reference. 64 On the Design Bar.

then click Modify. Complete the level 2 sprinkler placement 69 Using the placement methods that you have learned. Grid snapping ensures accurate placement.68 Using the same method. center the sprinkler between the right and left walls. NOTE Do not place sprinklers in the stairwell or Server Room 215. Round decimals up to the next whole number. 430 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . complete the level 2 sprinkler placement according to the following criteria and floor plan: ■ Refer to the room schedule to verify the required number of sprinklers for each room. You will create a Fire Protection Dry System in Server Room 215 in a later exercise. snap to the ceiling grid intersections rather than entering placement dimensions. Use sprinkler type: Sprinkler-Pendent-Plane_Hosted : 1/2" Pendent for all rooms. Click to place the sprinklers on ceiling tile faces. ■ ■ NOTE When placing sprinklers.

a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. 73 You can save the open file if you wish. then select Sprinklers. and click (Filter). click to prevent further movement of the sprinklers that would cause misalignment. Placing Sprinklers | 431 . click Check None. 71 Draw a pick box around the entire model.Fire Prot. (Pin) 72 In the Filter dialog. and on the toolbar.70 In the Project Browser. double-click 2 .

piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. you connect the sprinklers both logically by creating a system. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. In the left pane of the Open dialog. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. and double-click 2 . you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods and loaded a new sprinkler family into the project. Unlike logical connections (systems). Connecting the Sprinklers In this exercise. 2 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans.74 Click File menu ➤ Close. click the Training Files icon.Fire Prot to make it the active view. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. Open the i Connecting Sprinklers. Connecting the Sprinklers on page 432. However. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and physically with piping. In the next exercise. After creating the logical connection. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. Then you simplify the layout using tools from the Layout Paths tab on the Design Bar to modify pipe branches after converting the initial layout to piping. In this exercise. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. 432 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

and click OK. Make certain to include the lower sprinklers in Office 203 and Office 211. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. You select only half of the sprinklers on level 2 because it makes connecting the sprinklers more manageable. and display pinned and in red. 6 On the Options Bar. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder.Explore the System Browser 3 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. All sprinklers in the lower half of the building are selected. click System Browser. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. click (Create Fire Protection Wet System) to create a fire protection wet system. click (Filter Selection) to filter the selected elements. Connect sprinklers with a system 5 Draw a pick box (from left to right) around the lower half of the building as shown. 7 In the Filter box. 4 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. click in the drawing area to make it active. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create your systems. then press F9. 8 On the Options Bar. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. Notice that system tools display on the Options Bar. select Sprinklers. Connecting the Sprinklers | 433 . TIP You can also press F9 (or click Window menu ➤ System Browser) to open or close the System Browser. and provides more layout path solutions to choose from when creating pipes. click Check None. As you assign sprinklers to systems. If the System Browser does not respond.

The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. place the cursor over a sprinkler. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. 11 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. and click Expand to view the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing. 12 With the Fire Protection Wet 1 system selected. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red indicating the logical connection. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. In the System Browser. all of the sprinklers in the system have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. named Fire Protection Wet 1. expand Piping. under Fire Protection Wet in the Piping folder. Next. 434 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . right-click Fire Protection Wet. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. and click Select. 10 Double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the sprinklers. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. click (Layout Path) on the Options Bar. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. select an initial piping layout. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. The Layout Paths tools are activated on the Design Bar and Options Bar. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. press Tab. and a piping layout preview displays. and select the system or select the Fire Protection Wet 1 again in the System Browser.

verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection Wet is selected. and on the Options Bar. You can also view possible layout path solutions by pressing the left and right keyboard arrow keys. 23 On the Design Bar. When the layout is finished. 20 Zoom in on the stairway at the right side of the model. (Layout Path) button is available on the Options Bar whenever a system component 13 On the Design Bar. 16 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. click Solutions. 17 Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. ■ Connecting the Sprinklers | 435 . 22 On the Options Bar. and for Offset. verify that 6"150 mm is specified for D. 14 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. and on the Options Bar. For Offset. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. click Solutions. click Place Base. and select solution 4. The layout path solution displays. IMPORTANT The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 21 Move the cursor over the lower-left corner of the stairwell. do the following: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 15 Under System Type: Fire Protection Wet.NOTE The is selected. click Settings. 18 Click OK. enter -12' 0". do the following: ■ Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. 19 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. Click (Previous Solution). verify that 9' 0" is specified. these settings will convert the base component to a 6" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). and click to place the base component as shown. select Branch. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. verify that Main is selected.

click Modify. A (parallel movement control) displays. 26 Select the vertical layout path segment. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. 25 Zoom in on the vertical main. On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. In general. you modify the selected layout.Next. Modify the layout 24 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. 436 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

27 Drag the parallel movement control to the left to a point to the right of the doorway for Office 216. and midway between the sprinklers above the office as shown. Connecting the Sprinklers | 437 . 28 Select the horizontal branch pipe to the lower sprinkler in Office 211.

feeding the sprinkler in Office 203. as shown. 438 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . (tee junction control) down to the intersection with the main piping just below 32 Scroll to the left. and drag the down to merge it with the horizontal piping below.29 Drag the parallel movement control down until the pipe merges with the horizontal piping to the left. select the horizontal branch again. (elbow junction control) The piping for Office 203 is reconnected to the branch in the open area. 30 Select the horizontal branch pipe. 31 Drag the it.

there are situations where you must make modifications outside of the Layout Paths. 36 Select the horizontal branch feeding the lower sprinkler in Office 211. Next you combine the piping for the sprinklers in Office 216 by dragging each end of the pipe separately. So far. Connecting the Sprinklers | 439 . 37 Drag the (tee junction control) up to the intersection of main and the branch above. whenever there is a branch feeding a single sprinkler. You can make many of these modifications using the Layout Paths tools. click (Thin Lines). In general.33 Zoom in on the 3 offices at the bottom of the model. you have been using parallel movements to combine piping. it is an opportunity to merge the piping into a shared branch. Thin lines make it easier to see the various drag controls when using junction and elbow controls. 35 On the toolbar. as shown. Drag the lower branch piping up to merge it with the branch piping. 34 Select the piping feeding the lower sprinkler in the left office. However.

The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. (elbow junction control) up to combine 39 On the Layout Paths tab of the Design Bar. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. or that offset elevations are incorrect. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing.38 Select the horizontal branch again. or manually modify the pipe. 440 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and drag the the branch piping. select a different layout solution. Either relocate the system components. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the lower half of level 2. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically inserted. click Finish Layout.

45 Draw the pipe to the right and when the snap below the sprinkler in Office 211 displays. 46 Select the sprinkler that was disconnected in the open area when the piping was deleted. as shown. click (Filter). as shown. on the Options Bar. Connecting the Sprinklers | 441 . click to specify the end point. clear Sprinklers. draw a pick box to select the piping feeding the lower sprinkler in Office 211. including the cross and transitions from the main piping. right-click the connector at the open end.Continue combining piping 40 Zoom in on Office 211. 43 Press Delete. click draw pipe. and click OK. 41 On the Options Bar. click in Office 211. 44 Select the horizontal pipe. and the sprinkler in the open area. 42 In the Filter dialog. then continue drawing the pipe up to connect the sprinkler. and verify that (Auto Connect) is selected on the Options Bar. (Connect Into). and click the horizontal pipe feeding the sprinkler 47 Drag the open end of the main piping up to connect with the horizontal piping as shown.

Reconnect the sprinklers in Office 214 and 216 52 Select the vertical pipe in Office 216.48 Zoom in on the 3 offices at the bottom of the model. and press Delete. 53 Select the horizontal pipe in Office 216. including the pipe and the tee as shown. 50 While pressing Ctrl. 49 Draw a pick box around the horizontal piping and fittings between the sprinklers in Office 216 and the main in Server Room 215. and drag the top connector up to connect with the horizontal piping in the open area. 442 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . as shown. select all the piping to the 2 lower sprinklers in Office 214. 51 Press Delete. and drag the connector to the right to connect with the vertical pipe as shown.

■ Continue dragging the preview down until aligned with the 2 lower sprinklers. click to specify the end point for the pipe. ■ Connecting the Sprinklers | 443 . and click to make the connection to the sprinkler. and press Space to assume the size and elevation of the horizontal pipe. and do the following: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. then drag the preview to the connector snap on the right-most sprinkler. Click Modify. 55 On the Design Bar. verify that (Auto Connect) is selected. Click the horizontal pipe between the left wall of Office 214 and the upper-left sprinkler. click Pipe. Drag the preview down.54 Zoom in on the office in the lower-right corner.

and on the toolbar click 57 Click each of the open-ended pipes. On the Options Bar. (Trim/Extend). and click the horizontal pipe as shown. click (Connect Into).■ Select the sprinkler to the left. ■ Reconnect the piping for Office 214 to the main 56 Zoom in on the open piping above Server Room 215. 444 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 445 . you created piping to physically connect the sprinklers. After creating the system. you created a system to logically connect the sprinklers. and press Tab twice. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. and double-click the 2 . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. In the next exercise. expand Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in. Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System on page 445. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. The entire system should be highlighted. In this exercise. and select the tee fitting connecting the main to the upper horizontal branch piping. 58 Click Modify. Open the i Completing the Wet System. Next. 1 In the Project Browser. 60 You can save the open file if you wish. and converted pipe fittings.An elbow is inserted to complete the connection. you add the sprinklers in the upper half of the model to the existing wet system. 61 Click File menu ➤ Close. and then you create piping to physically connect them. You confirmed the system and the assigned sprinklers in the System Browser. Check pipe connectivity 59 Highlight a pipe in the main for the system. indicating connectivity throughout the system. 62 Proceed to the next exercise.Fire Prot view. you create the dry fire protection system.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. checked connectivity. click the Training Files icon. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise.

Fire Prot view. you can select the pipe or duct. air terminals. System tools display on the Options Bar. 5 Click (Edit System) to edit the selected system. The cross provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the upper half of the model. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. NOTE Do not click (Select Equipment for System).3 Click the plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a cross. such as VAV boxes. and number of elements in the system. and so on) are logically connected by a system. system equipment. 4 In the 2 . boilers. radiators. 446 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . or sprinkler in the current wet system. The Edit System toolbar displays providing system editing tools. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). and AC units. select a pipe segment. You use this tool to add mechanical equipment that is located upstream in a system. mechanical equipment. or a system component to display system tools on the Options Bar. and pipe or duct is created. fitting.

For System Name. You are going to select multiple elements to include into the wet system. Select Multiple. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Add To System). This information reports that there are 30 sprinklers currently connected to the wet system. verify that Fire Protection Wet 1 is specified. verify that 30 is specified. 9 Draw a pick box from upper-left to lower-right around all of the sprinklers that need to be connected.6 On the Edit System toolbar. verify that None is specified. For System Equipment. Notice that the cursor has changed to indicate that Add To System is active. Notice that system components that are not connected to the Fire Protection Wet 1 system display as an underlay (they are grayed out). 8 Place the cursor outside Office 201 in the upper-left corner of the building. click 7 On the Options Bar. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 447 . You cannot select them. Do not worry about including sprinklers that are already connected. For Number of Elements.

The selected sprinklers display in red. and on the Options Bar. On the Options Bar. On the Options Bar. verify that Solutions is selected. select Network. 11 On the Edit System toolbar. (Layout 448 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . solution 1 3. The sprinklers in the upper half of the building are assigned to the Fire Protection Wet 1 and no longer display as an underlay. This is separate from the Finish for the System Editor. 13 On the Layout Paths tab on the Design Bar. click Paths). click Finish to finish editing the system. Number of Elements now displays as 65 (sprinklers) in the system. 10 NOTE When you use multiple selections. and click Modify. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. for Solution Type. click Finish to finish your selection of the sprinklers being added to the system. 14 On the Options Bar. you must click Finish on the Options bar to complete the selections. 12 Select a sprinkler in the upper half of the model.

and drag the elbow junction control to the left to combine the branch piping as shown. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 449 .The layout automatically provides a path from the upper layout to the cross created earlier. and drag the tee junction control to the intersection to the left as shown. 16 Select the vertical pipe to the lower sprinkler in the corner office (201). 15 Zoom in on the upper left corner of the model. 17 Select the vertical branch again.

19 Using the same method. 20 On the Design Bar.18 Scroll to the right and select the branch to the lower-right sprinkler in Office 208. The tee junction control will stop at the junction of the tee from the main piping. as shown. The piping for the upper half of the model displays. click Finish Layout. Click the tee junction control again and continue the adjustment. 450 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . drag each end of the branch to the left to combine it with the piping to the sprinkler just to above.

indicating connectivity throughout the system. As with the wet system. In an actual dry system. it is enough show how the system is created without adding a valve. The dry system prevents any water discharge onto sensitive computer equipment. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. and the pipes for this system would not contain water until a valve opens enabling water flow through the pipes to the sprinklers in order to extinguish the fire. The entire system should be highlighted. you create the dry fire protection system. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System on page 451. you added the remaining wet system sprinklers and logically connected them to the existing system. In the next exercise. and then you create a system and piping to logically and physically connect the sprinklers.Check pipe connectivity 21 Highlight the pipe from the riser in the stairwell. For this exercise. and checked connectivity. a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. you create a dry fire protection system for Server Room 215. 22 You can save the open file if you wish. you create the dry system by placing sprinklers. and press Tab 3 times. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System In this exercise. In this exercise. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 451 . 23 Click File menu ➤ Close. After creating the system. a valve would isolate the dry system from the wet system. you created piping to physically connect the sprinklers.

3 Select the lower sprinkler in Office 216. and double-click 2 . Be careful to select only the sprinkler.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Open the i Creating the Dry System.Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 452 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .Ceiling Fire Prot to make the view active. click the Training Files icon. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. If necessary. Place sprinklers 2 Zoom in to view the 3 spaces at the bottom of the model. press Tab until the sprinkler displays on the status bar at the lower left corner of the window. 1 In the Project Browser.

6 Move the cursor to the upper-left corner directly above the sprinkler. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 453 . 7 Move the cursor to the right into Server Room 215. as shown. Select Multiple to place multiple sprinkler copies in the ceiling. TIP You can also enter CO to activate the Copy tool. Verify that Copy is selected.4 On the Edit toolbar. along the same horizontal ceiling grid. click to specify the copy start point. click to specify the copy end point for the first sprinkler. 8 Click Modify. then move the cursor diagonally to the upper-right. and click to specify the copy end point for the second sprinkler. and after the ceiling grid intersection snap displays. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Constrain is cleared. Notice that a border around the selected sprinklers displays indicating the copy selection. 5 On the Options Bar. click (Copy). The sprinklers are placed in the ceiling.

14 Right-click the Fire Protection Dry 1 system category. This creates a slight slope for the dry system pipe run. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Dry. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For D: (diameter). Create the dry system piping 15 In the Project Browser.Next. 454 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . enter 1/8" / 12". select Sprinkler . double-click 2 . verify that 1/2" is selected. 19 On the Options Bar.Hosted : 1/2" Dry Pendent. For Slope. 16 Zoom in on Server Room 215. click System Browser. The System Browser opens. The system is created and listed in the System Browser. 10 In the Type Selector. 13 In the System Browser. click Pipe. you change the sprinkler type. and click Select The selected system displays in red. For Offset. expand Piping ➤ Fire Protection Dry. Create the dry system 9 While pressing CTRL. verify that 9' 0" is specified. The dry system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red.Fire Prot to make it the active view. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. 18 In the Type Selector. 17 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar.Pendent .Dry . 11 On the Options Bar. Confirm and validate the system 12 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. click (Create Fire Protection Dry System) to create the dry system and assign the sprinklers to it. select both Server Room 215 sprinklers.

to specify a starting point for the piping 21 Draw the pipe preview straight down to a point even with the lower-left sprinkler. Do not connect to the upper right sprinkler. when the snap for the lower-left sprinkler displays. and click. 22 Continue to draw the pipe to the left and. as shown.20 Click the horizontal pipe directly above the upper-right sprinkler. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 455 . click to connect the pipe.

25 Right-click an empty area in the drawing area. click None. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. as shown. select Show categories from all disciplines. Only the sprinklers and piping are visible in the view. and clear the Lines category. You can confirm this in the 3D view or by checking connectivity. The pipe passed over but did not connect to the upper-right sprinkler. and zoom in on the dry fire protection system. click All. click Edit. Click OK twice. 29 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. under Instance Parameters. All categories are cleared. select any category. and double-click 3D. All categories are selected except the Lines category. you connect the upper sprinkler to the pipe. 26 In the Element Properties dialog.23 Press ESC to exit the Draw tool. 28 Clear Show categories from all disciplines. 24 In the Project Browser. Next. on the Model Categories tab. 456 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and clear a check mark from any category. click All. expand Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans ➤ 3D Views. and click View Properties. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog.

and select each pipe segment to verify the slope.30 Select the unconnected sprinkler. The sprinkler connects into the pipe. 32 Zoom the view. the pipe is sloped toward the main for drainage purposes. Creating the Fire Protection Dry System | 457 . To follow good design practice. click . 31 On the Options Bar. The slope value displays next to the slope control. and all pipe fittings are automatically added. You can click the slope control to change the reference end for the slope. and select the pipe segment above the sprinkler.

Dataset ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. You have completed the dry fire protection system. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection ➤ folder. First. and double-click 3D to make the view active. 35 Click File menu ➤ Close. and double-click 2. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. 3 In the Project Browser. you placed dry system sprinklers. and press TAB 3 times. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ Floor Plans. checked pipe connectivity. The dry system pipe run and the wet system pipe run highlight. you confirmed the systems in the System Browser.Check connectivity and validate pipe geometry 33 Zoom out to display the entire model. 36 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Additionally. This closes all windows previously opened during the current design session. indicating that they are connected. and validated the pipe geometry in the 3D view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ Fire Protection ➤ 3D views. Modifying Pipe Diameters on page 458. highlight a pipe segment in the dry system. In this exercise. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. 2 If necessary. 34 You can save the open file if you wish. you created the fire protection dry system that services Server Room 215. 4 Enter WT to tile both windows. Open the i Modifying Pipe Diameters. TIP When you tile 2 views.Fire Prot to make the view active. 458 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . a new dataset is supplied in the next exercise. you created the dry system and a pipe run to logically and physically connect the sprinklers. the active view is tiled to the left. Then. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers.

This selects the entire level 2 pipe run. 7 On the Options Bar. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 459 . and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately.You will work mainly in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. width. click Check None. width. and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. click . 8 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs. In the 2. starting at the upper-left corner of the building. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run 6 The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. draw a pick box around the entire level 2 fire protection piping. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. or width. height. Changing the diameter. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP.Fire Prot view. or height.

11 Select any pipe segment and verify the 1 inch diameter on the Options Bar. The entire fire protection pipe run highlights. the elbow and the horizontal pipe to the main piping to remove them from the selection. and press TAB twice. select 1". 10 On the Options Bar. select the supply pipe in the stairwell. 460 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . All pipes and pipe fittings change to a 1 inch diameter except for the supply piping. verifying that it is connected. 12 Place the cursor over a main pipe segment. and while pressing SHIFT.9 Click in the 3D view to make it active. zoom in on the supply pipe in the stairwell. for D: (diameter).

and on the toolbar. click (Pin) to prevent the linked model from moving. you can SHIFT-select to remove them from the selection. TIP If you have difficulty selecting piping segments without moving the linked architectural model.Modify the diameter of the main 13 In the 2 -Fire Prot view. select the model. If branch segments are selected. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 461 . NOTE Do not include branch pipe segments. draw a narrow pick box around the main pipe.

while pressing CTRL. the pipe fittings. 462 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . and the supply pipe.14 With the main selected. draw a pick box around the horizontal main.

(Filter) to select only 16 Double-click the 3D view. for Detail Level. for D: 6". and for Model Graphics Style. select Fine.The main piping is selected and displays in red. select the tee connecting the supply piping to the main. The following table shows the pipe diameter that will be used for each branch in the fire protection systems. for D. select 4". and on the View Control Bar. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. 18 On the Options Bar. 2 3 4. use the pipes and pipe fittings. Modify the diameter of branch pipes 20 The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. especially around the pipe fittings. 15 On the Options Bar. Sprinklers Serviced 1. 17 In the 3D view. 5 6-10 Pipe Diameter 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/2" 2" Modifying Pipe Diameters | 463 . NOTE If you select sprinklers with the pipes and pipe fittings. 19 Validate the pipe run geometry. select Shading with Edges.

select Fine and for Model Graphics Style. You need to change the diameters of these segments to conform to the requirements. This piping services 6 sprinklers (4 in the corner office. 22 Enter ZR. Be sure to include the tee at the right end of the pipe run in your selection. 25 On the Options Bar. The specifications requires a diameter of 2" for this pipe segment. for D:.Fire Prot view to make it active. select 2". for Detail. Notice that some branch pipe segments service more than 2 sprinklers. and draw a zoom region around the lower 3 offices in the building. 464 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . 26 Select the next pipe segment and tee to the right. and the 2 dry sprinklers in Office 215).21 Click in the 2 . The pipe diameter is modified. 23 On the View Control Bar. 24 Select the pipe segments and fittings that connect Office 214 and 215 directly to the main as shown. select Shading with Edges.

27 On the Options Bar.This segment services 4 sprinklers. and on the Options Bar. for D:. zoom in on the piping to Office 216. Next. 28 Double-click 3D to make it the active view. for D: select 1 1/2". It’s easier to select the fitting above the first sprinkler in this branch from a 3D view. select 1 1/2". Modifying Pipe Diameters | 465 . you continue to modify the pipe branch. 29 Select the pipe and tee that connects the first sprinkler on the branch.

466 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems . NOTE Tags are view specific. Notice that an outline of the tag displays and follows the cursor for accurate placement. Clear Leader. click Tag ➤ By Category. 34 In the Tag dialog. 36 Place the cursor over the first pipe segment that connecting the branch to the main. Tag the pipes 31 In the 2 Fire Prot view. and after the segment highlights. and on the Options Bar. click to place the tag. verify that Pipe Size Tag is loaded. 33 On the Options Bar. 37 On the Options Bar. They display only in the view in which they were placed. 35 Click OK. 38 Place the cursor over the vertical supply pipe in the stairwell. Next. for D: select 1 1/4". Click Tags. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. select Leader.30 Select the segment and fitting to the remaining sprinklers on this branch. you place a tag and include a leader line. under Category. 32 On the Fire Protection tab of the Design Bar. zoom in on the branch that you modified in the preceding step. press Tab until the pipe is highlighted place a tag on the supply pipe in the stairwell. for Pipes.

2 3 4. Complete pipe diameter modification and tag placement 41 For more practice use the methods that you learned in this exercise to finish modifying pipe run diameters according to the following criteria. you finish modifying the pipe run diameters. and finish placing the pipe tags. Sprinklers Serviced 1. and finish tagging the pipes. Next.39 Click the tag to display end controls (blue dots) and horizontal controls (arrows). 40 Drag the horizontal control to the upper-left to relocate the tag. 5 6-10 Pipe Diameter 1" 1 1/4" 1 1/2" 2" Modifying Pipe Diameters | 467 .

you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. 43 Click File menu ➤ Close. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. The completed fire protection system is included in the i Completed Fire Protection System. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. You learned the difference between pipe sizing and manually changing the diameter of a pipe.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ Fire Protection folder under Training Files. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. You can save the open file if you wish. In this tutorial.42 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. NOTE Do not overwrite the original dataset. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet and dry systems. In this exercise. you created a wet and a dry fire protection system. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. You added tags the pipes. For additional practice. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. and sizing as opposed to manually modifying a pipe diameter. 468 | Chapter 8 Fire Protection Systems .

In this tutorial. but also to understand how the settings in the Family Editor affect the family. and other components that are meant for transmitting fluids. you should have a working knowledge of Revit MEP and experience with the actual components that you will be modeling. ■ ■ NOTE The term fluid does not necessarily limit the use of piping systems to liquids. In the third lesson. Selecting the correct discipline is critical to the content working correctly. duct fittings. it cannot be changed without first deleting the connector and adding it again with the correct discipline. The discipline assigned to a connector determines its behavior and the types of systems with which it can interact. pipe fittings. Three disciplines can be assigned to connectors that are added to a family. you use the Family Editor to modify and create tags and annotation symbols. Steam. medical gases and other non-fluid materials are often transmitted using piping systems. alarm systems and others. After learning to modify an existing family. Electrical connectors are used for any type of electrical connections. and other elements that are part of the air handling systems. Before using this tutorial. All Revit MEP content requires connectors for to be intelligent Revit MEP components. including power. Pipe connectors are used for piping. Revit MEP Content The primary difference between content for Revit MEP and content for Revit Architecture or Revit Structure is the concept of connectors. Connectors are primarily logical entities that allow calculating loads within the building. you create a new lighting fixture and 2 pipe fittings. as after this selection is made. Although the exercises in this tutorial describe settings that are specific to a particular 469 .Creating Revit MEP Content 9 This tutorial expands your knowledge of the Family Editor by introducing several unique features in Revit MEP. Family Editor Creating a family requires careful thought. telephone. Components created without connectors cannot participate in a system topology. Revit MEP operation and the behavior of your components depends to a great extent on how you create specific components. ■ Duct connectors are associated with ductwork. not only for the geometry. you begin by modifying existing families to create new types.

for Discipline. open it in the Family Editor. click the Format column. You can create a component from scratch. and then load it into the project. For example. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and save the family as Exhaust Ventilator . select Electrical. 6 Click OK to close the Project Units window. or plumbing component.mechanical. Save a copy of the family 1 Click File ➤ Save As. electrical. modify it as needed. Finally. Map parameters Create multiple types within a family. Modifying Families In this lesson. click the Training Files icon. there are times when it is best to create a new family instead of attempting to create a single family with types to address every application. for Rounding. You can modify an existing component.Downblast. There are several ways to create a family with the Family Editor. you may want to create multiple types within the existing family instead of creating a new family. and click OK. At times. you modify existing components to create new types and build custom component families.rfa. 4 In the Project Units dialog. navigate to a folder of your choice. If you can find a component that is similar to the family that you want. and for Current. 2 In the Save As dialog. Create formulas for parameters. Place connectors. although it may be easier to modify an existing family. 470 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Define shared parameters. The process you use to create the family will determine how a part flexes as geometric parameters are modified. select 1 decimal place. If a family you are creating is very similar to an existing family. instead of creating a new one. it is easier to modify a component. 7 Save the family. the heat released by a light fixture affects the cooling requirements for a space. 5 In the Format dialog. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. it is important to recognize how components interact to affect the overall design. Set project units 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. Modifying a Fan Family In this exercise you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Modify an existing family.rfa.Downblast . Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor Exhaust Ventilator .

enter Common For Type. and click Save. under Parameters. 24 In the Parameter Properties dialog. create additional shared parameters with the following properties: Name Voltage Motor FLA Power Phase Number of Poles Discipline Electrical Electrical Electrical Common Electrical Type Electrical Potential Current Power Integer Number of Poles 20 Click OK. enter MEP. NOTE The parameter values stored in the shared parameter file will remain after completing this tutorial. and click OK. and click Select. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Groups. and click Select. click the Shared parameter option. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Name. select the Electrical Engineering. Add shared parameters to the Family Type 21 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 13 Browse to a folder. click New. select the Shared parameter option. enter a File name (for example. click Add. 19 Using the same method. 14 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. enter Text 18 Click OK. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 23 In the Family Types dialog. 11 If you have not already created a shared parameter file. under Parameters.Create Shared Parameters 8 On the Design Bar. The new parameter is added to the Family Types dialog under the Electrical Engineering category. click Family Types 9 In the Family Types dialog. Shared_Parameters) for the shared parameter file. under Parameters. for Group parameter under. 15 For Name. and click OK. select the Type option. and click OK. Click Yes. you must remove the shared parameter text file created in the previous step. 16 Under Parameters. click New. select Motor FLA. you will be prompted to choose a file from another project or to create a new file. enter Motor HP For Discipline. 17 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 12 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. and click Create. Modifying a Fan Family | 471 . click Add. To reuse this tutorial.

32 Specify the following values for the shared parameters in the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Voltage = 115 Phase = 1 Number of Poles = 1 Motor FLA = 4. Create New Family Types 29 Under Family Types.3 Ph Voltage 208 208 460 Phase 1 3 3 Number of Poles Motor FLA 2 3 3 8. and click OK. click New.4 Motor HP = 1/6 The value for Power is calculated from the parameter values specified. enter 1/6 HP .3 Ph 3 HP .1 Ph 2 HP . 33 Using the same method.5 4. enter the following formula: Voltage * Motor FLA * sqrt(if(Phase = 3. select Electrical Engineering. 30 For Name. and click OK.208 V .460 V . under Parameters. 1)) NOTE Formulas are case sensitive… make sure you use the same case as the names of the parameters you created.1 Ph. 3. add the following shared parameters to the family type. select MEP. for Group parameter under. for Parameter Group. under Parameter Data. select the Type option.8 7. 35 Save the family. 26 In the Parameter Properties. create additional Family Types with the following parameter values: Name 1 HP .8 Motor HP 1 2 3 34 Click OK. 27 Using the same method.208 V . 31 Click OK. 472 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .25 In the Shared Parameters dialog. select Voltage. as defined below: Parameter Phase Number of Poles Motor HP Power Group Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Mechanical Electrical Engineering Instance/Type Type Type Type Type Create a parameter formula to calculate power 28 In the Formula column for Power.115 V .

system type. while pressing Shift. and dragging the cursor to spin a model. alarm systems and others. 39 Highlight the narrow face at the base of the fan housing and click to place the connector on the center of the face. See Connectors on page 561. number of poles and the same voltage specified. Connectors can be placed on a Face or on a Work Plane.Add an electrical connector 36 Electrical connectors are used for a variety of electrical systems. 38 On the Options Bar. Click and drag the View Cube at the upper right corner of the view to spin the ventilator as shown. See Connector Placement on page 567.Balanced. click Electrical Connector. and verify that is selected. TIP You can also hold the right mouse button. 40 Click Modify Modifying a Fan Family | 473 . including power. select Power . 37 On the Design Bar. press Tab to cycle through the active faces until the narrow face at the base of the fan is highlighted. Connections between components in a power system must have connectors with the same. telephone. The electrical connector that you add here will ultimately be used in a power system. NOTE If necessary.

select 3 HP . 63 Click OK. click Load into Projects. and click OK. and again observe the Type Parameter values. 56 The i Sample Project. in the = column. 49 Click OK.rvt. select Voltage. 59 Move the cursor into the drawing area and click to add the Exhaust Ventilator Downblast : 1/6 HP-115 V-1 Ph. 57 In the Project Browser. 52 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click the Training Files icon.Downblast. 44 On the Options Bar. click Mechanical Equipment. 55 On the Design Bar.3 Ph.rvt file. Flex the part 51 Click File menu ➤ Open. specify an associated family parameter for the following parameters: Parameter Number of Poles Apparent Load Associated (shared) Parameter Number of Poles Power 48 Under Electrical Loads. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. (It is not necessary to save the i Sample Project. click list. 61 Select the fan. . for Load Classification. and in the Type Selector. for Name. click Family Types.) 60 Click Modify. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.rfa to make the family the active view. click 46 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and double-click 2 . 64 Save the family.) Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family This exercise demonstrates using various settings on the electrical connector to define a fan powered box with variable power requirements for electric heat and motor size. select Exhaust Ventilator Downblast : 1/6 HP-115 V-1 Ph.Map Parameter Values to Connector 41 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select 1 HP-208V-1 Ph. for Voltage. 54 Click Window menu ➤ Exhaust Ventilator . 47 Using the same method. 53 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project. and observe the values in the Type Parameters 62 For Type. 474 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . The values should correspond to the values entered when you created the new family types. 43 Select the Electrical connector created in the previous section. and on the Options Bar.460 V . select HVAC. 58 On the Mechanical Design Bar. 50 Save the family.rvt displays in the drawing area.Mech. click . (The exact location is not important. 42 In the Family Types dialog. It also demonstrates the use of shared parameters and parameter mapping.

you will need to complete that exercise to create shared parameters that are used in this exercise. select Electrical. See Modifying a Fan Family on page 470. Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. 6 In the Family Types dialog. select Power. 3 On the Options Bar. under Parameters. For Type. 8 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 10 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. go back and complete the previous Modifying a Fan Family exercise. for Parameter group.Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Add. for Parameter group. For Discipline. click New. and click Select.Power. 9 Click Edit. select MEP. 5 Click Family Types. NOTE If you have not already completed the previous exercise. click the Training Files icon. Open the family and create parameters 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. select the Shared parameter option. 2 Select the VAV box. 12 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 11 Under Parameters. click Edit Family. Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 475 . and double-click 1 . It this is not the case. 4 Click Yes when prompted to open the family for editing. The MEP group was created in the Modifying a Fan Family exercise and the parameters created in that exercise are listed under Parameters. enter Apparent Power Phase 1. select MEP.

Apparent Power Phase 1 is added as an instance parameter under the Electrical Engineering group in the Family Types dialog. Instance parameters have (default) appended to the parameter name. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 23 In the Formula column. enter 3. select the Instance option. and click OK 20 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK. select the Instance option. select the Shared parameter option. as defined below: Name Apparent Power Phase 3 Electric Heat Power Motor FLA Motor HP Motor On Phase Number of Poles Phase Voltage Group parameter under Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Electrical Engineering Instance/Type Instance Instance Type Type Instance Type Type Type 22 In the Family Types dialog. 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog. For Phase. select Electrical Engineering. and click Select. for Group parameter under. verify that Size 2 . and click OK. create the following additional shared parameters as defined below: Name Apparent Power Phase 2 Apparent Power Phase 3 Electric Heat Power Motor On Phase Discipline Electrical Electrical Electrical Common Type Power Power Power Integer 14 Click OK. under Parameter Data. 19 In the Shared Parameters dialog.13 Using the same method. select Electrical Engineering. for Group parameter under. 17 In the Family Types dialog. 21 Using the same method. select Apparent Power Phase 2. specify formulas for the following parameters: ■ ■ For Voltage. 476 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . enter 480. click Add.6 inch Inlet is selected for Name. under Parameter Data. select Apparent Power Phase 1. add the following shared parameters to the family type. under Parameters. and click OK. 15 In the Shared Parameters dialog.

enter Size 3 . 25 Under Family Types. Motor FLA * 277 V. Place connector and map parameters 31 Click and drag the view cube to spin the model around so you can see the controls box as shown.3. For Motor FLA. enter 2.■ For Apparent Power Phase 1. For Motor HP. For Motor On Phase.8 inch Inlet type: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Number of Poles. enter 3. click new. enter 1.2 5. enter 1/6. enter 1. Motor FLA * 277 V. For Apparent Power Phase 2. For Apparent Power Phase 3. and click OK. For Motor On Phase.6 inch Inlet VAV: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Number of Poles. 0 VA). Use the same case for the names in formulas as the names entered when you created the parameters. 24 Under Electrical Engineering.2. 0 VA).4 29 Click OK to close the Family Types dialog. ■ ■ NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. enter 1/4. create additional types. Motor FLA * 277 V. enter 1. and specify the parameters for each size listed below: Name Number of Poles 3 3 3 Motor On Motor HP Phase (Default) 1 1 1 1/3 1/2 3/4 Motor FLA Size 4 – 10 inch Inlet Size 5 – 12 inch Inlet Size 6 – 14 inch Inlet 2. enter 3.rfa.8 inch Inlet.9 3. 0 VA). 27 In the Family Types dialog. 30 Save the family as Parallel Fan Powered VAV. specify the following parameters for the Size 3 . For Motor FLA. enter Electric Heat Power / 3 + if(Motor On Phase = 1. enter Electric Heat Power / 3 + if(Motor On Phase = 2. 26 In the Name dialog. Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 477 . enter Electric Heat Power / 3 + if(Motor On Phase = 3. in the Value column. 28 Using the same method. For Motor HP. specify the following parameter values for the Size 2 .

select Number of Poles. ■ 478 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and click OK. select Apparent Power Phase 2. and click OK. 35 Click Modify. 34 Highlight the large face on the controls box. and click OK.Unbalanced. select Power . and click OK. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. click in the column. and click to add the connector on the face. and verify that is selected. and on the Options Bar. 33 On the Options Bar. 36 Select the connector. For Voltage. column. click Electrical Connector. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. click . select Apparent Power Phase 1. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog.32 On the Design Bar. click in the column. click in the column. specify values for the following parameters: ■ For Number of Poles. For Apparent Load Phase 2. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. select ■ ■ For Apparent Load Phase 1. click in the Voltage.

enter 3000. 41 If prompted. for Type. 49 Click OK. for Panel. 52 Select the VAV box. and double-click 1 . click in the column. respectively. select Override parameter values of existing types. . ■ ■ 38 Click OK to close the Element Properties dialog. 39 Save the family.6 inch Inlet is selected in the Type Selector. and C are 2512. and click . enter 2. 43 Select the VAV box. and click OK. click 44 Click (Create Power Circuit). and on the Options Bar. 50 Select panel HA. click (Edit Circuit on Panel).Unbalanced is selected. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ For Motor On Phase. and specify the following parameters: ■ For Motor On Phase. 47 Verify that Parallel Fan Powered VAV : Size 2 . 53 In the Element Properties dialog. B. The loads on phases A. 46 Select the VAV box.■ For Apparent Load Phase 3. and in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 51 Click OK. 1000. For Load Classification. 45 Click Modify. select panel HA. select Size 6 – 14 inch Inlet. and on the Options Bar. click Load into Projects. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. Flex the family 40 On the Design Bar. For Electric Heat Power. 42 In the Project Browser. For System Type. verify that Power . and click Yes. Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 479 . select Apparent Power Phase 3. The Sample Project is activated in the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. enter 1.Power. and click . 48 In the Element Properties dialog. and 1000. enter HVAC.

and click Yes. as shown.■ For Electric Heat Power. 55 Click Modify. click the VAV box. click . (Create (Select Equipment for System). 60 Select the supply air connector. Create a supply air system 65 In the Project Browser. and in the drawing area. 61 In the Element Properties dialog. Specify Flow Configuration for the VAV 58 Click Window menu ➤ Parallel Fan Powered VAV. The loads on phases A. 57 Click OK. and 3667. 62 Click OK. click . click Load into Projects. select 480 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans.rfa. 67 On the Options Bar. 56 Select panel HA. B. the air flow value for SupplyAirflow is the aggregate air flow for the downstream components. The Sample Project is activated in the drawing area. respectively. 63 On the Design Bar. enter 11000. under Mechanical. 54 Click OK. 59 Use the view cube in the upper right corner of the view to spin the model around so you can see the air supply connector. 4027. and double-click 1 . select Override parameter values of existing types. 66 Select the 4 supply air terminals in the left room. and on the Options Bar. When the Flow Configuration for the connector is set to Calculated. 64 If prompted. verify that Calculated is selected for Flow Configuration.Mech. and on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar click Supply Air System). and C have updated to 4819.

Round is selected. enter 6' 0". Branch ■ ■ ■ ■ For Duct Type. For Offset enter 9' 0". verify that Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows/Taps is selected. 69 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog. verify that Flex Duct Round : Flex . click Design Bar. and on the Modifying Fan Powered VAV Box with Electric Heat Family | 481 . verify that Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows/Taps is selected. and click Settings. For Offset enter 9' 0". to select layout 6 of 6.68 Click (Layout Paths). For Maximum Flex Duct Length. Ductwork is created for the selected solution. 70 Click OK 71 Verify that Network is selected for Solution Type. For Flex Duct Type. click Finish Layout. verify the following Main and Branch settings: Main ■ ■ For Duct Type.

75 In the Element Properties dialog. 73 In the System Browser.4 X 20 gpm).6 specified for Flow.6 X 20 gpm).6 inch Inlet VAV. right-click Mechanical Supply Air 1. 78 Again. and notice that the SupplyAirFlow parameter value is 600 CFM. For example. and select Properties. The Preset and System settings for Flow Configuration are used together to allow specifying a percentage of the system flow to be allocated to each downstream component. When Flow Configuration is set to System the Flow Factor parameter is active.72 Click Window menu ➤ System Browser. 76 Click OK. 80 Click OK. scroll down to Mechanical Airflow. enter 300. a boiler may have its supply preset to 20 gpm (system supply = 20 gpm) and the connectors at 2 downstream zone valves set to System. 482 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . with the total for all downstream components equal to 1. expand Mechanical (1 systems) ➤ Supply Air ➤ Parallel Fan Powered VAV: Size 2 . and select Properties. In this case the first downstream zone would receive a flow of 8 gpm (0. the air flow value for SupplyAirflow is the sum of the air flow for the downstream air terminals—in this case 600 CFM (4 X 150 CFM). scroll down to Mechanical Airflow and notice that the SupplyAirFlow parameter value is updated to 750 CFM.4 specified for Flow and the other with 0. 74 Right-click Mechanical Supply Air 1. This allows specifying a different portion of the system flow to each downstream subsystem. Using the combination of Preset and System settings on connectors lets you distribute flow according to the demands of a particular space. 79 In the Element Properties dialog. 77 Double-click a tag associated with one of the air terminals supplied by the VAV. Because the Flow Configuration for the connector is set to Calculated. and press Enter to modify the air flow for the air terminal. and the other would receive a flow of 12 gpm (0. the new sum of the air flow for the downstream air terminals. but one with 0. The Flow Factor parameter is specified as a value between 0 and 1.

Modifying Electrical Equipment | 483 .240V MCB . The final section demonstrates how to load. For Voltage. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Electrical . 6 Click File menu ➤ Save As. enter 2. you must create 2 additional instance parameters for the component family. 5 Click OK. 81 Close the Family and Sample Project files. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and in the following section you modify a 480V/3Ph primary transformer to create a 480V/1Ph to 240V/1Ph secondary transformer. In the first section. insert. and double-click {3D} to make it the active view. Modifying Electrical Equipment In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . Open Imperial ➤ Family EditorLighting and Appliance Panelboard . click the Training Files icon.rfa.Loads. select the connector. and then map the Flow Factor to the value specified for each instance of the component used in the project. you modify existing electrical equipment families to create new families. 3 On the Options Bar. click . and connect components of the newly created families in a simple project. 2 In the drawing area.Surface. To create unequal percentages for several downstream subsystems.208V MCB . enter 240. you modify a 208V/3Ph panel to create a 240V/3Ph family. 4 In the Element Properties dialog.Surface. and then you use the new families in a project. Modify an existing panel family 1 In the Project Browser. specify values for the following parameters: ■ ■ For Number of Poles. all instances of the family in a project will have the same factor. 7 In the Save As dialog.NOTE Because Flow Factor and Flow Configuration are properties of the connector.rfa.

21 Under Electrical. click Delete. 13 For Name.NEMA Type 2. 23 Click OK. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Single Phase Transformer . Load the new panel and transformer families into a project 27 Click File menu ➤ Open. 484 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . right-click the Design Bar. select 112. you modify an existing family type. click the Training Files icon.480V Primary. click New.5 kVA.rfa. the inch value will be applied to the foot value. 10 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 28 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Primary Number of Poles is 2. enter 3 kVA.480-208-120V . 29 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Simple Room. enter 0' 10 1/2" For Width. you create a new family type. 12 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.8 Click File menu ➤ Close. 14 Under Family Types. 15 Using the same method. Notice that the new family type is selected for Name. enter 2. for Name. NOTE If the Electrical tab is not available on the Design Bar. 26 Click File menu ➤ Close. verify that 15 kVA is selected. 20 In the Name dialog. 16 In the Family Types dialog. 24 Click File ➤ Save As.rfa. Next. and click Electrical. you use the modified families in a project. except for 15 kVA. delete all of the remaining types. 22 Under Dimensions. Otherwise. 25 In the Save As dialog. verify the following: ■ ■ Primary Voltage is 480. click Electrical Equipment. and click OK. 19 Under Family Types. 11 Open Imperial ➤ Family EditorDry Type Transformers . Modify an existing transformer family 9 Click File menu ➤ Open. enter 0' 8 5/8" NOTE You must enter 0 for the foot value. 18 Click Apply. 30 On the Electrical tab of the Design Bar. 17 Under Electrical. click the Training Files icon.rvt. for Primary Number of Poles. Next. In the following sections. click Family Types. enter 0' 6 1/2" For Height. for Name.00 V. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Length.

Surface : 100A.240V MCB . TIP You can press Spacebar to rotate a family if placement seems difficult. click to place the panel on the wall as shown. Modifying Electrical Equipment | 485 . NOTE The panel is a wall-hosted family—it can only be placed on a wall. You can also click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and click Open.Surface. click Load. click Electrical Equipment.rfa. 32 In the Open dialog.Power to make it the active view. Test the new electrical equipment in a project 33 In the Project Browser. and after panel snaps to the inside face of the wall.31 On the Options Bar. 35 In the Type Selector. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans. The new families are loaded into the project. navigate to the folder where you saved the new families. select Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . TIP You can verify that the electrical families were loaded by expanding Families ➤ Electrical Equipment in the Project Browser. 34 On the Electrical tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ Place a Lighting and Appliance Panelboard 480V MLO : 125A panel on the wall to the right of the first panel.240V MCB . then while pressing CTRL. select Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 36 Move the cursor over the wall. and double-click 1 .480V Primary.rfa and Single Phase Transformer . 37 Using the same method.

50 In the Element Properties dialog. select the Single Phase Transformer. 45 Click Add.■ Place a Single Phase Transformer . 41 With the panel selected. click . select Distribution Systems. L-G Voltage. 48 In the drawing area. for Panel Name. verify that Single is selected. under Electrical . 38 Click Modify. 40 On the Options Bar. For Distribution System Types. click Electrical Settings. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. 486 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . You can also click Settings menu ➤ Electrical Settings. Next. select 480. select 480 Wye. 44 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. select 480/277 Wye. click ■ ■ ■ ■ . For Wires. select 3. 49 On the Options Bar. do the following: For Secondary Distribution System. For Panel Name. select 277. Create a new distribution system 43 On the Electrical tab of the Design Bar. 47 Click OK. for Distribution Sys. select 120/240 Single.Loads.Loads.480V Primary : 15kVA transformer on the wall between the panels. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 In the right pane. and click OK. enter 480 Wye. Create a system 39 Select the Lighting and Appliance Panelboard 480V MLO : 125A panel. enter DP. A new row is added in the right pane. For Phase. under Electrical . Click OK. enter T-LC. For L-L Voltage. you create a system to logically connect the panels to the transformer.

The DP panel is logically connected to the transformer 54 Click Modify. and on the Options Bar. This creates a logical circuit between the LC panel to the transformer. 59 On the Options Bar. 53 On the Options Bar. select 120/240 Single. click to create a new circuit. ■ 57 In the Element Properties dialog. 52 With the transformer selected. select DP. and click OK. This indicates that the transformer is associated with that distribution system. 55 Select the Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .240V MCB . for Panel Name. For Panel. do the following: ■ For Distribution Sys. Notice that 480 Wye is selected for Distribution Sys on the Options Bar. 58 Select the Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .Surface : 100A panel. enter LC. 61 Close the Simple Room without saving. . click a new circuit. on the Options Bar.Surface : 100A (LC) panel. Modifying Electrical Equipment | 487 . select the transformer. click 60 On the Options Bar. 56 On the Options Bar.Loads. do the following: ■ ■ (Create Power Circuit) to create Click (Select a Panel for the Circuit). under Electrical .51 In the drawing area.240V MCB . select T-LC. for Panel. Click .

(Model Graphics Style) ➤ Hidden Line.Wall Mount Flush Valve. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Modifying a Water Closet This exercise demonstrates adding piping connectors to a water closet family and setting typical connector properties for domestic cold water and sanitary systems. and verify that is selected.rfa.Toilet . for System Type. you will be working at the back of the toilet. 488 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click (Temporary Hide/Isolate) ➤ Hide Element. Open Imperial ➤ Family EditorCommercial . and on the View Control Bar. so you must hide the wall in the view. Select the wall. 3 Use the view cube in the upper right corner of the view to spin the model around so it is oriented as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 The toilet is a wall-hosted component. select Sanitary. 5 On the Options Bar. click 2 On the View Control Bar. click Pipe Connector. and the extrusion that represents the wall is visible in the view. click the Training Files icon. 4 On the Design Bar. However.

so that the connector direction is The arrow indicates the connector direction. 9 If the arrow is pointing in toward the toilet bowl. Modifying a Water Closet | 489 . click pointing away from the bowl. The connector direction determines the direction from which it will accept connections from other components. highlight the round face. and move the cursor over the larger of the 2 round extrusions at the back of the toilet as shown. not the flow direction. 8 Select the connector. 10 Click .6 Zoom in. and click to add the connector. 7 Click Modify.

select In. 14 Select the connector. Clear Allow Slope Adjustments 490 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . enter 4. in the location shown. select Fixture Units. and click Modify. For Flow Direction. click 15 On the Options Bar. enter 0 3/4". 16 In the Element Properties dialog.11 In the Element Properties dialog. add a Domestic Cold Water system Piping Connector. . specify values for the following parameters: For Radius. select Out. For Flow Configuration. For Flow Direction. Select Allow Slope Adjustments For Fixture Units. specify values for the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Radius. 13 Using the same method. click ■ ■ ■ to specify connector direction. 12 Click OK. enter 0' 1 1/2".

5.■ ■ For Flow Configuration. and in the Save As dialog. you modify a diffuser tag family to provide a type mark instead of the default instance mark. select Fixture Units. select a diffuser tag.rvt. Modifying a Diffuser Annotation Tag Family In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 In the drawing area. enter 2. Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project.Commercial Wall Mount Flush Valve.rfa.Ceiling Mech. click the Training Files icon. Modifying a Diffuser Annotation Tag Family | 491 . Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Ceiling Plans. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Toilet . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click 1 . 17 Click OK. For Fixture Units. 18 Click File ➤ Save As.

select Mark. 6 Under Category Parameters. 5 In the Edit Label dialog. and click from label). click Edit Label. The sample text changes to 1t. The Family Editor opens. and on the Options Bar.3 On the Options Bar. and click Yes when asked to open the diffuser tag for editing. and click 7 Click OK. (Remove parameter (Add parameter to label). under Label Parameters. Each label is associated with a parameter. click Edit Family. 492 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . The diffuser tag is composed of two labels separated by a horizontal line. select Type Mark. 4 Select the top label (1i).

rvt. in the Load into Projects dialog. Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project.8 On the Design Bar. click Yes. The project becomes active and the diffuser tag updates to display the supply air terminal type. R-1. S-1. Dataset: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and the return air diffuser type. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family | 493 . 9 When prompted to overwrite the existing Diffuser Tag. and click OK. If more than one project is open. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close as you do not need to save the project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family In this exercise.rvt. without saving. you modify a light fixture tag family to include panel and circuit information. click the Training Files icon. select i Sample Project. 11 Click File menu ➤ Close again to close the tag family. click Load into Projects.

2 In the drawing area. 6 On the Options Bar. The Family Editor opens. select the 1i label. 7 Click the midpoint of the label to specify the copy start point. select a light fixture tag. 5 On the Edit toolbar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans. 4 In the drawing area. 8 Move the cursor straight down.Lighting. 3 On the Options Bar.1 In the Project Browser. click Multiple. click Edit Family. The light fixture tag is composed of a label that is associated with a parameter. and click Yes when asked to open the light fixture tag for editing. click (Copy). and press Enter to specify the copy end point. 494 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . enter 0 1/8". and after listening dimensions display. and double-click 1 .

The label is copied. 9 Repeat the previous steps to create a second copy of the label. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family | 495 .

enter PNL in the Sample Value column. The middle label text changes to PNL and the label is associated with the Panel parameter. click Edit Label. 11 Select the bottom line of the box. 12 Select the middle label. select Type Mark. select Panel. Notice that the bounding box contains only the first label. 16 Click OK. you modify 2 labels. Next. and drag it down so that the box contains all 3 labels. under Label Parameters.10 Click Modify. for the Panel parameter. and on the Options Bar. and click parameter from label). You need to modify this box. 13 In the Edit Label dialog. 496 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . (Remove 15 Under Label Parameters. The sample value is the text that identifies this label in the Family Editor. and click (Add parameter to label). 14 Under Category Parameters.

and click Yes. select Type Mark. in the Load into Projects dialog. and the light fixture tags update to display the panel and circuit information. Modifying a Light Fixture Annotation Tag Family | 497 . If more than one project is open. select i Sample Project. The Sample Project is activated in the drawing are. and click OK. select Override parameter values of existing types. modify the bottom label with the following Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Label Parameters. Load the light fixture tag family into a project 18 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and click For the Circuit Number parameter. click Load into Projects. select Circuit Number. 19 If prompted.rvt.17 Using the same method. enter CKT in the Sample Value column The 3 light fixture labels are as shown. ■ ■ Under Category Parameters. and click (Remove parameter from label) (Add parameter to label).

the template also defines characteristics of how the family works.20 Click File menu ➤ Close as you do not need to save the project. you cannot change a linear lighting fixture into a spot lighting fixture. or profile). 9 Save the newly-defined family. Templates also define the type of family (annotation. In some cases. Creating a Light Fixture Family In this exercise you create an 8” ceiling hosted recessed downlight. Creating Families In this lesson you learn how features of the Family Editor allow you to build custom component families. without saving. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. model. You cannot change these characteristics after you have created the family. For example. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. The hosting of a component is defined by the template used when the family is originally created. There are various light fixture family templates available in Revit MEP. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. If you expect to render your lighting designs. titleblock. such as linear versus spot lighting characteristics. The process of creating a component family includes the following steps: 1 Select the appropriate family template. as they have reference 498 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . it is important that you start your lighting family with one of these templates. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close again to close the tag family. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings.

Spot Spread Angle. 6 Specify the following settings under Family Parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the Always Vertical option Select Light Source For Part Type. Using the generic face hosted and non-hosted lighting fixtures has the limitation that the hosting geometry cannot be cut. Each family has additional parameters depending on whether it is a linear fixture. Light Source Axis (L/R). these planes are Light Source Axis (L/R).rft). When you use a spot light template. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Elevations (Elevation 1).) NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path. select the Normal option Clear the Shared option NOTE Family Category and Parameters settings determine the component type and provide a set of parameters that affect its behavior within Revit MEP. select Linear Lighting Fixture ceiling based.ies files are retrieved if Revit MEP is installed in the default path. these planes are Light Source Axis (F/B). When working in a linked file environment. 7 Click OK.ies file. select Lighting Fixtures.rft) lighting templates. and copy the Ltl9815.ies file. navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training\Imperial\Tutorials\Family Editor. and click Open. a spot fixture. such as Generic Model face based.ies file is not used for rendering. ceiling hosted. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 499 . 3 In the New dialog. and paste it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\IES folder. you must determine the correct path to the IES file as defined by the IESFileLocation parameter in the Revit. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters.rft) and linear (Linear Lighting Fixture*. you may use a non-lighting family template. and wall hosted objects. Additionally. Lighting manufacturers often allow you to download . See Part Types on page 571 and Category on page 570 for a complete list of Revit MEP categories and parameters. Create a new lighting family 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. navigate to the Imperial Templates folder. Spot Tilt Angle.ies files from the Web for their fixtures. and move with.rft. (This is the location from which the . and double-click Front.rft. When creating a lighting family. or a generic fixture. This file contains engineering data that can be used to calculate the coefficient of utilization of the fixture. This can be shortened or lengthened as necessary to model the linear lighting fixture. For spot light templates (Spot Lighting Fixture*. the family will have the additional parameters: Spot Beam Angle.ini file (within the <install_path>\RME2009\Program folder). Locate IES data file 1 Using Windows Explorer. and Light Source Elevation. 5 Under Family Category.planes that define the location of the light source. Using this face hosted family provides the ability for the fixture to be hosted by. The . For generic (Lighting Fixture*. The Linear template contains a model line representing the light source along the F/B axis. and Light Source Elevation. Tilt Plane. 8 In the Project Browser. objects in the linked file. there are lighting templates for non-hosted. you can also specify a .

14 On the Options Bar. 15 Zoom in on the Light Source Elevation. specify 0' 0". 11 In the Save As dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. and finish with a 1" horizontal line segment to the left. Define the fixture geometry 12 On the Design Bar. 4" above the Light Source reference plane. for File name. and click OK.TIP You may want set the scale to 6" = 1' .rfa. 9 Select the Light Source Elevation Plane. 500 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . enter 8 inch Open Downlight 42w TRT. and draw a 4" horizontal line to the left of the center. click Lines.0" and zoom in very close to create the Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. then draw a vertical line segment down to the ceiling (8"). and Chain. Start at the Center (Left/Right) vertical reference plane. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and sketch the shape of the fixture as shown. 13 On the Sketch tab on the Design Bar. click . and drag it up to a point 4" above the Basic Ceiling and Ceiling Plane as shown. and for Offset. .

click just to the left of the vertical line and just above the lower horizontal line to define the thickness for the fixture as shown. then click just above the line. 17 On the Options Bar. 19 Using the same method. 16 Click Lines.Next you will duplicate the original outline. move the cursor over the line. click . and for Offset. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the short horizontal line at the base. press Tab to highlight the short line. enter 1/16". Creating a Light Fixture Family | 501 . offset by 1/16" to define the thickness of the light fixture housing. 18 Click just above the upper horizontal line to add a line 1/16" above the existing line as shown.

502 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . enter 0' 0". click and . 22 Draw lines to close the outline at the top right and lower left as shown. 21 On the Options Bar. and for Offset. click Lines. clear Chain.20 On the Design Bar.

and sketch the axis line for the revolve as indicated below by the dark line. but make sure it is coincident with the vertical plane. 26 Click Finish Sketch. 24 On the toolbar. click Axis. and clean up the inside corner as shown. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 503 . The length of the line and its exact location are not important. click (Trim). 25 On the Design Bar.23 Click Modify.

click (Photometric Web). not grey) 504 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and on the Options Bar. select the (yellow) Light Source. 29 In the Light Source Definition dialog. click Family Types. specify values for the following parameters: Under Electrical . for Emit from Shape. select true (green check. and click OK. for Light distribution. Define family and connector properties 28 In the drawing area.Lighting ■ For Calculate Coefficient of Utilization. 31 In the Family Types dialog. click (Point).27 Save the family. click Light Source Definition. 30 On the Design Bar.

and verify that (Place on Face) is selected. enter 44. expand View (All) ➤ 3D Views. Lighting objects in a space contribute to the room’s Average Estimated Illumination. click the Value column. click the Value column. enter CF42TRT Under Photometrics ■ ■ For Tilt Angle. and is affected by the following fixture properties: ■ ■ ■ Coefficient of Utilization (Instance) Initial Intensity (Type) Light Loss Factor (Type) 32 Click OK. and in the Light Loss Factor dialog. select <Custom>. enter 3000 K and click OK. enter 3200. and select Ltl9815. click file browser . click Simple for Method. ■ ■ A fixture’s Coefficient of Utilization may be calculated based on the geometry of the space. Creating a Light Fixture Family | 505 . or a static value may be entered. For Initial Color. select Power . click the Value column. and in the Initial Color dialog. 34 Use the view cube in the upper right corner of the view to spin the model to view the top of the fixture. and click OK.21 VA Under Electrical ■ For Lamp. and in the Initial Intensity dialog. click the Value column. for Color Preset. and on the Options Bar. click Luminous Flux.Balanced.85 for Value. For Initial Intensity. for Color Temperature. and click OK. click Electrical Connector. enter 0. and double-click View 1.Under Electrical Loads ■ For Apparent Load. 33 In the Project Browser. enter 90 For Photometric Web File.ies in the ■ For Light Loss Factor. This illumination is based on the lumen method using the total lumen output of the lighting fixtures in the room. 35 On the Design Bar.

) In the Project Browser. click in the column. and click ■ ■ ■ . 38 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. (Light at the intersection of planes is able to pass through the ceiling. and double-click View 1. and select the 2 arcs that make up the outside edge of the trim (Temporary Hide/Isolate). Although the hole is not necessary for construction documents. verify that Power . and on the View Control Bar. and in the Associated Family Parameter dialog. select the connector. 42 Spin the model to view the bottom of the ceiling. 43 Select the yellow Light Source. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views.Balanced is specified For Apparent Load. and click to place the connector on the top of the fixture. enter Lighting ■ ■ 39 Click OK. enter 0.95 For System Type. 37 Click Modify. specify values for the following parameters: For Power Factor. click Opening. For Voltage. click ring as shown. 40 Save the family Cut a hole in the ceiling 41 Next you cut a hole in the ceiling. select Apparent Load from the list. . 44 On the Design Bar. 506 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . enter 277 For Load Classification. click and select Hide Element.36 Highlight the face at the top of the fixture. 45 On the Options Bar. it permits light to function as expected in renderings.

click Load into Projects. and in the Type Selector.rfa to make the family the active view. and double-click 1 . select 8 inch Open Downlight 42w TRT. The new lighting fixture is loaded into the project. and select Reset Temporary The basics of how lighting families work How to create a lighting family from a template Where to place IES files for use by lighting families Flange Family In this exercise. 55 Select the 4 downlights in the room. click the Training Files icon. The flange will be based on a 150 pound pressure class slip on flange. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Electrical ➤ Lighting ➤ Ceiling Plans.On the View Control Bar. Flex the light fixture 49 Click File menu ➤ Open. 54 On the Design Bar. The lighting level increases to 33 fc. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and use a Lookup Table to define several sizes for the flange. 48 Save the family. Revit MEP provides a Flange Family | 507 .rvt. 53 Click Window menu ➤ 8 inch Open Downlight 42w TRT. you will create a flange connector to model pipe flanges for model coordination. Lookup tables are used to define parameter values in an external .csv file.Ceiling Elec. you learned: ■ ■ ■ (Temporary Hide/Isolate). 52 In the Project Browser. The space tag indicates 22 fc and 135 W. In this exercise.46 Click Finish Sketch. This lets you specify multiple part sizes that are based on a table without creating a separate family type for each size. click 47 On the View Control Bar. 51 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Simple Room. and the wattage increases to 168. click Hide/Isolate.

enter NR For Discipline.text_file_lookup function that can be used to read the necessary values from a comma-separated values (.ini file (within the <install_path>\RME2009\Program folder).csv file.csv) file. select the Transition option. click Add. select Piping For Type. Select the Always Vertical option. Clear the Shared option. you must determine the correct path to the Lookup Table file as defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit. and in the Save As dialog. The Generic 150 psi Slip Flange. select Pipe Fittings. select Pipe Size For Group parameter under. See Part Types on page 571 and Category on page 570 for a complete list of Revit MEP categories and parameters. navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training\Imperial\Tutorials\Family Editor. When installed in the default path. See Lookup Tables on page 568 and CSV File Structure on page 569. 8 Using Windows Explorer. select Generic Model. 2 In the New dialog. and paste it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\LookupTables folder. Revit MEP looks in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\LookupTables to retrieve size information. select Dimensions Select Type 508 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and click OK. 4 Under Family Category. navigate to the Imperial Templates folder. 7 Click File ➤ Save. NOTE Family Category and Parameters settings determine the component type and provide a set of parameters that affect its behavior within Revit MEP.rft.csv file defines multiple sizes for this flange. (This is the location from which the LookupTable files are retrieved if Revit MEP is installed in the default path. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. For Part Type. verify that Family parameter is selected for Parameter Type and specify the following parameter data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Create parameters 9 Click Family Types. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the family as Generic 150 psi Slip Flange.rfa. 6 Click OK.) NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 10 Under Parameters.ini file. 5 Specify the following settings under Family Parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear the Work Plane-Based option. and copy the Generic 150 psi Slip Flange. 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. The location of Lookup Table files is defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit.

click . R1. 0’. 17 Save the family. ND) For LenA1. 19 Click the scale on the View Control Bar. 0’. ND. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Floor Plans. click Ref Plane. Select the Instance option 14 In the Family Types dialog. Define work planes 18 In the Project Browser. 13 Using the same method. select the Family parameter option For Discipline. "D2". and double-click Ref.12 Click OK. select Pipe Size. select Piping. 15 Specify formulae for the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ND. LenA1. enter D2 / 2 For LenA3.0". enter D1 / 2 For R2. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. "LenA2". enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. LenA2. Flange Family | 509 . ND) For LenA2. enter NR * 2 For R1. select Dimensions. enter 2" For Lookup Table Name = Generic 150 psi Slip Flange.csv Click Apply. enter LenA2 – LenA1 For D1. ND) 16 Click OK. and select 3” = 1'. 20 On the Design Bar. ND) For D2. 0’. For Group parameter under. create Instance parameters named D1. Level. 0’. "D1". R2 and specify the following parameters for each one: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. LenA3. enter 0' 2". enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. D2. For Type. specify values for the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ For NR. 22 Click to the right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane to add a reference plane 2" to the right of the center line. 23 Click again to the left of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane to add a reference plane 2" to the left of the center line as shown. 21 On the Options Bar. "LenA1". and for Offset.

24 Click Modify 25 Select the left plane and. 29 Create a dimension between the Center (Left/Right) plane and the Connector (right) plane. 30 Create another dimension between the Center (Left/Right) plane and the Pipe (left) plane. enter Connector for the Name of the right plane. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. for Name. 31 Click Modify. 27 Using the same method. under Identity Data. 510 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . enter Pipe. 28 On the Design Bar. click . click (Aligned). click Dimension. and on the Options Bar.

This option disables grips at the intersection of reference planes and specifies that the reference plane cannot be dimensioned to when you place a family into a project. 38 Click OK. 46 Click Modify. and select 33 In the Element Properties. The length is not important. 48 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. clear Chain. 47 Select the 3 model lines. Define geometry 40 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 36 Click . click Object Styles. 35 Select the horizontal reference plane and the 3 vertical reference planes. 41 On the Model Categories tab. Flange Family | 511 . under Other. for Is Reference. select the dimension between the left (Pipe) plane and Center (Left/Right) plane. but be careful to sketch them on the reference planes. and on the Options Bar. . and label it LenA2. and select Not a Reference. 43 On the Design Bar. under Other. and click OK. and set the Projection Line weight of each category to 5. 34 Using the same method. 45 Draw a horizontal line on the horizontal plane. and on the Options Bar. click Visibility. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. click the Value column. click LenA1 from the list. between the intersections with the right and left vertical planes as shown. click . 42 Click OK twice. clear Fine. and 44 Draw a vertical line on both the left (Pipe) and the right (Connector) vertical reference planes. click the Value column for Label. 39 Save the family. click Model Lines.32 Select the dimension between the Center (Left/Right) plane and right plane (Connector) and click .

Thus. 512 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and click to specify the endpoint for the dimension. create dimensions for the right vertical line. click Dimension. and on the Options Bar. under Other. click the Value column. 49 With all 3 lines still selected. we shut off the linework in Fine view. 52 On the Design Bar. create dimensions for the overall length of each vertical line. click . then select the other endpoint. and select Not a Reference. 57 On the Design Bar. 58 Using the same method. 54 Select the horizontal reference plane. press Tab to highlight the endpoint. for Reference. from endpoint to endpoint. move the cursor to the left. 51 Click OK. 50 In the Element Properties dialog.NOTE Piping objects generally show as linework in Coarse and Medium view. and in Fine view the solid model elements are shown. 56 Using the same method. 55 Click . click . and on the Options Bar. click Dimension. and click to place the dimension. click . 53 Move the cursor over an endpoint on the left vertical line.

62 Using the same method. 73 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. click the Value column. and double-click Left. click the Value column. and enter 0' 5". click and . click 72 Select the dimension line. select the dimension for the right line and label it D1. 64 On the Design Bar. click . Flange Family | 513 . and in the drawing area. and click OK. 70 Click Modify.59 Click Modify. 60 Select the dimension for the overall length of the left line. and on the Options Bar. Create the first extrusion 63 In the Project Browser. 68 On the Options Bar. 67 Click Lines. click Radius. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Set Work Plane. 65 On the Sketch tab on the Design Bar. specify Reference Plane : Pipe. and select R2. and click . . 71 Select the circle. and select D2. 66 In the Work Plane dialog. 61 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Elevations (Elevation 1). for Label. for Label. under Other. 69 Place the circle on the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes.

514 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . . and click OK. 84 Click Lines. under Constraints. 82 On the Sketch Editor tab on the Design Bar. specify Reference Plane : Center (Left/Right). 76 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and enter 0' 10". 88 Select the circle. for Visibility/Graphics. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. in the 86 Place the circle on the intersection of the horizontal and vertical reference planes. 87 Click Modify. 78 Under Graphics. Create the second extrusion 81 On the Design Bar. under Other. and click 91 Click OK. 83 In the Work Plane dialog. clear Coarse and Medium. select LenA2. 85 On the Options Bar. for Extrusion End. click Set Work Plane. click Edit. 75 Click Extrusion Properties.74 Click OK. 80 Click Finish Sketch. click 89 Select the dimension line. and select R1. click the Value column. click Radius. 79 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. for Label. 77 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. click column. click and . . and in the drawing area. and click OK twice. 90 In the Element Properties.

and click OK. and double-click View 1. 97 Click Finish Sketch. for Extrusion End. 93 In the Element Properties dialog. Flange Family | 515 . (Model Graphics Style). expand 3D Views. 103 On the Design Bar. and select 6” = 1'.92 Click Extrusion Properties. under Constraints. select Fitting. and select Wireframe to view both in the 102 Spin the flange to view the face of both extrusions as shown. for Visibility. and click OK twice. 98 Save the family. 95 Under Graphics. 94 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. clear Coarse and Medium. 104 On the Options Bar. select LenA1. Add connectors 99 In the Project Browser. click extrusions. and for System Type. click Pipe Connector. click Edit. 105 Highlight the large diameter face of the flange. 100 Click the scale on the View Control Bar. where the 2 extrusions meet. 101 On the View Control Bar. click column. 96 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. verify that is selected.0".

click and. click . under Dimensions. 109 With the connector selected.106 Click to add the connector. and click OK. 108 Select the connector. 110 In the Element Properties dialog. to change the direction of flow. The arrow indicating the connector direction should be pointing toward the smaller diameter face. enter 5". 516 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . if necessary. for Radius. 107 Click Modify.

111 Spin the flange to view the back of the larger extrusion. add a connector to the larger extrusion. 112 Click Pipe Connector. and using the same method. Flange Family | 517 .

113 Click Modify. 116 Click Modify. you can use the same method to create a duct fitting family for air systems. click and. and set the object visibility. test the fitting geometry. First. and click OK twice. 518 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and on the Options Bar. and by defining fitting size parameters. click 119 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. You then create single line geometry for the elbow. 115 Select the first connector. 114 Select the connector. under Dimensions. click . if necessary. to change the direction of flow. The arrow indicating the connector direction should be pointing toward the smaller diameter face. for Radius. 118 In the Element Properties dialog. and click the second connector. click Link Connector on the Options Bar. in the column. select NR. 120 Save the family Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family In this exercise. 117 Select both connectors. you create an elbow pipe fitting family. you create the physical fitting geometry by using reference planes and lines. After completing the pipe fitting family.

navigate to a folder of your choice. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Floor Plans. 7 Click File ➤ Save.NOTE Fittings are among the most complex families to create. Click Open. 2 In the New dialog. under Family Category. 14 Select the 2 reference planes. A new family file is created and new views open. Select Generic Model. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. It may take a longer to complete this exercise as compared to other exercises in this tutorial. and double-click Ref. on the Edit toolbar. However. 8 In the Save As dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For Look in. They are not displayed when the family is used in a building model. Even if you have created parametric families before. select Pipe Fittings: 5 Under Family Parameters. Define reference planes Reference planes are used to define relationships between the geometric components within the Family Editor. You can also press CTRL+S. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. if you have other projects open during a session. Verify that Shared is cleared. It is recommended that you methodically follow the steps and periodically check your work against the exercise. Level floor plan window. 12 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Work Plane-Based is cleared. Verify that Always vertical is selected. select Elbow. 10 Maximize the Ref. and verify that both reference planes have been pinned. Configure the elbow pipe fitting family 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. and save the family as Threaded Generic Elbow.rft. Close Hidden Windows closes all of the hidden windows for a project. click the current scale value. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 519 . For Part Type. creating system families typically takes more time to complete. Level to make it the active view. and select 6" = 1'-0". 6 Click OK. 9 In the Project Browser. click . one window for each open project remains open. 13 On the View Control Bar. If necessary. verify that Imperial Templates is selected.

for Name. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. TIP You can identify an object in the drawing area by placing the cursor over the object. 15 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. add another vertical plane 2" to the left of the left (Fitting) plane. 18 Click Modify. enter 0' 1". click . and on the Options Bar. and in the Element Properties dialog. 520 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 21 Using the same method. 22 Select the horizontal Center (Front/Back) reference plane. A tooltip and the Status Bar (which is located below the Design Bar) displays the object’s name. click Ref Plane. for Name. enter Coupling. click . 16 On the Options Bar. 23 Add new reference plane 2" above the Center (Front/Back) reference plane as shown. and click OK. 17 Click to the left the vertical Center (Left/Right) reference plane to place a new reference line to the left of the vertical Center (Left/Right) reference plane. enter Fitting. 19 Select the left plane.Pinning prevents accidentally moving the reference planes. and for Offset.

Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 521 . 29 On the Options Bar. For Offset. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Verify that (Draw) is selected. 28 On the Design Bar. verify that 0' 0" is specified. You create reference lines in order to create sweeps for the fitting geometry. click Reference Lines. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. Create reference lines and dimension them Reference lines are used to define the basic geometry of the family. for Name. (Line) is selected. enter Radius. They are not displayed when the family is used in a project. and click OK.24 Click Modify. Verify that Radius is cleared. and click Element Properties. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save to save the family. 25 Right-click the new reference plane.

align and lock the left end of the reference line to the left vertical reference plane (Coupling). 32 Select the middle vertical reference plane (Fitting).30 In the drawing area. draw a horizontal line of the approximate length and location as shown. Next. 36 Using the same method. you draw an arced reference line. 38 Align and lock the right reference line to the Center (Front/Back) reference plane as shown. 35 Align and lock the reference line to the Center (Front/Back) reference plane as shown. 31 On the Edit toolbar. 37 Align and lock the left end of the right reference line to the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. 522 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . draw another reference line to the right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane as shown. and click the right end of the reference line to align the right end of the reference line to the Fitting reference plane. 34 Using the same method. 33 Click to lock the end of the reference line to the Fitting plane. click (Align).

select this sketching option from the list. 44 Click Modify. 40 On the Options Bar. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 523 . 43 Move the cursor to the right to begin drawing the arc. click the intersection of the Fitting and the Radius reference planes to specify the center of the arc. click Reference Lines. and zoom out to view 2 dimension controls ( ). do the following: ■ Verify that Select (Draw) is selected. and. 42 Move the cursor directly down. click the right end of the left reference line to specify the first endpoint of the arc.39 On the Design Bar. ■ You may need to click ■ ■ For Offset. 45 Select the arc reference line. 41 In the drawing area. verify that 0' 0" is specified. and press Enter to specify a 45 degree radius for the arc. (Arc from center and endpoints). enter 45. Verify that Radius is cleared. and after the endpoint snap displays.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Verify that (Draw) is selected. For Offset. dimensions are temporary—they only display when selected. The dimension control located near the reference plane represents the projected length of that line relative to the reference plane. verify that 0' 0" is specified. 51 Draw a diagonal reference line to extend the arc at a 45 degree angle toward the Radius reference plane. 47 Drag the permanent dimension annotation away from the arc reference line. 524 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Verify that Radius is cleared. click Reference Lines.NOTE Temporary dimensions have two dimension controls that allow you to convert the temporary dimension to a permanent dimension. Next. 48 On the Design Bar. and adjust the length of the witness lines as shown. and click to specify the reference line end point at an approximate line length as shown. 50 Click the right end of the arced reference line to specify the diagonal reference line start point. The dimension control that is located perpendicular to the line being dimensioned represents the overall length of that line. By default. 49 On the Options Bar. 46 Click the dimension control that controls the overall dimension (located to the lower-right of the arc). you draw a diagonal reference line. (Line) is selected.

While drawing the diagonal reference line. 60 With the Dimension tool active. 55 Drag the dimension line down and to the right to move it out of the way. 56 On the Design Bar. and add an angular dimension between the diagonal reference line and the right horizontal reference line (which is located below the diagonal reference line). 52 Click Modify. 59 Add the following aligned dimensions: Between the Radius and the Center (Front/Back) horizontal reference planes. 57 In the Type Selector. 54 Using the same method. zoom the view to display the 2 dimension controls. 53 Select the diagonal reference line. and clean up the witness lines as necessary. click Dimension. verify that Linear Dimension Style : Default linear style is selected. verify that ■ ■ ■ (Aligned) is selected. the Tangent Extension tooltip may display to indicate that the diagonal reference line is tangent to the arced reference line. convert the temporary dimension for the overall length of the diagonal reference line to a permanent dimension. Between the Fitting and the Center vertical reference planes. 58 On the Options Bar. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 525 . on the Options Bar. 61 Position the dimension annotations and witness lines as shown. click (Angular). Between the Coupling and the Fitting vertical reference planes.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. click Add. is listed under Dimensions in the Family Types dialog. 64 In the Family Types dialog. 67 Click OK. 66 Under Parameter Data. 68 Using the same method. verify that Family parameter is selected. under Parameter Type. For Group parameter under. enter LenA1. select Dimensions. The new family parameter. click Family Types. create the following family parameters: Name Discipline Type of Parameter Group parameter under Pipe Size Pipe Size Pipe Size Pipe Size Pipe Size Angle Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Dimensions Instance/Type Instance Instance Instance Instance Instance Instance LenA2 BdyRad CplRad NomDia NomRad Ang Piping Piping Piping Piping Piping Common 526 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . select Pipe Size. Select Instance to create an Instance Parameter. under Parameters. For Type of Parameter. Create family parameters and assign them to dimensions 63 On the Design Bar. LenA1. 65 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Piping. For Discipline.62 Click File menu ➤ Save to save the family.

select the LenA1 family parameter. Revit MEP uses this pipe size information to define pipe fitting size after you specify a pipe diameter. select each dimension and associate it to a family parameter as shown. and copy the Threaded Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 527 . 71 In the drawing area.25". 69 In the Family Types dialog. Lookup tables are not used to determine pipe sizes as a result of using the Pipe Sizing tool—these pipe sizes are determined by various project-specific factors. 70 Click OK. For LenA2. 72 On the Options Bar. enter 1. Notice that the parameter name displays as part of the dimension annotation. navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\Training\Imperial\Tutorials\Family Editor. enter NomRad * 2. 75 Using Windows Explorer. in the Value column. in the Formula column. enter LenA1 * tan(Ang / 2). NomDia. you specify values and formulae for the family parameters that you added. in the Value column. The dimension is associated and controlled by the LenA1 family parameter. enter 2". Fittings must have their connectors (which you place later in this exercise) on lines that intersect the Center (Left/Right) and Center (Front/Back) reference planes. the calculated length defines the geometry. 73 Using the same method.Next. select the (left) dimension that is dimensioning the Center (Front/Back) and Radius reference planes. NOTE Associate each dimension separately. specify that following values and formulae: ■ ■ ■ ■ For CplRad. NOTE When specifying formulae. in the Formula column. For NomRad. Use a lookup table file to define multiple sizes A lookup table file is a CSV (comma separated value) text file that contains pipe size information. 74 Press CTRL+S. for Label. Do not select multiple dimensions and associate them to a parameter as this will cause errors.

"LenA1". verify that the Ref. "BdyRad". if specific pipe sizes that you need are not present in the lookup table file by default. For BdyRad. 77 In the Family Types dialog. you specify formulae that use the lookup table file to determine pipe size. The formulae are applied and the dimensions are adjusted. NOTE If Revit MEP was not installed in the default path. you must determine the correct path to the Lookup Table file as defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit. 76 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. for Lookup Table Name.csv lookup table file. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. Save the text file with the file name including the . 0. and click Open. you begin creating the fitting geometry. RELATED During fitting creation. This is the default path. For CplRad. you must save the lookup table file in a plain text format. If you encounter this type of issue. enter the following formulae: ■ ■ ■ For LenA1. Level floor plan is the active view.Generic Elbow. 80 Press CTRL+S to save the family. 0. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. copy the lookup table data from the problematic lookup table file and paste it into a new text file. 82 In the New dialog. 81 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. NomDia). NomDia). Next. click Family Types. "CplRad". If the file is saved in a proprietary format. enter text_file_lookup(Lookup Table Name. 528 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .rft. Next. 0. However. Create a fitting profile You create a fitting profile in order to provide a geometrical shape for the sweep extrusion.ini file (within the <install_path>\RME2009\Program folder). NomDia). select Profile. This sweep uses the profile and the reference lines to create the elbow fitting geometry. you can add them according to manufacturers’ specifications. 83 In the Project Browser.csv file extension and copy it to the LookupTables folder. 78 In the Formula column. in the Value column. enter Threaded Generic Elbow. Revit MEP may not be able to read it and any family type parameter formulae that refer to that lookup table will most likely return a value of 0 and errors will occur. and paste it into the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2009\LookupTables folder. 79 Click OK.csv and click Apply.

draw a circle with any radius in the approximate location as shown. and click OK. click Lines. verify that 0' 0" is specified. 96 Click the dimension value. For Offset. The center mark displays allowing you to align the circle to the reference planes. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 529 . select Center Mark Visible. 92 Click the Center (Front/Back) reference plane. and select 6" = 1'. zoom out. do the following: ■ Verify that Select (Draw) is selected. and click the dimension control ( The temporary dimension converts to a permanent dimension. 95 Select the circle. 86 On the Options Bar. ■ (Circle).0". ). under Graphics. 89 Select the circle. 88 Click Modify. click . 87 In the drawing area. 93 Click to lock the circle to the horizontally.84 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 98 Zoom in to view the sketch. and on the Options Bar. and press ENTER. You may need to click ■ ■ and select this sketching option from the list. 97 On the View Control Bar. and then click the circle center mark to align the circle horizontally. 90 In the Element Properties dialog. click the current scale. 94 Using the same method. click (Align). verify that Profiles is selected. align and lock the circle vertically. 91 On the Edit toolbar. Verify that Radius is cleared. 85 In the Type Selector. enter 1".

and click OK. 107 On the Options Bar. For Discipline. 106 In the drawing area. you create a new family type. Verify that the Type option is selected to create a Type parameter. click Add. 103 Name the new family type. 100 In the Family Types dialog. select Piping. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. under Family Types. The new family parameter is listed under Dimensions. For Group parameter under. The dimension is now associated to and controlled by the Rad family parameter. 101 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 102 In the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. For Type of Parameter. click New. select Rad. select Pipe Size. under Parameters. Click OK. under Parameter Data. 105 In the Family Types dialog.99 On the Design Bar. Notice that the parameter name displays as part of the dimension annotation. click OK. 104 Using the same method. select the dimension. Fitting. for Label. select Dimensions. The new family type is listed in the Name list. create a family type named Coupling. 530 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . enter Rad. Next.

click .Generic Elbow project becomes active. This allows for parametric changes in the fitting geometry to occur. Next. and save the family as Threaded Pipe Profile. under Existing family parameters of compatible type. expand Families ➤ Profiles ➤ Threaded Pipe Profile.rfa. you create the fitting geometry. 117 Click File menu ➤ Save to save the family. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. 110 In the Project Browser. 111 In the Type Properties dialog. TIP Remember that when you use cross-picking (drag right to left) to select an object. The object does not need to be fully contained within the border. for Rad. click Apply. Each sweep is based on the profile that you created and loaded into the project. 113 In the Type Properties dialog. 109 On the Design Bar.108 Click File ➤ Save. and click Properties. click . Notice that the Threaded . an object must be fully contained when using a pick box (drag left to right). right click Coupling. you load the fitting profile into the project. and click OK twice. Next. select Fitting. In contrast. under Existing family parameters of compatible type. select CplRad. 116 In the Associate Family Parameter. select BdyRad. 114 For Type. You create sweeps using the reference lines as sweep paths to create the fitting geometry. 112 In the Associate Family Parameter. and click OK. 118 In the drawing area. the cross-picking border only needs to intersect an object in order to select it. Create sweeps using reference lines The elbow fitting geometry consists of 2 couplings connected by the fitting body. 115 Under Dimensions. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 531 . under Dimensions. Associate family parameters to a profile parameter You associate family parameters to the Rad profile parameter for each family type in order to control the radius of the elbow fitting geometry. for Rad. click Load into Projects to load the Threaded Pipe Profile into the Threaded – Generic Elbow family.

click (Filter Selection). clear Reference Lines and Reference Planes. 128 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Path. 127 On the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. do the following: ■ ■ Select Threaded Pipe Profile: Coupling from the profile list. select the left horizontal reference line. 120 In the Filter dialog. 532 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Only the reference lines and reference planes display. and Angle options are specified at 0. 123 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 121 On the View Control Bar. 126 In the drawing area.119 On the Options Bar. 124 In the drawing area. click the red dot on the horizontal reference line. click Finish Sweep. Y. 122 On the Design Bar. Verify that the X. 125 On the Pick Path tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Path. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. and click OK.

134 On the Options Bar. click the red dot on the arced reference line. and Angle options are specified at 0. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. 132 On the Pick Path tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ Select Threaded Pipe Profile: Fitting from the profile list. Verify that the X. click Finish Path. 130 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. click Finish Sweep. Y. click Pick Path. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 533 . 131 In the drawing area. 129 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select the arced reference line. 133 In the drawing area. you create the geometry for the fitting body.The geometry for the left coupling is created. 135 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

136 Using the same method. 139 On the Annotation Categories tab of the Visibility Graphics Overrides dialog. you create the right coupling geometry for the elbow fitting. and select Threaded Pipe Profile: Coupling from the profile list to the right reference line to create the geometry for the right coupling. The elbow fitting geometry is created. enter VG. and click OK. 138 With the 3D view active. Next. 137 In the Project Browser. add a solid sweep.The geometry for the fitting body is created. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views ➤ View1 to make the 3D view active. clear all annotation categories. 534 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . you verify the fitting geometry. The fitting geometry displays. Next.

and click OK. 145 In the Filter dialog. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. select Other. 144 On the Options Bar. you need to hide some of the geometry in the family to make it easier to create model lines for the single-line display. click Check None. 141 In the Project Browser. Level to make it the active view. double-click Floor Plans ➤ Ref. and verify the fitting geometry. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. First. 146 On the View Control Bar. 142 Press CTRL+S to save the family. (Filter Selection).140 While pressing SHIFT and the middle mouse button. In this section. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 535 . 143 In the drawing area. drag the cursor to spin the model. Coarse and Medium detail levels display pipe and pipe fittings as single line. click The 3 sweeps are selected. This fitting geometry displays when the Coarse and Medium detail level settings are used. The Fine detail level displays pipe and pipe fittings as double line. In Revit MEP. you draw model lines to create the single line fitting geometry. Create detail level geometry Detail level geometry is the geometry that displays when you select a detail level.

147 On the Design Bar. 149 On the Options Bar.Only the reference planes and reference lines display. 150 In the drawing area. verify that Pipe Fittings is selected. click Model Lines. 536 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . verify that Level : Ref Level is selected. do the following: ■ For Plane. ■ ■ ■ For Offset. Select (Pick Lines). 148 In the Type Selector. Verify that Lock is cleared. verify that 0' 0" is specified. select the left horizontal reference line.

This converts the overall angle temporary dimension to a permanent dimension. 157 Select the permanent dimension. 152 With the Model Lines tool active and using the same method. click to lock the model line to the reference line. Each time you press Tab. and click the dimension control ( ) that is located at the lower-right. and lock the model line to the arced reference line. select Ang. TIP You can identify objects that are located under other objects by placing the cursor over an object and press Tab.A model line is created over the reference line. you highlight through the vertical hierarchy of objects (from top to bottom). 154 Select the arced model line to display its temporary dimension. 155 Zoom out. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 537 . 153 Click Modify. and on the Options Bar. This associates the angle dimension of the arced model line to the Ang family parameter. A tooltip and the Status Bar display the name of the object. 151 With the model line selected. for Label. select the arced reference line to create an arced model line. 156 Click Modify.

and modify the witness lines as shown. then click the Center (Front/Back) reference plane.158 Relocate the dimension annotation. 165 In the Type Selector. 168 Using the same method. If you lock it. 167 Click Modify. you dimension the diagonal model line. NOTE Make certain that you select the model line and not the reference line. and finally move the cursor and click to place the dimension. If necessary. click (Angular). create a diagonal model line by picking the diagonal reference line (located at the right end of the arced model line). and modify the witness lines as shown. 538 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . 161 Select the diagonal model line. Revit MEP warns you that locking the alignment would over constrain the sketch. 159 Using the same method. 166 In the drawing area. press Tab to locate the model line. click Dimension. convert the diagonal model line overall length temporary dimension to a permanent dimension. 169 Relocate the dimension annotations. associate the new angular dimension to the Ang family parameter. Next. NOTE Do not lock the diagonal model line. 160 Click Modify. 163 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 162 Using the same method. verify that Angular Dimension Style : Linear angular style is selected. and associate it to the LenA1 family parameter. 164 On the Options Bar. click the diagonal model line.

171 Press CTRL+S. for Ang. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 539 .170 On the View Control Bar. 173 In the Family Types dialog. Next. click Family Types. under Dimensions. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. you flex the part to validate the design. Flex the part 172 On the Design Bar. enter 90. and click Apply. The part flexes to become a 90 degree elbow fitting.

Add tick marks and dimension them You create tick marks to indicate the end of the fitting when viewing the fitting in either the Coarse or Medium (single line) detail level. clear Lines (Pipe Fitting) and Reference Planes. click (Filter Selection). 175 In the drawing area. 176 On the Options Bar. you create tick marks. and click OK. 177 In the Filter dialog. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. Lines (Pipe Fittings) are the model lines. 178 On the View Control Bar. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in view. Everything except for model lines and reference planes are selected.NOTE If the part does not flex and errors occur. Next. and click OK. 174 Restore the Ang parameter to 45. 540 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Check all constraints and verify that model lines were created and properly constrained. this is usually caused by a constraint issue.

draw a model line that is perpendicular and tangent to the end of the horizontal model line as shown. verify that Pipe Fittings is selected. 181 On the Options Bar. verify that 0' 0" is specified. 183 At the right end of the fitting. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 541 . TIP You draw this model line on top of the Coupling reference plane. draw another model line that is perpendicular and tangent to the end of the diagonal model line as shown. Line length is approximate. do the following: ■ For Plane.Only model lines and reference planes display. 182 At the left end of the fitting. verify that Level : Ref Level is selected. Verify that Radius is cleared. 180 In the Type Selector. Verify that (Draw) and (Line) are selected. 179 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ For Offset. click Model Lines.

length is approximate. 187 On the left end of the fitting. dimension the bottom half of the left model line. dimension both halves of the right model line (tick mark) by clicking the diagonal model line first. then move the cursor to the left and click to place the dimension. The 2 tick marks are drawn.Again. 186 On the Options Bar. 184 On the Design Bar. NOTE You must click the reference plane first to dimension this model line. click the Center (Front/Back) reference plane and click the top end point of the model line (tick mark). 542 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . The top half of the model line (tick mark) is dimensioned. you dimension each side of the 2 tick marks. and then clicking an endpoint of the model line (tick mark). 188 Using the same method. 189 Using the same method. verify that Linear Dimension Style : Linear is selected. click Dimension. verify that (Aligned) is selected. Next. 185 In the Type Selector.

You may need to zoom out to locate the lock. select CplRad This associates that dimension to the CplRad family parameter. 191 Select the lower dimension for the left model line. 197 Select the angular dimension. click Dimension. 194 On the Options Bar. Next.You place 2 dimensions for the right model line. and on the Options Bar. and modify the witness lines as shown. 193 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click (Angular). you create an angular dimension between the diagonal model line and the right model line tick mark. for Label. 192 Using the same method. associate the other 3 model line dimensions to the CplRad parameter. 195 Click the diagonal model line and then click the right model line tick mark. and lock it to 90 degrees. 198 Relocate the dimension annotations. You cannot select multiple dimensions and associate them to a parameter. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 543 . The dimension are as shown. move the cursor down and click to place the dimension. NOTE You must associate each dimension separately. 190 Click Modify. 196 Click Modify.

for Ang. and for NomRad enter 1 1/2". The elbow fitting flexes into a 90 degree elbow that has a 3 inch diameter. enter 90. click Family Types. 200 Press CTRL+S to save the family. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ . 544 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content .199 On the View Control Bar.Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. and click Apply. 202 In the Family Types dialog. Flex the part 201 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.

you set object visibility. click Check None. 205 On the Options Bar.203 Continue to flex the fitting by changing the Ang and NomRad parameter values. This specifies that the single-line fitting geometry will display when only the Coarse and Medium detail level settings are selected. Next. you specify the 2-line geometry for the Fine detail level setting. Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 545 . Next. You may want to refer to the Threaded Generic Elbow.csv lookup table file for the valid pipe diameters or add new pipe diameters based on the manufacturers’ specifications. You created the detail level geometry for the elbow fitting and flexed this geometry to validate it. NOTE If errors occur while flexing the fitting. and click OK. verify that Coarse and Medium are selected. clear Fine. you specify this single line geometry to a detail level setting. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. the NomRad value that you specified required a pipe diameter that is not included in the lookup table file. on the Options Bar. and click OK. 207 With the model lines selected. Specify object visibility You specify object visibility to determine the type of elbow fitting geometry that displays for each detail level setting. select Lines (Pipe Fittings). 204 In the drawing area. 206 In the Filter dialog. 208 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. Next. click Visibility. Only model lines are selected. click (Filter Selection).

and click OK. 210 On the Options Bar. The fitting displays. 213 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. 219 On the View Control Bar. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing. Only the 3 sweeps are selected.209 In the drawing area. click (Filter Selection). 217 On the Options Bar. select Other. cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the view. 218 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. click None. 211 In the Filter dialog. The 2-line fitting geometry will display only when the Fine detail level setting is selected. click Visibility. click (Filter Selection). 222 On the Options Bar. click to place the primary connector. click None. select Fitting from the system type list. on the Options Bar. and after the edge highlights. Add connectors 215 In the Project Browser. you add connectors to the elbow fitting family. 212 With the sweeps selected. click Pipe Connector. 214 Press CTRL+S. 546 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . and verify that Face) is selected. 220 Spin the model to view the faces at the ends of the fitting. Next. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. clear Coarse and Medium. verify that Fine is selected. select Dimensions. 216 In the drawing area. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ 3D Views ➤ View1 to make the 3D view active. and click OK. You begin by placing the primary connector. (Place on 223 Place the cursor on the edge of the right face of the fitting. 221 On the Design Bar.

Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 547 . 224 Using the same method. You can verify this by viewing the face in a floor plan view.The primary connector is placed. NOTE When you place fitting connectors. and that if all connectors are not properly rotated and linked. You place the primary connector on the right face because this face is on the X-axis. the primary connector must be placed on the face that is on the X-axis. Notice that crosshairs display indicating that this is the primary connector. Unexpected behavior can result if the primary connector is not properly placed relative to the other connectors. place a connector on the left face of the fitting.

and click the other connector. select the 2 connectors. Rotate connectors 231 In the 3D view. under Instance Parameters. ■ ■ For Radius. 227 On the Options Bar. and click OK. It also allows the fitting angle to change as a result of modifications to the pipe layout. 228 In the drawing area. click . select NomRad. enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the window. The 2 connectors are linked. 229 On the Options Bar. This allows the fitting radius to change after you specify a pipe diameter or perform pipe sizing. The 2 selected connectors display in red. Although the connectors are round. you link both connectors. ■ The connector radii change. in the Associate Family Parameter dialog. Next. it is the recommended that you rotate them so that they are oriented vertically. and click OK. select Ang. For Angle. do the following: For System Type. Notice that the connectors are oriented horizontally. In the Element Properties dialog. verify that Fitting is selected. 226 Select the primary connector (indicated by crosshairs). click OK. Next. select ■ . click . you specify connector properties. Next. 548 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . click Link Connector. 230 In the Element Properties dialog. The connector angle constraint and radius dimension are now associated to parameters. and that these parameters cannot be edited in the Element Properties dialog.225 Click Modify. you rotate the connectors. Notice that values are assigned to both associated parameters. in the Associate Family Parameter dialog.

Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 549 . 232 Spin the fitting to view the entire primary connector.IMPORTANT Connector rotation is a critical part of connector placement. the rectangular duct fitting will be inserted improperly. 233 Select the connector. If rectangular connectors are not rotated properly. creating an unexpected result. click (Rotate). click to specify the rotation start point. and on the Options Bar. and click to specify the rotation end point. The connector orientation determines the correct orientation of the objects that are automatically inserted on the part. Although this is not as important for round connectors. the rectangular connector must be oriented so that the width is assigned to the face that is on the X and Y axes. Remember that for rectangular connectors. You may find it easier to rotate connectors in a 3D view. 235 Move the cursor clockwise 90 degrees. where the part geometry is clearly visible. and after the intersection snap displays. 234 Move the cursor over the model line and to the left of the connector arrow. it is extremely important for rectangular connectors such as those on rectangular duct fittings. The height is not on these axes.

550 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . The primary connector is rotated and now has a vertical orientation.NOTE Do not use the flip arrows to flip the connector with respect to its reference plane. This also flips the connector arrow. you verify the connector arrow direction. Next. 236 Using the same method. You will learn more about connector arrows in the next section. 237 Press CTRL+S to save the family. rotate the secondary connector so that it has a vertical orientation.

243 On the Design Bar. and locate this template file.rfa . TIP You can also set the project template file path for all new projects on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog (click Settings menu ➤ Options). a new project is created based on the current project template. you load the threaded elbow family into the new project. This template may not be the Systems-Default template. If more than one project is open. and click OK. The elbow family is loaded into the new project and the new project becomes active. then click Browse. the duct or pipe when created will pass through the object geometry instead of away from it. Because Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 551 . opens. The Systems-Default template creates views for all system types allowing you to model different systems in one project. verify that the path points to the Systems-Default. based on the systems default template. select the project that you just created from the Load into Projects dialog.Mech view is located under Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. Under Create New.rte template file. NOTE If you click on the Standard toolbar.rte template. 241 In the New Project dialog. 242 Click Window menu ➤ Threaded Generic Elbow. 239 Press CTRL+S. a connector arrow points outward away from the object to which the connector is associated. Next. verify that the 1 . verify that Project is selected. If the template file path does not point to the Systems-Default. 244 In the Project Browser. In most instances. The 1 . click Load into Projects. Otherwise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Template file. You can modify the connector arrow direction by selecting the connector and clicking the flip arrows. This is the default view when a project.3D View to switch back to the threaded coupling family. Test the elbow fitting in a project 240 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.Verify connector arrow direction 238 In the 3D view. Click OK. verify that each connector arrow indicates an outward direction from its connector as shown. It does not indicate flow direction.Mech mechanical floor plan is the active view. IMPORTANT Connector arrows indicate the direction of a duct or pipe (extrusion) when it is being created to complete a connection.

it is associated with the mechanical discipline, both ducts and pipe can be created in the 1 - Mech view. 245 On the Piping tab of the Design Bar, click Pipe. NOTE If the Piping tab is not available on the Design Bar, right-click the Design Bar, and click Piping. Next, you assign the new threaded generic elbow fitting to a pipe type. 246 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Standard is selected. 247 On the Options Bar, click .

248 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 249 In the Type Properties dialog, under Mechanical, for Elbow, select Threaded – Generic Elbow: Threaded – Generic Elbow, and click OK twice. 250 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■

For D: (diameter) select 3”. Verify that Auto Connect is selected. Verify that the Offset elevation is specified at 9' 0"

251 In the drawing area, draw some piping, using various angles and offset elevations. NOTE Remember that if errors occur during fitting insertion, it is usually because the specified pipe diameter was not in the Threaded Generic Elbow lookup table file. 252 On the View Control Bar, for Detail Level, click Coarse, Medium, and Fine to see how the new elbow fitting geometry displays in both the floor pan and the 3D views.

You have verified that the threaded elbow fitting was correctly inserted, that the pipe was created in the correct direction away from the elbow, and that the detail level geometry displayed properly. Next, you check connectivity. Check connectivity 253 Place the cursor over the piping, and press Tab to check connectivity. The piping highlights indicating that it is connected. 254 Click Modify. Hide shape handles 255 In the Project Browser, double-click the 1 - Mech view to make it the active view. 256 In the drawing area, select an elbow from your test piping layout.

552 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

257 Enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around the elbow. Notice that triangular and dot shape handles display on the elbow along with the 2 connectors.

258 Drag the upper triangular shape handle upward as shown.

Notice that this shape handle modified the fitting geometry.

Other shape handles can modify aspects of the fitting such as location. These modifications can violate the design intent of the elbow fitting.

Creating an Elbow Pipe Fitting Family | 553

IMPORTANT Shape handles are not used for Revit MEP system families but they display by default when you create a new family. If shape handles are not hidden and they are inadvertently dragged during your modeling session, the geometry or placement of the family will be adversely affected. This can create unexpected results, especially for duct fittings. This is because, unlike pipe fittings, duct fittings use formulae that reside in the family rather than in an external lookup table file to determine size. It is highly recommended that you hide all shape handles for Revit MEP families before using them in a project. To hide the shape handles in a system family, you need to open the family in the Family Editor and specify the Is Reference instance parameter as Not a Reference for all reference lines and all reference planes that are used for that family. 259 Press CTRL+Z to undo the modification. 260 Click Window menu ➤ Threaded - Generic Elbow.rfa - Floor Plan: Ref. Level to switch to the elbow family floor plan view. 261 In the drawing area, cross-pick (drag from right to left) to select everything in the drawing, including reference planes.

262 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

263 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Reference Planes, and click OK. Only the reference planes are selected. 264 On the Options Bar, click .

265 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Is Reference, select Not a Reference, and click OK. 266 Using the same method, specify Not a Reference for all reference lines. 267 Press CTRL+S to save the family. 268 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. If more than one project is open, in the Load into Projects dialog, select the test project in which you tested the elbow fitting, and click OK. 269 After a message informs you to overwrite the existing version of the threaded generic elbow, click Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. The test project becomes active. 270 In the 1 - Mech floor plan view, zoom in and select an elbow from your piping layout. Notice that all shape handles are hidden.

554 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

The threaded elbow is ready to be used in a project. RELATED Although the physical geometry of this fitting is accurate, it is inconsistent with a real-world threaded elbow in that the connectors on this elbow fitting are on the outer face of the threaded portion of the fitting. This prevents the pipe from engaging the fitting. You can use the Hidden Line model graphics style to verify this. If the part were modeled so that the pipe engaged the fitting, proper performance of Revit MEP would be impacted due to the way hidden lines are calculated and drawn.

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family
It is likely that you will need to create annotation symbols that are not part of a building model. For example, a common symbol in MEP drawings is a New to Existing Connection callout. In this exercise, you create such an annotation. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 2 In the New dialog, select Generic Annotation.rft, and click Open. 3 Maximize the window, and in the drawing area, zoom in to view the note (located near the intersection of the reference planes). This note contains key points to remember when creating an annotation family. 4 Select the note and delete it. 5 Enter ZR, and draw a zoom region around the intersection of the 2 reference planes. Draw lines 6 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 7 In the Type Selector, verify that Generic Annotations is selected. 8 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Clear Chain.

(Draw), and

(Line) are selected.

For Offset, verify that 0' 0" is specified. Verify that Radius is cleared.

9 Click the intersection of the 2 reference planes to specify the line start point, move the mouse to the right, and after listening dimensions appear, enter 0 1/8, and press Enter. This creates a 1/8" line to the right of the intersection. The line is over the reference line. 10 Using the same method, draw 3 more 1/8" lines located above, below, and to the left of the intersection as shown.

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family | 555

TIP You can also mirror the opposite lines instead of drawing them. 11 In the drawing area, while pressing CTRL, select the 2 reference planes. 12 On the View Control Bar (located at the lower-left under the drawing area), click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. This hides the reference planes allowing you to better view the lines.

Next, you create the filled regions. Create filled regions

13 On the toolbar, click

(Fine Lines).

14 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Filled Region. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design, verify that Lines is selected. 16 In the Type Selector, verify that Generic Annotations is selected. 17 On the Options Bar, do the following:

Verify that Select

(Draw) is selected.

(Arc from center and endpoints). and, select this sketching option from the list.

You may need to click

Click Radius, and enter 3/32".

18 Zoom the view, place the cursor over the intersection of the 4 lines, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the center of the arc.

556 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

19 Move the cursor directly up and over the end of the upper vertical line, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the start point of the arc.

20 Move the cursor over the right horizontal line, and after the intersection snap displays, click to specify the end point of the arc.

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family | 557

An arced line is drawn.

21 With the Lines tool active, on the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Click

(Draw) and Chain are selected.

(Line).

For Offset, verify that 0' 0" is specified. Verify that Radius is cleared.

22 In the drawing area, click the upper end point of the arced line, then click the intersection of the 4 lines, and finally click the lower end point of the arced line.

558 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

A chain of 2 lines is drawn. 23 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. This filled region is created.

24 Using the same method, draw a filled region on the opposite lower-left quadrant.

Next, you draw a circle around the 2 filled regions. 25 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Lines. 26 On the Options Bar, do the following:

Verify that Click

(Draw) is selected.

(Circle).

Creating an Annotation Symbol Family | 559

■ ■

For Offset, verify that 0' 0" is specified. Click Radius, and verify that 0' 3/32" is specified.

27 In the drawing area, place the cursor over the intersection of the 4 lines, and after the end point snap displays, click to specify the center of the circle. 28 Click Modify.

29 Click File ➤ Save, and save the family as New to Existing.rfa Test the annotation symbol in a project 30 Click File menu ➤ Open. 31 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click the Training Files icon. 32 Open Imperial ➤ Family Editor ➤ i Sample Project.rvt. 33 Click Window menu ➤ New to Existing.rfa - Drawing Sheet to switch to the new annotation symbol family. 34 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 35 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Mechanical ➤ HVAC ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click 1 - Mech to make it the active view. 36 On the Drafting tab on the Design Bar, click Symbol. 37 In the Type Selector, verify that New to Existing is selected. 38 On the Options Bar, click .

39 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 40 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow Filled 15 Degree, and click OK twice. 41 On the Options Bar, for Number of Leaders, enter 1. 42 In the drawing area, zoom in, and click to place the annotation symbol in the project. 43 Press ESC twice. Next, you modify the symbol leader. 44 Select the leader to display shape handles.

560 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

45 Drag the middle shape handle up to modify the middle of the leader.

46 Drag the end shape handle to modify the annotation symbol as shown.

47 Select the symbol, and drag the cross-arrows to relocate the symbol. 48 Click File menu ➤ Close. You do not need to save the project.

Revit MEP Family Editor Concepts
A defining feature of Revit MEP content is the concept of connectors. Connectors allow Revit MEP content to participate in specific systems and facilitate calculations for a variety of parameters.

Connectors
The primary difference between content for Revit MEP and content for Revit Architecture or Revit Structure is the concept of connectors. All Revit MEP content requires connectors for to be intelligent Revit MEP components. Components created without connectors cannot participate in a system topology. Three disciplines can be assigned to connectors that are added to a family.

Duct connectors are associated with ductwork, duct fittings, and other elements that are part of the air handling systems. Electrical connectors are used for any type of electrical connections, including power, telephone, alarm systems and others.

Revit MEP Family Editor Concepts | 561

Pipe connectors are used for piping, pipe fittings, and other components that are meant for transmitting fluids.

The discipline assigned to a connector determines its behavior and the types of systems with which it can interact. Connectors are primarily logical entities that allow calculating loads within the building. NOTE The term fluid does not necessarily limit the use of piping systems to liquids. Steam, medical gases and other non-fluid materials are often transmitted using piping systems. Selecting the correct discipline is critical to the content working correctly, as after this selection is made, it cannot be changed without first deleting the connector and adding it again with the correct discipline.

Connector Properties
The discipline assigned to a connector determines the connector’s properties. The following tables show the different connector parameters, by property group, for each discipline and a brief description of their functionality.
Electrical Constraints Edge loop centered Graphics Size on screen Electrical - Loads True Load Phase 3 Calculated based on (Apparent Load Phase 3) x (Power Factor). Calculated based on (Apparent Load Phase 2) x (Power Factor). Calculated based on (Apparent Load Phase 1) x (Power Factor). Percentage of power attributed to this connector. Active only when Power is specified as System Type. Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 3). Active only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power, and Number of Poles >2. Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 2). Active only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power, and Number of Poles >1. Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor. Connector placement method (read only).

True Load Phase 2

True Load Phase 1

Power Factor

Apparent Load Phase 3

Apparent Load Phase 2

562 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Apparent Load Phase 1

Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current - Phase 1). Active only when Balanced Load is False and System Type is Power. Calculated based on (Voltage) x (Current). Active only when Balanced Load is True and System Type is Power. The voltage specified on the connector. Active only when the System Type is Power. Possible values are: Data, Power - Balanced, Power - Unbalanced, Telephone, Security, Fire Alarm, Nurse Call, Controls, Communication. Possible values are: HVAC, Lighting, Power, Other. Possible values are: Lagging, Leading. Possible values are: 1, 2, or 3.

Apparent Load

Voltage

System Type

Load Classification Power Factor State Number of Poles Identity Data Index Primary Connector

A unique identifier for a connector in a family (read only). Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connector of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family. The family’s electrical data that displays in a schedule is derived from the primary connector. A description of the connector

Connector Description

Mechanical (HVAC) Constraints Edge loop centered Angle Connector placement method (read only) Used for adjustable angle families (such as elbows and adjustable tees) to push the angle value into the family from connected components

Graphics Size on screen Mechanical Flow Factor Percentage of the system flow attributed to this connector. Active only when the Flow Configuration is System. Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor.

Connectors | 563

Loss Coefficient Flow Configuration Flow Direction System Type

Active only when the Loss Method is Coefficient. Possible values are: Calculated, Preset, System. Possible values are: In, Out, Bidirectional. Possible values are: Supply, Return, Exhaust, Other, Undefined. Possible values are: Not Defined, Coefficient, Specific Loss.

Loss Method Mechanical - Airflow Pressure Drop Flow Dimensions Shape Height

Active only when the Loss Method is Specific Loss. The amount of air flowing at this connector.

Possible values are: Rectangular or Round. The height of the connector when the Shape is defined to be rectangular. The width of the connector when the Shape is defined to be rectangular. The radius of the connector when the Shape is defined to be round.

Width

Radius

Identity Data Index Primary Connector A unique identifier for a connector in a family (read only). Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connector of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family. The family’s HVAC data that displays in a schedule is derived from the primary connector. The index of the linked connector, -1 if none. (read only) A description of the connector

Link Connector Index Connector Description

Mechanical (Piping) Constraints Edge loop centered Connector placement method (read only).

564 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Angle

Used for adjustable angle families (such as elbows and adjustable tees) to push the angle value into the family from connected components

Graphics Size on screen Mechanical Fixture Units Active only when the System Type is Sanitary, Domestic Hot Water, or Domestic Cold Water and the Flow Configuration is Fixture Units. K Coefficient (K Factor) is only editable if Loss Method is specified as “K Coefficient”. Percentage of the system flow attributed to this connector. Active only when the Flow Configuration is System. Volumetric flow rate of fluid through connector. Active only when the Loss Method is Specific Loss Possible values are: Calculated, Preset, System. Possible values are: In, Out, Bidirectional. Bidirectional is active only when the Flow Configuration is Calculated. Possible values are: Not Defined, K Coefficient from Table, K Coefficient, Specific Loss. Possible values are: Checked or unchecked. Possible values are: Undefined, Hydronic Supply, Hydronic Return, Sanitary, Domestic Cold Water, Domestic Hot Water, Fire Protection, Other. Possible values are: Bell Mouth Inlet or Reducer, Inward Projecting Pipe, Outlet, Square Edged Inlet. Active only when the Loss Method is K Coefficient from Table. Size of the connector display inside the Family Editor.

K Coefficient

Flow Factor

Flow Pressure Drop Flow Configuration Flow Direction

Loss Method

Allow Slope Adjustments System Type

K Coefficient Table

Dimensions Radius Identity Data Index A unique identifier for a connector in a family (read only). The nominal size of the connector.

Connectors | 565

Primary Connector

Possible values are: True or False (read only). A single connector of each discipline is allowed to be primary in each family. The family’s piping data that displays in a schedule is derived from the primary connector. The index of the linked connector, -1 if none. (read only). A description of the connector.

Link Connector Index Connector Description

System Types
When a Revit MEP component that is not a member in a system is selected in a building model, the Options Bar displays create system buttons. The specific buttons depend on the component and the type(s) of connectors in the family. If there are multiple connectors of the same type and you want to connect to a specific connector, you can right-click on the connector control to create the appropriate type.

Electrical
When a component with an electrical connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Power, Data, Telephone, Fire Alarm, Nurse Call, Communication.

Duct
When a component with an Duct connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific HVAC system (from left to right: Air Supply, Air Return, Exhaust).

Pipe Connector
Pipe connectors are used with hydronic systems, plumbing systems, fire protection systems. When a component with a hydronic pipe connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific hydronic piping system (from left to right: Supply, Return, Other.

When a component with a plumbing (pipe) connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Sanitary, Domestic Hot Water, Domestic Cold Water, Other).

When a component with a fire protection (pipe) connector is selected, the Options Bar displays one or more of the following buttons, which allow you to create a specific electrical system (from left to right: Wet Sprinkler, Dry Sprinkler, Other).

566 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

Load Classifications
Revit MEP maintains information about loads associated with the rooms in a project. As devices and equipment are placed in rooms, Revit MEP keeps track of the loads based on load type: HVAC, Lighting, Power, Other. The loads associated with the room can be view in the Element Properties for each room, and displayed in schedules.

Connector Placement
Connector placement options allow you to specify two basic connector placement methods:

Place on Face This option (Edge loop centered=true) will maintain its point at the center of the edge loop. In most cases this is the preferable method for placing a connector. Typically the Place on Face option is easier to use, and is suitable for most cases. Place on Work Plane This option allows placement of the connector on a selected plane. For many cases it would be possible to imitate the place on face option by specifying a plane and using dimensions to constrain the connector to the desired location. However, this method generally requires additional parameters and constraints to be used effectively.

Connectors | 567

NOTE Fittings (pipe and duct fittings) expect the instance origin of the family to be the intersection of the connectors. In most cases for fittings, there is a point on the fitting where all of the connectors (if extended into the fitting) will collide. Fittings expect this collision to be placed at the original intersection of the Center (Front / Back), Center (Left / Right), and Reference Level work planes. For this reason, it is good practice to pin these reference planes before beginning to build the family. Do this by selecting the reference plane(s) and clicking the Pin icon on the Edit toolbar.

Hosts
Objects that are placed in a model are often hosted by other components. Hosting components include ceilings, floors, roofs, and walls, as well as lines, and faces. Even components that are not hosted by one of these components are still hosted by the level on which they reside. When creating a family from a template, it is important that you consider what type of hosting behavior you want for the family. For example, you may intuitively think that a new light fixture should be ceiling hosted. However, there may be cases where you want to use that family in a wall mount configuration, or even freely suspended. You cannot change the hosting of a family after it is created; the hosting setting is hard-set based on the template from which the family originated. Plane hosting provides the ability for the family to be hosted by walls, floors, or ceilings, and provides a high level of flexibility. Plane hosted elements will even move with their hosting elements through linked models. Non-hosted families are actually hosted by the level they are inserted on and provide the ability for the element to be placed anywhere. Their height is defined relative to their level, but there is no association established with elements, linked models or otherwise. When using linked files, only face-hosted families will be able to be hosted by the linked file’s geometry.

Templates
As described above, the hosting of an element is defined based on the template that is used when the family is originally created. Templates also determine the type of family as an annotation family, model family, titleblock family, or a profile family. In some cases, the template also defines particular characteristics of how the family works, such as linear versus spot lighting characteristics. NOTE You cannot change these characteristics once you have created the family. For example, you cannot change a linear lighting fixture into a spot lighting fixture, or redefine an annotation symbol to be a model element. You must start the family with the appropriate template.

Lookup Tables
Lookup tables are used to define parameter values in an external .csv file. This lets you specify multiple part sizes that are based on a table without creating a separate family type for each size. Revit MEP provides a text_file_lookup function that can be used to read the necessary values from a comma-separated values (.csv) file. The location of Lookup Table files is defined by the LookupTableLocation parameter in the Revit.ini file. The syntax for the text_file_lookup function uses the following format:
result=text_file_lookup(LookupTableName, LookupColumn, DefaultIfNotFound, LookupValue) Where: Is:

568 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

result LookupTableName LookupColumn

the returned value. the name of the CSV file to lookup. the name of the column from which the result value is to be returned. the value that will be returned if LookupValue is not found. the value to find in the first column of the table.

DefaultIfNotFound LookupValue

CSV File Structure
The first row of values in the CSV file is for header information, to describe the contents of subsequent columns. The headers are of the format ParameterName##ParameterType##ParameterUnits Acceptable parameter types are: NUMBER, LENGTH, AREA, VOLUME, ANGLE, and OTHER For example, a column may have the following header: TotalArea##AREA##INCHES to represent the total area in square inches. The first column in the file contains a description. The Lookup Function processes the information in the file starting with column 2.

Parameter Mapping
Many properties for objects, such as the depth of an extrusion and the voltage of a connector, can be mapped (associated) to a family parameter or to a shared parameter to provide flexibility to the family. The associated parameter can be defined as an instance parameter or a type parameter. Parameters are mapped by clicking (small button) in the column in the Element Properties dialog for the object. When an object’s parameter is mapped to another parameter, its Value column cannot be edited. The example below shows that the Power Factor and Number of Poles parameters are currently not mapped to a parameter. Their values can be edited directly in the Value column. The Apparent Load Phase 1 and Voltage parameters are mapped to other parameters, and their values assume the values specified for the parameters to which they have been mapped.

Parameter Mapping | 569

Category
Revit MEP components fall into general categories (pipe fittings, lighting fixtures, and so on). The Family Category specified when a family is created determines which Family Parameters are activated. The settings for these family parameters affect the behavior for the part and identifies the type of component. In Family Editor, the Family Category and Parameters settings are found in the Settings menu. Depending on the Family Category and the type of template that the family was derived from (host-based, generic model, detail component, generic tag, and so on), different Family Parameters apply. The following table lists each Family Category, and indicates the applicable Family Parameters. Family Category Family Parameter Work Plane Always Ver- Light Based tical ** Source Part Type Maintain Annotation Orientation Shared

Air Terminals Communications Devices Data Devices Duct Accessories Duct Fittings Electrical Equipment Electrical Fixtures Fire Alarm Devices Generic Models Lighting Devices Lighting Fixtures Mechanical Equipment Nurse Call Devices Pipe Accessories Pipe Fittings Plumbing Fixtures Security Devices

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X X

X X X X X X X X

X

X X X X X X

X X

X X

570 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content

To create a lighting fixture that uses multiple light sources (such as a chandelier or a set of track lights). Part Type: See Part Types on page 571. Hood. Mechanical Equipment. there are times when this is not appropriate. Light Source A light source is the part of a lighting fixture that emits light (such as a light bulb). For example. This allows calculating fitting losses based on a loss table. the Part Type values available depends on the family category. you can specify the shape of the light element (point. However. Entry. Pipe Fittings. Pipe Accessories. Initial Intensity. Maintain Annotation Orientation: Use this option when the family has a nested annotation family. such as Light Loss Factor. Transition. for fittings it would not be valid to replace a cross with a transition. hemispherical. spot. circle). as is the case with receptacles and switches.Family Category Family Parameter Work Plane Always Ver. The ASHRAE Duct Fitting database is integrated with Revit MEP. and determines the behavior for the parts in the family. Elbow. create a nested family. In a project. To determine the part type family. line. Exit. The following table shows which part types apply to which family categories: Family Categories Air Terminals. Duct Fittings. Duct Accessories. ■ If a family category provides a Part Type parameter. Equipment. or photometric web). When light source is selected in the Family Category and Parameters dialog. The part type serves 2 functions: ■ To only allow replacing a particular part with a similar part in a building project. Generally the Type Selector allows you to replace a family of one category with any other family of the same category. In general. each lighting fixture family has one light source. Duct Mounted Equipment. and the light distribution (spherical. To accurately look up the correct fitting in the database. Fan and System Interaction. Valve Light Source | 571 . and Initial Color Control. Undefined. Obstruction. Junction. So there is a level of filtering built into the Type Selector for Revit MEP. the part type must be defined. Part Types The Part Type parameter provides additional subclassification of a family category. you can adjust the position and brightness of each light source to achieve the desired lighting effects. Plumbing Fixture Part Types Damper. You can also define photometric characteristics.Light Based tical ** Source Part Type Maintain Annotation Orientation X X X Shared Sprinklers Telephone Devices X X X X X X Family Parameters ■ ■ ■ Light Source: See Light Source on page 571. rectangle.

and Communication. Panelboard. Transformer. Data Devices. Data Panel.Family Categories Communication Devices. lab or other exhaust hoods Junction: Intersection of 3 or more segments (tee. grills. grates Exit: Point at which fluid leaves the system Equipment: Generic equipment Fan and System Interaction AHUs. the automatically generated wiring branches to the switch. wye) Obstruction: Anything that causes a pressure drop. Security Devices. Lighting Fixtures. Fire Alarm. Panelboard: Used to connect devices/equipment with connectors with a System Type value of Power and to generate branch circuit type schedules. Nurse Call. Electrical Fixtures. ■ ■ ■ ■ 572 | Chapter 9 Creating Revit MEP Content . Normal: Devices such as receptacles. fire alarm components. Electrical Equipment. Telephone. inline fans Hood: Kitchen. Duct Mounted Equipment: Smoke detectors. such as an inline filter Transition: Shape or size change Undefined: No specific functionality Valve: Valves and similar accessories Data Panel: Panels used to connect devices with connectors of System Type Data. cross. Switch Junction Box ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Damper: Used to control flow volume. Switchboard. As indicated in the image. Switch: Control device such as a switch where wiring is typically not drawn through the devices. and light fixtures. Controls. As indicated in the image. steam generators Elbow: A bend or elbow type fitting Entry: Point at which fluid enters the system: louvers. the automatically generated wiring branches through the junction box. Fire Alarm Devices. Security. Nurse Call Devices. Telephone Devices Part Types Normal. Lighting Devices. Junction Box: Wire management devices through which wiring is generally drawn through the device.

■ Part Types | 573 .■ Switchboard: Used to connect devices/equipment with connectors with a System Type value of Power and to generate branch circuit type schedules. Transformer: Used to interconnect Panelboards and/or Switchboards of differing voltages.

574 .

We wish to thank BNIM Architects. a Kansas city based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial datasets in this section. exterior fire stairs. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. slight modifications to the building design have been made. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. NOTE For training purposes. lofty ceilings. and a roof garden. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. 575 . As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit MEP 2009. balconies.

576 .

you learn how to create views from a building model. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. how to create section and elevation views. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. You learn how to create new views from existing views. including plan. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 10 In this tutorial. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. elevation. section. 577 . You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan.

click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 578 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

2 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Floor Plans. 4 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. 9 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. and click OK. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Rename View dialog.Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. Duplicating Plan Views | 579 . select Level 2. and click OK. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename.

and click OK. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. double-click Vicinity Plan. 13 In the Project Browser. enter Vicinity Plan. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. 580 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Floor Plans. 11 Under Floor Plans. 12 In the Rename View dialog.

Next. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. Duplicating Plan Views | 581 . click the current scale.14 On the View Control Bar. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. and click 1''= 80'-0''.

you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 582 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .16 Right-click. 18 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in _progress. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden.rvt. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.

rvt. 4 On the Options Bar. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 583 . NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. for Scale. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. click Elevation. select Elevation: Building Elevation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select 1/8''=1'-0''. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker.

click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. 584 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. select Section: Building Section. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. under Elevations (Building Elevation). and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. 11 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Type Selector. under Views (all). Creating Elevation and Section Views | 585 . 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. 15 On the Options Bar. click Section. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. select 1/8''=1'-0''. under Elevations. enter South East. and double-click Level 1. for Scale. double-click South East. and click OK. ■ Move the cursor down.

18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents.Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. 586 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and move them to just outside of the left side of the building.

click Split Segment. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 587 . Click the midpoint of the section line. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. and click to place it.

select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. click Modify. expand Sections (Building Section). 588 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . using the blue circular drag grip. and double-click Section 1. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser.21 On the Design Bar. 24 Select gridline F. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. 23 On the View Control Bar.

click Modify. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view.25 On the Design Bar. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. To create each view. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Creating Callout Views | 589 . 26 Click File menu ➤ Save.

under Floor Plans.Resulting callout view . select 1/4"=1'-0''. click Callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 590 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. for Scale.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. 4 On the Options Bar. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 3 In the Type Selector. select Floor Plan.rvt. double-click Level 1.

and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. and select the callout boundary. Creating Callout Views | 591 . 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head.■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. click Modify.

The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. 7 On the Design Bar. and click OK. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. click Modify. 9 In the Rename View dialog. 592 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter Enlarged Stair Plan.■ Select the middle grip. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.

12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. 14 On the Options Bar. double-click Section 1. select Detail View: Detail. and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. for Scale. Creating Callout Views | 593 . select 1 1/2''=1'-0''. under Sections (Building Sections). ■ Move the cursor diagonally down.Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. click Callout.

under Detail Views (Details).16 Modify the callout leader as shown. 17 In the Project Browser. expand Detail Views (Details). enter Roof Overhang Detail. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 594 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. 18 In the Rename View dialog.

Existing stair callout head and boundary Modifying View Tag Appearance | 595 . the elevation markers.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. You change the appearance of the section mark head. Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise.

9 In the Type Properties dialog. The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. Section Tail – Filled.rvt. under Floor Plans. open Imperial\Families\Annotations. and click Open. and click OK twice. and click OK.Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. clear any others. enter Section Head – Custom. select the section line. 10 On the floor plan.Custom. double-click Level 1. and click OK. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. for Section Head. .rfa. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. 8 In the Name dialog. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. click Training Files. and can be applied to the section line. click Load into Project. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. and click OK. click Duplicate. 4 On the Design Bar. select the current project. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Custom-Section Head. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 For Section Tag. 596 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Filled. Section Tail . click Edit/New. select Section Head .

open Imperial\Families\Annotations. click Training Files. select Circle. and on the Options Bar. select 3. scroll to Section Line. 19 Click OK. 22 In the Name dialog. select Custom-Callout Head. enter 3/4'' Circle. click the Annotation Objects tab. enter 3/4''. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. 27 Click OK twice. and select 3. click Duplicate. Click OK. and select 2. notice the circular elevation markers that display. 17 Under Category. and click OK. On the floor plan. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog.rfa. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing.Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. For Dimensions ➤ Width. and click Open. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 597 . . for Elevation Tag. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. 15 Under Category. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. For Line Weight. scroll to Section Marks. On the floor plan. select 3/4'' Circle. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line.

31 In the Load into Projects dialog. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. select the current project. 43 Under Category. click Duplicate. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 36 In the drawing. for Callout Tag. enter 1/4''. 40 Press ESC.30 On the Design Bar. 598 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . scroll down to Callout Boundary. select the callout. For Corner Radius. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 1/4'' Corner Radius. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. 39 Click OK twice. and click OK. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 1/4'' Corner Radius. click Edit/New. and click OK. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. clear all others. click the Annotation Objects tab. 34 In the Name dialog. and on the Options Bar. and select 7. Click OK. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. . click Load into Project. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head.

and select 4. masking regions. and visual overrides. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and apply it to multiple elevation views. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 599 . You learn to create view templates.rvt. click Training Files. select Dash. 49 Click OK. Creating a View Template In this exercise. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan.45 For Line Pattern. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. To accomplish this. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. expand Callout Boundary. filters. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 46 Under Category. view regions. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 47 Select Callout Leader Line.

under Elevations. 5 On the View Toolbar. click Zoom to Fit. and double-click East. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. 4 On the View Control Bar. under Visibility. The crop region displays as red. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 6 On the View Control bar. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 7 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view.Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 9 Click the Annotation Categories tab. clear Entourage. 600 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click (Hide Crop Region).

elevation markers. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 11 Click OK. and click Create View Template From View. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. 14 In the New View Template dialog. levels.10 Under Visibility. 13 In the Project Browser. grids. under Elevations. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. Callouts. under Elevations. 12 On the View Control bar. and click OK. Creating a View Template | 601 . and section lines are now hidden in the view. click OK. double-click North. 15 In the View Templates dialog. 16 In the Project Browser. right-click East.

18 In the Select View Template dialog. 21 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. and click Apply View Template.17 In the Project Browser. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Floor Plans. right-click North. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress.rvt. 19 Using the same method. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. click Apply. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. edit the crop region as before. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. double-click Penthouse. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 602 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise.rvt. and the exterior area on the south side of the building.

4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof Plan. select Level Below (Level 4). for Bottom.2 In the Project Browser. Click OK twice. for View Range. click Edit. right-click. View Range and Plan Regions | 603 . Under View Depth. under Floor Plans. and click Properties. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. select Level Below (Level 4). 3 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. for Level. select Penthouse.

under Extents. click Plan Region. select Level 4. select Level 4. Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. for Bottom. for View Range. and click Properties. 604 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .6 In the Project Browser. Click OK twice. click Edit. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Under View Depth. select Roof Plan. for Level. 10 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region.

click Region Properties. click Finish Sketch. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). the fire Using Filters to Control Visibility | 605 . click Edit.11 On the Options Bar. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. under Extents. select Unlimited. click Modify. Click OK twice. 16 On the Design Bar. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. 17 On the Design Bar. in this case. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. select Unlimited. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. In the left corner of the building. for Level. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Move you cursor diagonally. 13 On the Design Bar. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. for View Range. for Bottom. Under View Depth.

3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. click (New). expand Floor Plans. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. under Basic colors. select the red color.rating of the walls. 606 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. 5 In the Filters dialog. and click OK. under Filters. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Solid Fill. under Projection/Surface. under Categories. click the Filters tab. enter Rated Walls. 16 Click OK. 9 Click OK. click Add. 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Enter Hr. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and click OK. click <No Override>. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and apply a color. click Edit/New. 7 In the Filters dialog. select Fire Rating. 12 On the Filter tab. 17 Using the same method. Select contains. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. for Pattern. 14 In the Color dialog. and double-click Level 1. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. for Rated Walls. under Views (all). click Override under Patterns. select Walls. 11 Select Rated Walls. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. for Color. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. 10 On the Filter tab. After you apply the filter. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by.

To accomplish this. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. you obscure geometry in portions of a view. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. click OK. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. click Remove. and click OK. Masking Portions of a View | 607 .18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 2 Select Copy of Level 1.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click Rename. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click Show Crop Region. under Floor Plans. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. 5 On the View menu. 4 On the View Control Bar. as shown. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click. and click OK. 608 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. click Masking Region.7 On the View menu. 9 On the View Control Bar. 8 Select the crop region. 12 On the Options Bar. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Masking Portions of a View | 609 . click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click (Rectangle). 11 In the Type Selector. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. select Invisible lines. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan.rvt. 610 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in _progress. under Floor Plans. right-click Unit 18 Plan . NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view.14 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.Level 1. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects.

and click OK. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click <No Override> to apply a color. and click Override.2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. for Color. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. click black. 7 Under Cut. right-click. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click 1/4''=1'0''. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 4 On the View Control Bar. click in the Patterns field. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Working with Visual Overrides | 611 . under Pattern Overrides. for Pattern. click the current scale. 11 Click OK twice. under Visibility. and click Rename. right-click. and click OK. select Walls. select Solid fill.

16 Under Visibility. and click OK. click Modify. clear Floors. 18 Right-click. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. and click Hide in View ➤ Category. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Visibility. 612 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . clear Grids.

21 Under Projection/Surface. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. click a purple color. 23 In the Color dialog. 25 Click OK twice. Working with Visual Overrides | 613 . click <No Override> to apply a color. 20 Right-click. select Dash 1/16''. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. under Lines. and click OK. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. for Pattern.19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. By using the previous method to make the selection. click Override. for Color.

select the sofa. right-click. click Projection Lines.Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. and click OK twice. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. select a bright green color. 614 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click . click Modify. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. click By Category Override. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. 29 In the Color dialog. 28 For Color.

you learn how to create sheets within a Revit MEP project. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. how to add views to the sheets. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. right-click.32 Select one of the lamps. click . 33 On the View Control Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 615 . and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet.

click Training Files. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click View. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. 616 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. click Sheet.rvt. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. right-click. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. For Sheet Name. expand Sheets (all). Creating Drawing Sheets | 617 . under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties).NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. enter A101. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar.Unnamed. and select the title block. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . enter Site Plan. click Modify. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. 5 When the title block highlights. For Sheet Number. Click OK. 7 On the Design Bar. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. click Modify.

NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. click Edit. 14 Click OK. 2009. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. For Client Name. 11 In the Edit Text dialog.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. MA 12345 12 Click OK. The new project information displays in the titleblock. Smith. under Other. For Project Status. For Project Number. 618 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter For Approval. For Project Name. for Project Address. enter 15 May. enter Freighthouse Flats. enter 2009-1. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. enter J. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date.

17 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal.Elevations A106 . you add views to these sheets. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select the new sheet name. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise.Sections A108 . for Name. 21 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. and click OK.rvt. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps.Stairs In the following exercise. and click Rename. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.Elevations A105 . Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt.Layout Plan A104 . 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. right-click. Adding Views to Sheets | 619 . enter Floor Plan. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 .Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser.Elevations A107 . and click Save.

double-click A102 . double-click A104 . and drag it to the sheet. and click to place it. under Floor Plans. under Sheets (all). 4 On the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). under Elevations (Building Elevation). Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 620 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet.Floor Plan. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet.Elevations. click Modify. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. The red border around the view no longer displays. 6 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. select Level 1. and click to place the view.Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.

10 Under Sections (Building Sections). drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. Adding Views to Sheets | 621 .7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). and click to place it. click Modify. and click to place it. 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify.Sections. align it with the East elevation. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). double-click A107 . 8 On the Design Bar.

.Stairs. 18 Under Floor Plans. click Modify. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 Select title bar. and press TAB until it highlights. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. double-click A108 . drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. for View Scale. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. and click to place it. select 1-1/2'' = 1'0''. move the cursor over it. 622 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 19 On the Design Bar. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. zoom in to the grip.

you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. and then make changes and deactivate the view.View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 623 . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. you must first activate the view on the sheet. In order to do this. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. 21 Zoom to the stair callout.

Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 2 Select the building section view. and press ENTER. and click Activate View. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. click Modify. 5 On the Design Bar. double-click A107 . right-click. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. enter 54'. 624 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 3 At the right end of the Roof level line.Sections. under Sheets (all). Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.

6 Right-click. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 625 . double-click North. 7 In the Project Browser. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. under Elevations (Building Elevation). and click Deactivate View.

enter T. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. under Floor Plans. right-click. enter Title Sheet. 3 In the Project Browser.rvt. You modify the view to hide the view title. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. Click OK. and click OK. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : E1 30x42 Horizontal. double-click Level 1. 626 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. and click Properties. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. After you create the sheet. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The camera view displays.8 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Camera. For Sheet Name. select the new sheet name. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 7 Place the camera as shown. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.

11 On the View Control Bar. for Eye Elevation. select Far Clip Active. Click OK. Under Camera. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 627 . 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. For Far Clip Offset. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . enter 60'. enter 5'. enter 420'. Under Extents. 12 On the View Control Bar. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. For Target Elevation.8 On the Options Bar.

Under Model Crop Size. double-click T . under Sheets (all). Click Apply. select Scale (locked proportions). drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. 14 Under 3D Views. 628 | Chapter 10 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to place it in the center of the sheet.13 In the Project Browser. click Size. for Height. enter 25''.Title Sheet. and then click OK. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. on the Options Bar. 15 With the view selected.

. under Graphics. enter Viewport/no title mark. select No. click Edit/New. 19 Select the view on the sheet. 25 On the Design Bar. and close the exercise file. click Modify. click Duplicate.17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. and click OK. 22 In the Name dialog. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 629 . for Show title. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. 24 Click OK twice. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar.

630 .

Because of the open style floor plan. Tagging Objects In this lesson. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. such as doors and windows. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. You also learn to create different types of schedules. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. click Training Files.Tagging and Scheduling 11 In this tutorial.rvt. in your Revit MEP 2009 projects. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . such as room and window schedules.Level 1. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. 631 . you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit MEP.

NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). move the cursor to the right.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. as shown: 5 Using the same method. as shown: 632 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. and click Room and Area. click Room Separation. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. right-click in the Design Bar.

7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 9 In the Tags dialog. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 633 . Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.6 Using the same method. click Load.

click Training Files. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. 14 For Offset. The room tag number displays in blue. 13 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click it. 16 On the Design Bar. click Room.rfa. and the rectangle contains the room tag. type U18-1.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and click to place the room and tag. and select the room tag. click OK. type 8'. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. indicating that it can be edited. and press ENTER. 634 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . verify that Tag on placement is selected. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Room Tag. 11 In the Tags dialog.

and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. 22 Click the room text label. 23 Using the same method. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. and press ENTER. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. click Modify. and press ENTER. Dining. type Kitchen. Sequential letters are also supported. 19 On the Design Bar. place rooms and tags.18 Click the room text label. Click to place the new room and tag. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. click Room. type Entry. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 635 . click Modify.

double-click Unit 18 Plan . click Room Tag. 636 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling .Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Modify. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. 27 On the Design Bar. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. but they need to be tagged. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). The rooms are already placed. and click OK.Level 2. on the Model Categories tab. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 29 On the Design Bar. expand Lines. under Floor Plans. clear Room Separation. and moving clockwise.

4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 637 . clear Leader. click Tag ➤ By Category. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. in the Project Browser. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 31 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.Level 1.rvt. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . you learn how to place door and window tags. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

for Mark. type U18-1. under Identify Data.■ Closet door in living room 5 On the Design Bar. type U18-2. click Modify. and click OK. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door. click Properties). 638 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . (Element 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left. and on the Options Bar. and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

9 Using one of the methods you just learned. Tagging Doors and Windows | 639 . 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door. 10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right. rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags. and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 640 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . click OK.Level 2. 19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. select Door Tags. click Tag All Not Tagged. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag All Not Tagged. click Training Files.rfa. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Window Tag. select Window Tags. and click OK. double-click Unit 18 Plan . click Load. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser. verify that All objects in current view is selected. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and double-click Level 1. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 13 On the Design Bar.Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 20 In the Tags dialog. and click OK. 22 In the Tags dialog. 15 Under Category. expand Floor Plans.

4 Select a dining room chair. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags.rvt. 5 At the confirmation prompt. select the edge to which the leader connects. 26 Under Floor Plans.rfa. tag all untagged windows. click Yes to load a tag. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 3 On the Options Bar.25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags. Tagging Other Objects In this exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and modify the tag placement and display. you learn how to tag furniture objects. 28 Using the same method. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Furniture Tag. double-click Level 2. click Training Files. click Tag ➤ By Category. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. Tagging Other Objects | 641 . select Leader. 29 Save the file. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Level 1. expand Floor Plans.

Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. 14 Click Modify. 9 Click Modify. modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. clear Leader. and drag it above the chair tag. 11 Select the tag for the table. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1). 642 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 13 Optionally. and on the Options Bar.8 Select the furniture in the living room. and drag it up to form an angled leader. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. 12 Click the elbow control.

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture. Tagging Other Objects | 643 . click Modify. Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser. and click OK.16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table. click Tag All Not Tagged. 18 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. double-click Unit 18 Plan . select Furniture Tag : Standard.Level 2. and on the Design Bar. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

20 On the Options Bar. and click Modify. and click OK. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. click Check None. 23 Save the file. 644 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. select Furniture Tag: Boxed. you learn to add schedules. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. select Furniture Tags. 22 In the Type Selector. 21 In the Filter dialog. click (Filter Selection). you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

Finally.You begin by creating a window instance schedule. in which windows are listed by window type. Next. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. a schedule that lists every window in the building. Creating a Window Schedule | 645 . Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. that is. you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

click Training Files. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. 4 For Name. 7 Using the same method.rvt. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. click Schedule/Quantities. and double-click Level 1. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. click the Fields tab. 9 Click OK. Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser. right-click in the Design Bar. 646 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . select Windows. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. and click View. and click OK. expand Floor Plans. under Category. 6 Under Available fields. select Comments and click Add. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. type Building Window Schedule.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.

A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. Creating a Window Schedule | 647 . and click View Properties. click Show. 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. However. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. right-click the schedule. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. and on the Options Bar. 13 In the Project Browser. expand Schedules/Quantities. this can be a time-consuming process. NOTE By clicking Show. click Close. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays. in large building models with many views. you are prompted to open one that does. If no open view shows the selected element. Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark.

change the Type Mark in the first row from 10 to A. and click View Properties. click Edit. The window type schedule is displayed. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. 648 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. and press ENTER. The window schedule is displayed. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. for Sort by. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. for Sorting/Grouping. sorted by type mark. under Other. select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Other. click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog.15 In the Element Properties dialog. Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule. for Sorting/Grouping. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule.

you cannot use them to tag objects. jamb. unlike shared parameters. In this case. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 649 . double-click Level 2. and save the exercise file as i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. expand Schedules/Quantities. under Floor Plans. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types. as shown: 25 In the Project Browser. and double-click Building Window Schedule.rvt. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and. and sill conditions for a window can be found. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

click Add to create the new parameter. under Other. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. under Available fields. click OK. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. for Fields.3 In the Project Parameters dialog. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Select Type. click Edit. Under Parameter Data. select Construction. create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog. 6 Using the same method. For Group parameter under. 5 Click OK. and click Properties. type Head Detail. 650 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. select the following fields. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. so that they are listed before Comments. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 12 Click OK twice. right-click Building Window Schedule. for Name.

16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example. type Window Details. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. TIP To select all 3 headers. and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. 17 Save the file. select Doors. type 1/A107. for Head Detail. expand Floor Plans. and Sill Detail. and for Sill Detail. you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit.Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 651 . 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and without releasing the left mouse button.Door Schedule.rvt. click in the Head Detail header. select Head Detail. 14 On the Options Bar. click Group. You then hide the column used for the filter. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. type Unit 18 . and double-click Unit 18 Plan . under Type Mark A. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. type 3/A107. Under Name. click Schedule/Quantities.Level 1. for Jamb Detail. type 2/A107. Jamb Detail.

10 Under Fields. select Mark. expand Sheets (all). Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row). and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Select contains in the second field. 9 Click the Formatting tab. 652 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . select Hidden field. The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. but is not included as a column in the schedule.■ For Phase. This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. select Family and Type.Unit 18. select the following fields. 4 Click OK. and click OK. 11 Under Field formatting. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field. Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule. click the Fields tab. verify that New Construction is selected. and double-click A102 . Type U18 in the third field. 6 Under Available fields.

18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. click Modify.Door Schedule. click Unit 18 . 15 On the Design Bar. Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet.13 In the Project Browser. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 653 . and drag it to the sheet. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. select Rooms. right-click in the Design Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. select Number. and click View. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. to the right of Header text. select Bold. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. under Floor Plans. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.20 Save the file. and click OK. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 7 Under Text.rvt. 8 Click OK. under Available fields. 5 Using the same method. under Category. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. and click Add. 654 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet.

For 104. for room 101. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. select Storage. type Building Entry. type Storage. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. For 102. type Corridor. and press ENTER. For 105.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. type Stair. for Name. 11 Using the same method. next to Rows. 10 Edit the number to be 101. For 106. add 5 more rooms. click New. The room Number is U17-46. Creating a Room Schedule | 655 . and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. For 103. and press ENTER. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. 101-106. and press ENTER. select Corridor.

3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In the Line Graphics dialog. First. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. For Weight. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Projection/Surface. In the Lines field. 656 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . click Override. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. 4 Click OK twice. Under Custom colors. draw the horizontal line. and click OK.13 Save the file. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. For Room Separation. you add room separation lines. select 9. click the Lines field. under Visibility. place rooms from a program list.rvt. under Floor Plans. click the Color field. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. click the bright green swatch. click Room Separation. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. expand Lines. and modify room names.

Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Room. 9 On the Design Bar.8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 657 .

Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. 11 On the Options Bar. select 102 Storage. for Room. 658 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . select 101 Building Entry. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). for Room. type 8'. 14 For Offset.

17 On the Design Bar. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 659 . under Floor Plans. 20 While pressing CTRL. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). double-click Level 1. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105).15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. 16 Using the same method. under Schedules/Quantities. 19 In the Project Browser. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. and zoom in to the Corridor. place the following rooms. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. double-click Room Schedule. click Modify.

select Base Finish. for Rows. 30 On the Options Bar. and click OK. and click Add. select Rooms. click New. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. type Units. type As Selected. clear Room Bounding. and for all 3 finishes. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Constraints. 31 For Key Name. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. 660 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and Wall Finish. click Schedule/Quantities. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 27 Select Schedule keys. click 23 On the Design Bar. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. while pressing CTRL. under Category.21 On the Options Bar. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. under Available fields. click Modify. 24 Open the Room Schedule. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. Floor Finish. and click OK. (Element Properties).

Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 661 . 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. select Units. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. 44 On the Options Bar. under Other. under Schedules/Quantities. select Units. click Check None. 36 Click OK twice. and click OK. select Rooms. click Edit. for Room Style. and click OK. click (Filter Selection). for Room Style. 43 In the Filter dialog. 33 In the Project Browser. 38 Under U17-8. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. for Fields. click (Element Properties).32 Using the same method. under Floor Plans. 42 On the Options Bar. right-click Room Schedule. for Available fields. and click Properties. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. and click Add. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. double-click Level 1. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. select Room Style. 37 Open the Room Schedule.

For rooms 102 and 105. and double-click Level 1. 48 Save the file. right-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). under Floor Plans. and click Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. (Duplicate). Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise.46 Open the Room Schedule. select Room Style. for Name. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. type Room Type. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. 103. 662 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . select Service. at the warning prompt. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. under Graphics. click 5 For Title. 9 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and 106. 104. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. click the Color Scheme field. and apply it to the Level 1 view. type Room Type. for Color. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. click OK.rvt. select Public. under Views (all). and click OK.

21 In the second row of the table (Public). 19 On the Options Bar. select the color legend. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. click Color Scheme Legend. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 663 .11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. clear Visible. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. click Modify. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. under Schemes. and clear Room Separation. click the value in the Color column. and click OK. expand Lines. 14 Click OK twice. click Edit Color Scheme. click Edit. under Visibility. 17 On the Design Bar. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. select Room Type. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog.

22 In the Color dialog. (Element Properties). click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. respectively. on the Options Bar. type 1''. and click OK. 28 Under Title Text. 664 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . under Custom color. for Swatch Width. 30 On the Design Bar. and select Show Title. type 1/4''. click Edit/New. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. select blue. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. 23 Using the same method. click Modify. under Graphics. for Size. 29 Click OK twice. 24 Click OK. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected.

34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. under Visibility. under Sections. under Sections. select Rooms. double-click Building Section. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. and select Properties. for Color Scheme. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. click Color Scheme Legend. select Room Type. under Graphics. 35 Click OK twice. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. right-click Building Section. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. click Edit. and click OK. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 665 .

47 In the Element Properties dialog. select Public. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). for Room Style. click . for Room Style. 41 On the Options Bar. 46 Click . and click OK. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. click Check None. select all the rooms in the stairwell. (Filter Selection). under Identity Data. 45 While pressing CTRL. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 666 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. select Rooms.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. select Units. 42 In the Filter dialog. and click OK.

52 In the Room Style Schedule. for Room Style. for Rows. 51 On the Options Bar. and click . Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. type Suites. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. under Identity Data. under Key Name for the new row.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 667 . 54 While pressing CTRL. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Room Style Schedule. excluding the stairwell spaces. click New. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. select Service. and click OK.

668 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . select Suites. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. and click OK. but not beyond it. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. 59 Under Room Area Computation. under Volume Computations. select Areas and Volumes. The color fill will extend to the roof.55 Click . for Room Style. under Identity Data. and click OK. select the room on the left side of the top floor. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. The color fill extends to the roof. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. verify that At wall finish is selected. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog.

71 Click OK. and the living room. under Constraints. select the stairwell room. type 0’ 0” . select Level 2. for Upper Limit. under Constraints. 68 Click . Creating a Room Color Diagram | 669 . type -10”. and click 65 For Limit Offset. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. the dining room.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. 66 Click OK. 72 On the Design Bar. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). 67 On the first level. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. . select Loft. click Modify. 70 For Limit Offset. for Upper Limit.

Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building.73 Save the file. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 670 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials.rvt. double-click {3D}. under 3D Views. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates.

9 Using the same method. click Modify. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. 4 In the Type Selector. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. and click OK. select Roofs. 5 On the Design Bar. 3 While pressing CTRL.Insulation on Plywood Deck . Creating a Material Takeoff | 671 .EPDM.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. For Then by. Clear Itemize every instance. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. under Category. select Family and Type. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. select Material: Description. click Family and Type. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . under Available fields. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. and click Add. Select Grand totals.

click Edit. for Name. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. select Calculate totals. 21 Click OK. 17 Click Calculated Value. select Currency. for Material: Cost.25 4. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 1. for Fields. select Material: Cost. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1'^2). Under Field formatting.75 672 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . under Available fields. select Calculate totals. click Estimated Cost. 20 For Formula. under Other.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. and click OK twice. 23 For Field formatting. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. select Material: Area. click the Formatting tab. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. The /(1'^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. and click Add. and under Fields. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. 19 For Type. and click Properties. type Estimated Cost. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays.50 1. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 12 Click OK.

click the Format value. These shared parameters can be added to any family. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. The cost fields are formatted correctly. select $. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. and are defined and stored in an external file. not just for currency. you create a shared parameter file. In this lesson. 30 Click OK twice.50 The Estimated cost is calculated. 27 In the Format dialog. 31 Save the file. Digit grouping. You draw a travel path line. for Currency. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. creating a generic tag to tag the family. can be used for any number-based parameter. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. 28 For Unit symbol. which inserts commas after every three digits. adding the shared parameters to a family. and schedule the total distance of each path. either within family components or within the project template. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. regardless of category. 29 Select Use digit grouping. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit MEP multi-category schedules. you create an exiting plan for the building. for Rounding. and reporting the shared parameters. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 673 . Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 26 In the Project Units dialog. ensuring consistency across families and projects. tag the line.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost .

and save the exercise file as i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. click Training Files. click Create. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. 9 Under Parameters. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters.rvt. for Name. for File name. click New. type OfficeStandardsParameters. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. 7 Under Parameters. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. for Name. for Name. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 11 Click OK twice. type Exiting. click Training Files. under Groups. type Path ID. click New. type Travel Distance.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. and click Save. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. and click OK. for Type of Parameter. and click OK. select Length. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 674 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog.txt. click New.

Click Training Files. 9 In the Family Types dialog.rvt. in the Load into Projects dialog. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 675 . and click Select. If you have multiple projects open. 14 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Family Types dialog.rfa. for Travel Distance Formula. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. click Add. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. select Constraints. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. following the equals symbol (=). and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Travel Line. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. and select Instance. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. and click OK. type Length. 3 On the Design Bar.rvt. select Shared parameter. and click OK. 13 Click Apply. click Family Types. and click OK. 11 Click OK. 10 Using the same method. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. click Load into Projects. under Parameters. under Parameter Data. select i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. under Dimensions. for Group parameter under. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. under Parameter Type. under Parameters. 8 Select Instance. 15 If necessary. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. click Add. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. otherwise the family loads into the current project. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 12 In the Family Types dialog. group it under Dimensions.

Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. select Travel Distance. 19 On the Design Bar. click (Add Parameter). 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. 676 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . click Label. click parameter(s) to label). 24 Click OK twice. click Label. under Category Parameters. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. 17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. and click OK. click Select. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. click Training Files. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. select Travel Distance. 25 In the Edit Label dialog. under Parameters. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog.rft. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. and open Imperial\Templates\Generic Tag.

35 Save the file. 33 On the Design Bar. and press DELETE. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance.rfa.rvt is selected. 29 In the drawing window. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. click Load into Projects. and move it down. and click OK. select Path ID. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. click Modify. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. type Travel Distance Tag. for File Name.28 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Save As dialog. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 677 . and click Save. verify that i_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress.

Placing. 6 Move the cursor to the right. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. above the exterior door as shown.Level 1. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click in the center of the corridor. After the lines are tagged. 678 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . select Chain. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise.rvt. double-click Exiting Plan . You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Tagging. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 2 Zoom in to the corridor. under Floor Plans. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. click Component.

double click Exiting Plan . 17 On the Options Bar. click Modify. select the 2 dashed travel lines. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. clear Leader. through the door. and click (Element Properties). 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. for Path ID. click Modify. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 679 . under Constraints. 13 While pressing CTRL. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. 8 On the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. Placing. verify that Chain is selected. and click outside of the building. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. move the cursor near the right corner. and click OK. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. click Component. 12 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. type 1-1.Level 2. under Floor Plans.7 Move the cursor down.Tagging.

23 Move the cursor down. 680 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling .19 Move the cursor up through the door. click Modify. and click above the door to the stair. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. 21 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Design Bar. click Component. move the cursor to the left. and click. and click in the stair.

25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 27 On the Design Bar. 33 For Name.24 On the Design Bar. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. . for Path ID. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. and click OK.Tagging. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 681 . 30 Using the same method. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. under Category. under Constraints. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. click Tag ➤ By Category. and click OK. type Level 1 Exit Distance. click Modify. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. Placing. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. type 2-1. 28 While pressing CTRL.

35 Click the Filter tab. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. 46 In the Project Browser. under Other. and click Add. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Rename. in the first field. click Edit. 43 In the Project Browser. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. type 2-. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 41 Under Fields. 38 For Sort by. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. and click OK. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. 36 For Filter by. type 1-. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Path ID and Travel Distance. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. while pressing CTRL. 42 Click OK. in the third field. under Available fields. 50 Save the file.rvt. select Path ID. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. and under Field formatting. 45 In the Rename View dialog. select Path ID. click Training Files. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit MEP components.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. for Filter. type Level 2 Exit Distance. select Travel Distance. in the second field. and click Properties. select Calculate totals. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. for Filter by. under Schedules/Quantities. 49 Click OK twice. 44 In the Project Browser. and in the third field. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. 40 Click the Formatting tab. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. select contains. 682 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling .

6''. 9 Click OK twice. 10 In the schedule. 4 Under Available fields. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. select the following fields.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.Interiors ➤ C10 . and click Properties. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Identity Data. select Walls. and select C1010145 .Fixed Partitions. click the Value field.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 . right-click Generic . expand C . right-click the Design Bar.Partitions ➤ C1010100 . expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. and click .Drywall w/ Metal Stud. and click OK. click the Fields tab. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 683 . for Assembly Code. and click View.Partitions . under Categories. click Schedule/Quantities. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active.

the database display may be different than that shown. 684 | Chapter 11 Tagging and Scheduling . 11 Click OK 3 times. type Revit_Project. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. click the File Data Source tab. click OK. and click Next. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 1 On the File menu. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays.mdb). 8 In the New Database dialog.mdb. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. 6 Click Finish. click Training Files. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. under Database. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. 3 Click New. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. for Database Name. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. and click OK to create the database. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. select a location for the database file. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. 9 Under Directories. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. click Create. and click Next.11 Close the exercise file.

instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes.Revit MEP creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit MEP exports. Additionally. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. For example. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. in addition to the Id column. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 685 . The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. 13 Close the exercise file.

686 .

You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit MEP 2009 projects. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 687 . as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0'.Annotating and Dimensioning 12 In this tutorial. You accomplish this in Revit MEP by defining levels as either project or shared levels.

After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project. 688 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0' to 325'.Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height Relocating a Project In this exercise. the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. 3 On the Options Bar. the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. click Edit/New. and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. However. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate. click Training Files. 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. 6 Click OK twice. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project. for Elevation Base. Under Constraints.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 8 Select the Level 1 line. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. The levels in the project are not shared. click (Element Properties). Relocating a Project | 689 . In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated. In the Name dialog. select Shared. and click OK. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).rvt. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0'. If you did that now. expand Views (all). type 1/4'' Head .Shared Elevation. and double-click South.

you specify the point (0') from which you want to relocate the project. 10 On the View menu. 690 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Modify. Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. By typing 325' in this step. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. The south elevation is displayed. type 325'. 13 On the Design Bar. The base elevation now reads 325'. 12 In the Type Selector. select Level : 1/4'' Head .Shared Elevation.By selecting the Level 1 line. and press ENTER. you specify the new location of the project.

14 In the Project Browser. the Penthouse level. Relocating a Project | 691 . under Elevations. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. 15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ While pressing CTRL. and the Roof Plan level. double-click North.The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration. as well as other views of the building model. select Levels 2-4.

Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. You place linear. In this case. 16 If you want to save your changes. multi-segmented. radial. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. permanent dimensions are created automatically. Dimensioning on page 692. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit MEP to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. click File menu ➤ Save As. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Dimensioning In this lesson. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation. select Level : 1/4'' Head . In Revit MEP.Shared Elevation. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. click Modify.■ ■ In the Type Selector. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. 692 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . and angular dimensions. except when you sketch profiles to complete families. On the Design Bar. and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

Creating Dimensions | 693 .Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. click Dimension. dimensions are aligned. expand Views (all). The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. and are created by selecting individual reference points. snap to wall centerlines. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select it. By default.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view. expand Floor Plans. and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall.

select it.4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view. 5 Move the cursor above the view. and click to place the dimension. 694 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall.

and select it. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. click Dimension. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right.6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. Creating Dimensions | 695 . click Modify. The lock displays as locked.

15 After you select the reference points on the final planter.11 Using the same method. select the right endpoint of the planter. select Wall Faces. but below the first dimension that you placed. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 14 Move the cursor to the right. select the right side of the curtain wall. and select its left exterior face. 696 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . 16 Move the cursor up. above the plan view of the building. 12 On the Options Bar. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension. for Prefer. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right.

enter Linear . Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. 18 On the Basics tab. select Baseline. Creating Dimensions | 697 .Ordinate. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. and click OK.Baseline. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. 27 Click OK twice. The dimensions start from 0' 0" and increase moving away from the origin. 22 In the Name dialog. select Ordinate. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog. click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another. for Dimension String Type. click Edit/New. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. under Graphics.Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. 23 In the Type Properties dialog.3/32" Arial . for Dimension String Type. . enter Linear . and click OK. 25 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. 21 In the Type Properties dialog.3/32" Arial .

select Linear . 30 In the Type Selector. and in the Type Selector. . to the left.29 Select the dimension string. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text. enter Planter. 34 Click OK. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above. verify that Use Actual Value is selected. or to the right of a permanent dimension value. select Linear . under Dimension Value. The Dimension 32 In the Dimension Text dialog.Baseline.3/32" Arial . for example Text dialog displays.3/32" Arial to return to the original dimension style. below. 33 Under Text Fields. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline. 698 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . for Below.

35 On the Design Bar. 37 On the Design Bar. and select it. select Wall faces. Creating Dimensions | 699 . 40 Move the cursor outside the wall. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. 38 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). click Modify. For Prefer. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. click Modify. and specify a point to place the dimension. click Dimension.

for Suffix. type Typ. 700 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . click the dimension text. 44 With the dimension still selected. and click OK.. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog.42 Select the radial dimension. click Modify. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. 46 On the Basics tab.

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5. For Prefer. 50 Select the horizontal line. click Dimension. Creating Dimensions | 701 . 48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 51 Select the left exterior face of the planter. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building. verify that Wall faces is selected. 49 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular).

You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings. Automatic wall dimension Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 3. 53 On the Basics tab. instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. When you dimension the wall. and click to place the dimension. 702 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. expand Views (all). 54 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 702.52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc. you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser. you select only the wall. click Modify.

Click Options. select Wall centerlines. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 703 . 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. click Dimension. and select Widths. select Openings. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Entire Walls. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select references. Click OK. and click to place the automatic dimension string. Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. For Pick.

2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension. expand Floor Plans. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. and double-click Level 1. expand Views (all). you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. However. When you place dimensions. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. in some cases. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. Controlling Witness Lines on page 704. for a multi-segmented dimension. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. 704 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning .7 On the Basics tab. For example. Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter. and select it. Controlling Witness Lines | 705 . 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights. select Individual References. click Dimension. verify Wall centerlines is selected. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer. For Pick.

9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted. select the bottom right endpoint. and click to place the dimension. select the right edge of the planter. move the cursor down. 10 Using the same method. 8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension.7 Using the same method. 706 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . and select it.

select Wall centerlines. click Dimension. and when the wall centerline highlights. 13 On the Options Bar. Controlling Witness Lines | 707 . select it. for Prefer.11 Move the cursor down. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan. Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab. and specify a point to place the dimension.

select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed.15 Moving the cursor to the right. and click to place the dimension. 19 Release SHIFT. 16 On the Design Bar. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 708 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . 18 While pressing SHIFT. select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. and drag the dimension down the wall. click Modify.

you change the dimension tick mark. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 709. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 709 . 21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. 22 On the Basics tab. After you create the new family type. drag it to the right. text font. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise. click Modify. and using the same methods. create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.20 Click the blue middle grip. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

2 Click (Element Properties). 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 In the Name dialog. 710 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning .rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ Under Graphics. and click OK. for Tick Mark. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. click Edit/New. select Arrow 30 Degree.Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. and select the lower dimension. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. type Office Standard.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. 7 On the Basics tab. 9 In the Type Selector. select another font. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 711 . select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. select CityBlueprint. ■ Click OK twice. For Text Font.■ ■ Under Text. for Text Size. click Modify. 10 On the Basics tab. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list. click Modify. type 1/8”. and select the bottom dimension. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. and modify it to use the office standard parameters. create a new angular dimension type. Creating Text Annotation In this lesson. 712 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . select the angular dimension on the planter. and how to add leaders to the text notes.11 Using the same method. 12 Proceed to the next lesson. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. Creating Text Annotation on page 712.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Text. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 713 . you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. 3 On the Options Bar. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. for Leader. zoom to the planter near grid line 5. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. but below the upper dimension string.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. click (None). and click and drag to create a text box. 4 Move the cursor above grid line 4.Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise.

click Duplicate. select Arc Leaders. 10 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. 714 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. and click OK. type EXISTING BUILDING. for Text Size. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. and click . 11 Under Text. and click OK. 7 Select the text box. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify. type 1/4''. under Graphics. If so. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.5 In the text box. click Edit/New. type 1/4'' Arial Notes.

17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader). ■ Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. 15 On the Design Bar. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4. click Text. click Modify. A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 715 . Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the Planting Bed text box. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. and type Planting Bed.

for Leader Arrowhead. select CityBlueprint. for New. 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. Click Rename. In the Rename dialog. 24 On the Design Bar. Click OK twice. click Modify. Under Graphics. 20 On the Design Bar. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog.19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. click Modify. 716 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning . Under Text. and click OK. for Text Font. type Standard Notes. click Edit/New.

27 On the Options Bar. click Text. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right. click to place the text box. select Text: Standard Notes. and type 18'' Conc. Wall. and click Modify. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 717 . for Leader. 26 In the Type Selector. 31 Click in the text box. 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3. click (Arc). over the Planting Bed text.Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text.

click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.32 If you want to save your changes. 718 | Chapter 12 Annotating and Dimensioning .

you learn how to create details in Revit MEP 2009. you trace over the building model geometry. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. 719 . For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. These components display at the required scale. like a standard door header condition. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. In the callout view. In order to detail from the building model. and metal studs. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. add detail components. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson.Detailing 13 In this tutorial. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. plywood.

click Yes to load a Detail Items family. click Training Files. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. 7 In the drawing area. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. region objects. 720 | Chapter 13 Detailing . Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt.rfa. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. and insulation objects. click Detail Component. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. which means that all detail components. you detail the view of the roof edge. as well as detail lines. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. and click OK. navigate to Imperial\Families\i_Corrugated Metal. After you add components. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. select As underlay. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You load detail components. They are also view specific. click Training Files. The roof overhang detail displays. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 5 In the alert dialog. and click Open. Exact location is not important. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. double-click the detail callout head.Detailing the View In this exercise. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view.

Detailing the View | 721 . 15 For Spacing. 10 On the Options Bar. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. click (Element Properties). 17 In the drawing area. 13 In the Name dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. select Corrugated Metal. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. click Repeating Detail. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. enter 1' 4". click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. click Edit/New. and click OK. for Pattern ➤ Detail. click Duplicate. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. 16 Click OK twice. 12 In the Type Properties dialog.8 Delete the component.

TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. and click Open. click Detail Component. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. and on the Edit toolbar. 22 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 24 In the Type Selector.19 On the Design Bar. 722 | Chapter 13 Detailing . navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\Plywood-Section. ■ ■ Click Modify. click (Move). click Load.rfa. verify that Plywood-Section : 3/4" is selected. 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Modify. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point.

navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\i_Roof Edge Components. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. you load them as a group from a single file. click Detail Component. 31 To properly orient the component. and place it in the detail view as shown. 29 On the Design Bar. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 33 In the Type Selector. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x6. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x8.rvt. and click Open. 30 In the Type Selector. click Training Files. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. Detailing the View | 723 . click OK.Because you still have several components to load. press SPACEBAR 3 times.

click the Flip instance arrows. 37 Click Modify. 724 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 38 Select the horizontal segment.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. 35 On the Options Bar. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8". select Chain. and click Modify. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown.

click Insulation. For Offset.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. click Select the left midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move start point. and on the Edit toolbar. select to near side. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. Detailing the View | 725 . 42 Click Modify. Select the right midpoint of the 2x8 component as the move end point. enter 5 1/2". (Move). 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. as shown. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width.

46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. 47 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. 726 | Chapter 13 Detailing . select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x12. select Rigid Insulation-Section : 2 1/2".■ Click Modify. 45 In the Type Selector. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. 48 Place the component directly above the 2x8 component. select Plywood-Section : 3/4". and lock the component. 51 Click Modify. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. as shown.

select Thin Lines. meaning they display only in this view. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. For Offset. and press ENTER. enter 1/4". click Detail Lines. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. they are view specific.52 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 Click Modify. click Detail Lines. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. as shown. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 2x8 component. 2 In the Type Selector. Like detail components. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. select Thin Lines. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 2x12 component to the lower left corner of the 2x8 component. Adding Detail Lines on page 727. Adding Detail Lines | 727 . 7 In the Type Selector. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). you add lines to your detail. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 2x12 component and the roof joist.

10 On the Design Bar. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 2x12 component. 728 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and draw the detail lines as shown. as shown. click (Draw). For Offset. 16 On the Options Bar. select Chain. click Detail Lines. Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. enter 1/4". and clear Chain. and press ENTER. 11 In the Type Selector. as shown. 13 Add detail lines around the 2x12 component. select Medium Lines.

draw the detail lines as shown. select Do not display. select Thin Lines. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. When you turn the display model off. 22 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Type Selector. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. Adding Detail Lines | 729 . and click Properties. 24 On the View Control Bar.17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. and click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click. select the Penthouse level line. click ➤ Hide Crop Region.

and press ENTER. 29 On the Design Bar. select Vapor Barrier. click Detail Lines. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. select Break Line.Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. enter 1/2". TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. 30 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. 26 In the Type Selector. 730 | Chapter 13 Detailing . For Offset. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). press SPACEBAR as necessary.

you add text notes to complete the detail. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. Adding Text Notes | 731 . click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click to place the dimension. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the View Control Bar. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command.32 Click Modify. Click again to specify the location of the text box. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. Enter the text. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. Adding Text Notes on page 731. 6 Click the left outer edge of the 2x12 component. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. click Dimension. click Text. 4 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow.rvt. specify 3/4" = 1'-0" for the scale. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Add a dimension to the detail 5 On the Design Bar.

Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Text Fields. Creating Detail Components on page 732. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. (Filter Selection). 9 In the Dimension Text dialog.rvt. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. and save the exercise file. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. and click the dimension text. enter Typ. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. right-click. 732 | Chapter 13 Detailing . and click OK. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. right-click. for Suffix. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. click 6 In the Filter dialog. click Select All Instances. on the Options Bar. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. and click Rename.Keynotes.7 Click Modify. select a text note. and press DELETE. right-click. enter Roof Overhang Detail . and click OK. click Roof Overhang Detail. 3 In the Rename View dialog.. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. 8 Select the dimension line.

9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. navigate to Imperial\Templates\Detail Component. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. click Training Files. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. Creating Detail Components | 733 . select all the coping linework. 15 Use a window to select all linework. and click Open. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework.rft. 7 Click Modify. and selecting the chain. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 14 Click Modify. pressing TAB. while pressing CTRL. select Medium Lines. in the Type Selector. 16 Click Modify.

26 Press DELETE. double-click it in the Project Browser.17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. 21 To place the component. 30 In the drawing area. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. click . click Load into Projects. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\i_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. click Detail Component. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files.rfa. for File name. click Detail Component. 25 In the Filter dialog. 23 Using a window. delete the underlying linework. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. While pressing SHIFT.Keynotes view is not the open view. clear Detail Items. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. 734 | Chapter 13 Detailing . Adding Keynotes on page 735. 28 On the Options Bar. and the component can be placed in the detail. click Load. and click Open. 18 In the Save As dialog. 22 Click Modify. select the coping. 31 Using the same method used previously. The original linework remains selected. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. 27 On the Design Bar. enter Roof Edge. and click Save. navigate to your preferred location. 24 On the Options Bar. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK.

For the metal coping. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. click Training Files. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. navigate to Imperial\Families\Annotations\Keynote Tag.B5. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. you place keynotes on objects. 3/4" Plywood. 2-1/2" Rigid Insulation.Adding Keynotes In this exercise.rfa. and click OK. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. click Keynote ➤ Element. use keynote 07645. and click Open.C1. 2 In the alert dialog. Adding Keynotes | 735 .rvt. In the Keynotes dialog. use keynote 06160. Click to place the leader arm.D11. Roof Edge4.

navigate to 07645. For the 3/4" Plywood Siding. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. use keynote 09250. 15 In the Type Selector.20 Ga. 17 Keynote the component.D11. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. 11 Click OK 3 times. select the metal fascia with drip edge. For the 2 instances of the 5/8" Gypsum Wallboard. and click . 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 7/8" Corrugated Steel . for Identity Data ➤ Keynote.F1. use keynote 06160. use keynote 06110.6 Click Modify. click Detail Component. using keynote 07460. use keynote 06110. 18 Save the file. 13 Tag components: ■ (Element Properties).I1. FasciaProfile_1.G1.D1. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. 12 On the Design Bar. 736 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 19 Proceed to the next exercise. You do this in order to keynote the component. For the 2x12. select Corrugated Metal. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. use keynote 06110. For the 2x8. Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. For the 2x6.F1. click in the Value column. click Keynote ➤ Element. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 737. click Edit/New. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component.A8.

14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. select Medium Lines. 6 Lock the line. navigate to Imperial\Templates\Detail Component line based. click Load into Projects. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. 13 In the Type Selector. and select the right end point. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. navigate to your preferred location. 4 In the Type Selector. and click (Element Properties). 20 Click OK 3 times. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. and click Modify. and click Save. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. enter i_Medium Line Detail Component.rft. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 737 . 5 In the drawing area.rvt. 22 On the Options Bar. click Load. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Detail Component. 19 In the Name dialog. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. 15 Click Modify. select the left end point of the reference line. 11 Press DELETE. select Medium Line Detail Component. click Edit/New. for File name. 9 On the Design Bar. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. click Detail Component. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. click Training Files. 8 In the Save As dialog. 16 Select the component. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click Open. click Lines. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

on the Edit toolbar. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. and click .23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 37 Click OK 3 times. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. name the component 2 x 8 Framing. click Detail Component. i_Invisible Line Detail Component.G1. 41 Select the component just added. 48 Using the same method used previously. name the component Air Barrier. and click . click Detail Component. invisible. 30 Click Modify. 29 In the drawing area. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. (Move). 42 Using the same method used previously. and assign it keynote 06110. enter EPDM Membrane. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. 32 In the Element Properties dialog.A5. and click the lower end at the break line. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. 738 | Chapter 13 Detailing . You add the components to the project and keynote them. 31 Select the component. against the 3/4" plywood. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components. 46 Click Modify. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. and click Open. and hidden) used in the view. and click . select i_Light Line Detail Component. 27 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 49 With the component selected. 38 On the Design Bar. 24 While pressing CTRL. and click . 34 In the Name dialog. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 25 Next. 44 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. and assign it keynote 07260. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. and click OK.A1. click Training Files. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. 28 In the Type Selector. and i_Light Line Detail Component. click in the Value column. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 47 Select the component. 40 Click Modify. select i_Hidden Line Detail Component. click Duplicate.

Creating Line-based Detail Components | 739 . 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. select i_Hidden Line Detail Component. and click . click Detail Component. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. select Chain. 55 Click Modify.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. 53 On the Options Bar. leaving the detail component lines. 52 In the Type Selector.

select Invisible Lines. 63 In the drawing area. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Load into Projects.rfa. Air Barrier. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. click Detail Component. 64 Save the file as i_Invisible Line Detail Component.rfa. and assign it keynote 07260. select the component. 67 In the Type Selector. in the Type Selector.58 Using the method used previously.A4. 68 In the drawing area. 2 x 8 Framing. 60 On the Design Bar. 740 | Chapter 13 Detailing . click Keynote ➤ Element. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ i_Medium Line Detail Component. and Vapor Barrier. 61 In the drawing area. select i_Invisible Line Detail Component. name the component Vapor Barrier. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation.

add a keynote for the component. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number.txt. Enter 07460. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. and assign it keynote 07210.txt. ■ Modifying a Keynote Database | 741 . 73 Proceed to the next exercise. click File menu ➤ Save. click Keynote ➤ Element. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. name the component Batt Insul. under Keynote Table. Enter 07463. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. select Absolute. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 741. and press ENTER. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Imperial. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. and close the text editor. navigate to 07463. and click OK. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.69 Select the component. and press TAB. Each keynote displays as a simple number. 72 Save the file. 71 In the drawing area. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit MEP. 3 In the text editor. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. 11 Click Modify. and click to place the note. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. select all the keynotes.A1. click to place the leader. 10 In the Keynotes dialog.A9. and double-click i_Example_RevitKeynotes. under Path Type. and click OK. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. and press TAB. and click .A1. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. navigate to i_Example_RevitKeynotes. click Browse. 9 In the drawing area. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. 70 Using the method used previously. The database file opens in a text editor.. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. In the Type Selector. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer.A4.rvt. 6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. and click Open. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file.

13 Click Modify. For Positioning.rvt. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. and click OK.■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. 742 | Chapter 13 Detailing . The detail that you import is in DWG format. 14 Save the file. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson.Center to Center is selected. Navigate to Imperial\i_Roof Edge Detail. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. select 3" = 1'-0". select Black and White. click Training Files. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. For Colors. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. These details do not update with changes to the building model. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit MEP or by importing details from an existing detail library. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. for Scale. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. verify that Auto .dwg. After you create a drafting view. you learn how to create a drafted detail.

Creating a Reference Callout | 743 . right-click Drafting 1. and click OK.■ Click Open. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 5 Click Modify. 7 In the Rename View dialog. select Reference other view. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping.rvt. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Reference Callout on page 743. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. click Callout. 6 Select the callout. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. The detail is imported as an import symbol. 3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. enter EPDM Metal Coping. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise.

Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Type Properties dialog.No Reference. The callout is updated with the sheet information. 12 Click OK twice. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. and click OK. delete the existing value. enter Detail . and double-click the callout. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. click Rename. click Edit/New. for New. 10 In the Rename dialog.Elev. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail ./Sect. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar./Details. right-click EPDM Metal Coping.No Reference). Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). click Modify. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. 744 | Chapter 13 Detailing . double-click A105 .

18 Save the file. 3 On the View Control Bar. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. enter Header @ Sliding Door.rvt. verify that the scale is 3" = 1'-0". i_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click OK. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 745 . 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 745 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. so you use Revit MEP tools to draft the detail. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. for Name. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Detail Component. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.

Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. click Region Properties. click . select Gypsum-Plaster. enter Gyp. and enter 5/8". 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ . for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. click Filled Region. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 While pressing CTRL. 20 On the Design Bar. select Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 2x6. for Name. select Wide Lines. 16 Select the left edge of the region. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 17 Click Modify. click Edit/New.5 In the Type Selector. 19 In the Type Selector. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. 746 | Chapter 13 Detailing . click Duplicate. select the width dimension. and click OK. select the left and bottom edges of the region. 14 Click OK 3 times. Board. 11 In the Name dialog. Draw a rectangle as shown.

Select the midpoint of the upper 2x6 as the start point. click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 747 . and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 2x6. Move the cursor up. 24 Select the mirrored region. (Draw). click 22 On the Options Bar. and click above the top of the region as the end point.Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. and on the Edit toolbar.

28 In the Element Properties dialog. click Region Properties. 33 Click OK 3 times. Select the right edge of the lower 2x6. 30 In the Name dialog. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. in the Type Selector. On the Options Bar. click (Rectangle). click Filled Region. click (Align). 35 Select all the linework for the wood region.Finish. select Wood . 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. click Duplicate. verify that the thickness is 3/4".Finish.25 Click Modify. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 748 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ . Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. and select the right edge of the wood region. 36 Align the wood region to the 2x6: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. enter Wood . click Edit/New. for Name. Draw a rectangle as shown. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. and click OK.

click Filled Region. enter 1/4". click Finish Sketch. sketch the new region as shown. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 749 .37 On the Design Bar. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. 40 On the Options Bar. 39 In the Type Selector. click . For Offset. select Medium Lines. 42 On the Design Bar. verify that the width is 3/4" and the height is 2 1/2". 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Ref Plane. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. click Finish Sketch. 38 On the Design Bar.

Move the cursor down 1'. Select Chain. enter 0. click 48 Click Modify. Move the cursor right 1".46 On the Tools toolbar. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. For Offset. Move the cursor left 1". and click to select the point. and click to select the point. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. (Align). 52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. click Filled Region. and press ENTER. 47 Click the reference plane. 750 | Chapter 13 Detailing . and press ENTER. For Offset. enter 3/8". and click to select the point.

select Medium Lines. enter 1/8". 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Detail Lines. and select the bottom horizontal line. and press ENTER. Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. click (Trim/Extend). For Offset. 56 On the Design Bar. 60 Select the left. and right edges of the door panel region.54 On the Tools toolbar. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 751 . click Finish Sketch. 58 In the Type Selector. top.

select the height dimension. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.rfa. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Component.61 Click Modify. click Load. 62 Select the left detail line. 752 | Chapter 13 Detailing . navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\A307 Bolts-Side. and press ENTER. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. 68 Click Modify. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. 65 On the Options Bar. and click Open. 69 Select the bolt. enter 3". click Training Files. 63 Repeat for the right detail line.

79 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 2x6. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.70 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 753 . select Wide Lines. 71 On the Options Bar. 78 On the Design Bar. navigate to Imperial\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\Expansion Bolts-Side. and click Open. click Detail Lines. click Load. 74 Select the expansion bolt. use the images as a guide. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. select Thin Lines. 76 In the Type Selector. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. click Training Files. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 2x6. 80 On the Options Bar.rfa. click Detail Lines. click .

click Detail Lines. 87 Click Modify. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. click . click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. 754 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 84 On the Design Bar. 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. 85 On the Options Bar.82 Select the rectangle. and on the Edit toolbar. (Mirror).

click (Mirror). 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. as shown. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. select Medium Lines. 92 Select the line. and on the Edit toolbar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 755 .89 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. 90 In the Type Selector.

enter 1/8". 99 Click Modify. click .94 Select the mirrored line on the right. and click to place the arc as shown. and press ENTER. 756 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 96 Beginning at the end of the 1/8" line. click Detail Lines. 102 In the Type Selector. select the length dimension. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 103 Add two break lines as shown. 95 On the Design Bar. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. 101 On the Design Bar. select Break Line. click Detail Component. 97 On the Options Bar. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left.

Because detail measurements are typically less than a foot. 106 Click to place the dimension. 105 In the drawing area. click Dimension. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. 114 On the Design Bar. 107 Select the dimension line. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. and click OK. for Text ➤ Units Format. 110 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. 112 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 113 Click OK 3 times. select To the nearest 1/16". and click Modify. click Duplicate. 109 In the Type Properties dialog.3/32" Arial. The dimension display is updated. enter Detail Linear . the new style displays only inches. click in the Value column. For Rounding. Select Suppress 0 Feet. click 108 In the Element Properties dialog. You create a dimension style for detailing that rounds to a more precise measurement than the default. and on the Options Bar. 111 In the Type Properties dialog. . click Dimension.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 757 .

3/32”Arial. and then click the dimension text. and enter Varies. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 122 On the Design Bar. 116 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. drag the text for the smaller dimension. using the Drag Text grip. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 118 Select the wall dimension. for Below. 120 Under Text Fields. select Replace With Text. 117 Select the dimension line. 758 | Chapter 13 Detailing . 119 In the Dimension Text dialog. 121 Click OK. select Linear Dimension Style : Detail Linear 3/32" Arial. click Dimension. enter See Schedule.115 In the Type Selector. 124 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. 123 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . and click Modify. under Dimension Value.

and enter 6 7/8" @ Type A.125 Select Modify to end the command. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 759 . 126 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. 127 In the Dimension Text dialog. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. select Replace With Text. 129 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 7 ½" “ @ Type B. 130 Click OK. under Dimension Value. Enter 9 ½" “ @ Type C. and click the dimension text. 128 Click OK.

139 Save the file. 132 In the Options Bar. 133 In the drawing area. select the gypsum board region on the left. click to create an arced leader. 136 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. 138 On the Design Bar. 134 Enter Gyp. click Modify to end the command. and click to place the text. 135 Select the note. and on the Options Bar. 137 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. and click Modify.Add text notes to complete the detail 131 On the Design Bar. click (Add Right Arc Leader). click Text. 760 | Chapter 13 Detailing . Board.

you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family.rvt. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).Finishing the Sheets 14 In this tutorial. 761 . you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. click Training Files. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. and open Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click East. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

rfa.Hexagon.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Select the keynote. click Training Files. type 1. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. click Symbol. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . for Number of Leaders. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. click Modify. 762 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. 7 On the Design Bar.

under Identity Data. for Text.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. 12 On the Edit toolbar. 13 Select the tag. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click (Copy). Creating a Note Block | 763 . and click above the tag to place the copy. click (Element Properties). type Seal existing doors and insulate. on the Options Bar.

type B. click Copy. and click. 18 Using the same method. 19 With the tag selected. on the Options Bar. 16 For Tag. 17 Click OK.14 With the copy selected. (Mirror). position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. click (Element Properties). make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. and on the Options Bar. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 15 For Text. type Repair existing door surround. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. on the Edit toolbar. 764 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets .

Clean exterior brick wall. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Remove all existing windows. Tuckpoint as required. 22 Optionally. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 765 . Repair as required. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required.21 On the Design Bar. Clean existing concrete loading dock. click Modify. Repair existing door surround. and moving counter-clockwise. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. using the table as a reference.

25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. 28 In the Project Browser. select Tag. expand Schedules/Quantities. type Mark. and double-click A103 . expand Sheets (all). Clean cut and repair wall as required. type Exterior Construction Notes. On the Formatting tab. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet.Elevations. select Tag. for Heading. select Center. type Description. type 1/4''. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. and click Add. under Available fields. format. and click Add. and select Bold. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Exterior Construction Notes. On the Appearance tab. Create. and for Alignment. 27 In the column header (text). and drag it to the sheet. for Note block name. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. Select Text. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. 26 Click OK.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. 29 In the Project Browser. verify that Arial is selected. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. for Header text. for Sort by. 766 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . and click OK. for the value.

rvt.rvt.31 On the Design Bar. click Modify. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. Using Drawing Lists | 767 . Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. double-click T . 33 Save the file as Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 1 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all).Title Sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise.

and drag it to the sheet. and click Add. in the second field. and click Add. type T. for Filter by. in the first field. select Sheet Number. expand Schedules/Quantities. The drawing list displays. select does not equal. double-click T . select Sheet Number. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. select Sheet Index. 7 In the Project Browser. ■ 4 Click OK. for Sort by.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. under Available fields. select Sheet Number. 768 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . 6 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). 5 In the list title field. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. On the Filter tab. Select Sheet Name.Title Sheet. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. and in the third field.

Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list.9 On the Design Bar. 11 Save the file. For the text. Finally. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. click Modify. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit MEP building model. and so on). door frame schedule. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. and door frames. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. Training File Using Legends | 769 . windows. On construction documents. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. On construction documents. doors.

select Arial. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Imperial\i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. type Typical Symbol Legend. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. and click OK. for Name. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. you create a text type with the necessary size. type Legend Text. for Name. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. click Text.rvt.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click . 2 In the New Legend View dialog. click Edit/New. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. and click OK twice. 770 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . and click OK. 9 For Text Font. click Symbol.Open Level Head . You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. type 1/8''. click Duplicate.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . 10 For Text Size.Circle Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote .

verify that is selected. 16 In the Project Browser.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. and for Leader. 14 Working from the top down. and double-click A101 . 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. expand Legends. Creating a Symbol Legend | 771 . and click to place it.Site Plan/Floor Plan. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). click Typical Symbol Legend.

20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. click Modify. 23 Save the file. 19 In the Project Browser. 18 On the Design Bar.Unit 18. 22 On the Design Bar. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. select Viewport : Viewport /no titlemark. under Sheets. select Viewport : Viewport /no titlemark. 21 In the Type Selector. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. and click to place it. click Modify. double-click A102 . 772 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets .17 In the Type Selector.

5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. and click OK. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. 3 For Scale. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 7 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. for Name. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. type 4th Floor Wall Types. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. For Host length. click Legend Component. and on the Options Bar. 8 On the Design Bar.rvt. For View. type 3'. 9 Select the second wall. 6 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. select 3/4'' = 1'-0''. and press ENTER. select Section. for Family. Creating a Component Legend | 773 . select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. click Modify.

11 In the Type Selector. 774 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets .'' 14 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. 13 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. for Leader. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. 12 On the Options Bar. click to add text without a leader.Add titles to the legend components 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Text. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected.

16 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. The text note with leader is added to the legend. 18 Type the following text. click to add text with a single-segment leader. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 1'' Decking 2x4 Stud 1'' Decking. 17 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point.Add text to the legend 15 On the Options Bar. 19 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. Creating a Component Legend | 775 . pressing ENTER between component descriptions.

click OK to accept the default titleblock. under Legends. 776 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . right-click Sheets (all). drag it onto the sheet. select Level 4. under Floor Plans. 21 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Place the legend on a sheet 20 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Project Browser. 23 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. 22 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the new sheet. select 4th Floor Wall Types. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. and click New Sheet.

29 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 31 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. Creating a Component Legend | 777 . double-click Level 4.25 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Project Browser. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. Tile views in the drawing window 26 In the Project Browser. 27 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. under Floor Plans. Match a component type 30 On the Tools toolbar. click Modify to end the command. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. The open drawings are both visible. select the Wall Type 2 component. click (Match Type).

The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. select Detail Level: Medium. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. 34 On the View Control Bar. 778 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets .32 In the floor plan view. 33 Select the patio divider wall.

under Floor Plans.rvt. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. Using Revision Tracking | 779 . unanticipated changes in construction conditions. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. Using the table. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. These changes can be due to owner requests.35 Optionally. Using Revision Tracking Revit MEP provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. or changes in building material availability. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 4. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. You can create a sequence of revisions. In this exercise. click 36 Save the file. contractor inquiries.

2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. yet as concise as possible. 780 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . When you use this option. if the active revision is number 1. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. If you select Per Sheet. 5 For Description. 7 Under Show. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. the revision is locked and issued to the field. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. verify that Per Project is selected. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. If Visible is not selected. type a date. In general. In most instances. When Issued is selected. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. for Numbering. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. For example. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued.

which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. including revision number and revision date. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. move the cursor up. Sketching Revision Clouds | 781 . Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. click Modify. you make changes to the project floor plan. 3 Select the divider. under Floor Plans.8 Click OK. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. 6 On the Design Bar. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. click (Move). 4 On the Edit toolbar. 9 Save the file. 5 Select the divider. double-click Level 4. Revision clouds have read-only properties. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider.rvt.

and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. 11 On the Design Bar. click near the partition you moved. In the Snaps dialog. Revit MEP is now in sketch mode. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. select Snaps Off. 782 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets .Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Revision Cloud. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. 8 In the drawing area. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition.

Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. select 6. for Line Weight. 17 Save the file. Training File Tagging Revision Clouds | 783 . The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. click the Annotation Objects tab. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. you load a revision tag into the project. 16 Click OK.

6 Click Load.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. the cloud is tagged as number 1. under Floor Plans. click OK. 11 Click to place the tag. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. click Tags. 10 In the drawing area. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. select Leader. Working with Revisions In this exercise. you create additional revisions in the revision table. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. scroll down to Revision Clouds. double-click Level 4. you need to add one. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. and because the revision is the first in the project. You then issue a revision. Because you chose to number by project. Training File 784 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets .rvt. 8 In the Tags dialog. click Tag ➤ By Category. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. If the cursor is just inside the cloud.rfa. 5 In the Tags dialog. 12 Save the file. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. notice that Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 4 On the Options Bar. and open Imperial\Families\Annotations\Revision Tag. click Training Files. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left.

2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. You do this by issuing the revision. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. double-click A107 . Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 7 For Description. 8 Add another revision row. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. NOTE After you issue a revision. select Issued. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. you prevent further changes to the revision. and enter a date for the revision. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. You can continue to add revisions. 9 Click OK. type Modify Paving Area. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. Working with Revisions | 785 . and click OK. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. click Add. and enter a date. you can no longer modify it. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. under Sheets. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet.Unnamed. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. with the description Relocate Door.

Relocate Door to the revision cloud. select Seq. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. 13 Click Finish Sketch. 15 On the Options Bar. 2 . select Tag ➤ By Category.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. for Revision. select the revision cloud. 3 .Modify Paving Area. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock.Unnamed. 786 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. double-click Level 4. 19 To add tags. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. 12 In the drawing area. click to add a revision clouds. under Floor Plans. under Sheets (all). 17 Using the same method learned previously. double-click A107 . 11 On the Drafting tab. 10 In the Project Browser. in the drawing area. 20 On the Project Browser. apply Seq. select Revision Cloud. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab.

Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. select the titleblock. Working with Revisions | 787 . you edit the titleblock family. For each revision. clear Issued. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. 26 In the drawing area. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. Click Options.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. for Sequence. delete the first 3 characters. height. You do this so that the revision can be changed. select Alphabetic. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. beginning with "D". 25 Click OK twice. and rotation) to the revision schedule. for Numbering. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog.

36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. and press DELETE. click Load into Projects. and drag it above the schedule area. and click Properties. click Yes. for Build Schedule. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. 34 On the Design Bar. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. Select Grid lines. click Yes. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. for Appearance. 33 Select the schedule header. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. click Edit. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. click Edit Family. click Modify. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. 28 In the alert dialog. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. 788 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . right-click Revision Schedule. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. Clear Blank row before data. select Bottom-up. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog.27 On the Options Bar. Select Outline. under Other.

the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. for Formatting. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. right-click Revision Schedule. for Heading. When the height property is variable. under Other. open the titleblock family for editing. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. Working with Revisions | 789 . click Edit. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. for Height. 40 Select the revision schedule header. and click Properties. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. With a user-defined height. for Rotation on Sheet. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. 46 Click OK twice. select User defined.. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. select 90° Counterclockwise. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. enter Rev. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. 45 On the Appearance tab. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. select the revision schedule.

text. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. you learn to import information (such as images. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. 50 In the Reload Family dialog. click Yes.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 51 Save the file. click Load into Projects. 790 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets .

4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. under Sheets. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. under Sheets. for Leader.JPG. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Importing Image Files | 791 . Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.Title Sheet. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Modify. and place it on a sheet.Importing Image Files In this exercise. click Text. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click T . 3 On the Options Bar. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. 5 On the Design Bar.rvt. double-click T . you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.Title Sheet. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. click to add text without a leader. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo.

9 On the Design Bar. 11 Save the file. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. 6 Select the text. with the new text box still selected.doc text file in another window. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit MEP. click Modify. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit MEP window. Training File 792 | Chapter 14 Finishing the Sheets . you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement.

mdi. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. type Fixture Schedule.xls. 7 In the Revit MEP window. This step has been completed for you. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. 4 Under Printer.Unit 18. click File menu ➤ Print. under Sheets. Importing Spreadsheets | 793 . 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. i_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. for File name.JPG. click Modify. and saved as Fixture Schedule. for Name. 10 On the Design Bar. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. 12 Save the file. This process may vary from system to system.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 In Microsoft Excel. 1 In the Project Browser. click Desktop. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. click Training Files.rvt. This exercise demonstrates a common method.JPG. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. and click Save. select the document writer. 5 Click OK. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. double-click A102 .

794 .

The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. as well as a large lab building. or footprint. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. To effectively document this project.Using Dependent Views 15 In this tutorial. The large floor plan. 795 . for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. you break up the plan into sections. called dependent views.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 796 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views .

rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 797 . you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. click Training Files. and open Imperial\i_Dependent_Views. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2.

2 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. The dependent view opens. 3 In the Project Browser, under Level 2, right-click Dependent on Level 2, and click Rename. 4 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 - Aviary, and click OK. 5 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar, click Zoom To Fit. 6 In the drawing area, select the crop region. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region, and the model crop is the interior crop region.

7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building.

798 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up, confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).

9 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 799

10 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. 11 In the Project Browser, right-click Level 2, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 12 In the Project Browser, right-click Dependent on Level 2, and click Rename. 13 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 - Labs, and click OK. 14 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. 15 Select the crop region. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs).

17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes.

800 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region.

18 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 19 On the View Control Bar, click (Hide Crop Region).

20 Click in the drawing area, and on the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Matchline. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points:

Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles.)

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 801

■ ■ ■ ■

Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. Click above the left corner of the lab building. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. Move the cursor left about 16', and click.

24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

802 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 26 In the Object Styles dialog, click the Annotation Objects tab. 27 Under Matchline, for Line Weight, select 9. 28 For Line Pattern, select Double Dash 5/8'', and click OK.

Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 31 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets, right-click A101 - Unnamed, and click Rename. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter Level 2 Aviary, and click OK. 33 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, click Level 2 - Aviary, and drag it onto the sheet. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 803

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet, rename the sheet Level 2 Labs, and place the Level 2 - Labs dependent view on the sheet.

Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. 39 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 - Aviary is selected. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline.

804 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline.

41 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Floor Plan: Level 2 - Labs. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.

43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references.

44 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 45 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 805

46 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2 - Aviary. 47 On the View Control Bar, click (Show Crop Region).

48 Select the crop region, click the far right control, and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view.

49 If, after modifying the annotation crop region, the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display, select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area, right-click, and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.

806 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3), leaving 4 rooms visible in the view.

51 On the View Control Bar, click Apply dependent view settings to other plans

(Hide Crop Region).

52 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, right-click Level 2, and click Apply Dependent Views. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view, you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. 53 In the Select Views dialog, select all views in the list, and click OK. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view, but are not placed on sheets. 54 In the Project Browser, expand Level 1, and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 55 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1.

56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 807

57 On the Zoom flyout, click Zoom To Fit.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views
In this exercise, you
■ ■ ■ ■

Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Dependent_Views.rvt

Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South Elevation. The matchline is already placed in the view.

2 In the Project Browser, right-click South Elevation, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.

808 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

The dependent view opens. 3 In the Project Browser, expand South Elevation, right-click Dependent on South Elevation, and click Rename. 4 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation - Left, and click OK. 5 In the drawing area, select the Crop Region.

6 Select the inside crop region control on the right, and drag it toward the center of the view, cropping the view to the aviary.

7 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

8 In the Project Browser, right-click South Elevation, and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 9 In the Project Browser, right-click Dependent on South Elevation, and click Rename. 10 In the Rename View dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation - Right, and click OK. 11 Select the crop region. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left, and drag it toward the center of the drawing, cropping the view to the lab building.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 809

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

810 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 811

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

812 | Chapter 15 Using Dependent Views

Using Advanced Features

813

814

Grouping

16

Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009, you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. By grouping objects, you not only simplify their placement, you also simplify the modification process. For example, when you make changes to a single instance of a model group, all instances in the building model are updated, and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. You can also nest groups within other groups. In this tutorial, you create a model group for a typical kitchen, and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project, or with those working on a different project. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose, creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create, place, and modify repetitive units.

Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups
In this lesson, you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units, hotel rooms, and typical office layouts. After you create a model group, you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. In another exercise, you add the new model group to a previously created group. The new group is considered nested within the host group, and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. When you make changes to a nested group, the host group is also updated automatically.

Creating and Placing a Group
In this exercise, you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. In this exercise, you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. You mirror one instance of the group, and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position.

815

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\i_Groups-Condominium.rvt. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder.

Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click First Floor.

2 Click in the drawing area, enter ZR, and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan.

816 | Chapter 16 Grouping

Creating and Placing a Group | 817 . 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. click (Group). 4 On the Edit toolbar. enter Typical Kitchen. and click OK.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen.

Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. 818 | Chapter 16 Grouping . 7 On the Design Bar. select the center control for the group origin. click Modify.

and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. expand Model. Creating and Placing a Group | 819 . under Groups. and click Create Instance. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. right-click Typical Kitchen. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

15 On the Options Bar. click (Mirror).14 On the Edit toolbar. 820 | Chapter 16 Grouping . 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. clear Copy. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image.

click (Rotate). 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. and on the Edit toolbar. Creating and Placing a Group | 821 .17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell.

select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. and one rotated. 822 | Chapter 16 Grouping . one mirrored. as shown. 20 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images.

rvt. When you finish editing. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. Modifying a Group | 823 . and click to select it.rvt. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. you make changes to an instance of a group. click Save As. and click Save. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. press TAB to highlight the wall.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. Modifying a Group In this exercise. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. name the file i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated.

Click icon to exclude in this group instance. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member.). NOTE To display an excluded element. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click to select the wall.). select the element. press TAB.).).3 Click (Group Member. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. 7 Click (Group Member. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. 824 | Chapter 16 Grouping . and click to select the door. and click member to group instance. press TAB. 4 Move the cursor over the door. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance.

Modifying a Group | 825 . 11 On the Design Bar. click Wall. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. click Modify. 13 In the Type Selector. clear Tag on Placement. select Bifold-4 Panel : 48'' x 84''. 14 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 15 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet.8 On the Design Bar. click Door. 12 On the Design Bar. 10 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. move the cursor to the left.

move the cursor up. In edit group mode. 826 | Chapter 16 Grouping . Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 18 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. 20 On the Options Bar. 17 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click Edit Group. 19 Select the Typical Kitchen group. click Modify. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. All other elements in the model are grayed out. 23 Click near the bottom corner of the wall.16 On the Design Bar. 22 In the drawing area. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening.

enter 7'. and click OK. click 27 For Base Offset. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. and on the Options Bar. Nesting Groups In this exercise. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. enter 3' 4''. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. under Constraints. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. click Finish. Nesting Groups | 827 . for Unconnected Height. you add the Typical Kitchen group. which acts as the host. click Modify. created in an earlier lesson. 25 Select the opening.24 On the Design Bar. 28 On the group editor toolbar. (Element Properties). All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save.

2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. select the Typical Kitchen group. click (Add to Group). Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. 5 In the drawing area.rvt. click Edit Group. double-click First Floor. under Floor Plans. 828 | Chapter 16 Grouping . 3 On the Options Bar. 4 On the group editor toolbar. in the Project Browser.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.

select the wall between the folding doors. under Floor Plans.6 Press TAB. double-click Second Floor. 8 In the Project Browser. 7 On the group editor toolbar. Nesting Groups | 829 . click Finish. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. and each of the bifold doors.

you add door tags to a group.rvt. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. such as text. In the next exercise. such as door and window tags. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. 830 | Chapter 16 Grouping . Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. and filled regions. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. double-click First Floor. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. under Floor Plans.

and select a point below the left elevator. Creating a Detail Group | 831 . click to draw a rectangular region. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. click Finish Sketch. 4 On the Options Bar. click Filled Region. 7 On the Design Bar.

and click OK. 16 In the drawing area. and select the text note and the filled region. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 12 Enter Tile. and on the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. click to add an arc leader. enter Elevator Lobby Tile.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click (Group). 832 | Chapter 16 Grouping . The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. click Text. as shown. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 14 On the Edit toolbar. click Modify.

Because the detail group contains variables. under Floor Plans. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.18 On the Design Bar. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Project Browser. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click Second Floor. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. 21 In the drawing area. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 833 . and click Create Instance. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. click Modify. under Groups. expand Detail.

i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. as shown. 5 On the Design Bar. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.manner that a drawing component can be added. 834 | Chapter 16 Grouping . draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. click Modify. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. double-click First Floor. 3 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. clear Leader. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Tag ➤ By Category. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit.rvt.

under Floor Plans. Using Attached Detail Groups | 835 . enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. 9 On the Edit toolbar. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. click (Filter Selection). click (Group).7 On the Options Bar. select Door Tags. and click OK. double-click Second Floor. for Attached Detail Group Name. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. and click OK. click Check None. 8 In the Filter dialog.

select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. therefore. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. click Modify. 16 On the Design Bar. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. When you load the group from the library into a new project. and click OK. Training File 836 | Chapter 16 Grouping . 14 On the Options Bar. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. click Place Detail. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group.

under Groups\Model. accept the default template file. A warning dialog displays. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. browse to the Desktop. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. click Modify. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. In this case. select 2 Bedroom Unit. and click Save Group. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. for Create new. and click Save.rvt. 5 In the New Project dialog. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. Saving and Loading Groups | 837 . and click Open. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. and click Create Instance. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). click Desktop. 3 For File name. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. and expand Model. click OK. verify that Same as group name is selected. i_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. expand Groups. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. verify that Project is selected. 12 On the Design Bar. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. and click OK.

18 In the Project Browser. When a group is converted to a link. and click OK. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. click Training Files. 20 On the Options Bar. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. and on the Options Bar. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 23 In the confirmation dialog. click Modify. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 838 | Chapter 16 Grouping . click Bind. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. expand Revit Links. click Use Existing. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. click Link. click OK.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. verify that Attached Details is selected only. 26 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. and the link is removed. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project.rvt file is added as a link to the project. 17 On the Design Bar. 24 In the message dialog. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. select the linked Revit model. click Remove Link. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file.

They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. To make a workset editable. The first time you activate worksets within a project. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. When you are working on a shared project. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. After the project is shared. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. select the desired workset. You can enable Worksharing for any project. doors. Working in a shared project In a shared project. stairs. Elements specific to a view. they cannot make changes to it. use Element Borrowing. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. however. called Worksharing. and click Editable. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. A workset is a collection of building elements. you must first enable Worksharing. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit MEP 2009. floors. such as walls. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on.Sharing Projects 17 When working with large building projects. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. All other team members can view this workset. you specify an active workset. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. In this tutorial. Using Worksharing. go to the Worksets dialog. 839 . each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. such as annotations and dimensions. and so on. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area.

In a multi-story structure. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. In the lessons and exercises that follow. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog.Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. such as a tenant interior. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. After learning the fundamentals. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. Team size 840 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . you can select which worksets are open or closed. In the next exercise. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. Instead. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. When setting up Worksharing. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit MEP by opening only those worksets required for your work. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance.

designers work in teams. Team member roles Typically. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. In most projects. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. not including the Project Standards. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. Shared Levels and Grids. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. When creating the new worksets. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. As new members create worksets for their own use. for a typical project. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. with each assigned a specific functional task. Experience has shown that. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. When you create a new workset. each team member has control over a portion of the design. On this tab. and View worksets. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view.You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. This allows Revit MEP to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. Regardless of the default setting. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 841 . Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. You should have at least one workset for each person. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared.

you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. After saving to the central file. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. proceeds as usual. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. Therefore. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. On the Options Bar. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. However. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. 842 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. however. you should then save to your local file. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. When you save to the central file. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. you make that workset editable by you. When finished or at regular intervals. Generally. the file is saved as the central file. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. When you save to the central file. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. within the local file. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. your changes propagate to the entire team. This is called “Selective Open. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. This makes them available to other team members. As you work. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. if a workset named Interior was created. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. For example. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. you can select which workset is active. When you save locally (to your local file).Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. your changes are saved. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them.

you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit MEP. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. When working remotely. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. and make that workset editable.Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. reload the latest changes from the central file. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. In this instance. Alternatively. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. In this conceptual exercise. Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. and then save the local file. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. you work no differently then you would in the office. To do this. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. if you know who checked out the required workset. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. make any required worksets editable. In this situation. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. for instance. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. you should check out the Materials workset. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 843 . save to the central file. using VPN.

Your username displays as the present owner. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. click Worksets. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. and open Common\c_Worksets. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open.In the next exercise. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. and notice all are editable by you. 844 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . click Training Files. under Show. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. 3 In the Worksets dialog.rvt. The Worksets dialog displays." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

and click OK. In this case. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. In this simple training project. type the name Exterior Shell. click OK. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. Therefore. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. 13 In the Rename dialog. click New. Revit MEP creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. expand Floor Plans. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. imagine four users including yourself. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. 14 In the Worksets dialog. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. and Views. Project Standards. however. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. 9 Click New. expand Views (all). Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. ■ 5 Under Show. Only User-Created worksets should display. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. Because the interior walls appear in many views. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 845 . For training purposes. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. 11 In the Worksets dialog. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. you can rename the default workset. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1".When you enable worksharing. You do. another is assigned the interior layout. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. 16 In the drawing area. clear Families. For example. In this training file. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. 12 Click Rename. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. currently named Workset1. When you initially activate Worksharing. 8 Click OK. clear Visible by default in all views. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. and double-click Level 1. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. a small number of team members are working on the building model. select Workset1. it is better to make them visible by default.

846 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . click . click . 23 Select all of the interior elements. select Interior Layout for Workset. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 On the View menu. under Identity Data. including the interior doors. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. click . The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. 29 Click OK. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. click Visibility/Graphics. stairs. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. under Identity Data. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view.17 On the Options Bar. 20 Select one of the interior walls. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. click the Worksets tab. and click OK. under Identity Data. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. and click OK. select Interior Layout for Workset. 19 Click OK. and walls. 21 On the Options Bar. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 On the Options Bar.

double-click Level 2. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 847 . click Visibility/Graphics. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. click Save As. 34 In the drawing area. click Close. Now that you have created the central file. 42 On the right side of the dialog. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. 38 In the Save As dialog. 33 In the Project Browser. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. 44 On the File menu. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. 30 On the View menu. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. and click OK. make sure you remember the location of this central file. click Non Editable. under Identity Data. 43 Click OK. 32 Select Interior Layout. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In this exercise. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. select all of the interior elements of the building model. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. 39 Click Save. click . click Worksets. select Interior Layout for Workset. and click OK. click the Worksets tab. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. you enabled Worksharing on a project. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. under Floor Plans. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. under Views (all). 35 On the Options Bar. 41 In the Worksets dialog. If any interior elements remain. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout.

11 In the Worksets dialog.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. please do so before continuing. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. select Interior Layout. In addition. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 15 In the Project Browser. click Open. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 4 Click Open. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. select all the User-Created worksets. 12 Click OK. 6 On the File menu. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. make modifications to the building model. and click OK. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 2 In the Open dialog. In this case. and select Specify. Before working on the model. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. and click Save. You have created a local file which is for your use only. and click OK. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. click Save As. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 844. and double-click Level 1. select the central file. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. select Interior Layout for Name. click Options. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. If you have not yet completed the exercise. you create your local file. check out worksets. 848 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . Next. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. click Worksets. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. and select Yes for Editable. expand Views (all). This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. expand Floor Plans. 7 In the Save As dialog. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. 13 On the Window menu. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. any referenced workset is opened but hidden.

24 Click OK. In this case. and click OK. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. click . In the Worksets dialog. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. under Identity Data. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. Because this element is not owned by another user. you can still edit this wall. notice the Editable Only option. If this is selected. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. click Modify.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Working Individually with Worksets | 849 . 21 On the Options Bar. Revit MEP borrows it for you and applies your changes. 18 On the Options Bar. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. On the Options Bar. click Worksets. 20 Under Constraints. click . the Edited by value is now assigned to you. Verify that it is cleared. If it was owned by another user. 22 Click OK. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. 23 On the File menu. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. however.

26 Delete the door. 34 In the Type Selector. click Modify.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. 29 In the Type Selector. The precise location is not important. 850 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 31 On the Design Bar. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. click Door. click Wall. 33 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 28 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar.126mm Partition (2-hr). select Basic Wall: Interior . and modify the length so that the corridor is open. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously.

add two door openings into the rooms you created. Throughout the process. save to central. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. you created your local file. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. you should perform regular saves. When working in your local file. Borrowed Elements is selected. please do so before continuing. In this particular case. and reload the latest changes. At the end of a work session. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. click Save to Central. In addition. By default. In this exercise. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. displays the workset as well as the element type. it is recommended.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. Whenever you save. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. two users access the central file through a network connection. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. You modified the building model. a tooltip. leave this file open in its current state. and save locally immediately afterward. If you have not yet completed these exercises. make elements editable. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. checked out worksets. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. each user must check out worksets. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. which matches the information in the Status Bar. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 851 . If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. For training purposes. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. you should relinquish all worksets. Saving your work 36 On the File menu.

14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. and proceed to Creating a local copy. 7 In the Open dialog. and click OK. skip the following section. User 2: Create a local file. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. click Options. click Options. instructions are staggered. For training purposes. and select Yes for Editable. consider that person to be User 1. 15 On the File menu. and click OK. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. under Username. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. 9 Click Open. 12 In the Save As dialog. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit MEP and setting the username to User 2. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). and click Save. 2 Start a new Revit MEP session by double-clicking the Revit MEP icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 852 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects .rvt. and select Specify. In the following section of this exercise. specifically sequenced. click Save As. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. select all the User-Created worksets. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. In addition. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. click Open. click Worksets. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. select the central file. Using a second Revit MEP session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit MEP window. 3 On the Settings menu. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 4 Click the General Tab and. and click OK. You now have a local copy of the project. This is a system setting. 11 On the File menu. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. one user has already created a local file. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. enter User 2. This file is for your use only. return to the Settings dialog. and reset the Username to your computer login name.

it becomes the active workset. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. If it is not open. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 853 . 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. expand Floor Plans. 24 In the Project Browser. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. 17 Click OK. click Save to Central.” 29 Click OK. User 1: Check out worksets. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. and double-click Level 1. and double-click Level 1. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. open it now. expand Views (all). select the lower exterior wall. modify the building model. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. expand Views (all). and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. If you only have one workset checked out. expand Floor Plans. 23 Click OK. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. 27 On the File menu. click Worksets. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. and select Yes for Editable. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated.You are now the owner of that workset. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. 19 On the File menu.

click Save to Central. 33 On the File menu. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. right-click Copy of Level 1. and click OK. 45 In the Rename View dialog. 41 On the File menu. However. 37 On the File menu. right-click Level 1. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. 44 In the Project Browser. 43 In the Project Browser. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. 46 In the Project Browser. click Save to Central. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. click Worksets. under Floor Plans. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. The changes User 2 made are apparent. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. select Yes for Editable. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays.” 39 Click OK. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. 854 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. Before adding any furniture. and click OK. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. 42 Select Furniture Layout. and click Rename. under Floor Plans. When you save to central. you should create a furniture plan view.” 35 Click OK. click Reload Latest. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. under Views (all). and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. User 1: Reload latest worksets.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. Click Yes. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows.

click Edit/New. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. are placed under Project Standards. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. 66 On the File menu. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. enter Exterior Wall . 50 On the View menu. click Reload Latest. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. click Save to Central. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. click Rename. NOTE System families. 65 Click OK. 48 In the Type Selector. choose any desk. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 855 . select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.200mm. 60 In the Rename dialog. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. and click inside any room. 63 In the Worksets dialog. 61 Click OK 2 times. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. such as Wall Types. Therefore. select Project Standards. the Visible by default option was not selected. click Component. and click OK. click Worksets.” 55 Click OK. click Modify. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. click Visibility/Graphics. under Show. and click OK. rather than Families. 62 On the File menu. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. click the Worksets tab. click Save to Central. 53 On the File menu. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. and click Element Properties. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. 49 On the Design Bar.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. At the appropriate point in this exercise. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. and these problems are rectified. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. and still have your local files open. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. select Reload Latest. select Save to Central. 70 On the File menu. modified the building model. click Save As. click Options. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. finished the previous workset exercises. As each of you work. 71 In the Save to Central dialog.rvt. you need to set up your central and local files. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. This exercise requires two users and. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). leave this file open in its current state. you save the training file as a central file. In subsequent steps. throughout this training. click Training Files. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. Checking out worksets. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. In the final exercise of this tutorial. and save 69 On the File menu. Each user checked out worksets. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. and published their changes back to the central file. select the following. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. leave this file open in its current state. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. User 1: Reload latest. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. There are specific instructions for each user. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. Each user must have network access to the central file. 856 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . and click OK. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 856. 3 In the Save As dialog. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). two users are working on the same project with separate local files. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit MEP and setting the username to User 2.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to.

and click OK. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 857 . 12 On the File menu. click Options. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. and click OK. 6 On the File menu. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. 5 Click Save. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. click Save As. and click Save. and select Specify. and click OK. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit MEP by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. ■ ■ ■ This Revit MEP session is now set up for User 2. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. The central file should still be open. 17 On the File menu. click Options. and click OK. and reset the Username to your computer login name. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. select Make this a Central File after save. 15 Click Open. select the central file. Set the Username to User 2. 18 In the Save As dialog. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. You have created a local file which is for your use only. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. click Open. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and click OK.4 In the File Save Options dialog. Next. This is the local file for User 1. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. click Options. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. In addition. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. click Save As. 13 In the Open dialog. On the Settings menu. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. return to the Settings dialog. This is a system setting. 8 In the Save As dialog. and click Save. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive.

You are now the owner of that workset. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. if any User-Created worksets are not open. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. At this point. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. and then click OK. double-click Level 1. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. select the Interior Layout workset. After you submit the request. select Exterior Shell. under Floor Plans. and then click OK. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. and select Yes for Editable. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. 22 In the Worksets dialog. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. and click Open. 29 On the Options Bar. 26 In the Worksets dialog. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. 24 Under Active Workset. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. 27 Under Active Workset. verify that Editable Only is cleared. click Worksets. select them. and click Editing Requests.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. click the File menu. 30 On the left exterior wall. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. click Worksets. Afterwards. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. You are now the owner of that workset. 858 | Chapter 17 Sharing Projects . 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. and select Yes for Editable. select Interior Layout. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. select the second window from the top.

and the other user granted it. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. In this multi-user exercise. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. click Check Now. and click OK. In this case. 36 Click Close. to Local. and notice the window is in the new location. 35 Click Grant. select the following. 38 Click OK. and close 39 On the File menu. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. select Save to Central. click Close.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. A message informs you that your request has been granted. you requested permission to edit the element. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 859 . ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. select the request submitted by User 2.

860 .

you can have multiple sets of design options. In addition. At any time in the design process. Using design options. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. After you and the client agree on the final design. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. For example. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). 861 . and each option set can have multiple schemes. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. In this tutorial.Creating Multiple Design Options 18 When working with a building model.

These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. With the second option. In the final exercise of this lesson. 862 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . click New. and delete the unwanted options from the project. 2 In the Design Options dialog. under Option Set. The client has asked you to create various options. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. click Training Files. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 3"round columns and 2" round bars. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. In the first exercise in this lesson. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. you can edit it. the only available command is to create a new option set. In the second exercise. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. therefore. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\i_Urban_House. each is constructed for interchangeability. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. make your final design decision. you set up multiple design option sets. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. each with multiple design options. TIP In this exercise. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. click Design Options ➤ Design Options.rvt. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary).In this particular case. After you create a design option. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. the roof and structure systems must work together. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. you design each of the structural options. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create.

and the third column centered between the two. Creating the Structural Design Options | 863 . In this case. click 12 On the Options Bar. or add a dimension string between the columns. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. click Modify. 5 On the View menu. expand Floor Plans. add three columns. TIP To center the middle column. expand Views (all). 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. By selecting Multiple. 11 On the Edit toolbar. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 4 In the Project Browser. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. select Round Column: 03" Diameter. 6 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall.3 Select Option 1 (primary). Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. In the following illustration. 7 In the Type Selector. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. and click Close. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. 9 On the Design Bar. click Edit Selected. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. select: ■ ■ ■ . Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Column.

click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. click . and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. 18 On the View toolbar. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. A copy of the three selected columns is added. 17 Zoom out and. Because of the size of the columns. 864 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . they are difficult to see in this view. using the same technique.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. When you are finished.

19 In the Project Browser. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. click Beam. and click at its center to set the beam start point. In it. 23 On the Design Bar.Notice the 12 columns that you added. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. under Floor Plans. you add the beams that span the columns. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. Use the following illustration as a guide. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. The first click specifies the beam start point. double-click TOP OF CORE. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. Creating the Structural Design Options | 865 . The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. select Round Bar : 2". Adding a beam is a two-click process. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. The second click specifies the end of the beam. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Selector. click Modify. Next. Zoom in on the upper right column.

30 On the View toolbar. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. click . zoom into the left column. 866 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . 28 Zoom out. move down to the next set of columns.25 On the Edit toolbar. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. select: ■ ■ ■ . click 26 On the Options Bar. and click the center point. and select the center of the column to add a copy.

There should now be two roofing design options. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. click Rename. 38 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. not a new option set. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. under Option. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. under Option Set. Creating the Structural Design Options | 867 . name the option Louvers. 32 In the Design Options dialog. enter Brackets for New. under Option. under Option Set. 37 Select Option 2 and. enter Beam for New. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). click New. under Option. click Rename. and click OK. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. and click OK. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 41 Under Option Set. 33 Click Finish Editing. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. select Option 1 (primary). enter Roofing for New. 45 Under Roofing. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. under Option. and click OK. click Rename. click New. enter Structure for New. click Rename. 36 In the Rename dialog. 34 In the Design Options dialog. 40 In the Rename dialog. 43 In the Rename dialog. 46 Under Option. and click OK. click Rename. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. click New.

you create the second design option. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. and click OK. 50 In the Design Options dialog. select Edit Selected.47 Under Roofing. 868 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. This allows you to more easily manage the project. 48 Under Option. 51 Under Edit. When finished. 53 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Under Now Editing. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. double-click ROOF TERRACE. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. 52 Click Close. name the option Sunscreen. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. under Structure. select Option 2. it will resemble the following illustration. select Beam. click Rename.

57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. 58 On the Tools menu. Refer to the following illustration. 56 In the Type Selector. select Roof Beam. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. Creating the Structural Design Options | 869 . click Align. click Component. The second click represents the plane that is moved.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to.

62 Select the beam and. The second click represents the move end point. 870 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ .60 After aligning the beam. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. Click to indicate the end point of the move. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. click Modify. on the Edit toolbar. The first click sets the move start point. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. 61 On the Design Bar. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown.

you need this file in its current state. click . and click Save. 66 On the View toolbar. which is visible by default. i_Urban_House-in progress. 69 Click Close. Creating the Structural Design Options | 871 . click Save As. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. name the file. click Finish Editing. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. 68 In the Design Options dialog. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 70 On the File menu. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. Notice that even before you close the dialog.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. 67 On the Tools menu.rvt. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory.

3 In the Design Options dialog. expand Floor Plans. With the second option. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. delete them after the rafter is in place. each with multiple design options to pick from. is constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6" louvers. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. 10 Referring to the following illustration. Under Now Editing. under Roofing. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. If you need to add dimensions. In the next exercise. Sunscreen. 872 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. click Edit Selected. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. expand Views (all). open it now. You should have named it i_Urban_House-in progress. The second roofing system.In this exercise. 2 On the Tools menu. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. select Louvers (primary). you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. you design each of the roofing options. 5 Click Close. click Component. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. The first option. do so now. place the rafter 3' 0" inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 3'. select Rafter 2 x 10. a Louver system. 4 Under Edit. you set up multiple design option sets. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span.rvt. the other for beams. and double-click TOP OF CORE. 8 In the Type Selector. 6 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial.

Select 2nd for Move To. 16 On the Options Bar. click Array. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. enter 38' 6" for Length. 13 On the Options Bar. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. Select Constrain. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. under Other. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. 15 On the Edit menu.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 3' 3" apart. click Modify. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 873 . Enter 5 for Number. and click OK.

you do not need to type the foot and inch markers. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. For example. and press ENTER. you can enter 3 3.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. rather than entering 3' 3". 874 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . TIP When entering a dimension value. enter 3' 3". when the listening dimension displays. The space separates feet and inches.

and. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. and click Array. 27 For the array starting point. click Modify. when the listening dimension displays. 20 In the Type Selector. and select the louver you just placed. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 875 . click . Enter 34 for Number. enter 17' 6 1/2" for Length. 22 On the Design Bar. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. click the Edit menu.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Louver 2 x 6. 25 With the louver still selected. Select Constrain. under Other. click Component. and press Enter. 26 On the Options Bar. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 On the Options Bar. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. and click OK. 28 Move the cursor vertically downward. Select 2nd for Move To. enter 1’. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration.

under Edit. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. click Finish Editing. click . click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 31 In the Design Options dialog.Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 1' 0" apart. 29 On the View toolbar. 30 On the Tools menu. The louver roof system is complete. 876 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options .

Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. Therefore. Click OK.Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. click . click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. 34 In the Project Browser. the top of the next column on the right. select Sunscreen. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. expand Elevations. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. and click OK. You will fix this in a later step. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. In this case. under Roofing. and the third point defines the arc. click Properties. click Edit Selected. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 877 . Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. then you can modify it through the dimension. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. The first two points define the ends of the line. This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. and then click Close. 33 Under Editing. 43 On the Design Bar. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. 36 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. 41 Select the top of the left column. click Lines. 40 On the Options Bar. and double-click West. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. 39 On the Design Bar. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name.

under Edit. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. 49 On the View toolbar. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. click Trim/Extend. 46 On the Tools menu. you designed each of the roofing options. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. 50 On the Tools menu.44 In the Element Properties dialog. you need this file in its current state. Under Constraints. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. 878 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . 48 On the Design Bar. and then click Close. was constructed of 2" x 10"rafters and 2" x 6"louvers. a Louver system. Under Constraints. The louver roof system is complete. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. click Save. enter 1' 0" for Extrusion Start. The first option. 52 On the File menu. 45 Click OK. The arcs should connect. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. Select the right arc. click Finish Editing. click . click Finish Sketch. Sunscreen. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. 51 In the Design Options dialog. then the center arc. The second roofing system. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. enter -19' 0"for Extrusion End. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. In this exercise.

secondary. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Design Options tab. and click Rename. do so now. you select a design. tertiary. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 7 On the View menu. 10 In the Project Browser. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial.Managing Design Options In this exercise. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. make it part of the building model. and click Duplicate. click the Design Options tab. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. 3 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Primary Option. expand 3D Views. under 3D Views. and last options. click Visibility/Graphics. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. under Views (all). under Views (all). under Views (all). 5 Right-click each of the copies. under Views (all). under 3D Views. click Visibility/Graphics. right-click {3D}. enter Primary Option. under 3D Views. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. 11 On the View menu. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. 9 Click OK. Managing Design Options | 879 . 4 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. double-click Secondary Option. After exploring the combinations. and delete the discarded design options. and click OK.

17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. double-click Tertiary Option. 880 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. 19 On the View menu. click the Design Options tab. double-click Last Option. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. click Visibility/Graphics. 15 On the View menu. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. and click OK. under 3D Views. click the Design Options tab. 14 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option.13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 18 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. under Views (all). and click OK. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

click Delete. Managing Design Options | 881 . double-click Primary Option. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. 26 Under Option Set. 33 In the Design Options dialog. This was the client choice for structural. click Yes. 23 In the Design Options dialog. 24 Under Option.At this point. 25 Select Structure. but should be accepted as part of the building model. 22 On the Tools menu. select Beam. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. the current primaries are no longer options. The set is deleted. click Delete to remove the views that used options. An alert is displayed. since you no longer need them. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Close. 31 In the alert dialog. select Make Primary. the beam option becomes part of the model. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 30 Under Option Set. Because the client has selected the design option. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. 27 In the alert dialog. click Accept Primary. In this case. In your design options. click Yes. 29 Select Roofing. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. under Structure. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set.

After exploring the combinations. and deleted the discarded design options. you selected a design.The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. In this exercise. click Save. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. 882 | Chapter 18 Creating Multiple Design Options . 35 On the File menu. made it part of the building model.

You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. You create new phases. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. and then add new building model elements. 883 . demolish existing construction. You create new phases. complete with schedules. In the second exercise. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. For the client. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. In the second exercise. demolish existing walls and doors. then add new walls and doors in a different location. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation.Project Phasing 19 In any project. In the lesson and exercises that follow. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. This changes room definition and total building model area.

2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. define the units. are visible in this view. go to the Settings menu. If you wish to do so. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you do not need to change the project units to metric.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. under Phasing. click (Element Properties). then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. 6 On the Options Bar. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. When you create a new project. and open Common\c_Phasing. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. During the demolition and renovation process. click Modify. expand Views (all). and None is selected for Phase Demolished. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. As you add new elements to the building model. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. click Training Files. 884 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . and double-click Level 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. expand Floor Plans. and click OK. This means that all building model elements. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. 7 Click Cancel. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. under Phasing. click Project Units. 4 Click Cancel. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. regardless of phase. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. In the Element Properties dialog.rvt.

click (Filter Selection). clear Door Tags.Existing. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. right-click Level 1. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. and click OK. right-click Level 1 .Demo. and click OK. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Modify. all of the building model elements. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. select Existing.Existing. right-click Copy of Level 1 . 11 In the Filter dialog. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. TIP If this were a multi-story building. 16 In the Rename dialog. Because this is a phase-specific view. including the door tags. After you create the views. 20 In the Rename dialog. After you release the mouse button. 19 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Options Bar. Because this is a renovation project. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. under Floor Plans. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. click . and click OK. enter Level 1 . enter Level 1 . and click Rename. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. 18 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. Phasing Your Model | 885 .Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. and click Rename. 14 On the Design Bar. for Phase Created.Existing. 10 On the Options Bar. under Phasing. 17 Click No. are highlighted in red.

however. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. double-click Level 1 . under Floor Plans. select Overridden. and click OK.Demo. 27 Click New. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. 28 Under Filter Name. 886 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . 26 In the Phasing dialog.Existing. 24 In the Project Browser. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. you modify these settings. select Existing. Because of this time relationship. enter Composite Plan. under Floor Plans. new construction occurs after existing construction. click the Phase Filters tab. In this case. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. to which all the building model elements belong. double-click Level 1 . Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. Later in this exercise. under New. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. 21 In the Project Browser. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. for Phase. Phase status is time-dependent. You may need to zoom in to see this. and Temporary. 29 For Composite Plan. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. Existing. There are five default phase filters. On a logical time line. under Phasing. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. Demolished. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. Next.

42 In the Project Browser. select a lighter blue. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. under Floor Plans. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. double-click Level 1 . As you click each wall. click the value for Color.Demo. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. under Cut ➤ Lines. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. select red. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. Next. 39 In the Phasing dialog. or you can use the demolish tool. its display changes to a red dashed line. you begin demolition. The cursor is displayed as a hammer.Existing. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. 35 Click OK twice. double-click Level 1 . click (Demolish). select Demolished. click OK. When you demolish the host. 36 Using the same method. select the interior walls one at a time. There are two ways to demolish an element. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. under Floor Plans. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. select the line style. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. Phasing Your Model | 887 . 32 In the Demolished row. 34 In the Color dialog. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog.31 Under Phase Status. you demolish all elements hosted by it.

The demolished walls no longer display. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. for Phase Filter. click Door. under Phasing. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84".Demo.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 888 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . add a long horizontal wall. 49 On the Design Bar. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. and click OK. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Wall. 46 On the Architectural tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. select Show Previous + New. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. select Basic Wall: Interior . 55 In the Element Properties dialog. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. 47 In the Type Selector. 50 In the Type Selector. 51 Add a door leading into each room. 52 Open Level 1 .44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. for Phase Filter.Existing. under Phasing. 53 Open Level 1 .

58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . 62 If necessary. Phasing Your Model | 889 . 57 In the Project Browser. and existing shows as half-tone. click (Default 3D View). Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). 59 Open Level 1 . and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. regardless of phase. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. All elements are displayed in this view. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. The renovated building model plan is displayed.New.Demo. 61 On the View Control Bar. which are displayed as red. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. new is shown in blue. because the phase filter is set to Show All. right-click Level 1 . Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. 60 On the View toolbar.New.

As the renovation process continues. you can see the new walls added to the building model. define the units. 890 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing .Demo. you can do so at this time. In this view. and double-click Level 1 . and click OK. If you wish to save this file. Notice that this view is the original building model. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases.New. In this view. therefore. you do not need to change the project units to metric. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. All room boundaries are phase-specific. sizes. and new construction. In this exercise. go to the Settings menu. expand Floor Plans.Existing. If you wish to do so. You can also see that the room quantities. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. 63 Close the file. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. demolition.rvt. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the next exercise. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. click Training Files. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. 3 Open Level 1 . expand Views (all). 2 Open Level 1 . click Project Units. the rooms change in both definition and size. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view.

click Room Tag. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Room. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. Use the following illustration as a guide. click Modify. 13 Open Level 1 . Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. click Room. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. and maximize the view. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 11 On the Design Bar. 5 Click OK.New. 9 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 891 . click in each room to create a room and place a room tag.Demo. 6 Open Level 1 . In the Phasing dialog.Existing. 10 Open Level 1 . click in each room as you move to the right. yet they have different room numbers.

You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. In this case.Existing. View phase-specific room schedules. In this exercise. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. The two schedule views tile. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. click Tile. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. 18 Open Room Schedule . notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in.15 Using the following illustration as a guide.New Construction. 17 On the Window menu. 16 In the Project Browser. 892 | Chapter 19 Project Phasing . 19 On the Window menu. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. and double-click Room Schedule . 20 Close the file. expand Schedules/Quantities. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. In addition. click Close Hidden Windows.

Comparison of alternatives on a site.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 20 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. In this tutorial. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. performance. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. This maximizes efficiency. modify their visibility. In these situations. 893 . In the final lesson. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. and manage the links throughout the project. You position the building models on the site plan. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area.

and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. modify their visibility. and the other is a townhouse. You position the building models on the site.Linking Building Models In this lesson.Center to Center: Revit MEP places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. One building model is a condominium. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . you open a project in which only site components have been developed. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. You link two building models to the project. NOTE The center of a Revit MEP model is the center of the model geometry. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit MEP 2009 to automatically place it. 894 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .

■ Auto .rvt. All three files now reside. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. Auto . however. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. 4 On the File menu. with write permission. in the Model Linking folder that you created. 5 On the File menu. this option will place the link at a predefined location. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. This option is grayed out. 8 Clear Read-only. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. you can do so. Otherwise. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 895 . NOTE Revit MEP projects have an internal coordinate system. click Open. select the three files. click Save As.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit MEP Files. Manual . and click Properties. ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. right-click.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 911. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . RELATED See the lesson. click Open. c_Condo_Complex. click Training Files. and click OK. ■ ■ Manual . this system is not exposed to the user. and open Common\c_Site. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. and save the file there.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit MEP model. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. Select c_Site. 2 On the File menu.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. c_Townhouse. click Close. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer.

12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. select Auto . These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. 11 On the File menu. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 10 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). 13 Click Open.■ Click Open. and double-click Level 1. 896 | Chapter 20 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . For Positioning. The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. Notice the blue detail lines. expand Floor Plans.Origin to Origin.

clic